Shop Manual PC300LC 7 - SN40001and Up

SEBM025808
MACHINE MODEL
SERIAL NUMBER
PC300-7
PC300LC-7
PC350-7
PC350LC-7
40001 and up
40001 and up
20001 and up
20001 and up
This shop manual may contain attachments and optional equipment that are not available in
your area. Please consult your local Komatsu distributor for those items you may require.
Materials and specifications are subject to change without notice.
PC300, 300LC, PC350, 350LC-7 mount the SAA6D114E engine.

For details of the engine, see the 114 Series Engine Shop Manual.
2005
All Rights Reserved
Printed in Japan 09-05 (01)
00-1
(8)
GENERAL
CONTENTS
No. of page
01 GENERAL ............................................................................................................................
01-1
10 STRUCTURE, FUNCTION AND

MAINTENANCE STANDARD............................................
10-1
20 TESTING AND ADJUSTING ........................................................................
20-1
30 DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY
...................................................... 30-1
90 OTHERS ................................................................................................................................
00-2
90-1
PC300/350(LC)-7
LIST OF REVISED PAGES
The affected pages are indicated by the use of the

following marks. It is requested that necessary
actions be taken to these pages according to the
table below.
Mark
Indication
Action required
Page to be newly added
Page to be replaced
Replace
Page to be deleted
Discard
Add
Pages having no marks are those previously revised

or made additions.

Time of
Mark
revision
Page
Time of
Mark
revision
Page
Time of
Mark
revision
Page
Time of
Mark
revision
Mark
Page
00-1
(8)
01-1
10-16
(6)
10-46
10-78
00-2
(2)
01-2
10-17
(6)
10-47
10-79
00-2-1
(8)
01-3
10-18
00-2-2
(8)
01-4
10-19
00-2-3
(8)
01-5
00-2-4
(8)
00-2-5
(8)
Time of
revision
Page
10-48
(8)
10-80
(6)
10-50
(8)
10-81
10-20
(6)
10-51
(8)
10-82
01-6
10-21
(6)
01-7
00-3
10-52
10-83
10-22
10-53
10-84
01-8
10-23
10-54
10-85
00-4
01-9
10-24
10-55
00-5
01-10
10-26
10-56
10-87
00-6
01-11
10-27
10-57
10-88
00-7
01-12
10-28
10-58
10-89
00-8
10-29
10-59
10-90
00-9
10-30
10-60
10-91
00-10
10-1
10-31
10-62
10-92
00-11
10-2
10-32
10-63
10-94
00-12
10-3
10-64
10-95
00-13
10-4
10-34
10-65
10-96
00-14
10-6
10-35
10-66
10-97
00-15
10-7
10-36
10-67
00-16
10-7-1
(6)
10-37
(8)
10-68
10-99
00-17
10-7-2
(6)
10-38
(8)
10-69
10-100
00-18
10-8
10-70
10-101
00-19
10-9
10-40
(8)
10-71
10-102
00-20
10-10
10-41
(8)
10-72
10-103
00-21
10-12
10-42
(8)
10-74
10-104
00-22
10-13
10-43
10-75
10-105
10-44
10-76
10-106
10-77
10-107
PC300/350(LC)-7
(6)
q
10-33
(8)
10-39
10-14
(6)
10-15
(6)
10-45
(8)
10-86
(8)
10-98
(8)
00-2-1
(8)
Mark
Page
Page
Time of
Mark
revision
Page
Time of
Mark
revision
Page
Time of
Mark
revision
Page
Time of
revision
10-108
10-154
10-196
(4)
20-121
(8)
20-163
(7)
10-109
10-155
10-197
(4)
20-122
(8)
20-163-1
(7)
10-110
10-156
10-198
(4)
20-123
(8)
20-164
(1)
10-111
10-157
10-199
(4)
20-124
(8)
20-165
(5)
10-112
10-158
10-200
(4)
20-125
(8)
20-166
(5)
10-113
10-159
10-201
(4)
20-126
(8)
20-167
(5)
10-114
10-160
10-202
(4)
20-127
(8)
20-168
(5)
10-115
10-161
20-128
(8)
20-169
(5)
10-116
10-162
20-129
(8)
20-170
(5)
10-117
10-163
10-118
10-164
10-120
20-1
(1)
20-130
(8)
20-171
(5)
20-2
(8)
20-131
(8)
20-172
(5)
10-165
20-3
(1)
20-132
(8)
20-173
(5)
10-121
10-166
20-4
(1)
20-133
(8)
20-174
(5)
10-122
10-167
20-5
(1)
20-134
(1)
20-175
(5)
10-123
10-168
20-6
(1)
20-135
(1)
20-176
(5)
20-7
(1)
20-136
(8)
20-177
(5)
10-124
10-169
(8)
10-125
10-170
20-8
(1)
20-137
(8)
20-177-1
(5)
10-126
10-171
20-9
(1)
20-138
(8)
20-177-2
(5)
10-127
10-172
20-10
(1)
20-139
(8)
20-177-3
(5)
10-128
10-173
20-140
(8)
20-178
(7)
10-129
10-174
20-101
(8)
20-141
(1)
20-178-1
(7)
10-130
10-175
20-101-1
(8)
20-142
(1)
20-179
(1)
10-132
10-176
20-101-2
(8)
20-143
(1)
20-180
(1)
10-133
10-177
20-102
(8)
20-144
(1)
20-181
(1)
10-134
10-178
20-103
(8)
20-145
(1)
20-182
(1)
10-135
10-179
20-104
(8)
20-146
(1)
10-136
10-180
20-105
(8)
20-147
(7)
20-201
(1)
10-137
10-181
20-106
(8)
20-148
(1)
20-202
(1)
10-138
10-182
20-107
(7)
20-149
(1)
20-203
(1)
10-139
10-183
20-108
(8)
20-150
(1)
20-204
(1)
10-140
10-184
20-109
(8)
20-151
(1)
20-205
(1)
10-141
10-185
20-110
(8)
20-152
(1)
20-206
(1)
10-142
10-186
20-111
(1)
20-153
(1)
20-207
(3)
10-143
10-187
20-112
(8)
20-154
(1)
20-208
(1)
10-144
10-188
20-113
(8)
20-155
(1)
20-209
(1)
10-146
10-189
20-114
(8)
20-156
(1)
20-210
(1)
10-147
10-190
(4)
20-115
(8)
20-157
(1)
20-211
(1)
10-149
10-191
(4)
20-116
(8)
20-158
(1)
20-212
(1)
10-150
10-192
(6)
20-117
(8)
20-159
(1)
20-213
(7)
10-151
10-193
(4)
20-118
(8)
20-160
(1)
20-214
(7)
10-152
10-194
(4)
20-119
(7)
20-161
(1)
20-215
(7)
10-153
10-195
(4)
20-120
(7)
20-162
(1)
20-216
(7)
00-2-2
(8)
Time of
Mark
revision
PC300/350(LC)-7
Mark
Page
Time of
Mark
revision
Page
Time of
Mark
revision
Page
Time of
Mark
revision
Page
Time of
Mark
revision
Page
Time of
revision
20-218
(7)
20-246
(1)
20-319-1
(7)
20-342
(7)
20-383
(7)
20-219
(7)
20-247
(1)
20-319-2
(7)
20-343
(7)
20-384
(7)
20-220
(1)
20-248
(1)
20-320
(7)
20-344
(7)
20-385
(7)
20-221
(1)
20-249
(1)
20-321
(1)
20-345
(7)
20-386
(7)
20-222
(1)
20-250
(1)
20-321-1
(7)
20-346
(7)
20-222-1
(7)
20-251
(1)
20-321-2
(7)
20-347
(7)
20-501
(7)
20-222-2
(7)
20-252
(1)
20-322
(7)
20-348
(7)
20-502
(1)
20-222-3
(7)
20-253
(7)
20-323
(1)
20-349
(1)
20-503
(1)
20-222-4
(7)
20-254
(1)
20-323-1
(7)
20-350
(7)
20-504
(1)
20-223
(7)
20-255
(1)
20-323-2
(7)
20-351
(7)
20-505
(7)
20-224
(7)
20-256
(7)
20-324
(7)
20-352
(7)
20-505-1
(7)
20-225
(7)
20-257
(1)
20-325
(7)
20-353
(1)
20-506
(1)
20-226
(1)
20-258
(7)
20-325-1
(7)
20-354
(7)
20-507
(7)
20-227
(7)
20-260
(7)
20-325-2
(7)
20-355
(1)
20-507-1
(7)
20-228
(1)
20-261
(7)
20-326
(7)
20-356
(7)
20-508
(7)
20-229-1
(7)
20-327
(1)
20-357
(1)
20-510
(1)
20-229-2
(7)
20-301
(1)
20-327-1
(7)
20-358
(7)
20-511
(7)
20-229-3
(7)
20-302
(1)
20-327-2
(7)
20-359
(7)
20-511-1
(7)
20-229-4
(7)
20-303-1
(7)
20-328
(7)
20-360
(1)
20-512
(1)
20-229-5
(7)
20-303-2
(7)
20-329
(1)
20-362
(1)
20-513
(7)
20-230
(7)
20-303-3
(7)
20-329-1
(7)
20-363
(7)
20-513-1
(7)
20-231
(1)
20-303-4
(7)
20-329-2
(7)
20-363-1
(7)
20-514
(7)
20-231-1
(7)
20-303-5
(7)
20-330
(7)
20-364
(7)
20-515
(7)
20-231-2
(7)
20-303-6
(7)
20-331
(1)
20-365
(1)
20-516
(1)
20-232
(7)
20-304
(1)
20-331-1
(7)
20-366
(7)
20-517
(1)
20-233
(1)
20-305
(1)
20-331-2
(7)
20-367
(1)
20-518
(7)
20-233-1
(7)
20-306
(7)
20-332
(7)
20-368
(1)
20-519
(1)
20-233-2
(7)
20-307
(7)
20-333
(1)
20-369
(7)
20-520
(7)
20-234
(7)
20-307-1
(7)
20-333-1
(7)
20-369-1
(7)
(20-521)
20-235
(7)
20-307-2
(7)
20-333-2
(7)
20-370
(7)
20-521-1
(7)
20-235-1
(7)
20-308
(1)
20-334
(7)
20-371
(7)
20-521-2
(7)
20-235-2
(7)
20-309
(7)
20-335
(7)
20-372
(1)
20-522
(1)
20-236
(1)
20-310
(1)
20-335-1
(7)
20-374
(1)
20-523
(1)
20-237
(1)
20-311
(7)
20-335-2
(7)
20-375
(1)
20-524
(1)
20-238
(1)
20-312
(1)
20-336
(7)
20-376
(1)
20-525
(1)
20-239
(7)
20-313
(1)
20-337
(1)
20-377
(1)
20-526
(1)
20-240
(1)
20-314
(1)
20-337-1
(7)
20-378
(7)
20-527
(7)
20-241
(1)
20-315
(7)
20-337-2
(7)
20-379
(7)
20-528
(1)
20-242
(1)
20-316
(1)
20-338
(7)
20-380
(7)
20-530
(1)
20-243
(1)
20-317
(7)
20-339
(7)
20-381
(7)
20-531
(1)
20-244
(1)
20-318
(7)
20-340
(1)
20-381-1
(7)
20-532
(1)
20-245
(8)
20-319
(1)
20-341
(1)
20-382
(7)
20-533
(7)
PC300/350(LC)-7
00-2-3
(8)
Mark
Page
Page
Time of
Mark
revision
Page
Time of
Mark
revision
Page
Time of
Mark
revision
Page
Time of
revision
30-37
(2)
30-72
(8)
30-38
(8)
30-72-1
(8)
30-72-2
(8)
(8)
30-73
(2)
30-41
(8)
30-74
(2)
30-42
(8)
30-75
(2)
(8)
30-43
(8)
30-76
(2)
30-7
(8)
30-44
(8)
30-77
(8)
30-8
(8)
30-45
(8)
30-77-1
(8)
30-9
(8)
30-46
(8)
30-78
(8)
30-10
(8)
30-47
(8)
30-79
(8)
(7)
30-11
(8)
30-48
(8)
30-80
(8)
20-702
(7)
30-12
(8)
30-48-1
(8)
30-81
(8)
(7)
20-703
(7)
30-12-1
(8)
30-48-2
(8)
30-82
(8)
20-549
(7)
20-704
(7)
30-12-2
(8)
30-48-3
(8)
30-83
(8)
20-550
(7)
20-705
(7)
30-12-3
(8)
30-48-4
(8)
30-84
(8)
20-551
(7)
20-706
(7)
30-12-4
(8)
30-48-5
(8)
30-85
(2)
20-552
(7)
20-707
(7)
30-12-5
(8)
30-48-6
(8)
30-86
(2)
20-553
(7)
20-708
(7)
30-13
(2)
30-48-7
(8)
30-87
(8)
20-554
(7)
20-709
(7)
30-14
(2)
30-49
(8)
30-88
(8)
20-555
(7)
20-710
(7)
30-15
(2)
30-50
(8)
30-89
(8)
20-556
(7)
20-711
(7)
30-16
(2)
30-51
(2)
30-90
(8)
20-557
(7)
20-712
(7)
30-17
(2)
30-52
(2)
30-90-1
(8)
20-558
(7)
20-713
(7)
30-18
(2)
30-53
(2)
30-90-2
(8)
20-559
(7)
20-714
(7)
30-19
(2)
30-54
(2)
30-91
(8)
20-560
(7)
20-715
(7)
30-20
(2)
30-55
(2)
30-92
(8)
20-561
(7)
20-716
(7)
30-21
(2)
30-56
(2)
30-93
(8)
20-562
(7)
20-717
(7)
30-22
(2)
30-57
(8)
30-94
(8)
20-718
(7)
30-23
(2)
30-58
(8)
30-95
(8)
20-534
(7)
20-614
(1)
30-6
(2)
20-535
(7)
20-615
(1)
30-6-1
(8)
20-536
(7)
20-616
(1)
30-6-2
(8)
20-537
(7)
20-617
(1)
30-6-3
(8)
30-40
20-538
(7)
20-618
(1)
30-6-4
(8)
20-540
(7)
20-619
(1)
30-6-5
(8)
20-541
(1)
20-620
(1)
30-6-6
20-542
(7)
20-621
(7)
20-543
(7)
20-622
(7)
20-544
(7)
20-623
(1)
20-545
(1)
20-546
(7)
20-701
20-547
(1)
20-548
(30-39)
20-601
(1)
20-719
(7)
30-24
(2)
30-59
(2)
30-96
(8)
20-602
(1)
20-720
(7)
30-25
(2)
30-60
(2)
30-97
(8)
20-603
(1)
20-721
(7)
30-26
(2)
30-61
(2)
30-98
(8)
20-604
(1)
20-722
(7)
30-27
(2)
30-62
(2)
30-99
(8)
20-605
(1)
20-723
(7)
30-28
(2)
30-63
(2)
30-100
(8)
20-606
(1)
20-724
(7)
30-29
(8)
30-64
(2)
30-101
(8)
20-607
(1)
30-30
(8)
30-65
(2)
30-102
(8)
20-608
(1)
30-31
(2)
30-66
(2)
30-103
(8)
20-609
(1)
30-1
(8)
30-32
(2)
30-67
(2)
30-104
(8)
20-610
(1)
30-2
(8)
30-33
(2)
30-68
(2)
30-105
(8)
20-611
(1)
30-3
(2)
30-34
(2)
30-69
(2)
30-106
(8)
20-612
(1)
30-4
(2)
30-35
(2)
30-70
(2)
30-107
(8)
20-613
(1)
30-5
(3)
30-36
(2)
30-71
(8)
30-108
(8)
00-2-4
(8)
Time of
Mark
revision
PC300/350(LC)-7
Time of
Mark
revision
Mark
Page
30-109
(8)
30-110
(8)
30-111
(8)
30-112
(8)
30-113
(8)
30-114
(8)
90-1
(6)
Page
Time of
Mark
revision
Page
Time of
Mark
revision
Page
Time of
Mark
revision
Page
Time of
revision
90-3
90-5
(6)
90-7
(6)
90-9
(6)
90-11
(6)
90-13
(6)
90-15
(6)
90-17
(6)
90-19
(6)
PC300/350(LC)-7
00-2-5
(8)
Safety
Safety notice
Safety
Safety notice
Important safety notice
Proper service and repair is extremely important for safe machine operation. The service and repair
techniques recommended by Komatsu and described in this manual are both effective and safe.
Some of these techniques require the use of tools specially designed by Komatsu for the specific
purpose.
To prevent injury to workers, the symbol k is used to mark safety precautions in this manual. The
cautions accompanying these symbols should always be followed carefully. If any dangerous situation arises or may possibly arise, first consider safety, and take the necessary actions to deal with the
situation.
General precautions
Mistakes in operation are extremely dangerous.
Read the Operation and Maintenance Manual carefully BEFORE operating the machine.
1. Before carrying out any greasing or repairs, read
all the precautions given on the decals which
are fixed to the machine.
2. When carrying out any operation, always wear
safety shoes and helmet. Do not wear loose
work clothes, or clothes with buttons missing.
Always wear safety glasses when hitting
parts with a hammer.
Always wear safety glasses when grinding
parts with a grinder, etc.
3. If welding repairs are needed, always have a
trained, experienced welder carry out the work.
When carrying out welding work, always wear
welding gloves, apron, hand shield, cap and
other clothes suited for welding work.
4. When carrying out any operation with two or
more workers, always agree on the operating
procedure before starting. Always inform your
fellow workers before starting any step of the
operation. Before starting work, hang UNDER
REPAIR signs on the controls in the operator's
compartment.
5. Keep all tools in good condition and learn the
correct way to use them.
6. Decide a place in the repair workshop to keep

tools and removed parts. Always keep the tools
and parts in their correct places. Always keep
the work area clean and make sure that there is
no dirt or oil on the floor. Smoke only in the
areas provided for smoking. Never smoke while
working.
Preparations for work
7. Before adding oil or making any repairs, park
the machine on hard, level ground, and block
the wheels or tracks to prevent the machine
from moving.
8. Before starting work, lower blade, ripper, bucket
or any other work equipment to the ground. If
this is not possible, insert the safety pin or use
blocks to prevent the work equipment from falling. In addition, be sure to lock all the control
levers and hang warning signs on them.
9. When disassembling or assembling, support the
machine with blocks, jacks or stands before
starting work.
10. Remove all mud and oil from the steps or other
places used to get on and off the machine.
Always use the handrails, ladders or steps when
getting on or off the machine. Never jump on or
off the machine. If it is impossible to use the
handrails, ladders or steps, use a stand to provide safe footing.
00-3
Safety
Precautions during work

11. When removing the oil filler cap, drain plug or
hydraulic pressure measuring plugs, loosen
them slowly to prevent the oil from spurting out.
Before disconnecting or removing components
of the oil, water or air circuits, first remove the
pressure completely from the circuit.
12. The water and oil in the circuits are hot when the
engine is stopped, so be careful not to get
burned.
Wait for the oil and water to cool before carrying
out any work on the oil or water circuits.
13. Before starting work, remove the leads from the
battery. Always remove the lead from the negative () terminal first.
14. When raising heavy components, use a hoist or
crane.
Check that the wire rope, chains and hooks are
free from damage.
Always use lifting equipment which has ample
capacity.
Install the lifting equipment at the correct places.
Use a hoist or crane and operate slowly to prevent the component from hitting any other part.
Do not work with any part still raised by the hoist
or crane.
15. When removing covers which are under internal
pressure or under pressure from a spring,
always leave two bolts in position on opposite
sides. Slowly release the pressure, then slowly
loosen the bolts to remove.
16. When removing components, be careful not to
break or damage the wiring. Damaged wiring
may cause electrical fires.
17. When removing piping, stop the fuel or oil from
spilling out. If any fuel or oil drips onto the floor,
wipe it up immediately. Fuel or oil on the floor
can cause you to slip, or can even start fires.
18. As a general rule, do not use gasoline to wash
parts. In particular, use only the minimum of gasoline when washing electrical parts.
00-4
Safety notice
19. Be sure to assemble all parts again in their original places.

Replace any damaged parts with new parts.
When installing hoses and wires, be sure
that they will not be damaged by contact with
other parts when the machine is being
operated.
20. When installing high pressure hoses, make sure
that they are not twisted. Damaged tubes are
dangerous, so be extremely careful when installing tubes for high pressure circuits. Also, check
that connecting parts are correctly installed.
21. When assembling or installing parts, always use
the specified tightening torques. When installing
protective parts such as guards, or parts which
vibrate violently or rotate at high speed, be particularly careful to check that they are installed
correctly.
22. When aligning two holes, never insert your fingers or hand. Be careful not to get your fingers
caught in a hole.
23. When measuring hydraulic pressure, check that
the measuring tool is correctly assembled
before taking any measurements.
24. Take care when removing or installing the tracks
of track-type machines.
When removing the track, the track separates
suddenly, so never let anyone stand at either
end of the track.
Foreword
General
Foreword
General
This shop manual has been prepared as an aid to improve the quality of repairs by giving the serviceman an
accurate understanding of the product and by showing him the correct way to perform repairs and make judgements. Make sure you understand the contents of this manual and use it to full effect at every opportunity.
This shop manual mainly contains the necessary technical information for operations performed in a service
workshop. For ease of understanding, the manual is divided into the following chapters; these chapters are further divided into the each main group of components.
Structure and function

This section explains the structure and function of each component. It serves not only to give an understanding of the structure, but also serves as reference material for troubleshooting.
In addition, this section may contain hydraulic circuit diagrams, electric circuit diagrams, and maintenance standards.
Testing and adjusting

This section explains checks to be made before and after performing repairs, as well as adjustments to
be made at completion of the checks and repairs.
Troubleshooting charts correlating Problems with Causes are also included in this section.
Disassembly and assembly

This section explains the procedures for removing, installing, disassembling and assembling each component, as well as precautions for them.
Maintenance standard
This section gives the judgment standards for inspection of disassembled parts.
The contents of this section may be described in Structure and function.
Others
This section mainly gives hydraulic circuit diagrams and electric circuit diagrams.
In addition, this section may give the specifications of attachments and options together.
Notice
The specifications contained in this shop manual are subject to change at any time and without any
advance notice. Use the specifications given in the book with the latest date.
00-5
Foreword
General
How to read the shop manual

Volumes
Shop manuals are issued as a guide to carrying out
repairs. They are divided as follows:
Chassis volume: Issued for every machine model
Engine volume: Issued for each engine series
Electrical volume:
Attachments volume:
Each issued as one

volume to cover all
models
These various volumes are designed to avoid duplicating the same information. Therefore, to deal with
all repairs for any model , it is necessary that chassis, engine, electrical and attachment volumes be
available.
Distribution and updating

Any additions, amendments or other changes will be
sent to KOMATSU distributors. Get the most up-todate information before you start any work.
Filing method
1. See the page number on the bottom of the page.
File the pages in correct order.
Revised edition mark

W he n a m an ua l i s r ev i s e d, an e di t i on m a r k
((1)(2)(3)....) is recorded on the bottom of the pages.
Revisions
Revised pages are shown in the List of revised
pages next to the Contents page.
Symbols
So that the shop manual can be of ample practical
use, important safety and quality portions are
marked with the following symbols.
Symbol
Item
Remarks
Safety
Special safety precautions

are necessary when
performing the work.
Caution
Special technical
precautions or other
precautions for preserving
standards are necessary
when performing the work.
Weight
Weight of parts of systems.

Caution necessary when
selecting hoisting wire, or
when working posture is
important, etc.
Tightening
torque
Places that require special

attention for the tightening
torque during assembly.
Coat
Places to be coated with

adhesives and lubricants,
etc.
Oil, water
Places where oil, water or

fuel must be added, and
the capacity.
Drain
Places where oil or water

must be drained, and
quantity to be drained.
2. Following examples show how to read the page

number.
Example 1 (Chassis volume):
10 - 3
Item number
(10. Structure and Function)
Consecutive page number for
each item.
Example 2 (Engine volume):
12 - 5
Unit number (1. Engine)
Item number
(2. Testing and Adjusting)
Consecutive page number for
each item.
3. Additional pages: Additional pages are indicated by a hyphen () and number after the
page number. File as in the example.
Example:
10-4
10-4-1
10-4-2
10-5
00-6
Added pages
20-203
12-203-1
12-203-2
12-204
Foreword
Hoisting instructions
Hoisting instructions
Hoisting
k
Heavy parts (25 kg or more) must be lifted

with a hoist, etc. In the Disassembly and
assembly section, every part weighing 25
kg or more is indicated clearly with the
symbol 4
If a part cannot be smoothly removed from the

machine by hoisting, the following checks should
be made:
1) Check for removal of all bolts fastening the
part to the relative parts.
2) Check for existence of another part causing
interference with the part to be removed.
Wire ropes
1) Use adequate ropes depending on the
weight of parts to be hoisted, referring to the
table below:
Wire ropes
(Standard Z or S twist ropes
without galvanizing)
Rope diameter
Slinging near the edge of the hook may

cause the rope to slip off the hook during
hoisting, and a serious accident can result.
Hooks have maximum strength at the middle portion.
100%
88%
79%
71%
41%
SAD00479
3) Do not sling a heavy load with one rope

alone, but sling with two or more ropes
symmetrically wound onto the load.
k
Slinging with one rope may cause

turning of the load during hoisting,
untwisting of the rope, or slipping of the
rope from its original winding position on
the load, which can result in a dangerous
accident.
Allowable load
mm
kN
tons
10
11.5
12.5
14
16
18
20
22.4
30
40
50
60
9.8
13.7
15.7
21.6
27.5
35.3
43.1
54.9
98.1
176.5
274.6
392.2
1.0
1.4
1.6
2.2
2.8
3.6
4.4
5.6
10.0
18.0
28.0
40.0
a The allowable load value is estimated to be

one-sixth or one-seventh of the breaking
strength of the rope used.
2) Sling wire ropes from the middle portion of
the hook.
4) Do not sling a heavy load with ropes forming

a wide hanging angle from the hook.
When hoisting a load with two or more
ropes, the force subjected to each rope will
increase with the hanging angles. The table
below shows the variation of allowable load
kN {kg} when hoisting is made with two
ropes, each of which is allowed to sling up
to 9.8 kN {1000 kg} vertically, at various
hanging angles.
When two ropes sling a load vertically, up to
19.6 kN {2000 kg} of total weight can be
suspended. This weight becomes 9.8 kN
{1000 kg} when two ropes make a 120?
hanging angle. On the other hand, two
ropes are subjected to an excessive force
as large as 39.2 kN {4000 kg} if they sling a
19.6 kN {2000 kg} load at a lifting angle of
150.
00-7
Foreword
Method of disassembling, connecting push-pull type coupler

k
Before carrying out the following work, release

the residual pressure from the hydraulic tank.
For details, see Tes ting and adjus ting,
Releasing residual pressure from hydraulic tank.
Even if the residual pressure is released from
the hydraulic tank, some hydraulic oil flows out
when the hose is disconnected. Accordingly,
prepare an oil receiving container.
Disconnection
1) Release the residual pressure from the
hydraulic tank. For details, see Testing and
adjusting, Releasing residual pressure from
hydraulic tank.
2) Hold adapter (1) and push hose joint (2) into
mating adapter (3). (See Fig. 1)
a The adapter can be pushed in about 3.5 mm.
a Do not hold rubber cap portion (4).
3) After hose joint (2) is pushed into adapter (3),
press rubber cap portion (4) against (3) until it
clicks. (See Fig. 2)
4) Hold hose adapter (1) or hose (5) and pull it out.
(See Fig. 3)
a Since some hydraulic oil flows out, prepare
an oil receiving container.
Connection
1) Hold hose adapter (1) or hose (5) and insert it in
mating adapter (3), aligning them with each
other. (See Fig. 4)
a Do not hold rubber cap portion (4).
2) After inserting the hose in the mating adapter
perfectly, pull it back to check its connecting
condition. (See Fig. 5)
a When the hose is pulled back, the rubber cap
portion moves toward the hose about 3.5
mm. This does not indicate abnormality,
however.
00-8
Type 1
Foreword
Type 2
Type 3
Hold the mouthpiece of the tightening portion

and push body (2) in straight until sliding
prevention ring (1) contacts contact surface a of
the hexagonal portion at the male end.
1)
Hold the mouthpiece of the tightening portion

and push body (2) in straight until sliding
prevention ring (1) contacts contact surface a of
the hexagonal portion at the male end.
2)
Hold in the condition in Step 1), and turn lever

(4) to the right (clockwise).
2)
Hold in the condition in Step 1), and push until

cover (3) contacts contact surface a of the
hexagonal portion at the male end.
3)
Hold in the condition in Steps 1) and 2), and pull

out whole body (2) to disconnect it.
3)
Hold in the condition in Steps 1) and 2), and pull

out whole body (2) to disconnect it.
Hold the mouthpiece of the tightening portion and

push body (2) in straight until sliding prevention
ring (1) contacts contact surface a of the
hexagonal portion at the male end to connect it.
Hold the mouthpiece of the tightening portion and

push body (2) in straight until sliding prevention
ring (1) contacts contact surface a of the
hexagonal portion at the male end to connect it.
Connection
Disassembly
1)
00-9
Foreword
Coating materials
Coating materials
a The recommended coating materials such as adhesives, gasket sealants and greases used for disassembly
and assembly are listed below.
a For coating materials not listed below, use the equivalent of products shown in this list.
Category
Komatsu code
Part No.
LT-1A
790-129-9030
LT-1B
790-129-9050
LT-2
09940-00030
LT-3
790-129-9060
(Set of adhesive
and hardening
agent)
LT-4
790-129-9040
Holtz
MH 705
790-126-9120
Three bond
1735
790-129-9140
Aron-alpha
201
790-129-9130
Loctite
648-50
79A-129-9110
LG-1
790-129-9010
LG-5
790-129-9080
LG-6
790-129-9020
LG-7
790-129-9070
Three bond
1211
790-129-9090
Three bond
1207B
419-15-18131
Adhesives
Gasket
sealant
00-10
Qty
Container
Main applications, features
Used to prevent rubber gaskets, rubber

cushions, and cock plug from coming out.
Used in places requiring an immediately
effective, strong adhesive.
20 g
Polyethylene
Used for plastics (except polyethylene,
(2 pcs.)
container
polyprophylene, tetrafluoroethlene and
vinyl chloride), rubber, metal and nonmetal.
Features:
Polyethylene
Resistance to heat and chemicals
50 g
container
Used for anti-loosening and sealant
purpose for bolts and plugs.
Adhesive:
Used as adhesive or sealant for metal,
1 kg
glass and plastic.
Can
Hardening
agent:
500 g
Polyethylene Used as sealant for machined holes.
250 g
container
Used as heat-resisting sealant for
75 g
Tube
repairing engine.
Quick hardening type adhesive
Polyethylene Cure time: within 5 sec. to 3 min.
50 g
container
Used mainly for adhesion of metals,
rubbers, plastics and woods.
Quick hardening type adhesive
Quick cure type
Polyethylene
2g
(max. strength after 30 minutes)
container
Used mainly for adhesion of rubbers,
plastics and metals.
Resistance to heat, chemicals
Polyethylene
50 cc
Used at joint portions subject to high
container
temperatures.
Used as adhesive or sealant for gaskets
200 g
Tube
and packing of power train case, etc.
Used as sealant for various threads, pipe
joints, flanges.
1 kg
Can
Used as sealant for tapered plugs,
elbows, nipples of hydraulic piping.
Features: Silicon based, resistance to
heat, cold
200 g
Tube
Used as sealant for flange surface, tread.
Used as sealant for oil pan, final drive
case, etc.
Features: Silicon based, quick hardening
type
1 kg
Tube
Used as sealant for flywheel housing,
intake manifold, oil pan, thermostat
housing, etc.
Used as heat-resisting sealant for
100 g
Tube
repairing engine.
Features: Silicone type, heat resistant,
vibration resistant, and impact resistant
100 g
Tube
sealing material
Used as sealing material for transfer case
150 g
Tube
Foreword
Molybdenum
disulphide
lubricant
Komatsu code
Part No.
Qty
Container
LM-G
09940-00051
60 g
Can
LM-P
09940-00040
200 g
Tube
Various
Various
G2-LI
G2-CA
Grease
Primer
Molybdenum
disulphide
grease
LM-G (G2-M)
Hyper White
Grease G2-T
G0-T (*)
*: For use in
cold district
Biogrease G2B
G2-BT (*)
*: For high
temperature
and large load
SUNSTAR
PAINT PRIMER
580 SUPER
SUNSTAR
GLASS PRIMER
580 SUPER
SUNSTAR
PAINT PRIMER
435-95
SUNSTAR
GLASS PRIMER
435-41
Adhesive
Caulking
material
SUNSTAR
SASH PRIMER
GP-402
SUNSTAR
PENGUINE
SUPER 560
SUNSTAR
PENGUINE
SEAL 580
SUPER S or
W
Sika Japan,
Sikaflex 256HV
SUNSTAR
PENGUINE
SEAL No. 2505
SEKISUI
SILICONE
SEALANT
GE TOSHIBA
SILICONES
TOSSEAL 381
SYG2-400LI
SYG2-350LI
SYG2-400LI-A
SYG2-160LI
SYGA-160CNLI
SYG2-400CA
SYG2-350CA
SYG2-400CA-A
SYG2-160CA
SYGA-160CNCA
SYG2-400M
SYG2-400M-A
SYGA-16CNM
Various
Various
400 g 10 Bellows type

400 g 20 Bellows type
16 kg
Can
Main applications, features

Used as lubricant for sliding portion (to
prevent from squeaking).
Used to prevent seizure or scuffling of the
thread when press fitting or shrink fitting.
Used as lubricant for linkage, bearings,
etc.
General purpose type
Used for normal temperature, light load

bearing at places in contact with water or
steam.
Used for heavy load portion
Seizure resistance and heat resistance

higher than molybdenum disulfide grease
Bellows type
Since this grease is white, it does not
Can
stand out against machine body.
SYG2-400T-A
SYG2-16CNT
SYG0-400T-A (*)
SYG0-16CNT (*)
400 g
16 kg
SYG2-400B
SYGA-16CNB
SYG2-400BT (*)
SYGA-16CNBT (*)
400 g
16 kg
Bellows type
Can
20 ml
Glass
container
20 ml
Glass
container
22M-54-27230
20 ml
Glass
container
22M-54-27240
150 ml
Can
22M-54-27250
20 ml
Glass
container
22M-54-27210
320 ml
Ecocart
(Special
container)
Since this grease is decomposed by

bacteria in short period, it has less effects
on microorganisms, animals, and plants.
Used as primer for cab side
(Using limit: 4 months)
417-926-3910
417-926-3910
320 ml
Polyethylene
container
20Y-54-39850
310 ml
Polyethylene
container
417-926-3920
320 ml
Polyethylene
container
20Y-54-55130
333 ml
Polyethylene
container
22M-54-27220
333 ml
Cartridge
Used as primer for glass side

Adhesive for cab glass
Category
Coating materials
Used as primer for painted surface on

cab side
Used as primer for black ceramiccoated surface on glass side and for
hard polycarbonate-coated surface
Used as primer for sash (Alumite).
Used as adhesive for glass.
S is used for high-temperature
season (April - October) and W for
low-temperature season (November April) as adhesive for glass.
Used as adhesive for glass.
Used to seal joints of glass parts.
Used to seal front window.
Used to seal joint of glasses.
Translucent white seal.
00-11
Foreword
Standard tightening torque

Standard tightening torque table (when using torque wrench)
a In the case of metric nuts and bolts for which there is no special instruction, tighten to the torque given in the
table below.
Tightening torque
Thread diameter
of bolt
Width across
flats
mm
mm
Nm
kgm
6
8
10
12
14
10
13
17
19
22
11.8 14.7
27 34
59 74
98 123
153 190
1.2 1.5
2.8 3.5
6 7.5
10 12.5
15.5 19.5
16
18
20
22
24
24
27
30
32
36
235 285
320 400
455 565
610 765
785 980
23.5 29.5
33 41
46.5 58
62.5 78
80 100
27
30
33
36
39
41
46
50
55
60
1150 1440
1520 1910
1960 2450
2450 3040
2890 3630
118 147
155 195
200 250
250 310
295 370
Thread diameter
of bolt
Width across
flats
mm
mm
Nm
kgm
6
8
10
12
10
13
14
27
5.9 9.8
13.7 23.5
34.3 46.1
74.5 90.2
0.6 1.0
1.4 2.4
3.5 4.7
7.6 9.2
Tightening torque
Sealing surface
Table of tightening torques for flared nuts

a In the case of flared nuts for which there is no
special instruction, tighten to the torque given in
the table below.
SAD00483
Thread diameter
Width across flats
mm
mm
Nm
kgm
14
18
22
24
30
33
36
42
19
24
27
32
36
41
46
55
24.5 4.9
49 19.6
78.5 19.6
137.3 29.4
176.5 29.4
196.1 49
245.2 49
294.2 49
2.5 0.5
52
82
14 3
18 3
20 5
25 5
30 5
00-12
Tightening torque
Foreword
Table of tightening torques for flared nuts

a In the case of flared nuts for which there is no special instruction, tighten to the torque given in the table
below.
Thread diameter
Width across flats
Tightening torque
mm
mm
Nm
kgm
10
12
16
14
17
22
59 74
98 123
235 285
6 7.5
10 12.5
23.5 29.5
Table of tightening torques for o-ring boss piping joints

a Unless there are special instructions, tighten the O-ring boss piping joints to the torque below.
Norminal No.
02
03, 04
05, 06
10, 12
14
Thread diameter
Width across flats
mm
mm
14
20
24
33
42
Varies depending
on type of
connector.
Tightening torque (Nm {kgm})

Range
35 63 {3.5 6.5}
84 132 {8.5 13.5}
128 186 {13.0 19.0}
363 480 {37.0 49.0}
746 1010 {76.0 103}
Target
44 {4.5}
103 {10.5}
157 {16.0}
422 {43.0}
883 {90.0}
Table of tightening torques for o-ring boss plugs

a Unless there are special instructions, tighten the O-ring boss plugs to the torque below.
Norminal No.
08
10
12
14
16
18
20
24
30
33
36
42
52
Thread diameter
Width across flats
mm
mm
Range
Target
08
10
12
14
16
18
20
24
30
33
36
42
52
14
17
19
22
24
27
30
32
32
36
5.88 8.82 {0.6 0.9}

9.8 12.74 {1.0 1.3}
14.7 19.6 {1.5 2.0}
19.6 24.5 {2.0 2.5}
24.5 34.3 {2.5 3.5}
34.3 44.1 {3.5 4.5}
44.1 53.9 {4.5 5.5}
58.8 78.4 {6.0 8.0}
93.1 122.5 {9.5 12.5}
107.8 147.0 {11.0 15.0}
127.4 176.4 {13.0 18.0}
181.3 240.1 {18.5 24.5}
274.4 367.5 {28.0 37.5}
7.35 {0.75}
11.27 {1.15}
17.64 {1.8}
22.54 {2.3}
29.4 {3.0}
39.2 {4.0}
49.0 {5.0}
68.6 {7.0}
107.8 {11.0}
124.4 {13.0}
151.9 {15.5}
210.7 {21.5}
323.4 {33.0}
00-13
Foreword
Tightening torque for 102 and 114 engine series

1) Bolt and nuts
Use these torques for bolts and nuts (unit: mm) of Cummins Engine.
Thread diameter
Tightening torque
mm
Nm
kgm
6
8
10
12
10 2
24 4
43 6
77 12
1.02 0.20
2.45 0.41
4.38 0.61
7.85 1.22
2) Eye joints
Use these torques for eye joints (unit: mm) of Cummins Engine.
Thread diameter
Tightening torque
mm
Nm
kgm
6
8
10
12
14
82
10 2
12 2
24 4
36 5
0.81 0.20
1.02 0.20
1.22 0.20
2.45 0.41
3.67 0.51
3) Tapered screws
Use these torques for tapered screws (unit: inch) of Cummins Engine.
Thread diameter
Tightening torque
inch
Nm
kgm
1 / 16
1/8
1/4
3/8
1/2
3/4
1
31
82
12 2
15 2
24 4
36 5
60 9
0.31 0.10
0.81 0.20
1.22 0.20
1.53 0.20
2.45 0.41
3.67 0.51
6.12 0.92
Tightening torque table for hoses (taper seal type and face seal type)
a Tighten the hoses (taper seal type and face seal type) to the following torque, unless otherwise specified.
a Apply the following torque when the threads are coated (wet) with engine oil.
Nominal
size of
hose
Width
across flats
02
19
Range
Target
Taper seal
type
Face seal type
Thread size Nominal thread size

Root diameter
Threads per inch, (mm)
(mm)
(Reference)
Thread series
9
18UN
14.3
16
34 54 {3.5 5.5}
44 {4.5}
34 63 {3.5 6.5}
44 {4.5}
14
22
54 93 {5.5 9.5}
74 {7.5}
11
16UN
16
17.5
24
59 98 {6.0 10.0}
78 {8.0}
18
04
27
84 132 {8.5 13.5}
103 {10.5}
22
13
16UN
16
20.6
05
32
128 186 {13.0 19.0}
157 {16.0}
24
1 14UNS
25.4
3
1
12UN
16
30.2
03
06
36
177 245 {18.0 25.0}
216 {22.0}
30
(10)
41
177 245 {18.0 25.0}
216 {22.0}
33
(12)
46
197 294 {20.0 30.0}
245 {25.0}
36
(14)
55
246 343 {25.0 35.0}
294 {30.0}
42
00-14
Foreword
Electric wire code
Electric wire code

In the wiring diagrams, various colors and symbols are employed to indicate the thickness of wires.
This wire code table will help you understand WIRING DIAGRAMS.
Example: 5WB indicates a cable having a nominal number 5 and white coating with black stripe.
Classification by thickness
Norminal
number
Copper wire
Number of
strands
Dia. of
Cross section
strands (mm2)
(mm2)
Cable O.D.
(mm)
Current rating
(A)
Applicable circuit
0.85
11
0.32
0.88
2.4
12
Starting, lighting, signal etc.
26
0.32
2.09
3.1
20
Lighting, signal etc.
65
0.32
5.23
4.6
37
Charging and signal
15
84
0.45
13.36
7.0
59
Starting (Glow plug)
40
85
0.80
42.73
11.4
135
Starting
60
127
0.80
63.84
13.6
178
Starting
100
217
0.80
109.1
17.6
230
Starting
Classification by color and code

Priority
Circuits
Charging
Ground
Starting
Lighting
Instrument
Signal
Other
Code
Color
White
Black
Black
Red
Yellow
Green
Blue
Code
WR
BW
RW
YR
GW
LW
Color
White &
Red
White &
Black
Red &
White
Rellow &
Red
Green &
White
Blue &
White
Code
WB
BY
RB
YB
GR
LR
Color
White &
Black
Black &
Yellow
Red &
Black
Yellow &
Black
Green &
Red
Blue &
Yellow
Code
WL
BR
RY
YG
GY
LY
Color
White &
Blue
Black &
Red
Red &
Yellow
Yellow &
Green
Green &
Yellow
Blue &
Yellow
Code
WG
RG
YL
GB
LB
Color
White &
Green
Red &
Green
Yellow &
Blue
Green &
Black
Blue &
Black
Code
RL
YW
GL
Color
Red & Blue
Yellow &
White
Green &
Blue
Classification
Primary
Auxiliary
00-15
Foreword
Conversion table
Conversion table
Method of using the conversion table
The Conversion Table in this section is provided to enable simple conversion of figures. For details of the
method of using the Conversion Table, see the example given below.
Example
Method of using the Conversion Table to convert from millimeters to inches
1. Convert 55 mm into inches.
1) Locate the number 50 in the vertical column at the left side, take this as (A), then draw a horizontal line
from (A).
2) Locate the number 5 in the row across the top, take this as (B), then draw a perpendicular line down
from (B).
3) Take the point where the two lines cross as (C). This point (C) gives the value when converting from
millimeters to inches. Therefore, 55 mm = 2.165 inches.
2. Convert 550 mm into inches.
1) The number 550 does not appear in the table, so divide by 10 (move the decimal point one place to the
left) to convert it to 55 mm.
2) Carry out the same procedure as above to convert 55 mm to 2.165 inches.
3) The original value (550 mm) was divided by 10, so multiply 2.165 inches by 10 (move the decimal point
one place to the right) to return to the original value. This gives 550 mm = 21.65 inches.
(B)
Millimeters to inches
1 mm = 0.03937 in
0
0.039
0.079
0.118
0.157
0.197
0.236
0.276
0.315
0.354
10
0.394
0.433
0.472
0.512
0.551
0.591
0.630
0.669
0.709
0.748
20
0.787
0.827
0.866
0.906
0.945
0.984
1.024
1.063
1.102
1.142
30
1.181
1.220
1.260
1.299
1.339
1.378
1.417
1.457
1.496
1.536
40
1.575
1.614
1.654
1.693
1.732
1.772
1.811
1.850
1.890
1.929
(C)
(A)
00-16
50
1.969
2.008
2.047
2.087
2.126
2.165
2.205
2.244
2.283
2.323
60
2.362
2.402
2.441
2.480
2.520
2.559
2.598
2.638
2.677
2.717
70
2.756
2.795
2.835
2.874
2.913
2.953
2.992
3.032
3.071
3.110
80
3.150
3.189
3.228
3.268
3.307
3.346
3.386
3.425
3.465
3.504
90
3.543
3.583
3.622
3.661
3.701
3.740
3.780
3.819
3.858
3.898
Foreword
Conversion table
Millimeters to Inches
1 mm = 0.03937 in
0
0.039
0.079
0.118
0.157
0.197
0.236
0.276
0.315
0.354
10
0.394
0.433
0.472
0.512
0.551
0.591
0.630
0.669
0.709
0.748
20
0.787
0.827
0.866
0.906
0.945
0.984
1.024
1.063
1.102
1.142
30
1.181
1.220
1.260
1.299
1.339
1.378
1.417
1.457
1.496
1.536
40
1.575
1.614
1.654
1.693
1.732
1.772
1.811
1.850
1.890
1.929
50
1.969
2.008
2.047
2.087
2.126
2.165
2.205
2.244
2.283
2.323
60
2.362
2.402
2.441
2.480
2.520
2.559
2.598
2.638
2.677
2.717
70
2.756
2.795
2.835
2.874
2.913
2.953
2.992
3.032
3.071
3.110
80
3.150
3.189
3.228
3.268
3.307
3.346
3.386
3.425
3.465
3.504
90
3.543
3.583
3.622
3.661
3.701
3.740
3.780
3.819
3.858
3.898
Kilogram to Pound
1 kg = 2.2046 lb
0
0
2.20
4.41
6.61
8.82
11.02
13.23
15.43
17.64
19.84
10
22.05
24.25
26.46
28.66
30.86
33.07
35.27
37.48
39.68
41.89
20
44.09
46.30
48.50
50.71
51.91
55.12
57.32
59.53
61.73
63.93
30
66.14
68.34
70.55
72.75
74.96
77.16
79.37
81.57
83.78
85.98
40
88.18
90.39
92.59
94.80
97.00
99.21
101.41
103.62
105.82
108.03
50
110.23
112.44
114.64
116.85
119.05
121.25
123.46
125.66
127.87
130.07
60
132.28
134.48
136.69
138.89
141.10
143.30
145.51
147.71
149.91
152.12
70
154.32
156.53
158.73
160.94
163.14
165.35
167.55
169.76
171.96
174.17
80
176.37
178.57
180.78
182.98
185.19
187.39
189.60
191.80
194.01
196.21
90
198.42
200.62
202.83
205.03
207.24
209.44
211.64
213.85
216.05
218.26
00-17
Foreword
Conversion table
Liter to U.S. Gallon

1l = 0.2642 U.S. Gal
0
0.264
0.528
0.793
1.057
1.321
1.585
1.849
2.113
2.378
10
2.642
2.906
3.170
3.434
3.698
3.963
4.227
4.491
4.755
5.019
20
5.283
5.548
5.812
6.076
6.340
6.604
6.869
7.133
7.397
7.661
30
7.925
8.189
8.454
8.718
8.982
9.246
9.510
9.774
10.039
10.303
40
10.567
10.831
11.095
11.359
11.624
11.888
12.152
12.416
12.680
12.944
50
13.209
13.473
13.737
14.001
14.265
14.529
14.795
15.058
15.322
15.586
60
15.850
16.115
16.379
16.643
16.907
17.171
17.435
17.700
17.964
18.228
70
18.492
18.756
19.020
19.285
19.549
19.813
20.077
20.341
20.605
20.870
80
21.134
21.398
21.662
21.926
22.190
22.455
22.719
22.983
23.247
23.511
90
23.775
24.040
24.304
24.568
24.832
25.096
25.361
25.625
25.889
26.153
Liter to U.K. Gallon

1l = 0.21997 U.K. Gal
0
0.220
0.440
0.660
0.880
1.100
1.320
1.540
1.760
1.980
10
2.200
2.420
2.640
2.860
3.080
3.300
3.520
3.740
3.950
4.179
20
4.399
4.619
4.839
5.059
5.279
5.499
5.719
5.939
6.159
6.379
30
6.599
6.819
7.039
7.259
7.479
7.969
7.919
8.139
8.359
8.579
40
8.799
9.019
9.239
9.459
9.679
9.899
10.119
10.339
10.559
10.778
50
10.998
11.281
11.438
11.658
11.878
12.098
12.318
12.528
12.758
12.978
60
13.198
13.418
13.638
13.858
14.078
14.298
14.518
14.738
14.958
15.178
70
15.398
15.618
15.838
16.058
16.278
16.498
16.718
16.938
17.158
17.378
80
17.598
17.818
18.037
18.257
18.477
18.697
18.917
19.137
19.357
19.577
90
19.797
20.017
20.237
20.457
20.677
20.897
21.117
21.337
21.557
21.777
00-18
Foreword
Conversion table
kgm to ft. lb
1 kgm = 7.233 ft. lb
0
7.2
14.5
21.7
28.9
36.2
43.4
50.6
57.9
65.1
10
72.3
79.6
86.8
94.0
101.3
108.5
115.7
123.0
130.2
137.4
20
144.7
151.9
159.1
166.4
173.6
180.8
188.1
195.3
202.5
209.8
30
217.0
224.2
231.5
238.7
245.9
253.2
260.4
267.6
274.9
282.1
40
289.3
296.6
303.8
311.0
318.3
325.5
332.7
340.0
347.2
354.4
50
361.7
368.9
376.1
383.4
390.6
397.8
405.1
412.3
419.5
426.8
60
434.0
441.2
448.5
455.7
462.9
470.2
477.4
484.6
491.8
499.1
70
506.3
513.5
520.8
528.0
535.2
542.5
549.7
556.9
564.2
571.4
80
578.6
585.9
593.1
600.3
607.6
614.8
622.0
629.3
636.5
643.7
90
651.0
658.2
665.4
672.7
679.9
687.1
694.4
701.6
708.8
716.1
100
723.3
730.5
737.8
745.0
752.2
759.5
766.7
773.9
781.2
788.4
110
795.6
802.9
810.1
817.3
824.6
831.8
839.0
846.3
853.5
860.7
120
868.0
875.2
882.4
889.7
896.9
904.1
911.4
918.6
925.8
933.1
130
940.3
947.5
954.8
962.0
969.2
976.5
983.7
990.9
998.2
1005.4
140
1012.6
1019.9
1027.1
1034.3
1041.5
1048.8
1056.0
1063.2
1070.5
1077.7
150
1084.9
1092.2
1099.4
1106.6
1113.9
1121.1
1128.3
1135.6
1142.8
1150.0
160
1157.3
1164.5
1171.7
1179.0
1186.2
1193.4
1200.7
1207.9
1215.1
1222.4
170
1129.6
1236.8
1244.1
1251.3
1258.5
1265.8
1273.0
1280.1
1287.5
1294.7
180
1301.9
1309.2
1316.4
1323.6
1330.9
1338.1
1345.3
1352.6
1359.8
1367.0
190
1374.3
1381.5
1388.7
1396.0
1403.2
1410.4
1417.7
1424.9
1432.1
1439.4
00-19
Foreword
Conversion table
kg/cm2 to lb/in2
1kg/cm2 = 14.2233 lb/in2
0
14.2
28.4
42.7
56.9
71.1
85.3
99.6
113.8
128.0
10
142.2
156.5
170.7
184.9
199.1
213.4
227.6
241.8
256.0
270.2
20
284.5
298.7
312.9
327.1
341.4
355.6
369.8
384.0
398.3
412.5
30
426.7
440.9
455.1
469.4
483.6
497.8
512.0
526.3
540.5
554.7
40
568.9
583.2
597.4
611.6
625.8
640.1
654.3
668.5
682.7
696.9
50
711.2
725.4
739.6
753.8
768.1
782.3
796.5
810.7
825.0
839.2
60
853.4
867.6
881.8
896.1
910.3
924.5
938.7
953.0
967.2
981.4
70
995.6
1010
1024
1038
1053
1067
1081
1095
1109
1124
80
1138
1152
1166
1181
1195
1209
1223
1237
1252
1266
90
1280
1294
1309
1323
1337
1351
1365
1380
1394
1408
100
1422
1437
1451
1465
1479
1493
1508
1522
1536
1550
110
1565
1579
1593
1607
1621
1636
1650
1664
1678
1693
120
1707
1721
1735
1749
1764
1778
1792
1806
1821
1835
130
1849
1863
1877
1892
1906
1920
1934
1949
1963
1977
140
1991
2005
2020
2034
2048
2062
2077
2091
2105
2119
150
2134
2148
2162
2176
2190
2205
2219
2233
2247
2262
160
2276
2290
2304
2318
2333
2347
2361
2375
2389
2404
170
2418
2432
2446
2460
2475
2489
2503
2518
2532
2546
180
2560
2574
2589
2603
2617
2631
2646
2660
2674
2688
190
2702
2717
2731
2745
2759
2773
2788
2802
2816
2830
200
2845
2859
2873
2887
2901
2916
2930
2944
2958
2973
210
2987
3001
3015
3030
3044
3058
3072
3086
3101
3115
220
3129
3143
3158
3172
3186
3200
3214
3229
3243
3257
230
3271
3286
3300
3314
3328
3343
3357
3371
3385
3399
240
3414
3428
3442
3456
3470
3485
3499
3513
3527
3542
00-20
Foreword
Conversion table
Temperature
Fahrenheit-Centigrade Conversion ; a simple way to convert a Fahrenheit temperature reading into a Centigrade temperature reading or vice versa is to enter the accompanying table in the center or boldface column of figures.
These figures refer to the temperature in either Fahrenheit or Centigrade degrees.
If it is desired to convert from Fahrenheit to Centigrade degrees, consider the center column as a table of
Fahrenheit temperatures and read the corresponding Centigrade temperature in the column at the left.
If it is desired to convert from Centigrade to Fahrenheit degrees, consider the center column as a table of
Centigrade values, and read the corresponding Fahrenheit temperature on the right.
1C = 33.8F
C
40.4
37.2
34.4
31.7
28.9
40
35
30
25
20
40.0
31.0
22.0
13.0
4.0
11.7
11.1
10.6
10.0
9.4
11
12
13
14
15
51.8
53.6
55.4
57.2
59.0
7.8
8.3
8.9
9.4
10.0
46
47
48
49
50
114.8
116.6
118.4
120.2
122.0
27.2
27.8
28.3
28.9
29.4
81
82
83
84
85
117.8
179.6
181.4
183.2
185.0
28.3
27.8
27.2
26.7
26.1
19
18
17
16
15
2.2
0.4
1.4
3.2
5.0
8.9
8.3
7.8
7.2
6.7
16
17
18
19
20
60.8
62.6
64.4
66.2
68.0
10.6
11.1
11.7
12.2
12.8
51
52
53
54
55
123.8
125.6
127.4
129.2
131.0
30.0
30.6
31.1
31.7
32.2
86
87
88
89
90
186.8
188.6
190.4
192.2
194.0
25.6
25.0
24.4
23.9
23.3
14
13
12
11
10
6.8
8.6
10.4
12.2
14.0
6.1
5.6
5.0
4.4
3.9
21
22
23
24
25
69.8
71.6
73.4
75.2
77.0
13.3
13.9
14.4
15.0
15.6
56
57
58
59
0
132.8
134.6
136.4
138.2
140.0
32.8
33.3
33.9
34.4
35.0
91
92
93
94
95
195.8
197.6
199.4
201.2
203.0
22.8
22.2
21.7
21.1
20.6
9
8
7
6
5
15.8
17.6
19.4
21.2
23.0
3.3
2.8
2.2
1.7
1.1
26
27
28
29
30
78.8
80.6
82.4
84.2
86.0
16.1
16.7
17.2
17.8
18.3
61
62
63
64
65
141.8
143.6
145.4
147.2
149.0
35.6
36.1
36.7
37.2
37.8
96
97
98
99
100
204.8
206.6
208.4
210.2
212.0
20.0
19.4
18.9
18.3
17.8
4
3
2
1
0
24.8
26.6
28.4
30.2
32.0
0.6
0
0.6
1.1
1.7
31
32
33
34
35
87.8
89.6
91.4
93.2
95.0
18.9
19.4
20.0
20.6
21.1
66
67
68
69
70
150.8
152.6
154.4
156.2
158.0
40.6
43.3
46.1
48.9
51.7
105
110
115
120
125
221.0
230.0
239.0
248.0
257.0
17.2
16.7
16.1
15.6
15.0
1
2
3
4
5
33.8
35.6
37.4
39.2
41.0
2.2
2.8
3.3
3.9
4.4
36
37
38
39
40
96.8
98.6
100.4
102.2
104.0
21.7
22.2
22.8
23.3
23.9
71
72
73
74
75
159.8
161.6
163.4
165.2
167.0
54.4
57.2
60.0
62.7
65.6
130
135
140
145
150
266.0
275.0
284.0
293.0
302.0
14.4
13.9
13.3
12.8
12.2
6
7
8
9
10
42.8
44.6
46.4
48.2
50.0
5.0
5.6
6.1
6.7
7.2
41
42
43
44
45
105.8
107.6
109.4
111.2
113.0
24.4
25.0
25.6
26.1
26.7
76
77
78
79
80
168.8
170.6
172.4
174.2
176.0
68.3
71.1
73.9
76.7
79.4
155
160
165
170
175
311.0
320.0
329.0
338.0
347.0
00-21
Foreword
Units
Units
In this manual, the measuring units are indicated with Internatinal System of units (SI).
As for reference, conventionally used Gravitational System of units are indicated in parentheses {
}.
Example:
N {kg}
Nm {kgm}
MPa {kg/cm2}
kPa {mmH2O}
kPa {mmHg}
kW/rpm {HP/rpm}
g/kWh {g/HPh}
00-22
04-05
01
GENERAL
Specification Dimension Drawings . . . 01-2
Specifications
PC300-7, PC300LC-7 . . . . . . . . . . . 01-4
PC350-7, PC350LC-7 . . . . . . . . . . . 01-6
Weight Table
PC300-7, PC300LC-7 . . . . . . . . . . . 01-8
PC350-7, PC350LC-7 . . . . . . . . . . 01-10
Fuel, Coolant, And Lubricants. . . . . . . 01-12
PC300-7
01-1
GENERAL
SPECIFICATION DIMENSION DRAWINGS
12

DIMENSIONS
WORKING RANGES
01-2
PC300-7
GENERAL
12
DIMENSIONS
Item
Unit
PC300-7
PC300LC-7
PC350-7
PC350LC-7
Overall length
mm
11,140
11,140
11,140
11,140
Overall height
mm
3,280
3,280
3,280
3,280
Overall width
mm
3,190
3,290
3,190
3,290
Track shoe width
mm
600
700
600
700
Height of cab
mm
3,130
3,130
3,130
3,130
Tail swing radius
mm
3,450
3,450
3,450
3,450
Track overall length
mm
4,625
4,955
4,625
4,955
Length of track on ground
mm
3,700
4,030
3,700
4,030
Min. ground clearance
mm
498
498
498
498
Unit
PC300-7
PC300LC-7
PC350-7
PC350LC-7
WORKING RANGES
Item
A
Max. digging reach
mm
11,100
11,100
11,100
11,100
Max. digging depth
mm
7,380
7,380
7,380
7,380
Max. digging height
mm
10,210
10,210
10,210
10,210
Max. vertical wall depth
mm
6,480
6,480
6,480
6,480
Max. dumping height
mm
7,110
7,110
7,110
7,110
Min. dumping height
mm
2,640
2,640
2,640
2,640
Max. reach at ground level
mm
10,920
10,920
10,920
10,920
PC300-7
01-3
GENERAL
SPECIFICATIONS
SPECIFICATIONS
PC300-7, PC300LC-7
Machine model
PC300-7
Serial Number
m
1.4
1.4
Operating weight
kg
30,800
31,900
Max. digging depth
mm
7,380
7,380
mm
6,480
6,480
Max. digging reach
mm
11,100
11,100
mm
10,920
10,920
Max. digging height
mm
10,210
10,210
Max. dumping height
mm
7,110
7,110
kN {kg}
211.8 {21,600}
211.8 {21,600}
kN {kg}
(226.5 {23,100})
(226.5 {23,100})
Swing speed
rpm
9.5
9.5
Swing max. slope angle
deg.
21
21
Travel speed
km/h
Working ranges
Performance
40001 and up
Bucket capacity
Max. digging force

(using power max. function)
Lo: 3.2 (
Mi: 4.5)
Lo: 3.2 (
Mi: 4.5)
Hi: 5.5
Hi: 5.5
deg.
35
35
kPa {kg/cm}
62.8 {0.64}
53.0 {0.54}
[mm]
[600]
[700]
Overall length (for transport)
mm
11,140
11,140
Overall width
mm
3,190
3,190
Overall width of track
mm
3,190
3,290
Overall height (for transport)
mm
3,280
3,280
Overall height to chassis
mm
3,130
3,130
Ground clearance to bottom of upper structure
mm
1,186
1,186
mm
498
498
Tail swing radius
mm
3,450
3,450
Min. swing radius of work equipment
mm
4,310
4,310
Height of work equipment at min. swing radius
mm
8,520
8,520
mm
3,700
4,030
Track gauge
mm
2,590
2,590
Height of machine cab
mm
3,130
3,130
Gradeability
Ground pressure
[standard shoe width]
Dimensions
PC300LC-7
: The "Mi" mode is on the multi-monitor specification machine only.
01-4
PC300-7
GENERAL
SPECIFICATIONS
12
Machine model
PC300-7
Serial Number
40001 and up
Model
Type
Performance
Engine
No. of cylinders - bore x stroke

Piston displacement
Flywheel horsepower
Max. torque
Max. speed at no load
Min. speed at no load
Min. fuel consumption
PC300LC-7
l {cc}
SAA6D114E
4-cycle, water-cooled, in-line, vertical, direct injection, with turbo charger and aftercooler
6 - 114 x 135
8.27 {8,270}
kW/rpm {HP/rpm}
Nm/rpm {kgm/rpm}
rpm
rpm
g/kWh {g/HPh}
180.3/1,900 {242/1,900}
1,079/1,400 {110/1,400}
2,160
900
205 {153}
mm
Starting motor
Alternator
Battery
24V, 7.5 kW
24V, 35 A
12V, 126 Ah x 2
Radiator core type
CF19-4
2 on each side
Track shoe
Assembly-type triple
grouser, 45 on each
side
grouser, 48 on each
side
Hydraulic
pump
8 on each side
Type x No.
Delivery
Set pressure
Control
valve
7 on each side
Type x No.
Control method
Hydraulic
motor
Track roller
Travel motor
l/min
MPa (kg/cm)
HMV160ADT-2, Piston type

(with brake valve, parking brake): x 2
KMF230ABE-5, Piston type
(with safety valve, holding brake): x 1
reverse rotation check valve
Swing motor
Inside diameter of cylinder

Diameter of piston rod
Stroke
Max. distance between pins
Min. distance between pins
Hydraulic tank
Hydraulic filter
Hydraulic cooler
PC300-7
HPV125+125, variable displacement, Piston type x2

267.5 x 2
37.8 {380}
6-spool type + 1-spool type x 1
Hydraulic
Type
Hydraulic cylinder
Hydraulic system
Undercarriage
Carrier roller
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
Boom
Arm
Bucket
Double acting
piston
Double acting
piston
Double acting
piston
140
100
1,480
3,525
2,045
160
110
1,825
4,255
2,430
140
100
1,285
3,155
1,870
Closed box type

Tank return side
CFT-1 (Air cooled)
01-5
GENERAL
SPECIFICATIONS
PC350-7, PC350LC-7
Machine model
PC350-7
Performance
Working ranges
Serial Number
20001 and up
Bucket capacity
1.4
1.4
Operating weight
kg
32,300
33,400
Max. digging depth
mm
7,380
7,380
mm
6,480
6,480
Max. digging reach
mm
11,100
11,100
mm
10,920
10,920
Max. digging height
mm
10,210
10,210
Max. dumping height
mm
7,110
7,110
kN {kg}
212.8 {21,700}
212.8 {21,700}
(227.5 {23,200})
(227.5 {23,200})
Max. digging force

(using power max. function)
Swing speed
rpm
9.5
9.5
Swing max. slope angle
deg.
18
18
Travel speed
km/h
Lo: 3.2 (
Mi: 4.5)
Lo: 3.2 (
Mi: 4.5)
Hi: 5.5
Hi: 5.5
deg.
35
35
kPa {kg/cm}
65.7 {0.67}
62.8 {0.64}
[mm]
[600]
[700]
Overall length (for transport)
mm
11,140
11,140
Overall width
mm
3,190
3,190
Overall width of track
mm
3,190
3,290
Overall height (for transport)
mm
3,280
3,280
Overall height to chassis
mm
3,130
3,130
Ground clearance to bottom of upper structure
mm
1,186
1,186
mm
498
498
Tail swing radius
mm
3,450
3,450
Min. swing radius of work equipment
mm
4,310
4,310
Height of work equipment at min. swing radius
mm
8,520
8,520
mm
3,700
4,030
Track gauge
mm
2,590
2,590
Height of machine cab
mm
3,130
3,130
Gradeability
Ground pressure
[standard shoe width]
Dimensions
PC350LC-7
01-6
PC300-7
GENERAL
SPECIFICATIONS
Machine model
PC350-7
Serial Number
20001 and up
Model
Type
Performance
Engine
No. of cylinders - bore x stroke

Piston displacement
Flywheel horsepower
Max. torque
Max. speed at no load
Min. speed at no load
Min. fuel consumption
PC350LC-7
l {cc}
SAA6D114E
4-cycle, water-cooled, in-line, vertical, direct injection, with turbo charger and aftercooler
6 - 114 x 135
8.27 {8,270}
kW/rpm {HP/rpm}
Nm/rpm {kgm/rpm}
rpm
rpm
g/kWh {g/HPh}
180.3/1,900 {242/1,900}
1,079/1,400 {110/1,400}
2,180
900
205 {153}
mm
Starting motor
Alternator
Battery
24V, 7.5 kW
24V, 35 A
12V, 126 Ah x 2
Radiator core type
CF19-4
2 on each side
Track shoe
grouser, 45 on each
side
grouser, 48 on each
side
Hydraulic
pump
8 on each side
Type x No.
Delivery
Set pressure
Control
valve
7 on each side
Type x No.
Control method
Hydraulic
motor
Track roller
Travel motor
l/min
MPa (kg/cm)
HMV160ADT-2, Piston type

(with brake valve, parking brake): x 2
KMF230ABE-5, Piston type
(with safety valve, holding brake): x 1
reverse rotation check valve
Swing motor
Inside diameter of cylinder

Diameter of piston rod
Stroke
Max. distance between pins
Min. distance between pins
Hydraulic tank
Hydraulic filter
Hydraulic cooler
PC300-7
HPV125+125, variable displacement, Piston type x2

267.5 x 2
37.8 {380}
6-spool type + 1-spool type x 1
Hydraulic
Type
Hydraulic cylinder
Hydraulic system
Undercarriage
Carrier roller
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
Boom
Arm
Bucket
Double acting
piston
Double acting
piston
Double acting
piston
140
100
1,480
3,525
2,045
160
110
1,825
4,255
2,430
140
100
1,825
3,155
1,870
Closed box type

Tank return side
CFT-1 (Air cooled)
01-7
GENERAL
WEIGHT TABLE
WEIGHT TABLE
This weight table is for use when handling components or when transporting the machine.
PC300-7, PC300LC-7
Unit: kg
Machine model
PC300-7
Serial Number
Engine assembly
PC300LC-7
40001 and up
1,148
1,148
Engine
860
860
Damper
14.3
14.3
Hydraulic pump
178
178
Radiator oil cooler assembly
153
153
Hydraulic tank, filter assembly (excluding hydraulic oil)
176
176
Fuel tank (excluding fuel)
238
238
2,723
2,723
Operators cab
292
292
Operators seat
35
35
Counterweight
5,470
5,470
Swing machinery
442
442
Control valve
242
242
Swing motor
88
88
Travel motor
164 x 2
164 x 2
Center swivel joint
29.9
29.9
Track frame assembly
7,311
7,979
Track frame
3,879
4,441
Swing circle
487
487
Idler
169 x 2
169 x 2
Idler cushion
287.5 x 2
287.5 x 2
Carrier roller
31.3 x 4
31.3 x 4
Track roller
52.9 x 14
52.9 x 16
Final drive (including travel motor)
583 x 2
583 x 2
Revolving frame
01-8
PC300-7
GENERAL
WEIGHT TABLE
12
Unit: kg
Machine model
PC300-7
Serial Number
PC300LC-7
40001 and up
Track shoe assembly
Standard triple grouser shoe (600 mm)
3,470
3,700
4,030
4,300
Wide triple grouser shoe (800 mm)
4,380
4,680
Road liner (rubber pad type) (600 mm)
Boom assembly
2,290
2,290
Arm assembly
1,105
1,105
Bucket assembly
1,015
1,015
254 x 2
254 x 2
Arm cylinder assembly
382
382
Bucket cylinder assembly
228
228
Link assembly (large)
316
316
Link assembly (small)
76 + 15 x 2 + 56 + 17 + 42
76 + 15 x 2 + 56 + 17 + 42
Arm pin
13 +17
13 +17
Bucket pin
30 x 2
30 x 2
Link pin
27 x 2
27 x 2
Boom cylinder assembly
Boom pin
PC300-7
01-9
GENERAL
WEIGHT TABLE
PC350-7, PC350LC-7
Unit: kg
Machine model
PC350-7
Serial Number
Engine assembly
PC350LC-7
20001 and up
1,148
1,148
Engine
860
860
Damper
14.3
14.3
Hydraulic pump
178
178
Radiator oil cooler assembly
153
153
Hydraulic tank, filter assembly (excluding hydraulic oil)
176
176
Fuel tank (excluding fuel)
238
238
2,828
2,828
Operators cab
287
287
Operators seat
35
35
Counterweight
6,370
6,370
Swing machinery
442
442
Control valve
242
242
Swing motor
88
88
Travel motor
164 x 2
164 x 2
Center swivel joint
29.9
29.9
Track frame assembly
7,538
8,183
Track frame
4,074
4,602
Swing circle
487
487
Idler
169 x 2
169 x 2
Idler cushion
287.5 x 2
287.5 x 2
Carrier roller
31.3 x 4
31.3 x 4
Track roller
52.9 x 8
58.3 x 6
52.9 x 8
58.3 x 8
Final drive (including travel motor)
583 x 2
583 x 2
Revolving frame
01-10
PC300-7
GENERAL
WEIGHT TABLE
12
Unit: kg
Machine model
PC350-7
Serial Number
PC350LC-7
20001 and up
Track shoe assembly
3,670
3,920
4,030
4,300
Wide triple grouser shoe (800 mm)
Road liner (rubber pad type) (600 mm)
Boom assembly
2,450
2,450
Arm assembly
1,211
1,211
Bucket assembly
1,508
1,508
254 x 2
254 x 2
Arm cylinder assembly
382
382
Bucket cylinder assembly
228
228
Link assembly (large)
316
316
Link assembly (small)
76 + 15 x 2 + 56 + 17 + 42
76 + 15 x 2 + 56 + 17 + 42
Arm pin
13 +17
13 +17
Bucket pin
30 x 2
30 x 2
Link pin
27 x 2
27 x 2
Boom cylinder assembly
Boom pin
PC300-7
01-11
GENERAL
FUEL, COOLANT, AND LUBRICANTS
12
FUEL, COOLANT, AND LUBRICANTS
RESERVOIR
KIND
OF
FLUID
AMBIENT TEMPERATURE
-22 -4
-30 -20
14
-10
32
0
50
10
68
20
86
30
104F
40C
CAPACITY (l)
Specified
Refill
38
35
1.3
13.4
13.4
8.5
8.5
Idler (1 each)
0.22 ~ 0.24
0.22 ~ 0.24
Track roller (1 each)
0.25 ~ 0.28
0.25 ~ 0.28
0.145 ~ 0.155
0.145 ~ 0.155
365
188
605
32
SAE 30
SAE 10W
Engine oil pan
SAE 10W-30
SAE 15W-40
Damper case
Swing machinery case
Final drive case (each side)
Engine
oil
SAE 30
Carrier roller (1 each)

SAE 10W
SAE 10W-30
Hydraulic system
SAE 15W-40
Hydraulic
oil
Fuel tank
H046-HM ()
ASTM D975 No. 2
Diesel
fuel
ASTM D975A
No.1
Cooling system
Coolant
Add antifreeze
For the H-046-HM, use the oil recommended by Komatsu.
01-12
PC300-7
10 STRUCTURE, FUNCTION AND

MAINTENANCE STANDARD
1252
Engine
Multi Monitor System . . . . . . . . . . 10-173

7-Segment Monitor System . . . . . 10-193
Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-200
PC300-7
10-1
Related Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2

Radiator Oil Cooler Aftercooler . . .10-3
Power Train . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-4
Final Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-6
Sprocket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7-1
Swing Machinery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-8
Swing Circle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-10
Track Frame Recoil Spring . . . . . . .10-12
Idler. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-14
Carrier roller. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-16
Track roller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-17
Track Shoe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-18
Hydraulic Equipment Layout Drawing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-22
Hydraulic Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-24
Hydraulic Pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-26
Variable Volume Valve . . . . . . . . . . .10-47
Control Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-50
CLSS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-66
Self Pressure Reducing Valve. . . . . .10-69
Swing Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-72
Reverse Prevention Valve . . . . . . . . .10-78
Center Swivel Joint . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-80
Travel Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-81
Travel Junction Valve . . . . . . . . . . . .10-91
Travel PPC Shuttle Valve . . . . . . . . .10-94
Valve Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-98
Work Equipment Swing PPC Valve10-99
Travel PPC Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-103
Service PPC Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-112
Solenoid Valve. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-115
PPC Accumulator. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-117
Return Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-118
Boom Hydraulic Drift Prevention Valve
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-120
Quick Return Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-126
Lift Check Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-128
Attachment Circuit Selector Valve .10-129
Hydraulic Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-132
Work Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-134
Air Conditioner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-140
Engine Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-141
Electronic Control System . . . . . . .10-149
(6)
STRUCTURE, FUNCTION, & MAINTENANCE STANDARD
ENGINE RELATED PARTS
12
ENGINE RELATED PARTS
1.
2.
3.
4.
Drive plate
Torsion spring
Stopper pin
Friction plate
10-2
5.
6.
7.
8.
Damper assembly
Muffler
Rear engine mount
Front engine mount
OUTLINE
The damper assembly is a wet type.

Oil capacity: 1.3
PC300-7
RADIATOR OIL COOLER

AFTERCOOLER
12
RADIATOR OIL COOLER AFTERCOOLER
SWP08671
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Reservoir tank
Oil cooler
Radiator
Radiator inlet hose
Radiator outlet hose
Net
Shroud
Radiator cap
Aftercooler
PC300-7
SPECIFICATIONS
Radiator : CF19-4
Oil cooler : CF40-1
10-3
POWER TRAIN
12
POWER TRAIN
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Idler
Center swivel joint
Control valve
Final drive
Travel motor (HMV 160ADT-2)
Engine (SAA6D114E)
10-4
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
Hydraulic pump (HPV125+125)

Travel speed solenoid valve
Swing brake solenoid valve
Swing machinery
Swing motor (KMF230ABE-5)
Swing circle
PC300-7
FINAL DRIVE
12
FINAL DRIVE
10-6
PC300-7
FINAL DRIVE
12
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
Level plug
Drain plug
No. 1 planetary gear (No. of teeth: 42)
No. 1 sun gear (No. of teeth: 11)
No. 2 sun gear (No. of teeth: 19)
No. 1 planetary carrier
Cover
Ring gear (No. of teeth: 97)
Hub
Sprocket
Floating seal
Travel motor
No. 2 planetary gear (No. of teeth: 38)
SPECIFICATIONS
Reduction ratio:
11+ 97 19 + 97
= 58.943
11 19
Unit: mm
No.
15
Check item
Backlash between No. 1 sun gear and
No. 1 planetary gear
Criteria
Remedy
Standard clearance
Clearance limit
0.12 ~ 0.44
0.90
16
Backlash between No. 1 planetary gear

and ring gear
0.18 ~ 0.62
1.20
17
Backlash between No. 2 planetary carrier and motor
0.06 ~ 0.25
18
Backlash between No. 2 sun gear and

0.15 ~ 0.51
1.00
19
Backlash between No. 2 planetary gear

and ring gear
0.19 ~ 0.66
1.30
20
Backlash between No. 2 planetary carrier and No. 2 sun gear
0.39 ~ 0.80
1.60
21
Amount of wear on sprocket tooth
22
Repair limit: 6
Standard size
Repair limit
87
84
Width of sprocket tooth
PC300-7
Replace
Rebuild or
replace
10-7
SPROCKET
12
PC300-7
SPROCKET
Unit: mm
No.
Check item
Criteria
Remedy
Standard clearance
Clearance limit
336.5
324.5
Wear of tooth tip
Thickness of tooth root
20
14
Width of tooth
87
84
Wear of tooth shape
10-7-1
(6)
Build-up
welding or
replace
Repair limit: 6
(measure with sprocket tooth shape)
PC300-7
SPROCKET
SPROCKET TOOTH SHAPE OF REAL DIMENSION
The above drawing is reduced to 62%. Enlarge it to 160% to return it to the full scale and make a copy
on an OHP sheet.
PC300-7
10-7-2
(6)
SWING MACHINERY
12
SWING MACHINERY
10-8
PC300-7
SWING MACHINERY
12
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
Swing pinion (No. of teeth: 13)

Spacer
Case
No. 2 sun gear
Ring gear
No. 1 sun gear
Swing motor
Oil level gauge
Drain plug
SPECIFICATIONS
Reduction ratio:
19 + 68 24 + 68
= 17.553
19 24
Unit: mm
No.
Check item
Criteria
Remedy
Standard clearance
Clearance limit
0.18 ~ 0.28
Backlash between No. 1 sun gear and No. 1

planetary gear
0.15 ~ 0.51
1.00
16
Backlash between No. 1 planetary gear and

ring gear
0.17 ~ 0.60
1.10
17
Backlash between No. 1 planetary carrier

and No. 2 sun gear
0.40 ~ 0.75
1.20
18
Backlash between No. 2 sun gear and No. 2

planetary gear
0.16 ~ 0.55
1.00
19
Backlash between No. 2 planetary gear and

ring gear
0.17 ~ 0.60
1.10
20
Backlash between coupling and swing pinion
0.08 ~ 0.25
21
Backlash between swing pinion and swing

circle
0.00 ~ 1.21
2.00
22
Clearance between plate and coupling
0.57 ~ 1.09
Standard size
Repair limit
23
Wear of swing pinion surface contacting

with oil seal
14
Backlash between swing motor shaft and

No. 1 sun gear
15
PC300-7
145
0
-0.100
Replace
Apply hard chrome

plating, recondition, or replace
10-9
SWING CIRCLE
SWING CIRCLE
1. Swing circle inner race (No. of teeth: 90)

2. Ball
3. Swing circle outer race
SPECIFICATIONS
a. Inner race soft zone S position

b. Outer race soft zone S position
Reduction ratio:
90
= 6.923
13
Amount of grease: 33 l (G2-LI)

Unit: mm
No.
10-10
Check item
Axial clearance of bearing
(when mounted on chassis)
Criteria
Remedy
Standard clearance
Clearance limit
0.5 ~ 1.6
3.2
Replace
PC300-7
TRACK FRAME RECOIL SPRING
SWP08996
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Idler
Track frame
Carrier roller
Final drive
Track roller
Track shoe
Center guard
Recoil spring
Front guard
10-12
The dimensions and the number of track rollers depend

on the model, but the basic structure is not different.
Number of track rollers
Model
Qty
PC300-7, PC350-7
PC300LC-7, PC350LC-7
PC300-7
12
Standard shoe
Model
PC300-7
PC300LC-7
PC350-7
PC350LC-7
Shoe width
600 mm
700 mm
600 mm
600 mm
Link pitch
216 mm
216 mm
216 mm
216 mm
45 (pieces)
49 (pieces)
45 (pieces)
48 (pieces)
Item
No. on track (one side)
Unit: mm
No.
10
11
Check item
Vertical width of idler guide
Horizontal width of idler

guide
Criteria
Remedy
Standard
size
Tolerance
Repair limit
Track frame
123
+2
-1
127
Idler support
120
0.5
118
Track frame
266
+3
-1
271
Idler support
261
259
Standard size
12
Recoil spring
PC300-7
Rebuild
or
replace
Repair limit
Free length
x O.D.
Installation
length
Installation
load
Free
length
Installation
load
795 X 241
648
173.3 kN
(17,680 kg)
138.56 kN
(14,140 kg)
Replace
10-13
IDLER
12
IDLER
10-14
(6)
PC300-7
IDLER
12
Unit: mm
No.
Check item
Outside diameter of protruding
Criteria
Remedy
Standard size
Repair limit
635
Outside diameter of tread
590
578
Thickness of tread
32
26
Width of protrusion
102
Total width
190
Width of tread
44
50
Clearance between shaft and

bushing
Standard
size
80
Interference between idler and

bushing
Standard
size
87.6
PC300-7
Tolerance
Shaft
Hole
-0.225
-0.325
+0.130
-0.024
Tolerance
Shaft
Hole
+0.087
+0.037
-0.027
-0.079
Rebuild
or
replace
Standard
clearance
Clearance
limit
0.201 ~ 0.455
1.5
Standard
interference
Interference
limit
0.064 ~ 0.166
Replace
bushing
10-15
(6)
CARRIER ROLLER
12
CARRIER ROLLER
Unit: mm
No.
Check item
Criteria
Remedy
Standard size
Repair limit
175
Outside diameter of flange
148
134
Width of tread
50.3
Thickness of tread
32
25
Width of flange
19
Interference between shaft

and bushing
Standard
size
50
Interference between roller

and bushing
Standard
size
57
Shaft
Hole
-0.250
-0.270
+0.099
-0.032
Tolerance
Shaft
Hole
+0.117
+0.087
+0.040
0
Standard
interference
Clearance
limit
0.218 - 0.369
Standard
interference
Interference
limit
0.047 - 0.117
Standard clearance
Clearance limit
0.5 - 0.7
Replace
Axial clearance of roller
10-16
(6)
Tolerance
PC300-7
TRACK ROLLER
12
TRACK ROLLER
Unit: mm
No.
Check item
Criteria
Remedy
Standard size
Repair limit
216
Outside diameter of flange
180
168
Thickness of tread
54
48
Overall width
250
Inside width
98
Width of tread
49
Width of flange
27
Clearance between shaft and

bushing
Standard
size
65
Interference between roller

and bushing
Standard
size
72
PC300-7
Tolerance
Shaft
Hole
-0.250
-0.350
+0.186
-0.064
Tolerance
Shaft
Hole
+0.108
+0.008
-0.006
-0.036
Rebuild
or
replace
Standard
clearance
Clearance
limit
0.186 - 0.536
Standard
interference
Interference
limit
0.014 - 0.144
Replace
bushing
10-17
(6)
TRACK SHOE
12
TRACK SHOE
SWP09000
P portion shows the link of bushing press fitting end.
10-18
PC300-7
TRACK SHOE
12
Unit: mm
No
.
1
Check item
Criteria
Remedy
Standard size
Repair limit
216.3
219.3
Standard size
When turned
66.9
61.9
Standard size
Repair limit
116
107
30.7
21.7
Link pitch
Bushing outside diameter
Reverse
or
replace
Link height
Thickness of link metal
(bushing press-fitting portion)
4
5
Repair or
replace
178.4
Shoe bolt pitch
140.4
Replace
76.2
8
Link
9
10
Inside width
102
Overall width
47.8
Tread width
42.6
11
Protrusion of pin
4.2
12
Protrusion of regular bushing
5.25
13
Overall length of pin
242
14
Overall length of bushing
15
Thickness of bushing metal
16
Thickness of spacer
17
18
Press-fitting
force
19
Repair or
replace
Adjust or
replace
148.4
Standard size
When turned
10.8
5.8
Bushing
98 - 264.6 kN {10 - 27 ton}
Regular pin
147 - 362.6 kN {15 - 37 ton}
Master pin
98 - 215.6 kN {10 - 22 ton}
: Dry type track link
PC300-7
10-19
(6)
TRACK SHOE
12
Unit: mm
No.
Check item
Criteria
Tightening torque
(Nm {kgm})
Remedy
Additional tightening
angle (deg.)
a. Regular link
Triple shoe
393 39
{40 4}
120 10
Retighten
Shoe bolt
20
b. Master link
Tightening torque
(Nm {kgm})
Additional tightening Lower limit torque

angle (deg.)
(Nm {kgm})
22
23
Interference between
bushing and link
Interference between
regular pin and link
Clearance between regular pin

and bushing
Standard
size
Interference between master

pin and bushing
Clearance between master pin

and bushing
Standard
interference
Hole
66.5
+0.464
+0.424
+0.074
0
0.350 ~ 0.464
44.6
+0.235
+0.085
-0.188
-0.250
0.273 ~ 0.485
Standard
size
Standard
size
44.6
25
Tolerance
Shaft
44.6
24
PC300-7, PC350-7: 45
PC300LC-7, PC350LC-7: 48
No. of shoes (each side)
21
Standard
size
44.3
Tolerance
Shaft
Hole
+0.235
+0.085
+0.915
+0.415
Tolerance
Shaft
Hole
+0.03
0
-0.188
-0.250
Tolerance
Shaft
Hole
+0.050
-0.050
+0.915
+0.415
Standard
clearance
0.180 ~ 0.830
Adjust or
replace
Standard
interference
0.188 ~ 0.280
Standard
clearance
0.365 ~ 0.965
: Dry type track link
10-20
(6)
PC300-7
TRACK SHOE
12
TRIPLE GROUSER SHOE
Unit: mm
No.
Check item
Criteria
Height
( )
Remedy
Standard size
Repair limit
36
24
30
18
Thickness
11
32
3
( )
29
Length of base
26
Rebuild or replace
4
( )
24
24
5
( )
22
18
Length at tip
( )
16
18
7
( )
22
: PC300-7, PC300LC-7 : 600 mm width shoe
PC300-7
10-21
(6)
HYDRAULIC EQUIPMENT LAYOUT

DRAWING
12
HYDRAULIC EQUIPMENT LAYOUT DRAWING

1. Bucket cylinder
2. Arm cylinder
3. Boom cylinder
4. Swing motor
5. Control valve
6. Oil cooler
7. Hydraulic filter
8. Hydraulic pump
9. L.H. travel motor
10. Hydraulic tank
11. Multi-pattern selector valve
12. L.H. PPC valve
13. Safety lever (electric type)
14. Center swivel joint
15. R.H. PPC valve
16. Travel PPC valve
17. Attachment circuit selector valve
18. Holding valve
19. Accumulator
20. Solenoid valve assembly
20A PPC lock solenoid
20B Travel junction solenoid
20C Pump merge/divider solenoid
20D Travel speed solenoid
20E Swing brake solenoid
20F Machine push-up solenoid
20G 2-stage relief solenoid
10-22
PC300-7
HYDRAULIC EQUIPMENT LAYOUT

DRAWING
12
PC300-7
10-23
HYDRAULIC TANK
12
HYDRAULIC TANK
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Sight gauge
Hydraulic tank
Oil filler cap
Filter element
Strainer
Bypass valve
10-24
SPECIFICATIONS
Tank capacity: 275 l
Amount of oil inside tank: 188 l
Pressure valve
Relief cracking pressure:
16.7 6.9 kPa
{0.17 0.07 kg/cm}
Suction cracking pressure:
0 - 0.49 kPa
{0 - 0.005 kg/cm}
Bypass Valve set pressure:
150 30 kPa
{1.5 0.3 kg/cm}
PC300-7
HYDRAULIC PUMP
12
HYDRAULIC PUMP
HPV125 + 125
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Front main pump

Rear main pump
LS valve
PC valve
LS-EPC valve
PC-EPC valve
IM
ISIG
PAF
PFC
:
:
:
:
PAR :
PRC :
PBF :
PD1F:
PENF:
PC mode selector current

LS set selector current
Front pump delivery port
Front pump delivery pressure detection port
Rear pump delivery port
Rear pump delivery pressure
detection port
Pump pressure input port
Case drain port
Front pump control pressure
detection port
PENR : Rear pump control pressure detection port

PLSF : Front load pressure input port
PLSFC: Front load pressure detection port
PLSR : Rear load pressure input port
PLSRC: Rear load pressure detection port
PS
: Pump suction port
PLSC : LS set selector pressure detection
port
PM : PC set selector pressure detection
port
PEPC : EPC basic pressure input port
Outline
This pump consists of 2 variable capacity swash plate
piston pumps, PC valve, LS valve, and EPC valve.
10-26
PC300-7
HYDRAULIC PUMP
12
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Shaft (Front)
Cradle
Case (Front)
Rocker cam
Shoe
Piston
PC300-7
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
Cylinder block
Valve plate
End cap
Shaft (Rear)
Case (Rear)
Servo piston
10-27
HYDRAULIC PUMP
12
SWP
Function
The rotation and torque transmitted to the
pump shaft are converted into hydraulic
energy, and pressurized oil is discharged
according to the load.
It is possible to change the discharge amount
by changing the swash plate angle.
Structure
Cylinder block (7) is supported to shaft (1) by
a spline, and shaft (1) is supported by the
front and rear bearings.
The tip of piston (6) is a concave ball, and
shoe (5) is caulked to it to form one unit. Piston (6) and shoe (5) form a spherical bearing.
10-28
Rocker cam (4) has flat surface A, and shoe

(5) is always pressed against this surface
while sliding in a circular movement.
Rocker cam (4) brings high pressure oil at cylinder surface B with cradle (2), which is
secured to the case, and forms a static pressure bearing when it slides.
Piston (6) carries out relative movement in
the axial direction inside each cylinder chamber of cylinder block (7).
The cylinder block seals the pressure oil to
valve plate (8) and carries out relative rotation. This surface is designed so that the oil
pressure balance is maintained at a suitable
level. The oil inside each cylinder chamber of
cylinder block (7) is sucked in and discharged
through valve plate (8).
PC300-7
HYDRAULIC PUMP
12
Operation
1) Operation of pump
i Cylinder block (7) rotates together with
shaft (1), and shoe (5) slides on flat surface
A.
When this happens, rocker cam (4) moves
along cylindrical surface B, so angle
between center line X of rocker cam (4) and
the axial direction of cylinder block (7)
changes. (Angle is called the swash plate
angle.)
ii Center line X of rocker cam (4) maintains
swash plate angle in relation to the axial
direction of cylinder block (7), and flat surface A moves as a cam in relation to shoe
(5).
In this way, piston (6) slides on the inside of
cylinder block (7), so a difference between
volumes E and F is created inside cylinder
block (7). The suction and discharge is carried out by this difference F - E.
In other words, when cylinder block (7)
rotates and the volume of chamber E
becomes smaller, the oil is discharged during that stroke. On the other hand, the volume of chamber F becomes larger, and as
the volume becomes bigger, the oil is
sucked in.
iii If center line X of rocker cam (4) is in line
with the axial direction of cylinder block (7)
(swash plate angle = 0), the difference
between volumes E and F inside cylinder
block (7) becomes 0, so the pump does not
carry out any suction or discharge of oil.
(In actual fact, the swash plate angle never
becomes 0.)
PC300-7
10-29

12
2)
HYDRAULIC PUMP
Control of discharge amount

If the swash plate angle becomes larger,
the difference between volumes E and F
becomes larger and discharge amount Q
increases.
Swash plate angle is changed by servo
piston (12).
Servo piston (12) moves in a reciprocal
movement () according to the signal
pressure from the PC and LS valves. This
straight line movement is transmitted
through rod (13) to rocker cam (4), and
rocker cam (4), which is supported by the
cylindrical surface to cradle (2), slides in a
rotating movement in direction of arrow.
With servo piston (12), the area receiving
the pressure is different on the left and
the right, so main pump discharge pressure (self pressure) PP is always brought
to the chamber receiving the pressure at
the small diameter piston end.
Output pressure Pen of the LS valve is
brought to the chamber receiving the
pressure at the large diameter end. The
relationship in the size of pressure PP at
the small diameter piston end and pressure Pen at the large diameter end, and
the ratio between the area receiving the
pressure of the small diameter piston and
the large diameter piston controls the
movement of servo piston (12).
10-30
PC300-7
HYDRAULIC PUMP
12
LS VALVE
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Plug
Locknut
Sleeve
Spring
Seat
Spool
Piston
Sleeve
PA :
PP :
PDP :
PLP :
PLS :
PPL :
PSIG :
Pump port
Pump port
Drain port
LS control pressure output port
LS pressure input port
PC control pressure input port
LS mode selection pilot port
PA :
PA2 :
PDP :
PM :
PPL :
PPL2:
Pump port
Pump pressure pilot port
Drain port
PC mode selector pressure pilot port
PC control pressure output port
LS control pressure output port
PC VALVE
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Servo piston assembly

Plug
Pin
Spool
Retainer
Seat
Cover
Wiring
PC300-7
10-31
HYDRAULIC PUMP
12
Function
(1) LS valve
The LS valve detects the load and controls the
discharge amount.
This valve controls main pump discharge
amount Q according to differential pressure
PLS (=PP - PLS) [called the LS differential
pressure] (the difference between main pump
pressure PP and control valve outlet port
pressure PLS).
Main pump pressure PP, pressure PLS {called
the LS pressure} coming from the control
valve output, and pressure Psig {called the
LS selector pressure} from the proportional
solenoid valve enter this valve. The relationship between discharge amount Q and differential pressure PLS, (the difference between
main pump pressure PP and LS pressure
PLS) (= PP - PLS) changes as shown in the
diagram at the right according to LS pressure
selector current isig of the LS-EPC valve.
When isig changes between 0 and 1A, the set
pressure of the spring changes according to
this, and the selector point for the pump discharge amount changes at the rated central
valve between 0.98 2.5 MPa {10 25 kg/
cm}.
(2) PC valve
When the pump discharge pressure PP1
(self-pressure) and PP2 (other pump pressure) are high, the PC valve controls the
pump so that no more oil than the constant
flow (in accordance with the discharge pressure) flows even if the stroke of the control
valve becomes larger. In this way, it carries
out equal horsepower control so that the
horsepower absorbed by the pump does not
exceed the engine horsepower.
In other words, If the load during the operation becomes larger and the pump discharge
pressure rises, it reduces the discharge
amount from the pump; and if the pump discharge pressure drops, it increases the discharge amount from the pump. The
relationship between the average of the front
and rear pump discharge pressures (average
discharge amount of F, R pumps (PP1 +
PP2)/2) and pump discharge amount Q is
shown on the right, with the current given to
the PC-EPC valve solenoid shown as a parameter. The controller senses the actual speed of
the engine, and if the speed drops because of
an increase in the load, it reduces the pump
discharge amount to allow the speed to
recover. In other words, when the load
increases and the engine speed drops below
10-32
09141
09142
the set value, the command current to the PCEPC valve solenoid from the controller
increases according to the drop in the engine
speed to reduce the pump swash plate angle.
PC300-7
HYDRAULIC PUMP
12
OPERATION
SDP08884
(1) LS valve
1) When control valve is at neutral position
The LS valve is a three-way selector valve,
with pressure PLS (LS pressure) from the
inlet port of the control valve brought to
spring chamber B, and main pump discharge
pressure PP brought to port H of sleeve (8).
The size of this LS pressure PLS + force Z of
spring (4) and the main pump pressure (self
pressure) PP determines the position of
spool (6). However, the size of the output
pressure PSIG (the LS selection pressure) of
the EPC valve for the LS valve entering port G
also changes the position of spool (6). (The
set pressure of the spring changes).
Before the engine is started, servo piston (12)
is pushed to the right. (See the diagram on
the right)
When the engine is started and the control
lever is at the neutral position, LS pressure
PLS is 0 MPa {0 kg/cm}. (It is interconnected
with the drain circuit through the control
valve spool.)
PC300-7
At this point, spool (6) is pushed to the left,

and port C and port D are connected. Pump
pressure PP enters the large diameter end of
the piston from port K and the same pump
pressure PP also enters port J at the small
diameter end of the piston, so the swash plate
is moved to the minimum angle by the difference in the area of the piston (12).
10-33
(8)
HYDRAULIC PUMP
12
SDP08885
2) Operation in increase direction for pump

discharge amount
When the difference between the main pump
pressure PP and LS pressure PLS, in other
words, LS differential pressure PLS,
becomes smaller (for example, when the area
of opening of the control valve becomes
larger and pump PP drops), spool (6) is
pushed to the right by the combined force of
LS pressure PLS and the force of spring (4).
When spool (6) moves, port D and port E are
joined and connected to the PC valve. When
this happens, the PC valve is connected to the
drain port, so circuit D - K becomes drain
pressure PT. (The operation of the PC valve is
explained later).
10-34
For this reason, the pressure at the large

diameter end of servo piston (12) becomes
drain pressure PT, and pump pressure PP
enters port J at the small diameter end, so
servo piston (12) is pushed to the right. Therefore, the swash plate moves in the direction
to make the discharge amount larger. If the
output pressure of the EPC valve for the LS
valve enters port G, this pressure creates a
force to move piston (7) to the left. If piston
(7) is pushed to the left, it acts to make the set
pressure of spring (4) weaker, and the difference between PLS and PP changes when
ports D and E of spool (6) are connected.
PC300-7
HYDRAULIC PUMP
12
SDP08886
3) Operation in decrease direction for

pump discharge amount
The following explains the situation if the
servo piston (12) moves to the left (the discharge amount becomes smaller). When LS
differential pressure PLS becomes larger
(for example, when the area of opening of the
control valve becomes smaller and pump
pressure PP rises), pump pressure PP
pushes spool (6) to the left.
When spool (6) moves, main port pressure
PP flows from port C and port D and from
port K, it enters the large diameter end of the
piston.
PC300-7
Main pump pressure PP also enters port J at

the small diameter end of the piston, but
because of the difference in area between the
large diameter end and the small diameter
end of servo piston (12), servo piston (12) is
pushed to the left.
As a result, the swash plate moves in the
direction to make angle smaller.
If LS selection pressure PSIG enters port G, it
acts to make the set pressure of spring (4)
weaker.
10-35
HYDRAULIC PUMP
12
SDP08887
4) When servo piston is balanced

Let us take the area receiving the pressure at
the large diameter end of the piston as A1,
the area receiving the pressure at the small
diameter end as A0, and the pressure flowing
into the large diameter end of the piston as
Pen. If the main pump pressure PP of the LS
valve and the combined force of force Z of
spring (4) and LS pressure PLS are balanced,
and the relationship is A0 x PP = A1 x Pen,
servo piston (11) will stop in that position, and
the swash plate will be kept at an intermediate position. (It will stop at a position where
the opening of the throttle from port D to port
E and from port C to port D of spool (6) is
approximately the same.)
10-36
At this point, the relationship between the

area receiving the pressure at both ends of
piston (12) is A0 : A1 = 1:2, so the pressure
applied to both ends of the piston when it is
balanced becomes PP : Pen = 2:1.
The position where spool (6) is balanced and
stopped is the standard center, and the force
of spring (4) is adjusted so that it is determined when PP - PLS = 2.5 MPa {25 kg/cm}.
However, if PSIG (the output pressure of 0
2.9 MPa {0 30 kg/cm} of the EPC valve of
the LS valve) is applied to port G, the balance
stop position will change in proportion to
pressure PSIG between PP - PLS = 2.5
0.98 MPa {25 10 kg/cm}.
PC300-7
HYDRAULIC PUMP
12
(2) PC Valve
1) When pump controller is normal
a. When the load on the actuator is small
and pump pressures PP1 and PP2 are
low
i) Movement of PC-EPC solenoid (1)
The command current from the pump
controller flows to PC-EPC solenoid
(1).This command current acts on the PCEPC valve and outputs the signal pressure. When this signal pressure is
received, the force pushing piston (2) is
changed.
On the opposite side to the force pushing
this piston (2) is the spring set pressure of
springs (4) and (6) and pump pressure
PP1 (self pressure) and PP2 (other pump
pressure) pushing spool (3). Piston (2)
stops at a position where the combined
force pushing spool (3) is balanced, and
PC300-7
the pressure (pressure of port C) output

from the PC valve changes according to
this position.
The size of command current X is determined by the nature of the operation
(lever operation), the selection of the
working mode, and the set value and
actual value for the engine speed.
Other pump pressure
This is the pressure of the pump at the
opposite end.
For the F pump, it is the R pump pressure
For the R pump, it is the F pump pressure
10-37
(8)
HYDRAULIC PUMP
12
ii) Action of spring

The spring load of springs (4) and (6) in the
PC valve is determined by the swash plate
position.
If piston (9) moves to the left, spring (6) is
compressed, and if it moves further to the left,
spring (6) contacts seat (5) and is fixed in
position. In other words, the spring load is
changed by piston (9) extending or compressing springs (4) and (6).
10-38
(8)
If the command circuit input to PC-EPC valve

solenoid (1) changes further, the force pushing piston (2) changes, and the spring load of
springs (4) and (6) also changes according to
the valve of the PC-EPC valve solenoid command current.
PC300-7
HYDRAULIC PUMP
12
Port C of the PC valve is connected to port E

of the LS valve (see (1) LS valve). Self pressure PP1 enters port B and the small diameter end of servo piston (9), and other pump
pressure PP2 enters port A.
When pump pressures PP1 and PP2 are
small, spool (3) is on the left. At this point,
port C and D are connected, and the pressure
entering the LS valve becomes drain pressure
PT. If port E and port G of the LS valve are
connected (see (1) LS valve), the pressure
entering the large diameter end of the piston
from port J becomes drain pressure PT, and
servo piston (9) moves to the right. In this
way, the pump discharge amount moves in
the direction of increase.
As servo piston (9) moves further, springs (4)
and (6) expand and the spring force becomes
weaker. When the spring force becomes
weaker, spool (3) moves to the right, so the
connection between port C and port D is cut,
and the pump discharge pressure ports B and
C are connected. As a result, the pressure at
port C rises, and the pressure at the large
diameter end of the piston also rises, so the
movement of piston (9) to the right is
stopped.
In other words, the stop position for piston (9)
(= pump discharge amount) is decided at the
point where the force of springs (4) and (6)
and the pushing force from the PC-EPC valve
solenoid and the pushing force created by the
pressures PP1 and PP2 acting on the spool
(3) are in balance.
PC300-7
10-39
HYDRAULIC PUMP
12
b. When load on actuator is large and

pump discharge pressure is high
When the load is large and pump discharge pressures PP1 and PP2 are high,
the force pushing spool (3) to the left
becomes larger and spool (3) moves to
the position in the diagram above. When
this happens, as shown in the diagram
above, part of the pressurized oil from
port B flows out through port C where the
LS valve is actuated to port D, and the
pressurized oil flowing from port C to the
LS valve becomes approximately half of
main pump pressure PP.
When port E and port G of the LS valve
are connected (see (1) LS valve), the pressure from port J enters the large diameter
end of servo piston (9), and servo piston
(9) stops.
10-40
(8)
If main pump pressure PP increases further and spool (3) moves further to the
left, main pump pressure PP1 flows to
port C and acts to make the discharge
amount the minimum. When piston (9)
moves to the left, springs (4) and (6) are
compressed and push back spool (3).
When spool (3) moves to the left, the
opening of port C and port D becomes
larger. As a result, the pressure at port C
(= J) drops, and piston (9) stops moving
to the left.
The position in which piston (9) stops
when this happens is further to the left
than the position when pump pressures
PP1 and PP2 are low.
PC300-7
HYDRAULIC PUMP
12
The relation of average pump pressure

(PP1 + PP2)/2 and the position of servo
piston (9) forms a bent line because of
the double-spring effect of springs (4)
and (6). The relationship between average pump pressure (PP1 + PP2)/2 and
pump discharge amount Q is shown in
the figure at the right.
If command voltage X sent to PC-EPC

valve solenoid (1) increases further, the
relationship between average pump
pressure (PP1 + PP2)/2, and pump discharge amount Q is proportional to the
pushing force of the PC-EPC valve solenoid and moves in parallel. In other
words, the pushing force of PC-EPC
solenoid (1) is added to the force pushing to the left because of the pump pressure applied to the spool (3), so the
relationship between the average pump
pressure (PP1 + PP2)/2 and Q moves
from [1] to [2] in accordance with the
increase in X.
PC300-7
10-41
(8)
HYDRAULIC PUMP
12
2) When pump controller is abnormal and

emergency pump drive switch is ON
a. When load on main pump is light
If there is a failure in the pump controller,
turn emergency pump drive switch ON to
switch to the resistor side. In this case, the
power source is taken directly from the
battery. But if the current is used as it is, it
is too large, so use the resistor to control
the current flowing to PC-EPC valve solenoid (1).
When this is done, the current becomes
constant, so the force pushing piston (2)
is also constant.
If the main pump pressure PP1 and PP2
are low, the combined force of the pump
pressure and the force of PC-EPC valve
solenoid (1) are weaker than the spring
set force, so spool (3) is balanced at a
position to the right.
10-42
(8)
At this point, port C is connected to the

drain pressure of port D, and the large
diameter end of the piston of servo piston
(9) also becomes the drain pressure PT
through the LS valve. When this happens,
the pressure at the small diameter end of
the piston is large, so servo piston (9)
moves in the direction to make the discharge amount larger.
PC300-7
HYDRAULIC PUMP
12
09147
b. When main pump load is heavy

In the same way as in the previous item,
when the emergency pump drive switch
is ON, the command current sent to PCEPC valve solenoid (1) becomes constant.
For this reason, the force of piston (2)
pushing spool (3) is constant.
If main pump pressures PP1 and PP2
increase, spool (3) moves further to the
left than when the main pump load is
light, and is balanced at the position in
the diagram above.
In this case, the pressure from port A
flows to port C, so servo piston (9) moves
to the left (to make the discharge amount
smaller) by the same mechanism as
explained in item 2)-b, and stops at a
position to the left of the position when
the load on the pump is light. In other
words, even when the emergency pump
drive switch is ON, the curve for the
pump pressure PP
PC300-7
and discharge amount Q is determined as

shown in the diagram for the valve of the
current sent to the PC-EPC valve solenoid
through the resistor.
The curve when the PC prolix switch is
ON is curve , which is to the left of curve
for when the pump controller is normal.
10-43
HYDRAULIC PUMP
12
LS(PC)-EPC VALVE
1.
2.
3.
4.
Body
Spool
Spring
Rod
10-44
5. Coil
6. Plunger
7. Connector
PSIG(PM) : To LS(PC) valve

PT
: To tank
PEPC
: From self-reducing pressure valve
PC300-7
HYDRAULIC PUMP
12O
FUNCTION
The EPC valve consists of the proportional

solenoid portion and the hydraulic valve
portion.
When it receives signal current i from the
pump controller, it generates the EPC output pressure in proportion to the size of the
signal, and outputs it to the LS valve.
OPERATION
1. When signal current is 0 (coil de-energized)
When there is no signal current flowing
from the controller to coil (5), coil (5) is deenergized.
For this reason, spool (2) is pushed to the
right in the direction of the arrow by spring
(3).
As a result, port PEPC closes and the pressurized oil from the main pump does not
flow to the LS valve.
At the same time, the pressurized oil from
the LS valve passes from port PSIG(PM)
through port PT and is drained to the tank.
PC300-7
08890
10-45
(8)

2. When signal current is very small (coil
energized)
When a very small signal current flows to
coil (5), coil (5) is energized, and a propulsion force is generated which pushes
plunger (6) to the left.
Push pin (4) pushes spool (2) to the left,
and pressurized oil flows from port PEPC
to port PSIG(PM).
When the pressure at port PSIG(PM) rises
and the load of spring (3) + the force acting
on surface a of spool (2) becomes greater
than the propulsion force of plunger (6),
spool (2) is pushed to the right. The circuit
between port PEPC and port PSIG(PM) is
shut off, and at the same time, port
PSIG(PM) and port PT are connected.
As a result, spool (2) is moved up or down
until the propulsion force of plunger (6) is
balanced with the load of spring (3) + pressure of port PSIG(PM).
Therefore, the circuit pressure between the
EPC valve and the LS valve is controlled in
proportion to the size of the signal current.
3. When signal current is maximum (coil
energized)
When the signal current flows to coil (5),
coil (5) is energized.
When this happens, the signal current is at
its maximum, so the propulsion force of
plunger (6) is also at its maximum.
For this reason, spool (2) is pushed fully to
the left by push pin (4).
As a result, the maximum flow of pressurized oil from port PEPC flows to port
PSIG(PM), and the circuit pressure
between the EPC valve and LS valve
becomes the maximum.
At the same time, port PT closes and stops
the oil from flowing to the tank.
10-46
HYDRAULIC PUMP
08891
08892
PC300-7
VARIABLE VOLUME VALVE
12
1.
2.
3.
4.
Block
Plug
Spring
Piston
PC300-7
PM: To PC valve
PT: To tank
PEPC: From self-reducing pressure valve
10-47
FUNCTION
This stabilizes the EPC output pressure.
OPERATION
The output pressure from EPC flows to port

PM, and when the propulsion force of piston
(4) becomes larger than the load of spring (3),
piston (4) is pushed to the left and the volume
at port PM increases.
When the propulsion force of piston (4)
becomes less than the load on spring (3), piston (4) is pushed to the right and the volume
at port PM goes down.
09148
10-48
(8)
PC300-7
CONTROL VALVE
12
CONTROL VALVE
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
6-spool valve
Cover 1
Cover 2
Pump merge-divider valve
Back pressure valve
Boom lock valve
Boom, arm Hi valve
Service valve
Quick return valve
Boom Hi check valve
OUTLINE
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A-1
A-2
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B-1
B-2
P1
P2
P3
P4
P5
P6
P7
P8
P9
P10
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
To bucket cylinder bottom

To left travel motor
To boom cylinder bottom
To swing motor
To right travel motor
To arm cylinder head
To boom cylinder bottom
To attachment
To bucket cylinder head
To left travel motor
To bottom cylinder head
To swing motor
To right travel motor
To arm cylinder bottom
To arm cylinder bottom
To attachment
From bucket PPC valve
From bucket PPC valve
From left travel PPC valve
From left travel PPC valve
From boom PPC valve
From boom PPC valve
From swing PPC valve
From swing PPC valve
: From right travel PPC valve
: From right travel PPC valve
10-50
(8)
P11
P12
P-3
P-4
BP1
PB5
BP6
This control valve consists of a 7-spool

valve (6 spool valve + boom, arm Hi valve)
and a service valve. A merge-divider valve,
back-pressure valve, boom hydraulic drift
prevention valve, quick return valve, and Hi
valve check valve are installed to it.
Since all the valves are assembled together
with connecting bolts and their passes are
connected to each other inside the assembly, the assembly is small in size and easy
to maintain.
Since one spool of this control valve is
used for one work equipment unit, its structure is simple.
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
PLS1 :
PLS2 :
PP1 :
PP2 :
PPS1:
PPS2:
PR :
PS :
PST :
PX1 :
PX2 :
SA :
SB :
T
:
T1 :
TS :
TSW :
From arm PPC valve

From arm PPC valve
From service PPC valve
From service PPC valve
Boom RAISE PPC output pressure
From 2-stage safety valve solenoid valve
From attachment circuit selector solenoid
valve
To rear pump control
To front pump control
To rear pump control
To front pump control
From rear main pump
From front main pump
To solenoid valve, PPC valve, EPC valve
From pump merge-divider solenoid valve
From travel junction valve
From 2-stage solenoid valve
From 2-stage solenoid valve
Pressure sensor fitting port
Pressure sensor fitting port
To tank
To tank
To tank
To swing motor
PC300-7
CONTROL VALVE
12
8-spool valve
(7-spool valve + 1 service valve)
(1/9)
PC300-7
10-51
(8)
CONTROL VALVE
12
(2/9)
S*P09099
10-52
PC300-7
CONTROL VALVE
12
(3/9)
1. Unload valve
2. Pressure compensation valve (Arm OUT)
3. Pressure compensation valve (Right travel
reverse)
4. Pressure compensation valve (Right swing)
5. Pressure compensation valve (Boom RAISE)
6. Pressure compensation valve (Left travel
reverse)
7. Pressure compensation valve (Bucket CURL)
8. Pressure compensation valve (Boom RAISE)
9. Pressure compensation valve (Service)
PC300-7
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
Pressure compensation valve (Service)

Pressure compensation valve (Arm IN)
Pressure compensation valve (Bucket DUMP)
Pressure compensation valve (Left travel forward)
Pressure compensation valve (Boom LOWER)
Pressure compensation valve (Left swing)
Pressure compensation valve (Right travel
forward)
Pressure compensation valve (Arm IN)
Main relief valve
10-53
CONTROL VALVE
12
(4/9)
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
Spool (Arm)
Spool (Right travel)
Spool (Swing)
Spool (Boom)
Spool (Left travel)
Spool (Bucket)
Spool (Boom Hi)

Spool (Arm Hi)
Spool (Service)
Unload valve
Main relief valve
Unit: mm
No.
Check item
Criteria
Standard size
12
Spool return spring
Remedy
Repair limit
Free length x
Outside diameter
Installed
length
Installed
load
Free
length
Installed
load
54.2 x 34.8
51.2
416.5 N
{42.5 kg}
333.2 N
{34 kg}
13
Spool return spring
54.6 x 34.8
51.2
429.9 N
{42.9 kg}
336.1 N
{34.3 kg}
14
Spool return spring
54.5 x 34.8
51.2
393 N
{40.1 kg}
314.6 N
{32.1 kg}
15
Spool return spring
54.9 x 24.2
51.2
251 N
{25.1 kg}
201.0 N
{20.5 kg}
10-54
If damaged or
deformed, replace
spring
PC300-7
CONTROL VALVE
12
(5/9)
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
Safety-suction valve (Arm OUT)

Suction valve (Right travel reverse)
Suction valve (Boom RAISE)
Suction valve (Left travel reverse)
Safety-suction valve (Service)
Safety-suction valve (2-stage) (Service)
Safety-suction valve (Arm IN)
Safety-suction valve (Bucket DUMP)
Suction valve (Left travel forward)
Safety-suction valve (2-stage) (Boom LOWER)

Suction valve (Right travel forward)
Safety-suction valve (Arm IN)
LS shuttle valve (Arm, right travel)
LS select valve
LS shuttle valve (Boom, left travel, bucket)
LS shuttle valve (Service)
LS check valve
Pressure relief plug
Unit: mm
No.
Check item
Criteria
Standard size
19
Check valve spring
PC300-7
Remedy
Repair limit
Free length x
Outside diameter
Installed
length
Installed
load
Free
length
Installed
load
11.5 x 4.6
8.5
1.5 N
{0.15 kg}
1.2 N
{0.12 kg}
If damaged or
deformed, replace
spring
10-55
CONTROL VALVE
12
(6/9)
ARM CONTROL VALVE

1. Unload valve
2. Main relief valve
3. Safety valve (Boom
RAISE)
4. Lift check valve
10-56
5. Safety-suction valve
6. Spool
7. Pressure compensation valve
(OUT)
8. LS shuttle valve
(IN)
11. Check valve for regeneration circuit
R. H. TRAVEL CONTROL
VALVE
12. Suction valve
13. Spool
(Reverse)
15. LS shuttle valve
(Forward)
17. Suction valve
PC300-7
CONTROL VALVE
Unit: mm
No.
Check item
Criteria
Standard size
18
Regeneration valve
spring
Remedy
Repair limit
Free length x
Outside diameter
Installed
length
Installed
load
Free
length
Installed
load
31.5 x 10.3
19.5
6.2 N
{0.6 kg}
4.9 N
{0.5 kg}
19
Piston return spring
48.1 x 10.8
28
17.5 N
{1.8 kg}
14.0 N
{1.4 kg}
20
36.9 x 11.1
28
29.4 N
{3 kg}
23.5 N
{2.4 kg}
PC300-7
If damaged or
deformed, replace
spring
10-57
CONTROL VALVE
(7/9)
SWING CONTROL VALVE
BOOM CONTROL VALVE
1. Spool
2. Pressure compensation
valve (Right)
3. LS select valve
valve (Left)
5. Suction valve
6. Spool
valve (RAISE)
8. Hydraulic drift prevention
valve
9. LS shuttle valve
valve (Lower)
12. Check valve for regeneration
circuit
10-58
L. H. TRAVEL CONTROL
VALVE
13. Pump merge-divider valve
(Travel junction valve)
14. Return spring
15. Suction valve
16. Spool
valve (Reverse)
18. LS shuttle valve
valve (Forward)
20. Suction valve
PC300-7
CONTROL VALVE
Unit: mm
No.
Check item
Criteria
Standard size
21
Regeneration valve spring
Remedy
Repair limit
Free length x
Outside diameter
Installed
length
Installed
load
Free
length
Installed
load
31.5 x 10.3
19.5
6.2 N
{0.6 kg}
4.9 N
{0.5 kg}
14.0 N
{1.4 kg}
22
48.1 x 10.8
28
17.5 N
{1.8 kg}
23
36.9 x 11.1
28
29.4 N
{3 kg}
23.5 N
{2.4 kg}
24
Spool return spring
30.7 x 20.5
23
50.0 N
{5.1 kg}
40.0 N
{4.1 kg}
PC300-7
If damaged or
deformed, replace
spring
10-59
CONTROL VALVE
12
(8/9)
BUCKET CONTROL VALVE
BOOM, ARM HI VALVE
SERVICE VALVE
2. Spool
valve (CURL)
4. LS shuttle valve
valve (DUMP)
7. Boom Hi spool
(Boom RAISE)
9. Boom Hi check valve
10. Quick-return valve
(Arm IN)
12. Arm Hi spool
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
Safety-suction valve
Spool
Pressure compensation valve
LS shuttle valve
Safety-suction valve
Unit: mm
No.
Check item
Criteria
Standard size
20
21
10-60
Free length x
Outside diameter
Remedy
Repair limit
Installed
length
Installed
load
Free
length
Installed
load
28
17.5 N
{1.8 kg}
14.0 N
{1.4 kg}
48.1 x 10.8
36.9 x 11.1
28
29.4 N
{3 kg}
23.5 N
{2.4 kg}
If damaged or
deformed, replace
spring
PC300-7
CONTROL VALVE
12
(9/9)
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Unload valve
Main relief valve
Pump merge-divider valve (Main)
Return spring
Pump merge-divider valve (For LS)
Return spring
Valve (Sequence valve)
Spring (Sequence valve)
10-62
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
LS bypass plug
Screw
Poppet
Spring (Pressure reducing valve pilot)
Spring (Pressure reducing valve main)
Valve (Pressure reducing valve)
Spring (Safety valve)
Ball
PC300-7
CONTROL VALVE
Unit: mm
No.
Check item
Criteria
Standard size
17
Check valve spring
Remedy
Repair limit
Free length x
Outside diameter
Installed
length
Installed
load
Free
length
Installed
load
11.5 x 4.6
8.5
1.5 N
{0.15 kg}
1.2 N
{0.12 kg}
125.5 N
{12.8 kg}
18
Spool return spring
46.6 x 21.8
3.3
156.8 N
{16.0 kg}
19
Spool return spring
64.5 x 32.3
63
177.5 N
{18.1 kg}
142.0 N
{14.5 kg}
20
Sequence valve spring
70.9 x 18.0
59
199.8 N
{20.4 kg}
160.0 N
{16.3 kg}
PC300-7
If damaged or
deformed, replace
spring
10-63
CONTROL VALVE
MAIN RELIEF VALVE
1. Spring
2. Poppet
FUNCTION
The relief valve set pressure is set to 2 stages.

When power is needed, pilot pressure P is turned ON and the pressure is set to high pressure.
OPERATION
The relief valve set pressure is determined by the installed load of spring (1). (First stage)
It is unnecessary to set the first and second stage individually.
The second stage is set when the first stage is set.
1.
When pilot pressure P is OFF: Low-pressure setting

The set pressure is determined by the installed load of spring (1).
2. When pilot pressure P is ON: High-pressure setting

In addition to the installed load of spring (1), pilot pressure P is applied to poppet diameter d1, so the
set pressure becomes higher.
10-64
PC300-7
CONTROL VALVE
12
VARIABLE PRESSURE COMPENSATION VALVE
PC300-7
10-65
CLSS
12
CLSS
OUTLINE OF CLSS
FEATURES
STRUCTURE
CLSS stands for Closed center Load Sensing

System, and has the following features.
1) Fine control not influenced by load

2) Control enabling digging even with fine control
3) Ease of compound operation ensured by flow
divider function using area of opening of
spool during compound operations
4) Energy saving using variable pump control
10-66
The CLSS consists of a main pump (2

pumps), control valve, and actuators for the
work equipment.
The main pump body consists of the pump
itself, the PC valve and LS valve.
PC300-7
CLSS
Basic principle
1) Control of pump swash plate
The pump swash plate angle (pump discharge amount) is controlled so that LS differential pressure PLS (the difference
between pump pressure PP and control
valve outlet port LS pressure PLS) (load
pressure of actuator) is constant.
(LS pressure PLS = Pump discharge pressure PP LS pressure PLS)
If LS differential pressure PLS becomes

lower than the set pressure of the LS valve
(when the actuator load pressure is high),
the pump swash plate moves towards the
maximum position; if it becomes higher
than the set pressure of the LS valve (when
the actuator load pressure is low), the
pump swash plate moves towards the minimum position.
PC300-7
10-67
2) Pressure compensation
A pressure compensation valve is installed to
the outlet port side of the control valve to balance the load.
When two actuators are operated together,
this valve acts to make pressure difference P
between the upstream (inlet port) and downstream (outlet port) of the spool of each valve
the same regardless of the size of the load
(pressure).
10-68
CLSS
In this way, the flow of oil from the pump is

divided (compensated) in proportion to the
area of opening S1 and S2 of each valve.
PC300-7
SELF PRESSURE REDUCING VALVE

FUNCTION
This value reduces the discharge pressure

of the main pump and supplies it as control
pressure for the solenoid valves, PPC
valves, etc.
OPERATION
1. When engine is stopped
Poppet (11) is pressed by spring (12)
against the seat and port PR is not connected to TS.
Valve (14) is pressed by spring (13) against
the left side and port P2 is connected to PR.
Valve (7) is pressed by spring (8) against
the left side and port P2 is not connected to
A2.
PC300-7
10-69
2. When in neutral or load pressure P2 is

low (When boom is lowered and arm is in IN
position and they are moving down under
own weight)
Note: When load pressure A2 is lower than self-pressure reducing valve output pressure PR.
Valve (7) receives the force of spring (8) and

PR pressure (which is 0 MPa {0 kg/cm} when
the engine is stopped) in the direction to close
the circuit between ports P2 and A2. If the
hydraulic oil flows in port P2, the dx P2 pressure becomes equal to the total of the force of
spring (8) and the value of area of d x PR
pressure, then the area of the pass between
ports P2 and A2 is so adjusted that the P2
pressure will be kept constant above the PR
pressure.
If the PR pressure rises above the set level,
puppet (11) opens and the hydraulic oil flows
from the PR port through orifice "a" in spool
(14) and open part of poppet (11) to seal drain
port TS.
Accordingly, differential pressure is generated
between before and after orifice "a" in spool
(14) and then spool (14) moves to close the
pass between port P2 and PR. The P2 pressure
is controlled constant (at the set pressure) by
the area of the oil pass at this time and supplied as the PR pressure.
3. When load pressure P2 is high

If load pressure A2 rises and the pump discharge increases because of operation of the
work equipment, the dx P2 pressure rises
higher than the total of the force of spring (8)
and the value of d x PR pressure, and then
valve (7) moves to the right stroke end.
As a result, the area of the pass between ports
P2 and A2 increases and the pass resistance
lowers and the loss of the engine power is
reduced.
If the PR pressure rises above the set pressure, poppet (11) opens and the hydraulic oil
flows from the PR port through orifice "a" in
spool (14) and open part of poppet (11) to seal
drain port TS.
Accordingly, differential pressure is generated
between before and after orifice "a" in spool
(14) and then spool (14) moves to close the
pass between port P2 and PR. The P2 pressure
is controlled constant (at the set pressure) by
the area of the oil pass at this time and supplied as the PR pressure.
10-70
PC300-7
12
4. When abnormally high pressure is
generated
If the PR pressure on the self-pressure
reducing valve rises high abnormally, ball
(16) separates from the seat against the
force of spring (15) and the hydraulic oil
flows from output port PR to TS. Accordingly, the PR pressure lowers. By this operation, the hydraulic devices (PPC valves,
solenoid valves, etc.) are protected from
abnormal pressure.
PC300-7
10-71
SWING MOTOR
12
SWING MOTOR
KMF230ABE-5
B :
S :
T :
MA :
MB :
From swing lock solenoid valve

From control valve
To tank
From control valve
From control valve
SPECIFICATIONS
Model
KMF230ABE-5
Theoretical displacement
229.4 cm/rev
Safety valve set pressure
10-72
27.9
+0.5
0
MPa {285 0+0.5 kg/cm2 }
Rated revolving speed
1,130 rpm
Brake release pressure
1.9 0.4 MPa {19 4 kg/cm}

PC300-7
SWING MOTOR
12
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Brake spring
Drive shaft
Spacer
Case
Disc
Plate
Brake piston
10-74
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
Housing
Piston
Cylinder block
Valve plate
Reverse prevention valve
Center shaft
Center spring
15. Safety valve

16. Check valve
17. Shuttle valve
PC300-7
SWING MOTOR
12
Unit: mm
No.
Check item
Criteria
Standard size
18
19
Check valve spring
Shuttle valve spring
PC300-7
Remedy
Repair limit
Free length x
Outside diameter
Installed
length
Installed
load
Free
length
Installed
load
66.5 x 25.6
45
6.96 N
{0.71 kg}
5.59 N
{0.57 kg}
24.5 x 11.6
14
7.7 N
{0.79 kg}
6.18 N
{0.63 kg}
If damaged or
deformed, replace
spring
10-75
SWING MOTOR
RELIEF VALVE PORTION

1) Outline
The relief portion consists of check valves
(2) and (3), shuttle valves (4) and (5), and
relief valve (1).
2. Function
When the swing is stopped, the outlet port
circuit of the motor from the control valve
is closed, but the motor continues to rotate
under inertia, so the pressure at the output
side of the motor becomes abnormally
high, and this may damage the motor.
To prevent this, the abnormally high pressure oil is relieved to port S from the outlet
port of the motor (high-pressure side) to
prevent any damage.
3. Operation
1) When starting swing
When the swing control lever is operated
to swing right, the pressure oil from the
pump passes through the control valve and
is supplied to port MA. As a result, the
pressure at port MA rises, the starting
torque is generated in the motor, and the
motor starts to rotate. The oil from the outlet port of the motor passes from port MA
through the control valve and returns to
the tank. (Fig. 1)
2) When stopping swing
When the swing control lever is returned to
neutral, the supply of pressure oil from the
pump to port MA is stopped. With the oil
from the outlet port of the motor, the return
circuit to the tank is closed by the control
valve, so the pressure at port MB rises. As
a result, rotation resistance is generated in
the motor, so the braking effect starts.
If the pressure at port MB becomes higher
than the pressure at port MA, it pushes
shuttle valve A (4) and chamber C
becomes the same pressure as port MB.
The oil pressure rises further until it
reaches the set pressure of relief valve (1).
As a result, a high braking torque acts on
the motor and stops the motor. (Fig.2)
When relief valve (1) is being actuated, the
relief oil and oil from port S passes
through check valve B (3) and is supplied to
port MA. This prevents cavitation at port
MA.
10-76
PC300-7
SWING MOTOR
12
Operation of swing lock

1. When swing lock solenoid valve is deactivated
When the swing lock solenoid valve is deactivated, the pressurized oil from the main pump is
shut off and port B is connected to the tank circuit.
As a result, brake piston (7) is pushed down by
brake spring (1), discs (5) and plates (6) are
pushed together, and the brake is applied.
09149
2. When swing lock solenoid valve is excited

When the swing lock solenoid valve is excited,
the valve is switched and the pressure oil from
the main pump enters port B and flows to brake
chamber a.
The pressure oil entering chamber a overcomes
brake spring (1) and pushes brake piston (7) up.
As a result, discs (5) and plates (6) are separated
and the brake is released.
09150
PC300-7
10-77
REVERSE PREVENTION VALVE
12

Operation diagram
1. Valve body
2. Spool (MA side)
3. Spring (MA side)
4. Plug
5. Spool (MB side)
6. Spring (MB side)
7. Plug
Explanation of effect
10-78
PC300-7
12
Outline
This valve reduces the swing back generation in the swing body by the inertia of the
swing body, the backlash and rigidity of the
machinery system, and the compression of
the hydraulic oil when the swing is
stopped. This is effective in preventing
spillage of the load and reducing the cycle
time when stopping the swing (the positioning ability is good and it is possible to
move swiftly to the next job.
Operation
1) When brake pressure is being generated at port MB
Pressure MB passes through the notch and
goes to chamber d, spool (5) pushes spring
(6) according to the difference in area D1 >
D2, moves to the left, and MB is connected
to e.
When this happens, pressure MA is below
the set pressure of spring (3), so spool (2)
does not move. For this reason, the pressure oil is closed by spool (2), and the braking force is ensured.
2) After motor stops

The motor is reversed by the closing pressure generated at port MB. (1st reversal)
When this happens, reversal pressure is
generated at port MA. Pressure MA goes
to chamber a, so spool (2) pushes spring (3)
and moves to the right, and MA is connected to B. At the same time, b is connected to f through the drill hole in spool
(5), so the reversal pressure at port MA is
bypassed to port T to prevent the 2nd
reversal.
PC300-7
10-79
CENTER SWIVEL JOINT
12
CENTER SWIVEL JOINT
1. Cover
2. Body
3. Slipper seal
4. O-ring
5. Shaft
T2. To tank
T1. From L.H. and R.H. travel motors port T
D2. From control valve port B5
B1. To L.H. travel motor port PA
C2. From control valve port A5
A1. To L.H. travel motor port PB

A2. From control valve port A2
C1. To R.H. travel motor port PA
B2. From control valve port B2
D1. To R.H. travel motor port PB
E. To L.H. and R.H. travel motors port P
Unit: mm
No.
Check Item
Clearance between rotor

and shaft
10-80
Criteria
Remedy
Standard Size
Standard clearance
Repair limit
80
Replace
PC300-7
TRAVEL MOTOR
TRAVEL MOTOR
HMV160ADT-2
P
T
PA
PB
:
:
:
:
From travel speed solenoid valve

To tank
From control valve
From control valve
PC300-7
SPECIFICATIONS
Type
Theoretical
Delivery
HMV160ADT-2
Min.
103.5 cm/rev
Max.
160.8 cm/rev
Brake releasing pressure
1.2 MPa {12 kg/cm}
Travel speed
switching
pressure
0.8 MPa {8 kg/cm}
Differential
pressure
10-81
TRAVEL MOTOR
12
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
Output shaft
Motor case
Rocker cam
Piston
Cylinder
Valve plate
End cover
Slow return valve
Brake spring
Brake piston
10-82
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
Plate
Disc
Regulator piston
Check valve spring
Counterbalance valve
Safety valve
Ball
Regulator valve
Spring
PC300-7
TRAVEL MOTOR
12
Unit: mm
No.
Check item
Criteria
Standard size
20
Spool return spring
Remedy
Repair limit
Free length x
Outside diameter
Installed
length
Installed
load
Free
length
Installed
load
58.43 x 30.0
42.0
426.3 N
{43.5 kg}
341 N
{34.8 kg}
21
Check valve spring
33.0 x 13.8
23.0
1.27 N
{0.13 kg}
1.0 N
{0.10 kg}
22
Regulator piston spring
61.6 x 23.2
30.0
398.9 N
{40.7 kg}
319.5 N
{32.6 kg}
PC300-7
If damaged or
deformed,
replace spring
10-83
TRAVEL MOTOR
OPERATION OF MOTOR
1) At low speed (motor swash plate angle
at maximum)
09151
The solenoid valve is deactivated, so the pilot

pressure oil from the main pump does not
flow to port P.
For this reason, regulator valve (21) is pushed
to the right by spring (22).
Because of this, it pushes slow return valve
(8), and the main pressure oil from the control
valve going to end cover (7) is shut off by regulator valve (21).
Fulcrum a of rocker cam (3) is eccentric to
point of force b of the combined force of the
propulsion force of cylinder (5), so the combined force of the piston propulsion force acts
as a moment to angle rocker cam (3) in the
direction of the maximum swash plate angle.
10-84
At the same time, the pressurized oil at regulator piston (13) passes through orifice c in
regulator valve (21) and is drained to the
motor case.
As a result, rocker cam (3) moves in the maximum swash plate angle direction, the motor
capacity becomes maximum, and the system
is set to low speed.
PC300-7
TRAVEL MOTOR
12
2) At high speed (motor swash plate angle

at minimum)
09152
When the solenoid valve is excited, the pilot

pressure oil from the main pump flows to
port P, and pushes regulator valve (21) to the
left.
Because of this, the main pressure oil from
the control valve passes through passage d in
regulator valve (21), enters regulator piston
(13) at the bottom, and pushes regulator piston (13) to the right.
As a result, rocker cam (3) moves in the minimum swash plate angle direction, the motor
capacity becomes minimum, and the system
is set to high travel speed.
PC300-7
10-85
OPERATION OF PARKING BRAKE

1) When starting to travel
When the travel lever is operated, the pressurized oil from the pump actuates counterbalance valve spool (17), opens the
circuit to the parking brake, and flows into
chamber a of the brake piston (10).
It overcomes the force of spring (9), and
pushes piston (10) to the left.
When this happens, the force pushing plate
(11) and disc (12) together is lost, so plate
(11) and disc (12) separate and the brake is
released.
2) When stopping travel

When the travel lever is placed in neutral,
counterbalance valve spool (17) returns to
the neutral position and the circuit to the
parking brake is closed.
The pressurized oil in chamber a of brake
piston (10) is drained to the case from the
orifice in the brake piston, and brake piston
(10) is pushed to the right in the direction
of the arrow by spring (9).
As a result, plate (11) and disc (12) are
pushed together, and the brake is applied.
A time delay is provided by having the
pressurized oil pass through a throttle in
slow return valve (8) when the brake piston
returns, and this ensures that the brake is
still effective after the machine stops.
10-86
(8)
TRAVEL MOTOR
09153
09154
PC300-7
TRAVEL MOTOR
OPERATION OF BRAKE VALVE

The brake valve consists of check valve,
counterbalance valve, and safety valve in a
circuit as shown in the diagram on the
right. (Fig. 1)
The function and operation of each component is as given below.
1) Counterbalance valve, check valve
Function
When traveling downhill, the weight of the
machine makes it try to travel faster than
the speed of the motor.
As a result, if the machine travels with the
engine at low speed, the motor will rotate
without load and the machine will run
away, which is extremely dangerous.
To prevent this these valves act to make the
machine travel according to the engine
speed (pump discharge amount).
Operation when pressure oil is supplied
When the travel lever is operated, the pressurized oil from the control valve is supplied to port PA. It pushes open suction
safety valve (18a) and flows from motor
inlet port MA to motor outlet port MB.
However, the motor outlet port is closed by
suction safety valve (18b) and spool (19), so
the pressure at the supply side rises. (Fig.
2)
The pressurized oil at the supply side flows

from orifice E1 and E2 in spool (19) to
chamber S1. When the pressure in chamber S1 goes above the spool switching
pressure, spool (19) is pushed to the right
in the direction of the arrow.
As a result, port MB and port PB are connected, the outlet port side of the motor is
opened, and the motor starts to rotate. (Fig.
3)
PC300-7
09155
09156
09157
10-87

Operation of brake when traveling downhill
If the machine tries to run away when traveling downhill, the motor will turn under no
load, so the pressure at the motor inlet port
will drop, and the pressure in chamber S1
through orifices E1 and E2 will also drop.
When the pressure in chamber S1 drops
below the spool switching pressure, spool
(19) is returned to the left, in the direction of
the arrow by spring (20), and outlet port MB
is throttled.
As a result, the pressure at the outlet port
side rises, resistance is generated to the rotation of the motor, and this prevents the
machine from running away.
In other words, the spool moves to a position
where the pressure at the outlet port MB balances the pressure at the inlet port and the
force generated by the weight of the
machine. It throttles the outlet port circuit
and controls the travel speed according to
the amount of oil discharged from the pump.
(Fig. 4)
2) Safety valve (2-direction operation, 2stage set safety valve)
Function
When travel is stopped (or when traveling
downhill), the circuits at the inlet and outlet
ports of the motor are closed by the counterbalance valve. However, the motor is rotated
by inertia, so the pressure at the outlet port
of the motor will become abnormally high
and damage the motor or piping. The safety
valve acts to release this abnormal pressure
and send it to the inlet port side of the motor
to prevent damage to the equipment.
Operation in both directions
1) When pressure in chamber MB has
become high (when rotating clockwise)
When the travel is stopped (or when traveling downhill), chamber MB in the outlet port
circuit is closed by the check valve of the
counterbalance valve, but the pressure at the
outlet port rises because of the inertia. (Fig.
5)
If the pressure goes above the set pressure,
the force produced by the difference in are
between D1 and D2 [4(D12 - D22) x pressure] overcomes the force of the spring and
moves the poppet to the left, so that the oil
flows to chamber MA in the circuit on the
opposite side. (Fig. 6)
10-88
TRAVEL MOTOR
09158
09160
PC300-7
2) When pressure in chamber MA has

become high (when rotating counterclockwise)
When the travel is stopped (or when traveling
downhill), chamber MA in the outlet port circuit is closed by the check valve of the counterbalance valve, but the pressure at the
outlet port rises because of inertia. (Fig. 7)
If the pressure goes above the set pressure,

the force produced by the difference in area
between D1 and D3 [4(D32 - D12) x pressure] overcomes the force of the spring and
moves the poppet to the left, so the oil flows
to chamber MB in the circuit on the opposite
side. (Fig. 8)
TRAVEL MOTOR
09161
09162
Operation of mechanism for varying set

pressure
1) When starting travel (high-pressure setting)
When the travel lever is operated, the pressurized oil from the pump actuated counterbalance valve spool (19), and opens the pilot
circuit to the safety valve. The oil passes from
chamber G to passage H and flows into
chamber J, pushes the piston to the right, and
compresses the spring to make the set load
larger. Because of this, the set pressure of the
safety valve is switched to the high pressure
setting, and a large drawbar pull is made
available.
09163
PC300-7
10-89
2) When stopping travel (low-pressure setting)

When the travel lever is placed in neutral, the
pressure in chamber PA drops and counterbalance valve spool (19) returns to the neutral
position. While the counterbalance valve
spool is returning to the neutral position, the
pressurized oil in chamber J passes through
passage H, and escapes to chamber PA from
chamber G. The piston moves to the left, and
the set load becomes smaller. Because of this,
the set pressure of the safety valve is
switched to the low-pressure setting and
relieves the shock when reducing speed.
TRAVEL MOTOR
09164
[Set pressure of safety valve]

When starting, when
traveling: High-pressure setting
When stopping: Lowpressure setting
40.2 MPa {410 kg/cm2}
27.5 MPa {280 kg/cm2}
10-90
PC300-7
TRAVEL JUNCTION VALVE

Function
This valve connects both travel circuits to each
other so that the hydraulic oil will be supplied
evenly to both travel motors and the machine will
travel straight.
When the machine is steered, outside pilot pressure PST closes the travel junction valve to secure
high steering performance.
Operation
When pilot pressure is turned ON
If the pilot pressure from the travel junction solenoid valve becomes higher than the force of
spring (14), travel junction spool (13) moves to the
left stroke end and the junction circuit between
port PTL (Left travel circuit) and PTR (Right travel
circuit) is closed.
09165
PC300-7
10-91
When pilot pressure is turned OFF

If pilot pressure PST from the solenoid valve is 0, travel junction spool
(13) is pressed by the force of spring
(14) against the right side and the
pass between ports PTL and PTR is
open.
If the oil flow rates in both travel motors

become different from each other, the oil
flows through the route between port PTL,
travel junction spool (13), and port PTR so
that the oil flow rates will be equalized again.
09166
10-92
PC300-7
TRAVEL PPC SHUTTLE VALVE

Function
If boom RAISE or arm IN are operated when
the machine is traveling, the stroke of the
spools for the boom and arm is controlled by
the travel PPC pressure and this limits the
flow of oil to the boom and arm cylinders.
When the boom and arm stroke is controlled,
the travel PPC pressure passes through the
circuit inside the control valve to actuate the
system.
Operation
1 When travel is at neutral
Stroke limit signal chambers a and b are connected to the travel PPC valve through orifices (5) and (6) in pistons (3) and (4) inside
the travel spring case, and the is drained.
When arm IN is operated, spool (1) moves to the

right by stroke (st0) to a point where it contacts the
end face of spring case (2).
When boom RAISE is operated, spool (9) moves to
the left by stroke (st3) to a point where it contacts
the end face of spring case (10).
10-94
PC300-7
09167
PC300-7
10-95
12
2. When travel is operated
When the travel lever is operated to right
REVERSE (or FORWARD), the right (REVESE
(or FORWARD) PPC pressure pushes spool (7)
to the left (or right).
Spool (7) pushes piston (3), orifice (5) closes,
and stroke limit signal chamber a is shut off
from the drain circuit of the travel PPC valve.
At the same time, the right REVERSE (or FORWARD) PPC pressure passes through orifice
(6) in piston (4), acts on the right end face of
piston (8), and pushes piston (8) to the left.
If arm IN is operated, spool (1) moves to the
right, but the maximum stroke of the spool is
limited by the amount of movement st2 of
piston (8) and becomes st1.
If boom RAISE is operated, spool (9) tries to
move to the left, but the travel PPC pressure
enters stroke control signal chamber b, so the
spool does not move.
10-96
PC300-7
09168
PC300-7
10-97
VALVE CONTROL
VALVE CONTROL
1. Travel PPC valve

2. Service PPC valve
3. Service pedal
4. L.H. travel lever
5. R.H. travel lever
6. R.H. PPC valve
7. R.H. work equipment
control lever
10-98
(8)
8. Solenoid valve
9. Accumulator
10. Control valve
11. Hydraulic pump
12. Junction box
13. L.H. work equipment
control lever
14. L.H. PPC valve
Lever positions
A. Hold
B. Boom "RAISE"
C. Boom "LOWER"
D. Bucket "DUMP"
E. Bucket "CURL"
F. Hold
G. Arm "IN"
H. Arm "OUT"
J.
K.
L.
M.
N.
Swing "RIGHT"
Swing "LEFT"
Neutral
Travel "REVERSE"
Travel "FORWARD"
PC300-7
WORK EQUIPMENT SWING PPC

VALVE
WORK EQUIPMENT SWING PPC VALVE
P: From main pump

T: To tank
PC300-7
P1:
P2:
P3:
P4:
Left: Arm OUT / Right: Boom LOWER

Left: Arm IN / Right: Boom RAISE
Left: Swing RIGHT / Right: Bucket CURL
Left: Swing LEFT / Right: Bucket DUMP
10-99

VALVE
12
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
Spool
Metering spring
Centering spring
Piston
Disc
Nut (For connection of lever)
Joint
Plate
Retainer
Body
Filter
Unit: mm
No.
Check item
Criteria
Standard size
12
Centering spring
(For P3 and P4)
Remedy
Repair limit
Free length x
Outside diameter
Installed
length
Installed
load
Free
length
Installed
load
42.5 x 15.5
34
17.6 N
{1.8 kg}
13.7 N
{1.4 kg}
13
Centering spring
(For P3 and P4)
44.5 x 15.5
34
29.4 N
{3.0 kg}
23.5 N
{2.4 kg}
14
Metering spring
26.5 x 8.2
24.9
16.7 N
{1.7 kg}
13.7 N
{1.4 kg}
10-100
If damaged or
deformed,
replace spring
PC300-7

VALVE
OPERATION
1) At neutral
Ports A and B of the control valve and
ports P1 and P2 of the PPC valve are connected to drain chamber D through fine
control hole f in spool (1). (Fig. 1)
2) During fine control (neutral fine

control)
When piston (4) starts to be pushed by disc
(5), retainer (9) is pushed; spool (1) is also
pushed by metering spring (2), and moves
down.
When this happens, fine control hole f is
shut off from drain chamber D, and at
almost the same time, it is connected to
pump pressure chamber PP, so pilot pressure oil from the main pump passes
through fine control hole f and goes from
port P1 to port A.
When the pressure at port P1 becomes
higher, spool (1) is pushed back and fine
control hole f is shut off from pump pressure chamber PP. At almost the same time,
it is connected to drain chamber D to
release the pressure at port P1. When this
happens, spool (1) moves up or down so
that the force of metering spring (2) is balanced with the pressure at port P1. The
relationship in the position of spool (1) and
body (10) (fine control hole f is at a point
midway between drain hole D and pump
pressure chamber PP) does not change
until retainer (9) contacts spool (1).
Therefore, metering spring (2) is compressed proportionally to the amount of
movement of the control lever, so the pressure at port P1 also rises in proportion to
the travel of the control lever. In this way,
the control valve spool moves to a position
where the pressure in chamber A (the
same as the pressure at port P1) and the
force of the control valve spool return
spring are balanced. (Fig. 2)
PC300-7
10-101

VALVE
12
3) During fine control (when control
lever is returned)
When disc (5) starts to be returned, spool
(1) is pushed up by the force of centering
spring (3) and the pressure at port P1.
connected to drain chamber D and the
pressure oil at port P1 is released.
If the pressure at port P1 drops too far,
spool (1) is pushed down by metering
spring (2), and fine control hole f is shut off
from drain chamber D. At almost the same
time, it is connected to pump pressure
chamber PP, and the pump pressure is supplied until the pressure at port P1 recovers
to a pressure that corresponds to the lever
position.
When the spool of the control valve
returns, oil in drain chamber D flows in
from fine control hole f in the valve on the
side that is not working. The oil passes
through port P2 and enters chamber B to
fill the chamber with oil. (Fig. 3)
4) At full stroke
When disc (5) pushes down piston (4), and
retainer (9) pushes down spool (1), fine
control hole f is shut off from drain chamber D, and is connected with pump pressure chamber PP. Therefore, the pilot
pressure oil from the main pump passes
through fine control hole f and flows to
chamber A from port P1, and pushes the
control valve spool.
The oil returning from chamber B passes
from port P2 through fine control hole f
and flows to drain chamber D. (Fig. 4)
10-102
PC300-7
TRAVEL PPC VALVE
TRAVEL PPC VALVE
P : From main pump

T : To tank
P1 : Left reverse
P2 : Left forward
PC300-7
P3
P4
P5
P6
: Right reverse
: Right forward
: Travel signal
: Steering signal
10-103
TRAVEL PPC VALVE
12
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Plate
Body
Piston
Collar
Metering spring
10-104
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
Centering spring
Valve
Damper
Steering signal
Steering signal valve spring
PC300-7
TRAVEL PPC VALVE
12
Unit: mm
No.
Check item
Criteria
Standard size
Metering spring
Remedy
Repair limit
Free length x
Outside diameter
Installed
length
Installed
load
Free
length
Installed
load
26.5 x 8.15
24.7
16.7 N
{1.7 kg}
13.7 N
{1.4 kg}
Centering spring
48.1 x 15.5
32.5
108 N
{11 kg}
86.3 N
{8.8 kg}
Steering signal spring
12.8 x 7.3
8.5
8.8 N
{0.9 kg}
7.1 N
{0.72 kg}
PC300-7
If damaged or
deformed,
replace spring
10-105
TRAVEL PPC VALVE
12
OPERATION
1) At neutral
ports P1 and P2 of the PPC valve are connected to drain chamber D through fine
control hole f in spool (1). (Fig. 1)
2) Fine control (neutral fine control)

When piston (4) starts to be pushed by disc
(5), retainer (9) is pushed. Spool (1) is also
pushed by metering spring (2), and moves
down.
shut off from drain chamber D. At almost
the same time, it is connected to pump
pressure chamber PP, and the pilot pressure of the main pump is sent from port A
through fine control hole f to port P1.
When the pressure at port P1 rises, spool
(1) is pushed back. Fine control hole f is
shut off from pump pressure chamber PP.
At almost the same time, it is connected to
drain chamber D, so the pressure at port
P1 escapes.
As a result, spool (1) moves up and down
until the force of metering spool (2) is balanced with the pressure at port P1.
The relationship of the position of spool (1)
and body (10) (fine control hole f is in the
middle between drain hole D and pump
pressure chamber PP) does not change
until retainer (9) contacts spool (1).
Therefore, metering spring (2) is compressed in proportion to the travel of the
control lever, so the pressure at port P1
also rises in proportion to the travel of the
control lever. In this way, the spool of the
control valve spool moves to a position
where the pressure of chamber A (same as
pressure at port P1) and the force of the
return spring of the control valve spool are
balanced. (Fig. 2)
10-106
PC300-7
TRAVEL PPC VALVE
12
3) Fine control (control lever returned)

When lever (5) starts to be returned, spool
(1) is pushed up by the force of centering
spring (3) and the pressure at port P1.
Because of this, fine control hole f is connected to drain chamber D, and the pressurized oil at port P1 is released.
If the pressure at port P1 drops too much,
spool (1) is pushed up by metering spring
(2), so fine control hole f is shut off from
drain chamber D. At almost the same time,
it is connected to pump pressure chamber
PP, so the pressure at port P1 supplies the
pump pressure until the pressure recovers
to a pressure equivalent to the position of
the lever.
When the control valve returns, oil in drain
chamber D flows in from fine control hole f
of the valve on the side that is not moving.
It passes through port P2 and goes to chamber B to charge the oil. (Fig. 3)
4) At full stroke
Lever (5) pushes down piston (4), and
retainer (9) pushes down on spool (1). Fine
control hole f is shut off from drain chamber
D, and is connected to pump pressure
chamber PP. Therefore, the pilot pressure
oil from the main pump passes through fine
control hole f and flows to chamber A from
port P1 to push the control valve spool. The
return oil from chamber B passes from port
P2 through fine control hole f and flows to
drain chamber D. (Fig. 4)
PC300-7
10-107
TRAVEL PPC VALVE
2. Travel signal/Steering function

Travel signal
If either of the travel levers is operated, the maximum PPC output pressure on both sides is output as
the travel signal. Accordingly, if the machine is traveling is judged by the signal of port P5.
Steering signal
If the operation quantities of both levers are different from each other as in the steering operation, the
higher one of the PPC output pressures on both sides is output as the steering signal.
Any signal is not output from port P6 while the machine is travelling straight (forward or reverse) or in
neutral.
Accordingly, if the machine is being steered is judged by the signal of port P6.
Operation
1) While in NEUTRAL
The signals of the output ports (P1 - P4), travel signal (Port P5), and steering signal (Port P6) are not output.
10-108
PC300-7
TRAVEL PPC VALVE
2) While travelling straight

(The following drawing shows the circuit for traveling straight forward.)
While the left motor is operating for forward travel (the signal of port P2 is output) and the right motor
is also operating for forward travel (the signal of port P4 is output), the pressures in left spring chamber
(k) and right spring chamber (l) of steering signal valve (j) are set high. Accordingly, the steering signal
valve is kept in neutral and the steering signal (Port P6) is not output.
PC300-7
10-109
TRAVEL PPC VALVE
12
3) When steered or pivot-turned
(The following drawing shows the circuit for left forward (slow) and right forward (fast) operation.)
If the operation quantities of both levers are different from each other as in the steering operation (If the
difference of the pilot pressure between both sides is higher than a certain level), the pilot pressure is
output as the steering signal.
In the case of the following drawing, the pressure in left spring chamber (k) of steering signal valve (j) is
P2. The pressure in right spring chamber (l) is P4.
If (P4 - P2) x (Sectional area of spool) > Set spring load, the spool is changed to the direction of the
arrow and the higher one of both PPC output pressures (the pressure of port P4 in this drawing) is output as the steering signal to port P6.
10-110
PC300-7
TRAVEL PPC VALVE
12
4) When pivot-turned
(The following drawing shows the circuit for left reverse and right forward operation.)
While the left motor is operating for reverse travel (the signal of port P1 is output) and the right motor is
operating for forward travel (the signal of port P4 is output), only the pressure in right spring chamber
(l) of steering signal valve (j) is set high. Accordingly, the steering signal valve moves to the left and outputs the steering signal (port P6).
PC300-7
10-111
SERVICE PPC VALVE
SERVICE PPC VALVE
1. Spool
2. Metering spring
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Centering spring
Piston
Lever
Plate
Retainer
Body
T
P
P1
P2
: To tank
: From main pump
: Port
: Port
Unit: mm
No.
Check item
Criteria
Standard size
10
10-112
Centering spring
Metering spring
Remedy
Repair limit
Free length x
Outside diameter
Installed
length
Installed
load
Free
length
Installed
load
33.9 x 15.3
28.4
124.5 N
{12.7 kg}
100 N
{10.2 kg}
22.7 x 8.1
22
16.7 N
{1.7 kg}
13.7 N
{1.4 kg}
If damaged or
deformed,
replace spring
PC300-7
SERVICE PPC VALVE
OPERATION
At neutral
The pressurized oil from the main pump
enters from port P and is blocked by spool
(1).
ports a and b of the PPC valve are connected to drain port T through fine control
hole X of spool (1).
WHEN OPERATED
When lever (5) is moved, metering spring

(2) is pushed by piston (4) and retainer (7),
and spool (1) is pushed down by this.
As a result, fine control portion Y is connected with port a, and the pressurized oil
from port P flows from port a to port A of
the control valve.
PC300-7
10-113
SERVICE PPC VALVE
When the pressure at port a becomes

higher, spool (1) is pushed back by the
force acting on the end of the spool, and
fine control portion Y closes.
As a result, spool (1) moves up and down
to balance the force at port a and the force
at metering spring (2).
Therefore, metering spring (2) is compressed in proportion to the amount the
control lever is moved. The spring force
becomes larger, so the pressure at port a
also increases in proportion to the amount
the control lever is operated.
In this way, the control valve spool moves
to a position where the pressure of port A
(the same as the pressure at port a) is balanced with the force of the return spring of
the control valve spool.
10-114
PC300-7
SOLENOID VALVE
SOLENOID VALVE
PPC lock, 2-stage relief, travel speed, swing brake, merge-divider, machine push-up, travel junction solenoid valves
1. PPC lock solenoid valve

2. Travel junction solenoid
valve
3. Merge-divider solenoid valve
4. Travel speed solenoid valve
5. Swing brake solenoid valve
6. Machine push-up solenoid
valve
8. 2-stage relief solenoid valve
PC300-7
T : To tank
A1 : To PPC valve
A2 : To main valve (Travel junction valve)
A3 . To main valve (Mergedivider valve)
A4 : To both travel motors
A5 : To swing motor
A6 : To 2-stage safety valve at
boom cylinder head
A8 : To main valve (2-stage relief

valve)
P1 : From main pump
ACC: To accumulator
10-115
SOLENOID VALVE
12
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Connector
Moving core
Coil
Spool
Block
Spring
OPERATION
WHEN SOLENOID IS TURNED OFF
Since the signal current does not flow from

the controller, solenoid (3) is turned off.
Accordingly, spool (4) is pressed by spring
(6) against the left side.
By this operation, the pass from P to A is
closed and the hydraulic oil from the main
pump does not flow into the actuator.
At this time, the oil from the actuator is
drained through ports A and T into the
tank.
WHEN SOLENOID IS TURNED ON

The signal current flows from the controller
to solenoid (3), and the latter is turned on.
Accordingly, spool (4) is pressed against to
the right side.
By this operation, the hydraulic oil from the
main pump flows through port P and spool
(4) to port A, then flows into the actuator.
At this time, port T is closed and the oil
does not flow into the tank.
10-116
PC300-7
PPC ACCUMULATOR
PPC ACCUMULATOR
1
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Gas plug
Shell
Poppet
Holder
Bladder
Oil port
SPECIFICATIONS
Gas capacity:300 cc (for PPC)
SBP00290
PC300-7
10-117
RETURN OIL FILTER
RETURN OIL FILTER

FOR BREAKER
SPECIFICATIONS
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Drain plug
Element
Case
Head cover
Relief valve
10-118
Rated pressure:
6.9 MPa {70 kg/cm2}
Flow
:
200 l/min.
Relief valve cracking pressure:
0.34 0.05 MPa
{3.5 0.5 kg/cm2}
Filter mesh size: 6 m
Filtering area :
4,570 cm2
PC300-7
BOOM HYDRAULIC DRIFT

PREVENTION VALVE
BOOM HYDRAULIC DRIFT PREVENTION VALVE

Function
When the boom lever is not being operated,

these valves act to prevent the oil at the boom
bottom from leaking from spool (1) and prevent the boom from moving down.
Operation
1. Boom RAISE
When the boom RAISE is operated, the main
pressure oil acts in the left direction on ringshaped area A (= Area of d1 - Area of d2)
because of the difference in the outside diameter d1 of poppet (5) and seat diameter d2.
When it overcomes the force of spring (4),
poppet (5) moves to the left.
In addition, the main pressure oil acts in the
right direction on seat diameter d3 of valve
(6). When it overcomes the force of spring (4),
valve (6) moves to the right.
As a result, the main pressure oil prom the
control valve passes through the opening of
poppet (5) and flows to the bottom end of the
boom cylinder.
10-120
PC300-7

PREVENTION VALVE
09169
PC300-7
10-121

PREVENTION VALVE
2. Boom at HOLD
When the boom is raised and the control
lever is returned to the HOLD position, the oil
that has flowed into the inside of poppet (5)
through orifice a in poppet (5) is closed by
pilot piston (2).
The main pressure oil and hold pressure at
the bottom of the boom cylinder are shut off.
At the same time, the hold pressure at the
bottom end of the boom cylinder acts in the
right direction on ring-shaped area A (= Area
of d1 - Area of d2) because of the difference in the outside diameter d1 of poppet (5)
and seat diameter d2. Poppet (5) is closed by
the total of this force and the force of spring
(4), so the main pressure oil and hold pressure at the bottom of the boom cylinder are
shut off.
In addition, the hold pressure at the bottom of
the boom cylinder acts in the left direction on
outside diameter d4 of valve (6).
Valve (6) is closed by the total of this force
and the force of spring (4), so the main pressure oil and hold pressure at the bottom of
the boom cylinder are shut off. As a result, the
boom is held in position.
10-122
PC300-7

PREVENTION VALVE
09170
PC300-7
10-123

PREVENTION VALVE
3. Boom LOWER
When boom LOWER is operated, the pilot
pressure from the PPC valve pushes pilot
spool (2), and the pressure oil chamber b
inside the poppet is drained through orifice c.
The oil at the bottom end of the boom
flows from orifice a to chamber b to orifice c to drain, so the oil pressure in
chamber b drops.
When the pressure in chamber b drops
below the pressure at port b, poppet (4)
opens, and the pressure oil from port B
goes to port A and flows to the control
valve.
10-124
PC300-7

4. When abnormally high pressure is generated
If abnormally high pressure is generated in
the boom cylinder bottom circuit, the hydraulic oil in port B pushes check valve (6) open,
then safety valve (3) operates.

PREVENTION VALVE
If the hydraulic drift prevention valve for the

arm cylinder head circuit is installed
(optional), the hydraulic oil in the boom cylinder bottom circuit or that in the arm cylinder
head circuit, having higher pressure, pushes
check valve (6) open, then safety valve (3)
operates.
09171
PC300-7
10-125
QUICK RETURN VALVE
QUICK RETURN VALVE

FUNCTION
When arm OUT is operated, this valve reduces
the pressure loss of the large amount of oil
returning from the cylinder bottom.
OPERATION
1.
Arm at OUT
When arm OUT is operated, the pilot pressure
from the PPC valve pushes pilot spool (1), and
the pressure oil from chamber b inside the
poppet is drained through orifice c.
The oil at the bottom end of the arm flows
from orifice a to chamber b to orifice c to
drain, so the oil pressure in chamber b drops.
When the pressure in chamber b drops below
the pressure at port A, the pressure at port A
and acts on ring -shaped area C (= Area of
d1 - Area of d2) because of the difference in
the outside diameter d1 of valve (2) and seat
diameter d2. Valve (2) moves to the left and
the pressure oil from port A goes to port B.
From port B, the oil is drained directly to the
tank.
10-126
PC300-7
QUICK RETURN VALVE
2. Arm at HOLD
The oil that has flowed through orifice a in
valve (2) is closed by pilot piston (1). At the
same time, the hold pressure at the bottom
end of the arm acts in the right direction on
ring-shaped area C (= Area of d1 - Area of
d2) because of the difference in the outside
diameter d1 of valve (2) and seat diameter
d2. Valve (2) is closed by the total of this force
and the force of spring (3), so port A and port
B are shut off.
PC300-7
10-127
LIFT CHECK VALVE
LIFT CHECK VALVE

Function
This valve applies back pressure to the drain
circuit to prevent generation of negative pressure on the hydraulic devices for the work
equipment (motors, cylinders, etc.)
Operation
1. While engine is stopped
Any oil is not supplied from the pump to
the self-pressure reducing valve and valve
(1) is pressed by only the force of spring (2)
toward the right and drain circuit "a" of the
control valve is connected through orifice
"b" of valve (1) to port T.
2. While engine is running

Output pressure PR of the self-pressure
reducing valve is applied through the control valve to spring chamber "c" of the back
pressure valve.
Output pressure PR applied to spring
chamber "c" is applied to the left end of
valve (1) (area of d) to push valve (1) to
the right.
At this time, pressure PA of drain circuit "a"
of the control valve is applied to the right
end of valve (1) (area of d1) to push valve
(1) to the left.
Valve (1) is balanced so that the back pressure PA will be as follows.
PA = {(Area of d) x PR + Force of spring
(2)} / (Area of d1)
10-128
09174
09175
PC300-7
ATTACHMENT CIRCUIT SELECTOR

VALVE
ATTACHMENT CIRCUIT SELECTOR VALVE
V :
T :
ATT:
ACC:
P1 :
TS :
1. Spool
2. Spring
To control valve
To hydraulic tank
To attachment
To accumulator
From attachment circuit selector solenoid valve
To hydraulic tank
Unit: mm
No.
Check item
Criteria
Remedy
Standard size
Spool return
spring
PC300-7
Repair limit
Free length x
Outside Dia.
Installed
length
Installed
load
Free length
Installed
load
132.0 x 29
114.5
833 N
{85.0 Kg}
--
666 N
{68.0 Kg}
Replace spring if
any damages or
deformations are
found
10-129
ATTACHMENT CIRCUIT SELECTOR

VALVE
Function
When a breaker is installed, the return oil from
the breaker does not pass through the main
valve, but returns directly to the hydraulic tank.
When other attachments (crusher, etc.) are
installed, the attachment and the main valve are
interconnected.
Operation
1. When attachment other than breaker is
installed
Spool (1) is pushed fully to the left by the
force of spring (2), ATT port and port V are
interconnected, and ATT port and port T are
shut off, so the attachment and main valve are
interconnected.
2. When breaker is installed

When the pilot pressure from the attachment
circuit selector solenoid valve overcomes the
force of spring (2), the spool (1) moves fully to
the right. ATT port and port V are shut off and
ATT port and port T are interconnected, so the
oil returning from the breaker does not pass
through the main valve, but passes through
port T and returns directly to the hydraulic
tank.
10-130
08901
08902
PC300-7
HYDRAULIC CYLINDER
HYDRAULIC CYLINDER
BOOM CYLINDER
ARM CYLINDER
BUCKET CYLINDER
10-132
PC300-7
HYDRAULIC CYLINDER
12
Unit: mm
No.
Check item
Criteria
Cylinder
Clearance between
piston rod and bushing
Clearance between
piston rod support
pin and bushing
Clearance between
cylinder bottom
support pin and
bushing
PC300-7
Standard
size
Tolerance
Shaft
Hole
Remedy
Standard clearance
Clearance
limit
Boom
100
-0.036
-0.090
+0.035
+0.005
0.041 ~ 0.125
0.412
Arm
110
-0.036
-0.090
+0.261
+0.047
0.083 ~ 0.351
0.412
Bucket
100
-0.030
-0.076
+0.257
+0.047
0.083 ~ 0.347
0.447
Boom
100
-0.030
-0.060
+0.190
+0.070
0.100 ~ 0.250
Arm
100
-0.030
-0.076
+0.190
+0.070
0.105 ~ 0.251
Bucket
90
-0.030
-0.076
+0.190
+0.070
0.100 ~ 0.246
Boom
90
-0.030
-0.060
+0.190
+0.070
0.075 ~ 0.225
Arm
100
-0.030
-0.076
+0.190
+0.070
0.105 ~ 0.251
Bucket
90
-0.030
-0.060
+0.190
+0.070
0.100 ~ 0.230
Replace bushing
Replace pin or
bushing
10-133
WORK EQUIPMENT
WORK EQUIPMENT
10-134
PC300-7
WORK EQUIPMENT
Unit: mm
No.
Check item
Clearance between connecting

pin and bushing of revolving
frame and boom
Criteria
Standard
size
Tolerance
Remedy
Standard clearance
Clearance
limit
+0.157
+0.079
0.115 ~ 0.247
1.0
Shaft
Hole
110
-0.036
-0.090

pin and bushing of boom and arm
110
-0.036
-0.090
+0.179
+0.081
0.117 ~ 0.269
1.0

pin and bushing of arm and link
90
-0.036
-0.090
+0.165
+0.072
0.108 ~ 0.255
1.0

pin and bushing of arm and
bucket
90
-0.036
-0.090
+0.145
+0.083
0.119 ~ 0.235
1.0

pin and bushing of link and
bucket
90
-0.036
-0.090
+0.165
+0.072
0.108 ~ 0.255
1.0

pin and bushing of link and link
90
-0.036
-0.090
+0.163
+0.069
0.105 ~ 0.253
1.0
Bucket clearance (a)
0.5 ~ 1.0
Bucket clearance (b)
2.0
Replace
Adjust shims
PC300-7
10-135
WORK EQUIPMENT
1. DIMENSION OF ARM
10-136
PC300-7
WORK EQUIPMENT
Unit: mm
Model
No.
100
1
2
119.3
320
+0.1
0
+1.5
0
+0.5
0
110
/ 116 1.2
/ 316 -0.3
0.8
0
0.5
0.036
0.090
+0.1
0
100
0.036
0.071
119.3
+1.5
0
/ 116 1.2
320
+0.5
0
/ 316 -0.3
0.8
110
0
0.5
0.036
0.090
470.6 1
470.6 1
236.5 0.5
236.5 0.5
1022.4 1
1022.4 1
3,178 3
3,178 3
2,975.6 1
2,975.6 1
10
472.5
472.5 1.0
11
731.0 0.2
731.0 0.2
12
728.0 0.5
728.0 0.5
13
513.6
513.6
14
1,670
1,670
16
17
Arm as individual part
When pressfitting bushing
+0.2
0
90
0.036
0.090
345.0 0.5
80
+0.2
0
330
0.036
0.090
0
0.5
90
+0.2
0
0.036
0.090
345.0 0.5
80
+0.2
0
330
0.036
0.090
0
0.5
345
345
Min.
1,870
1,870
Max.
3,155
3,155
19
PC300-7
0.036
0.071
PC350-7, PC350LC-7
15
18
PC300-7, PC300LC-7
10-137

12
2.DIMENSION
10-138
WORK EQUIPMENT
OF BUCKET
PC300-7
WORK EQUIPMENT
12
Unit: mm
Model
PC300-7, PC300LC-7
PC350-7, PC350LC-7
512.2 0.5
512.2 0.5
37.9 0.5
37.9 0.5
94 19
94 19
513.6
513.6
1,658
1,666
193
208
50
42
No.
90
10
346
+0.2
0
+1
0
11
68
68
12
138
138
13
525.5 0.5
525.5 0.5
14
26
26
165
165
150
150
16
200
200
17
146.1
135.5
18
137.6
142.0
19
R115
R115
20
R100
R100
15
370
21
22
PC300-7
60
+2
0
60
10-139
AIR CONDITIONER
AIR CONDITIONER
AIR CONDITIONER PIPING
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Hot water pickup piping

Receiver tank
Hot water return piping
Condenser
Air conditioner compressor
Refrigerant piping
Air conditioner unit
Duct
10-140
A. Fresh air
B. Recirculated air
C. Hot air/cold air
PC300-7
ENGINE CONTROL
ENGINE CONTROL
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Battery relay
Battery
Starting switch
Fuel control dial
Linkage
Starting motor
Engine throttle and pump controller
Fuel injection pump
Governor motor
PC300-7
OUTLINE
The engine can be started and stopped with

only starting switch (3).
The engine throttle and pump controller(7)
receives the signal of fuel control dial (4) and
transmits the drive signal to governor motor
(9) to control the governor lever angle of fuel
injection pump (8) and control the engine
speed.
10-141
ENGINE CONTROL
12
1. OPERATION OF SYSTEM
Starting engine
When the starting switch is turned to the
START position, the starting signal flows to
the starting motor, and the starting motor
turns to start the engine.
When this happens, the engine throttle and
pump controller checks the signal from the
fuel control dial and sets the engine speed
to the speed set by the fuel control dial.
If the engine stop solenoid (shut-off valve)
is not driven before starting the engine, the
engine will not start.
(At the same time as the starting signal for
the starting motor is input from the controller, the drive signal is output for 3 seconds.)
Engine speed control
The fuel control dial sends a signal to the
engine throttle and pump controller
according to the position of the dial. The
engine throttle and pump controller calculates the angle of the governor motor
according to this signal, and sends a signal
to drive the governor motor so that it is at
that angle.
When this happens, the operating angle of
the governor motor is detected by the
potentiometer, and feedback is sent to the
engine throttle and pump controller, so
that it can observe the operation of the
governor motor.
Stopping engine
When the engine throttle and pump controller detects that the starting switch has
been turned to the STOP position, it drives
the governor motor so that it is set to the
low idling angle position.
The engine stop solenoid signal (HOLD)
which drives directly from the ACC signal is
turned OFF and the engine stops.
When this happens, to maintain the electric
power in the system until the engine stops
completely, the engine throttle and pump
controller itself drives the battery relay.
10-142
09176
09177
09178
PC300-7
ENGINE CONTROL
12
1. COMPONENT
Fuel control dial
1. Knob
2. Dial
3. Spring
4. Ball
5. Potentiometer
6. Connector
Function
The fuel control dial is installed under the
monitor panel, and a potentiometer is
installed under the knob. The potentiometer shaft is turned by turning the knob.
As the potentiometer shaft is turned, the
resistance of the variable resistor in the
potentiometer changes and a throttle signal is sent to the engine throttle and pump
controller.
The hatched area in the graph shown at
right is the abnormality detection area.
PC300-7
10-143
ENGINE CONTROL
Governor motor
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Potentiometer
Cover
Shaft
Dust seal
Bearing
Motor
Gear
Connector
Function
The motor is turned according to the drive
signal from the engine throttle and pump
controller to control the governor lever of the
fuel injection pump.
This motor used as the motive power source
is a stepping motor.
10-144
A potentiometer for feedback is installed to

monitor the operation of the motor.
Revolution of the motor is transmitted
through the gear to the potentiometer.
Operation
While motor is stopped
Electric power is applied to both phases A
and B of the motor.
While motor is running
The engine throttle and pump controller supplies a pulse current to phases A and B, and
the motor revolves, synchronizing to the
pulse.
PC300-7
ENGINE CONTROL
Engine throttle and pump controller
10-146
PC300-7
ENGINE CONTROL
12
Input and output signals
CN-1
CN-2
Pin
No.
1
Signal name
Input/
output
CN-3
Pin
No.
1 NC
R pump pressure sensor
Input
Signal GND
Input
Abnormality in auto-greasing controller
Input
NC
Input
Overload sensor (analog)
Input
F boom pressure sensor
Input
10
Signal name
Input/
output
Output
Pin
Signal name
No.
1 VB (controller power)
Input/
output
Input
Swing emergency switch
Input
VIS (solenoid power)
NC
Input
SOL_COM (solenoid common gnd)
Input
232C_RxD
Input
Battery relay drive
Output
Overload sensor (ON/OFF)
Input
Governor motor A phase (+)
Output
Overload alarm valid switch
Input
LS-EPC
Output
Model selection 4
Input
Travel junction SOL
Output
Attachment circuit selector signal
Output
Engine stop solenoid (Pull)
Output
NC
Output
Bucket CURL pressure SW
Input
NC
Input
10
Boom RAISE pressure SW
Input
Output
11
VB (controller power)
Input
12
VIS (solenoid power)
Input
Input
13
10
Signal GND
Input
11
NC
11
Knob SW
Input
12
CAN shield
12
NC
Input
13
Model selection 5
13
Governor motor FB potentiometer
Input
14
232C_TxD
Output
14
KEY_SIG
14
15
NC
Input
15
Governor motor A phase (-)
Output
15
NC
Output
16
SENS_PWR
17
Key Switch (Terminal C)
Input
Input
16
Travel steering signal pressure SW
Input
16
PC-EPC
Output
17
Model selection 3
Input
17
Pump merge/divider solenoid
Output
Input
18
18
Heater relay drive
Output
18
NC
Input
19
NC
Output
19
Bucket DUMP pressure switch
Input
19
Throttle potentiometer
Input
20
NC
Input
20
Boom LOWER pressure switch
Input
20
NC
Input
GND (controller GND)
GND (analog GND)
S_NET
21
21
Input/
output
22
VIS (solenoid PWR)
22
POT_PWR
Key switch (terminal ACC)
CAN0_L
23
23
Input/
output
24
KEY_SIG
CAN1_L
Input/
output
25
Governor motor B phase (+)
26
Service flow adjustment EPC (1)
Output
27
Travel Hi/Lo selector solenoid
Output
Output
24
Output
Input
21
22
23
Input
Output
24
28
2-stage relief solenoid
25
NC
Input
29
Swing pressure switch
Input
26
NC
Input
30
Arm IN pressure switch
Input
27
Model selection 2
Input
31
28
NC
Input
32
29
GND (pulse GND)
33
30
NC
Input
34
NC
31
GND (S_NET GND)
Input
35
Governor motor B phase (-)
Output
CAN0_H
Input/
output
36
NC
Output
37
Swing parking brake solenoid
Output
CAN1_H
Input/
output
38
NC
Output
39
Travel pressure switch
Input
40
Arm OUT pressure switch
Input
32
33
34
PC300-7
Input
GND (232C GND)
35
Service valve pressure switch
Input
36
NC
Input
37
Model selection switch 1
Input
38
Swing lock switch
Input
39
GND (pulse GND)
40
Engine speed sensor
Input
10-147
ELECTRONIC CONTROL SYSTEM
Control function
1
Engine/Pump composite control function
2
Pump/Valve control function
3
One-touch power maximizing function
Machine push-up function
4
Auto-deceleration function
5
Auto-warm-up/Overheat prevention function
Electronic control system

6
Swing control function
7
Travel control function
8
ATT flow control, circuit selector function (option)
Self-diagnosis function
For the self-diagnosis function, see "TROUBLE SHOOTING".
PC300-7
10-149
TOTAL SYSTEM DIAGRAM
10-150
PC300-7
09179
PC300-7
10-151
1. Engine and Pump control function
SJP09121
OR
08908
10-152
PC300-7
FUNCTION
The operator can set the work mode switch

on the monitor panel to mode A, E, or B (or
L) and select proper engine torque and
pump absorption torque according to the
type of work.
The engine throttle and pump controller
detects the speed of the engine governor
set with the fuel control dial and the actual
engine speed and controls them so that the
pump will absorb all the torque at each output point of the engine, according to the
pump absorption torque set in each mode.
: The L mode is on the multi-monitor specification machine only.
SJP08755
OR
08909
SJP09180
SJP08757
OR
08911
PC300-7
10-153
12
1) Control method in each mode

Mode A, Mode E
Matching point in mode A: Rated speed
Mode A
(Work)
180.2 kW/1,950 rpm {242 HP/1,950 rpm}
Mode A
(Travel)
180.2 kW/1,900 rpm {242 HP/1,900 rpm}
Mode E
154.4 kW/1,750 rpm {207 HP/1,750 rpm}
If the pump load increases and the pressure

rises, the engine speed lowers.
At this time, the controller lowers the pump
discharge so that the engine speed will be
near the full output point. If the pressure lowers, the controller increases the pump discharge so that the engine speed will be near
the full output point.
By repeating these operations, the controller
constantly uses the engine near the full output point.
09181
09182
SJP08760
OR
08914
10-154
PC300-7
12
Mode B / (Mode
Mode
Partial output point
L)
Mode B
82%
Mode
61%
09183
Mode B
147.1 kW/1,800 rpm

{197 HP / 1,800 rpm}
(Mode L)
110.3 kW/1,550 rpm

{148 HP / 1,550 rpm}
At this time, the controller keeps the pump

absorption torque along the constant horsepower curve and lower the engine speed by
the composite control of the engine and
pump.
By this method, the engine is used in the low
fuel consumption area.
09184
09185
PC300-7
10-155
12
2) Function to control pump during
travel
When the travel is operated in A operation,
or E or B working mode, the working mode
stays as it is, and the pump absorption
torque and engine speed rise to A travel
mode.
09186
If the machine travels in mode L, the working mode and engine speed do not change,
but the pump absorption torque is
increased.
3) Function to control when emergency

pump drive switch is turned ON
Even if the controller or a sensor has a
trouble, the functions of the machine can
be secured with pump absorption torque
almost equivalent to mode E by turning on
emergency pump drive switch (10).
In this case, a constant current flows from
the battery to the EPC valve for PC and the
oil pressure is sensed by only the EPC
valve for PC.
4) Function of engine drive switch when

emergency occurs
If there is a failure in the controller or any
problem in the chassis wiring or relays,
and the engine cannot be started because
the engine stop solenoid cannot drive, turn
the switch ON for approx. 5 seconds before
the starting signal comes ON. This makes it
possible to drive the solenoid forcibly.
(However, if current flows through this
solenoid continuously for more than 30
seconds, there is danger that it will burn
out, so correctly control the time that the
current flows.)
10-156
PC300-7
12
2. Pump/Valve control function
SJP08765
OR
08921
Function
The machine is matched to various types of
work properly with the 2-stage relief function
to increase the digging force, etc.
PC300-7
10-157
12
1) LS control function
The change point (LS set differential pressure)
of the pump discharge in the LS valve is
changed by changing the output pressure
from the LS-EPC valve to the LS valve according to the operating condition of the actuator.
By this operation, the start-up time of the
pump discharge is optimized and the composite operation and fine control performance is improved.
2) Cut-off function
When the cut-off function is turned on, the
PC-EPC current is increased to near the maximum value.
By this operation, the flow rate in the relief
state is lowered to reduce fuel consumption.
Operating condition for turning on cut-off
function
09187
Condition
The average value of the front and rear

pressure sensors is above 27.9 MPa {285
kg/cm} and the one-touch power maximizing function is not turned on
The cut-off function does not work, however,

while the machine is travelling in mode A or the
arm crane operation width swing lock switch is
turned on.
1. 2-stage relief function
The relief pressure in the normal work is 34.8
MPa {355 kg/cm}. If the 2-stage relief function
is turned on, however, the relief pressure
rises to about 37.2 MPa {380 kg/cm}.
By this operation, the hydraulic force is
increased further.
Operating condition for turning on 2-stage
relief function
Condition
During travel
When swing lock switch is
turned on
When boom is lowered
When one-touch power maximizing function is turned on
When
Relief pressure
34.8 MPa
{355 kg/cm}
37.2 MPa
{380 kg/cm}
L mode is operated
10-158
PC300-7
12
3. One-touch power maximizing/machine

push-up function
09188
FUNCTION
Power can be increased for a certain time by

operating the left knob switch.
When the machine push-up switch is operated, the boom pushing force is increased.
PC300-7
10-159
12
1) One-touch power maximizing function

When the operator needs more digging force
to dig up a large rock, etc., if the left knob
switch is pressed, the hydraulic force is
increased about 7% to increase the digging
force.
If the left knob switch is turned on in working
mode "A" or "E", each function is set automatically as shown below.
Software cut-off function

Working
mode
A, E
Engine/Pump
control
2-stage relief function
Operation time
Software
cut-off function
Matching at rated
output point
34.8 MPa {355 kg/cm}
37.2 MPa {380 kg/cm}
Automatically
reset at 8.5 sec
Cancel
2) Machine push-up function

Operate switch (1) to increase the boom pushing force when digging ditches or holes on
hard ground.
10-160
Switch
2-stage safety valve

function
OFF
Setting of safety valve at

boom cylinder
14.7 MPa {150 kg/cm}
ON
Setting of safety valve at

boom cylinder
28.4 MPa {290 kg/cm}
PC300-7
12
4. Auto-deceleration function
SJP08767
OR
08924
FUNCTION
If the all control levers are set in NEUTRAL

while waiting for a dump truck or work, the
engine speed is lowered to the medium level
automatically to reduce the fuel consumption
and noise.
If any lever is operated, the engine speed
rises to the set level instantly.
PC300-7
10-161
12
OPERATION
WHEN CONTROL LEVERS ARE SET IN NEUTRAL
If all the control levers are set in NEUTRAL

while the engine speed is above the decelerator operation level (about 1,400 rpm), the
engine speed lowers instantly to the first
deceleration level about 100 rpm lower than
the set speed.
If 4 more seconds pass, the engine speed
lowers to the second deceleration level
(about 1,400 rpm) and keeps at that level until
any lever is operated again.
WHEN ANY CONTROL LEVER IS OPERATED
If any control lever is operated while the

engine speed is kept at the second deceleration level, the engine speed rises instantly to
the level set with the fuel control dial.
10-162
PC300-7
12
5. Auto-warm-up/Overheat prevention
function
SJP08768
OR
08925
FUNCTION
After the engine is started, if the engine cooling water temperature is low, the engine
speed is raised automatically to warm up the
engine. If the engine cooling water temperature rises too high during work, the pump
load is reduced to prevent overheating.
PC300-7
10-163
12
1) Auto-warm-up function
After the engine is started, if the engine cooling water temperature is low, the engine
speed is raised automatically to warm up the
engine.
Operating condition (All)
Operated
Water temperature: Below 30C.

Engine speed: Max. 1,200 rpm
Engine speed: Max. 1,200 rpm
Resetting condition (Any one)
Reset
Water temperature: Above 30C

Auto
Auto-warm-up operation time: Min. 10 minutes
Manual
Fuel control dial: Kept at 70% of full level for 3 sec.

or longer
2) Overheat prevention function

If the engine cooling water temperature rises
too high during work, the pump load and
engine speed are reduced to prevent overheating.
Operating condition
Water temperature:
Above 105C
Operating condition
Water temperature:
Above 102C
Operating condition
Water temperature:
Above 100C
10-164
This function is turned on when the water

temperature rises above 95C.
Operation/Remedy
Resetting condition
Work mode: Any mode

Engine speed: Low idle
Monitor alarm lamp: Lights up
Alarm buzzer: Sounds
Water temperature: Below 105C

Fuel control dial: Return to low idle
position once.
Under above condition, controller
is set to condition before operation
of function. (Manual reset)
Operation/Remedy
Resetting condition
Work mode: Mode A, E, OR B

Engine speed: Keep as is.
Monitor alarm lamp: Lights up.
Lower pump discharge.

of function. (Automatic reset)
Operation/Remedy
Operating condition
Water temperature:
Above 95C
Work mode: Mode A

Lower pump discharge.
Resetting condition
Operation/Remedy
Engine speed: Any level
Work mode: Travel

Lower travel speed.

Resetting condition

PC300-7
12
6. Swing control function
SJP08769
OR
08926
FUNCTION
The swing lock and swing holding brake functions are installed.
PC300-7
10-165
12
1) Swing lock and swing holding brake

functions
The swing lock function (manual) is used to
lock machine from swinging at any position.
The swing holding brake function (automatic)
is used to prevent hydraulic drift after the
machine stops swinging.
Swing lock switch and swing lock/holding
brake
Lock
switch
OFF
ON
Lock
lamp
Function
Operation
OFF
Swing
holding
brake
If swing lever is set in neutral,

swing brake operates in
about 7 sec. If swing lever is
operated, brake is released
and machine can swing freely.
Swing
lock
Swing lock operates and

machine is locked from
swinging. Even if swing lever
is operated, swing lock is not
reset and machine does not
swing.
ON
2) Quick hydraulic oil warm-up function

when swing lock switch is turned on
If swing lock switch (4) is turned on, the
pump-cut function is cancelled and the relief
pressure rises from 34.8 MPa {355 kg/cm} to
37.2 MPa {380 kg/cm}. If the work equipment
is relieved under this condition, the hydraulic
oil temperature rises quickly and the warm-up
time can be shortened.
Operation of swing holding brake release

switch
If the controller, etc. has a problem, the swing
holding brake does not work normally, and
the machine cannot swing, the swing lock can
be reset with the swing holding brake release
switch.
Swing holding brake

release switch
Swing lock
switch
Swing brake
ON
(When control has
trouble)
ON
OFF
OFF
(When controller is normal)
ON
OFF
Swing
Swing
Swing lock Swing holdlock is
lock is
is turned
ing brake is
turned on. canceled. on.
turned on.
Even if the swing holding brake release

switch is turned on, if the swing lock switch is
turned on, the swing brake is not released.
If the swing lock is reset, swinging is stopped
by only the hydraulic brake of the safety
valve. Accordingly, if swinging is stopped on
a slope, the upper structure may drift hydraulically.
10-166
PC300-7
12
7. Travel control function
SJP08770
OR
08927
FUNCTION
The pumps are controlled and the travel

speed is changed manually or automatically,
to secure proper travel performance matched
to the type of work and jobsite during travel.
PC300-7
10-167
12
1) Pump control function during travel
If the machine travels in a work mode other
than mode A, the work mode and the engine
speed are kept as they are and the pump
absorption torque is increased.
For details, see ENGINE/PUMP COMPOSITE
CONTROL FUNCTION.
1. Travel speed change function
i) Manual change with travel speed switch
If the travel speed switch is changed
between Lo, ( Mi), and Hi, the governor/
pump controller controls the pump capacity and motor capacity at each gear speed
as shown at right to change the travel
speed.
Travel speed
switch
Lo (Low
speed)
Mi) (Middle Speed)
Hi (High
speed)
Pump capacity
(%)
90
82
100
Motor capacity
Max.
Max.
Min.
3.2
4.5
5.5
Travel speed
(km/h)
ii) Automatic change according to engine

speed
If the fuel control dial is used to set the
engine speed to less than 1,200 rpm:
When traveling in Lo, it will not switch
even when set to Hi or Mi.
When traveling in Hi or Mi, it will switch
automatically to Lo.
iii) Automatic changes according to pump
discharge pressure
When traveling with the travel speed
switch set to Hi or Mi, it the load
increases, such as when traveling uphill,
and the travel pressure goes above 3.23
MPa {330 kg/cm} for more than 0.5 sec,
the travel motor capacity will automatically change to low speed (equivalent to
Lo). (The travel speed switch will stay at
Hi or Mi.)
After continuing to travel in Lo, if the load
increases, such as when traveling on level
ground or traveling downhill, and the
travel pressure goes below 18.6 MPa {190
kg/cm} for more than 0.5 sec, the travel
motor capacity will automatically change
and will return to Hi or Mi.
10-168
09189
PC300-7
8. ATT flow control, circuit selector function (if equipment)
FUNCTION
This function is available only with the ATT specification. The function acts as follows according to
the flow command and working mode from the
monitor.
1) It throttles the ATT PPC pressure and controls
the flow when the pedal is depressed fully.
2) In mode B and the other modes, it switches to
ATT single acting (B) or double acting (other
modes).
: The ATT flow control adjustment function is
on the multi-monitor specification machine
only.
PC300-7
10-169
9. System component parts

1) Engine revolution sensor
1.
2.
3.
4.
Sensor
Locknut
Wiring harness
Connector
FUNCTION
The engine revolution sensor is installed to

the ring gear of the engine flywheel. It electrically calculates the number of the gear teeth
which pass in front of it and transmits the
result to the engine throttle and pump controller.
A magnet is used to sense the gear teeth.
Each time a gear tooth passes in front of the
magnet, a current is generated.
10-170
PC300-7
12
2) PPC oil pressure switch
1. Plug
2. Switch
3. Connector
SPECIFICATIONS
Type of contacts: Normally open contacts
Operating (ON) pressure: 0.5 0.1 MPa
{5.0 1.0 kg/cm}
Resetting (OFF) Pressure: 0.3 0.5 MPa
{3.0 0.5 kg/cm}
FUNCTION
The junction block has 9 pressure switches,

which check the operating condition of each
actuator by the PPC pressure and transmit it
to the engine throttle and pump controller.
PC300-7
10-171
12
3) Pump pressure sensor
1. Sensor
2. Connector
FUNCTION
The pump pressure sensor is installed to the

inlet circuit of the control valve. It converts
the pump discharge pressure into a voltage
and transmits it to the engine throttle and
pump controller.
OPERATION
The oil pressure applied from the pressure

intake part presses the diaphragm of the oil
pressure sensor, the diaphragm is deformed.
The gauge layer facing the diaphragm measures the deformation of the diaphragm by
the change of its resistance, then converts the
change of the resistance into a voltage and
transmits it to the amplifier (voltage amplifier).
The amplifier amplifies the received voltage
and transmits it to the engine throttle and
pump controller.
Relationship between pressure P (MPa {kg/
cm}) and output voltage (V) is as follows.
V = 0.08 [0.008] x P + 0.5
10-172
SJP08774
OR
08930
PC300-7
MULTI MONITOR SYSTEM
SJP08775
OR
08931
The monitor system monitors the condition

of the machine with sensors installed on various parts of the machine. It processes and
immediately displays the obtained information on the panel notifying the operator of the
condition of the machine.
The panel is roughly divided as follows.
1. Monitor section to output alarms when
the machine has troubles
2. Gauge section to display the condition
constantly (Coolant temperature, hydraulic oil temperature, fuel level, etc.)
PC300-7
The monitor panel also has various mode

selector switches and functions to operate the
machine control system.
10-173
12
1. Monitor panel
OUTLINE
The monitor panel has the functions to display various items and the functions to
select modes and electric parts.
The monitor panel has a CPU (Central Processing Unit) in it to process, display, and
output the information.
The monitor display unit consists of LCD
(Liquid Crystal Display). The switches are
flat sheet switches.
10-174
PC300-7
Input and output signals

CN-1
CN-2
Pin
No.
1 Key ON
Signal name
Key ON
Washer motor output
Input/
output
Input
CN-3
Pin
Signal name
No.
1 Engine water temperature
Input/
output
Input
Pin
No.
1 NC
Signal name
Input/
output
Input
Input
Fuel level
Input
NC
Output
Radiator water level
Input
NC
Input
Starting signal
Input
(Hydraulic oil level)
Input
NC
Input
Limit switch (W)
Input
GND
GND
VB +
Wiper motor (+)
Output
10
Wiper motor (-)
Output
11
Buzzer ON signal
Input
12
Limit switch (P)
Input
PC300-7
Input
Input
Air cleaner clogging
Input
NC
Input
NC
Input
NC
Input
Engine oil pressure
Input
RS230C CTS
Input
Engine oil level
Input
RS230C RXD
Input
N/W signal
Input/
Output
RS230C RXD
Input/
Output
10
N/W signal
Input/
Output
10
RS230C RXD
Input/
Output
11
Battery charge
Input
11
BOOTSW
Input
12
Hydraulic oil temperature (analog)
Input
12
NC
Input
13
GND (for analog signal)
13
GND
14
Buzzer drive
Input
14
CAN (SHIELD)
Input
15
Limit SW (window)
Input
15
CAN (+)
Input
16
Buzzer cancel
Input
16
CAN (-)
Input
17
Swing lock
Input
18
Preheat
Input
19
Light switch
Input
20
N/W GND
10-175
MONITOR CONTROL, DISPLAY PORTION

MONITOR PORTION
08932
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
Wiper motor
Preheating monitor
Swing lock monitor
Engine water temperature monitor
Hydraulic oil temperature gauge
Engine water temperature gauge
Working mode monitor
Service monitor
Travel speed monitor
Fuel gauge
10-176
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
Fuel level monitor

Hydraulic oil temperature monitor
Power max. monitor
Auto-deceleration monitor
Radiator water level caution
Battery charge caution
Engine oil pressure caution
Engine oil level caution
Maintenance time warning caution
PC300-7
MONITOR ITEMS AND DISPLAY
Symbol
Display item
Swing lock
Display method
Swing lock switch
Swing holding brake

release switch
Swing lock monitor
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
Flashes
ON
ON
ON
Continuous set time
Preheating monitor status
Up to 30 sec.
ON
From 30 sec. to 40 sec.
Flashes
More than 40 sec.
OFF
Power Max. switch status
Power max. monitor status
Being pressed
Lights up but goes out after

approx. 9 sec. when kept pressed
Not being pressed
Flashes
Preheating
Power Max.
Engine water
temperature
Hydraulic oil
temperature
See gauge display on the next page
Fuel level
PC300-7
10-177
Gauge
Engine water temperature (C)
Hydraulic oil temperature (C)
Range
Temperature, volume
Indicator
Buzzer sound
A1
105
Red
A2
102
Red
A3
100
Green
A4
80
Green
A5
60
Green
A6
30
White
B1
105
Red
B2
102
Red
B3
100
Green
B4
80
Green
B5
40
Green
B6
20
White
C1
417
Green
C2
347.5
Green
C3
277.5
Green
C4
139
Green
C5
100
Green
C6
62
Red
Fuel level (L)
10-178
PC300-7
Checks before starting (caution lamps all light up), when maintenance interval is exceeded.
If the checks before starting or maintenance interval is exceeded items light up, the display of the hydraulic
oil temperature gauge and the hydraulic oil temperature monitor are stopped, and the following cautions
are displayed.
Symbol
Display item
Check before
starting item
When engine is
stopped
When engine is running
Engine oil pressure
--
When abnormal,
lights up and buzzer
sounds
Battery charge
--
Lights up when abnormal
When abnormal,
lights up and buzzer
sounds
Engine oil level
--
--
Maintenance
Lights up when there is a warning. Lights up for

only 30 sec. after key is turned ON, then goes
out.
The problems that have occurred are displayed in order from the left.
When the above cautions are displayed, if the hydraulic oil temperature is high or low, only the symbol is
displayed.
Condition of hydraulic oil
Color of symbol
Low temperature (below B6 or equivalent)
Black on white background
Normal (B6 - B2)
No display
High temperature (below B2)
White on red letters
PC300-7
10-179
Display category
Symbol
Display item
Display range
ON
INT
Display method
OFF
Wiper
Displays set condition
Working
mode
Displays set
mode
Travel speed
Displays set
speed
Monitor
Service meter
10-180
Auto-deceleration
ON OFF
Displays actuation status
Service
meter indicator
When service meter is working
Lights up when
service meter is
working
PC300-7
SWITCHES
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Working mode selector switch

Selector switch
Display brightness, contrast adjustment switch
Control switch
Window washer switch
Wiper switch
Maintenance switch
Travel speed selector switch
Auto-deceleration switch
PC300-7
10-181
Working mode selector switch

The condition of the machine changes according to the switch that is pressed (A, E, L, B). It
is possible to check the condition on the working mode monitor display. The relationship
between each working mode and the monitor
display is shown in the table on the right.
Selector switch
This is used when making detailed settings in
each working mode. (For details, see ATTACHMENT FLOW CONTROL FUNCTION for modes
A and E.)
Maintenance switch
Check the condition of the maintenance
items. (For details, see MAINTENANCE FUNCTION.)
Auto-deceleration switch
Each time the auto-deceleration switch is
pressed, the auto-deceleration function is
switched ON/OFF.
Use the auto-deceleration monitor display to
check the present condition.
When the working mode switch is operated to
switch the working mode, it is automatically
set to ON.
Travel speed selector switch

Each time the travel speed selector switch is
pressed, the travel speed changes.
Lo Mi Hi Lo. . . . . .
Use the travel speed monitor display to check
the present condition.
The relationship between the set speed and
the monitor display in the table on the right.
Wiper switch
Each time the wiper switch is pressed, the
wiper setting changes OFF INT ON
OFF . . . . . .
Use the wiper monitor display to check the
present condition.
The relationship between the wiper setting
and the monitor display is as shown in the
table on the right.
10-182
Switch that is
pressed
Display
Working mode status after setting
[A]
A mode (default)
[E]
E mode
[L]
L mode
[B]
B mode
Display
Setting
Crawler symbol + Lo
Low speed (default)
Crawler symbol + Mi
Medium speed
Crawler symbol + Hi
High speed
Display
Setting
Wiper actuation
status
None
OFF
Stowing stopped
or now stowing
Wiper symbol + INT
INT
Intermittent actuation
Wiper symbol + ON
ON
Continuous actuation
PC300-7

While the switch is being pressed, window
washer liquid is sprayed out. There is a time
delay before the wiper starts.
Control switch
This is used for control when using the maintenance function or select function.
(For details, see each function.)
Display brightness, contrast adjustment

switch
Use this switch when adjusting the display
brightness and contrast.
(For details, see each function.)
PC300-7
10-183
SELECT MODE FUNCTION
This is used when setting the flow in each

working mode. It is possible to make the setting when genuine attachment piping is
installed and the initial value setting function
on the service menu has been used to set to
ATTACHMENT INSTALLED.
It is possible to check on the working mode
monitor if this function can be set.
Working mode
Monitor display
A mode
[A] + crusher symbol
E mode
[E] + crusher symbol
B mode
[B] + flow symbol
METHOD OF USE
Carry out the setting on the normal screen
1. A mode, E mode
1) Press select switch (1) on the monitor to
move to the adjustment screen.
2) Press control switch (2) to select the flow
level.
Control switch
Actuation
Flow level bar graph
extends to the right

retracts to the left
3) After completing the level selection, press

input confirmation switch (3).
The selection flow level is confirmed and
the screen moves to the normal screen.
From the moment that the flow level is
selected, the content of the selection is
reflected for the attachment flow.
Before the input confirmation switch
is pressed, the flow level is not confirmed, so press return switch (4) to
return to the normal screen. This function can be used to return to the previously set flow.
The relationship between the set flow
level and the flow value is as shown in
the table on the right.
10-184
Flow level
Flow (L/min.)
Remarks
530
Default
430
370
300
230
165
100
30
PC300-7
2. B mode
1) Press select switch (1) on the monitor to
move to the screen for selecting the 3stage flow level.
2) Press control switch (2), or input [01] - [03]
with the numeral 10-key pad to choose
one on the three flow levels.
No.
10-key pad operation
01
02
03

The selected flow level is selected.
is pressed, the flow level is not confirmed, so press return switch (4) to
return to the operator screen. This
function can be used to return to the
previously set flow.
4) After the flow level is confirmed, the
screen changes to the screen shown in
the diagram on the right.
With this screen, it is possible to make
fine adjustment to the flow.
No.
Flow level (L/min.)
Remarks
01
230
Default
02
190
03
150
5) Press control switch (2) and select the

flow level.
Control switch
Actuation

PC300-7
10-185

The selected flow level is confirmed and
the screen moves to the operator screen.
From the moment that the flow level is
selected, the content of the selection is
reflected for the attachment flow.
is pressed, the flow level is not confirmed, se press return switch (4) to
return to the normal screen. This function can be used to return to the previously set flow.
The relationship between the set flow
level and the flow value is as shown in
the table on the right.
7) Check the set value with the working
mode monitor.
The relationship between the display
level and the set value is as shown in the
table on the right, and it is possible to
check the level of the flow that can be set.
10-186
Flow
level
When
flow is
100 l/
min.
When
flow is
140 l/
min.
When
flow is
180 l/
min.
180
220
250
170
210
250
160
200
240
150
190
230
140
180
220
130
170
210
120
160
200
Remarks
Default
Display level
Set value (ll/min.)
250 or 260
230 or 240
210 or 220
190 or 200
170 or 180
150 or 160
130 or 140
120
PC300-7
MAINTENANCE FUNCTION
When the maintenance time for replacement,
inspection, or filling has approached for the 10
maintenance items, press maintenance switch (1)
and the caution display (yellow or red) appears
on the monitor display for 30 seconds after the
key is turned ON to remind the operator to carry
out lubrication maintenance.
Maintenance items
No.
Item
Replacement
interval (hours)
01
Engine oil
500
02
Engine oil filter
500
03
Fuel filter
500
04
Hydraulic filter
1000
05
Hydraulic tank breather
500
06
Corrosion resistor
(1000)
07
Damper case oil
1000
08
Final case oil
2000
09
Machinery case oil
1000
10
Hydraulic oil
5000
Option, so not set
The above replacement intervals are set for

each item, and the time remaining to maintenance is reduced as the machine is operated.
The content of the caution display differs
according to the remaining time. The relationship is as shown in the table below.
Display
Condition
None
Remaining time for

maintenance for all
items is more than 30
hours
Notice display (black

symbol displayed on
yellow background)
There is one or more

items with less than 30
hours remaining time
for maintenance
Warning display (wiper

symbol displayed on red
background)
There is one or more

items with less than 0
hours remaining time
for maintenance
PC300-7
10-187
METHOD OF CHECKING STATUS

MAINTENANCE ITEMS
Operate as follows when on the operator
screen.
1. Press maintenance switch (1) and switch to
the maintenance list display screen.
The maintenance items are displayed as
symbols on the screen.
2. Press control switch (2), or use the 10-key pad
to input the number (01 - 10) of the maintenance item to select the item.
The cursor moves and the item is highlighted.
The display method is the same as
described on the previous page (relationship between remaining time and caution
display). If the remaining time is less than
30 hours, the item is displayed in yellow,
and if it is less than 0 hours, it is displayed
in red.
MAINTENANCE OPERATION
1.
After completing the selection, press input

confirmation switch (3).
The screen will change to the maintenance
reset screen.
2. Use the maintenance reset screen to check
the content, and if there is any problem, press
input confirmation switch (3) to move to the
check screen.
If the wrong item is selected, press return
switch (4) to return to the maintenance list
screen.
3. Check the content on the check screen, and if
there is no problem, press input confirmation
switch (3) to reset the maintenance time.
After the reset is completed, the screen
returns to the maintenance list display
screen. To check the remaining time, or if the
wrong item is selected, press return switch (4)
to return to the maintenance list screen.
The check screen shows the symbol for
the maintenance item and the set time in
large letters.
The background color of the symbol for
the item where the maintenance item was
reset is the same as the background of the
screen, so it is possible to check that it has
been reset.
10-188
PC300-7
BRIGHTNESS, CONTRAST ADJUSTMENT

FUNCTION
This function is used to adjust the brightness and
contrast of the display.
ADJUSTMENT METHOD
Operate as follows when on the operator
screen.
1. Press display brightness/contrast adjustment
switch (1) and switch to the adjustment
screen.
Relationship between menu symbol and content.
No.
Symbol
Content
01
Return mark
Return
02
Contrast
03
Brightness
2. Press control switch (2), or use the 10-key pad

to input the number (00 - 02) to select either
contrast or brightness.
After completing the selection, press input
confirmation switch (3) and return to the
adjustment screen.
Then press return switch (4) or use the 10-key
pas to set to [00] and press input confirmation
switch (3) to return to the normal screen.
3. Press control switch (2) and adjust the brightness and contrast as desired.
Control switch
Actuation

PC300-7
08937
10-189
SERVICE METER CHECK FUNCTION
When the starting switch is at the OFF position, keep return switch (1) and control switch
(2) of the monitor pressed at the same time,
and the service meter is shown on the display.
This display is shown only while the two
switches are being pressed. When the
switches are released, the display goes out.
Note that it takes 3 - 5 seconds after the
switches are pressed for the service meter
display to appear.
DISPLAY LCD CHECK FUNCTION
On the password input screen or on the normal screen, if monitor return switch (1) and
working mode (A) switch are kept pressed at
the same time, all the LCD display will light
up and the whole screen will become white,
so the display can be checked.
If any part of the display is black, the LCD is
broken.
10-190
08943
PC300-7
USER CODE DISPLAY FUNCTION
If there is any problem in operating the

machine, the user code is displayed on the
monitor to advise the operator of the steps to
take.
This code display appears on the operator
screen.
On the operator screen, the user code is displayed on the portion for the hydraulic oil
temperature gauge.
If more than one user code is generated at the

same time, the user codes are displayed in
turn for 2 seconds each to display all the user
codes.
08945
PC300-7
10-191
4
While the user code is being displayed, if the

input confirmation switch is pressed, the service code and failure code can be displayed.
If there is more than one service code or failure code, the display switches every 2 seconds and displays all the service codes/failure
codes that caused the user code to be displayed.
Even if service codes/failure codes have
occurred, if they did not cause the user code
to be displayed, this function does not display
them.
If the telephone number has been set using

the telephone number input on the service
menu, it is possible to switch on the service
code/failure code and display the telephone
symbol and telephone number.
For details of inputting and setting the telephone number, see SPECIAL FUNCTIONS OF
MONITOR PANEL in the TESTING AND
ADJUSTING section.
10-192
(6)
PC300-7
7-SEGMENT MONITOR SYSTEM
SJP08775
OR
08931
The monitor system monitors the condition

of the machine with sensors installed on various parts of the machine. It processes and
immediately displays the obtained information on the panel notifying the operator of the
condition of the machine.
The panel is roughly divided as follows.
1. Monitor section to output alarms when
the machine has troubles
2. Gauge section to display the condition
constantly (Coolant temperature, hydraulic oil temperature, fuel level, etc.)
PC300-7
The monitor panel also has various mode

selector switches and functions to operate the
machine control system.
10-193
4
12
1. Monitor panel
OUTLINE
The monitor panel has the functions to display various items and the functions to select
modes and electric parts.
The monitor panel has a CPU (Central Processing Unit) in it to process, display, and output the information.
The monitor display unit consists of LCD (Liquid Crystal Display) and LED (Light Emitting
Diode). The switches are flat sheet switches.
10-194
INPUT AND OUTPUT SIGNALS

CN-P01
Pin
No.
CN-P02
Signal name
Pin
No.
Signal Name
Engine water temperature
Key switch (Battery)
Key switch (Battery)
Fuel
Washer motor output
Key switch (Terminal C)
NC
Wiper contact W
Air cleaner clogging sensor
GND
NC
GND
Engine oil pressure sensor
VB + (24 V)
Engine oil level sensor
Wiper motor (+)
Network signal
10
Wiper motor (-)
10
Network signal
11
(Buzzer ON signal input)
11
Charge level
12
Wiper contact P
12
NC
13
GND (For analog signal)
14
NC
15
Wind limit switch
16
Buzzer cancel
17
Swing lock
18
Preheating
19
Limit switch
20
Network (GND)
PC300-7
Display section of monitor
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
PC300-7
Service meter display

Coolant temperature gauge
Coolant temperature caution
Digital meter display (Service code and user
code are displayed when trouble occurs
Fuel level caution
Fuel level gauge
Engine oil level caution lamp
Preheating pilot lamp
Swing holding brake pilot lamp
Oil maintenance pilot lamp
Battery charge caution lamp
Air cleaner clogging caution lamp
Engine oil pressure caution lamp
10-195
4
Monitored items and display

Symbol
When engine is
stopped
Lights when normal.
(Goes off when
engine is started.)
Displayed item
Display range
Engine oil pressure
Max. 1,500 rpm

Max. 0.05 MPa
{0.5 kg/cm}
Min. 1,500 rpm
Max. 0.15 MPa
{1.5 kg/cm}
When clogged
Goes off.
Flashes when abnormal.
Charge level
When charge is
abnormal
Lights when normal.

(Goes off when
engine is started.)
Flashes when abnormal.
Engine oil level
Below low level
Flashes when
abnormal.
Packing (Swing lock)
When swing is
locked
Lights up when swing is locked. Flashes when

swing holding brake release switch is turned on.
Oil maintenance
See "OIL MAINTENANCE FUNCTION" on next page.
Preheating
When preheated
Coolant temperature
Flashes at 102C or higher. Flashes and

buzzer sounds at 105C or higher.
Fuel level
Flashes when below low level.
While engine is running
Flashes and buzzer

sounds when abnormal.
SAP00521
SAP00523
SAP00526
10-196
Goes off.
Lights up for 30 sec. when starting switch is set

to HEAT. Then, flashes for 10 sec. to indicated
completion of preheating.
PC300-7
12
Oil maintenance function

1. Function and operation
At a set time after the engine oil is replaced, the
oil maintenance function is turned on to notify
the operator by the LED lamp on the monitor
panel that it is time to replace the oil. The function to indicate the phone number of the place to
make contact for service on the LCD unit is
installed, too.
1) Check of elapsed time
Nothing is displayed normally until point
B shown in the figure at right after this
function is reset. If the key is turned on
with the buzzer cancel switch processed
(for 2.5 seconds), however, the elapsed
time is displayed on the service meter
section.
2) Display of replacement of oil
If time passes point B after this function is
reset, the elapsed time is displayed on the
service meter section and the LED flashes
when the key is turned on.
2. Setting of time interval
1) The time interval is set in the interval setting mode. It can be set to "125h", "250h",
"500h", "Not set", or "Demo-mode". The
default is "Not set".
2) To enter the interval setting mode, press
and hold the clock switch for 2.5 seconds.
3) If the buzzer cancel switch is pressed in
the interval setting mode, the clock display section changes to "" "125"
"250" "500" "d" in order. ("" corresponds to "Not set" and "d" corresponds
to "Demo-mode".)
4) To save the time interval, set a desired
time (mode) on the monitor panel and
press and hold the clock switch for 2.5
seconds.
PC300-7
10-197
4
12
3. Timing and contents of display

1) When replacement of oil is displayed
The elapsed time is displayed for 10 seconds after all segments are turned on.
Phone number is displayed for the next 10
seconds.
If the phone number has not been input,
however, the elapsed time is displayed for
20 seconds after all segments are turned
on.
2) When elapsed time is checked
The elapsed time is displayed for 10 seconds after all segments are turned on.
4. Resetting elapsed time
1) When the replacement of oil and elapsed
time are displayed, press the buzzer cancel switch 10 seconds after all segments
are turned on (while the elapsed time is
displayed) and hold for 3 seconds. The
elapsed time is reset. After this operation,
"0h" is displayed for 1 second.
2) When the set time is changed, the elapsed
time is reset to "0h".
5. Demo-mode
1) In the demo-mode, the time is set to 250h,
the elapsed time is set to 240h, and
replacement of oil is displayed when the
key is turned on. The elapsed time does
not increase, however. The time can be
reset in this mode. Turn on the key 3
times in this mode, and the time interval
is automatically set to "Not set" at the 4th
time and after. The elapsed time is set to
"0h" and counting of elapsed time is
started.
10-198
PC300-7
12
Mode selector switches
1. Travel speed switch
2. Auto-deceleration switch
3. Wiper switch
4. Work mode selector switch
(Including setting switch)
There are 4 sets of the mode selector

switches on the switch section. Each time one
switch is pressed, the machine condition
changes. The current condition is indicated by
the lighting of the LED above the switch.
The initial setting of only the work mode after

the starting switch is turned on can be
changed.
For how to change the setting, see "Work
mode default setting mode" in TROUBLESHOOTING-Display and special functions of
monitor panel.
PC300-7
Operations table of switch section

The bold letters are the positions of the
switches reset when the starting switch is
turned on.
Item
Operation
Work mode
AEB
Auto-deceleration
ONOFF
Wiper
Travel speed
OFFIntermittentON
HiLo
10-199
4
SENSOR
SENSOR
The signals from the sensors are input to the

panel directly. Either side of a sensor of contact type is always connected to the chassis
ground.
Sensor
name
Type of sensor
When
normal
When
abnormal
Engine oil
level
Contact
ON
(Closed)
OFF
(Open)
Engine oil
pressure
Contact
OFF
(Open)
ON
(Closed)
Hydraulic
oil temperature
Resistance
Coolant
temperature
Resistance
Fuel level
Resistance
Contact
OFF
(Closed)
ON
(Open)
Air cleaner
clogging
10-200
PC300-7
SENSOR
12

1. Connector
2. Bracket
3. Float
4. Switch
Engine oil pressure sensor (For low pressure)
1. Plug
2. Contact ring
3. Contact
4. Diaphragm
5. Spring
6. Terminal
Coolant temperature sensor

Hydraulic oil temperature sensor
1. Thermistor
2. Body
3. Tube
PC300-7
4. Tube
5. Wire
6. Connector
10-201
4
SENSOR
12
Fuel level sensor
1. Float
2. Connector
3. Cover
4. Variable resistor
10-202
PC300-7
SENSOR
12

1. Connector
2. Bracket
3. Float
4. Switch
Engine oil pressure sensor (For low pressure)
1. Plug
2. Contact ring
3. Contact
4. Diaphragm
5. Spring
6. Terminal
Coolant temperature sensor

1. Thermistor
2. Body
3. Tube
PC300-7
4. Tube
5. Wire
6. Connector
10-203
SENSOR
12
Fuel level sensor
1. Float
2. Connector
3. Cover
4. Variable resistor
10-204
PC300-7
20 TESTING AND ADJUSTING

STANDARD VALUE TABLE FOR ENGINE RELATED PARTS ................................................................. 20- 2
STANDARD VALUE TABLE FOR CHASSIS RELATED PARTS................................................................. 20- 3
TESTING AND ADJUSTING ...................................................................................................................... 20-101
TROUBLESHOOTING ................................................................................................................................ 20-201
Note the following when making judgements using the standard value tables for testing, adjusting, or troubleshooting.
1. The standard value for a new machine given in the table is the value used when shipping the machine from
the factory and is given for reference. It is used as a guideline for judging the progress of wear after the
machine has been operated, and as a reference value when carrying out repairs.
2. The service limit value given in the tables is the estimated value for the shipped machine based on the
results of various tests. It is used for reference together with the state of repair and the history of operation
to judge if there is a failure.
3. These standard values are not the standards used in dealing with claims.
k
k
k
k
When carrying out testing, adjusting, or troubleshooting, park the machine on level ground, insert the safety
pins, and use blocks to prevent the machine from moving.
When carrying out work together with other workers, always use signals and do not let unauthorized people
near the machine.
When checking the water level, always wait for the water to cool down. If the radiator cap is removed when
the water is still hot, the water will spurt out and cause burns.
Be careful not to get caught in the fan, fan belt or other rotating parts.
PC300/350(LC)-7
20-1
TESTING AND ADJUSTING
STANDARD VALUE TABLE FOR ENGINE RELATED PARTS
STANDARD VALUE TABLE FOR ENGINE RELATED PARTS
Item
Applicable model
PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-7
Engine
SAA6D114E-2
Measurement condition
Standard value
for new machine
Service limit
value
2,16070
2,16070
25
900 + 50
25
900 + 50
1,900
1,900
kPa
{mmHg.}
133160
{1,0001,200}
Max. 120
{Max. 900}
Bosch
index
Max. 4.5
Max. 6.5
Max. 1.0
Max. 2.0
0.30 0.05
0.56 0.05
Unit
High idle
Engine speed
Low idle
rpm
Rated speed
Intake air pressure
(boost pressure)
Exhaust gas color
Valve clearance
(Normal temperature)
At rated output
At sudden acceleration
At high idle
Intake valve
Exhaust valve
mm
Compression pressure
Oil temperature: 4060C

Engine speed: 250300rpm
MPa
{kg/cm2}
Min. 2.4
{Min. 24.6}
Difference
between cyinders
Min. 2.0
{Min. 20.5}
Max. 0.7
{Max. 6.9}
Blow-by pressure
(Coolant temperature: operating

range) At rated output
kPa
{mmH2O}
Max. 1.0
{Max. 100}
20
{200}
0.360.61
{3.56.0}
Min. 0.10
{Min. 1.0}
0.18
{1.8}
0.07
{0.7}
90120
120
(degree)
9.5
9.5
Oil pressure
(SAE15W-40)
(Coolant temperature: operating

range)
At high idle
MPa
{kg/cm2}
At low idle
Oil temperature
Whole speed range (inside oil pan)
Fuel injection timing
Before Top Dead Center
Fan belt tension
Deflection when pressed with finger

force of approx. 58.8 N{6 kg}
mm
Min. 6, Max. 10
Air conditioner
compressor belt tension
Deflection when pressed with finger

force of approx. 63.7 N {6.5 kg}
mm
58
58
20-2
(8)
PC300/350(LC)-7
STANDARD VALUE TABLE FOR CHASSIS RELATED PARTS

Applicable model
Operating force
of control levers
Travel of control
levers
Spool stroke
Engine speed
Category
Item
Measurement Condition
2 pumps at relief
Engine water temperature:

Within operation range
Hydraulic oil temperature: Within
operation range
Engine at high idling
Arm in relief condition
At 2-pump relief + one

touch power up
Engine water temperature:

Within operation range
operation range
Arm relief + One-touch power
max. switch in ON condition
Speed when autodeceleration is operated

Auto-deceleration switch in ON
condition
All control levers in NEUTRAL
condition
PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-7

Unit
rpm
Standard value
Permissible value
1,980100
1,980100
1,870100
1,870100
1,400100
1,400100
9.50.5
9.50.5
8510
8510
8510
8510
Boom control valve

Arm control valve
Bucket control valve
mm
Swing control valve

Travel control valve
Boom control lever
Engine stopped
At center of control lever grip
Max. reading up to stroke end
(excepting lever play in NEUTRAL position)
Arm control lever

Bucket control lever
Swing control lever
Travel control lever
mm
8510
8510
8510
8510
11512
11512
Play of control lever
Max. 10
Max. 15
Boom control lever
15.73.9
{1.60.4}
Max. 24.5
{Max. 2.5}
Arm control lever
15.73.9
{1.60.4}
Max. 24.5
{Max. 2.5}
12.72.9
{1.30.3}
Max. 21.6
{Max. 2.2}
12.72.9
{1.30.3}
Max. 21.6
{Max. 2.2}
Lever
24.55.9
{2.50.6}
Max. 39.2
{Max. 4.0}
Papel
74.518.6
{7.61.9}
Max. 107.6
{Max. 11}

operation range
At center of control lever grip
At tip in case of pedal
Max. reading up to stroke end

Swing control lever
PC300/350(LC)-7
N{kg}
20-3
Applicable model
Category
Item
Unload pressure
PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-7
Unit
Hydraulic oil temperature: Within operation range

Working mode: A mode
Hydraulic pump output pressure with all
control levers in NEUTRAL position
RAISE
At low-presoperation range
sure setting
At high-pres Working mode: A
sure setting
mode
Hydraulic pump output pressure with all
measurement circuits relieved
Values inside parenthesis: Hydraulic oil
pressure with one-touch power max.
switch in ON mode (reference only)
Hydraulic pressure
Arm
Bucket
Swing
Swing
20-4
3.91.0
{4010}
34.81 +1.47
0.98
33.3437.23
(37.26 +1.47
0.98 )
(35.8039.23)
18.130.98
{18510}
16.6619.6
{170200}
31.361.47
{32015}
29.433.32
{170200}
34.81 +1.47
0.98
33.3437.23
(37.26 +1.47
0.98 )
(35.8039.23)
+2.94
37.27 0.98
{380 +30
10 }
Engine running at high idling
Self-reducing pressure valve output pressure with all control levers in NEUTRAL
position
Hydraulic oil temperature: Within operation

range
Self-reducing pres- Engine at high idling
sure valve
Traveling speed: Hi
Hydraulic oil pump pressure - LS pressure
Swing brake angle
3.91.0
{4010}
+15
{340375(365400)}
{355 +15
10 (380 10 )}
MPa
{kg/cm2}
30.87 +1.47
28.4232.85
2.45
+15
{285335}
{315 25 }
Travel
Control circuit
source pressure
Permissible value
+15
{340375(365400)}
{355 +15
10 (380 10 )}
LOWER
Boom
Standard value
35.8040.70
{365415}
3.230.2
{332}
2.843.43
{2935}
When all control levers in

NEUTRAL
position
3.91.0
{4010}
3.91.0
{4010}
When traveling
at half stroke
(without load)
2.450.1
{251}
2.450.1
{251}
PC300, 300LC:
Max. 110
PC350, 350LC:
Max. 120
PC300, 300LC:
Max. 140
PC350, 350LC:
Max. 150

range
Swing circle misalignment amount when
stopping after one turn
deg.
(mm)
PC300/350(LC)-7
Applicable model
Category
Item
PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-7
Unit
Standard value
Permissible value
3.30.4
Max. 4.2
4.70.5
Max. 5.7
sec.
31.62.9
Max. 38
mm
/min
Max. 5.5
Max. 11
90
Time taken to start

swing
Swing
Time taken to
swing

range
Engine running at high
idling
Time required for passing
points 90 and 180
degrees from starting
point
sec.
180

Time required for 5 more turns after making initial one turn
15
BKP00103
Hydraulic drift of
swing
Leakage from
swing motor
PC300/350(LC)-7

Engine stopped
Keeping upper structure transverse on
slope of 15 degrees
Notching a mating mark on inner and
outer races of swing circle
Mating mark misalignment amount during
5 minutes
Swing lock switch: ON
Leakage amount for one minute during
swing relief
20-5
Applicable model
Category
Item
PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-7
Unit
Standard value
Permissible value
Lo
PC300, 350:
55.011.0
PC300LC, 350LC:
58.011.5
PC300, 350:
42.070.0
PC300LC, 350LC:
45.074.5
( Mi)
PC300, 350:
39.05.5
PC300LC, 350LC:
41.56.0
PC300, 350:
31.548.5
PC300LC, 350LC:
34.051.5
Hi
PC300, 350:
32.02.0
PC300LC, 350LC:
34.02.0
PC300, 350:
28.039.0
PC300LC, 350LC:
32.041.5
Lo
23.34.4
18.931.0
( Mi)
16.72.2
14.421.0
Hi
13.10.7
12.115.1
Max. 200
Max. 300
BKP00104
Travel speed (1)

operation range
Time required for track shoes to
make 5 turns after making one initial idle turn
sec.
45
BKP00105
Travel
Travel speed (2)

operation range
Flat ground
Time required for traveling 20 m
after 10 m trial run
45
BKP00105
Travel deviation

range
Travel speed: Lo
Solid and flat ground
Swerving amount while traveling 20 m (X)
after initial 10 m trial run
mm
20m
10m
BKP00107
: The Mi mode is on the multi-monitor specification machine only.
20-6
PC300/350(LC)-7
Applicable model
Category
Item
PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-7
Unit
Standard value
Permissible value
mm
/min
Max. 15
Max. 30
PC300, 300LC:
Max. 450
PC350, 350LC:
Max. 550
PC300, 300LC:
Max. 675
PC350, 350LC:
Max. 825
PC300, 300LC:
Max. 25
PC350, 350LC:
Max. 30
PC300, 300LC:
Max. 38
PC350, 350LC:
Max. 45
PC300, 300LC:
Max. 135
PC350, 350LC:
Max. 165
PC300, 300LC:
Max. 203
PC350, 350LC:
Max. 248
PC300, 300LC:
Max. 20
PC350, 350LC:
Max. 25
PC300, 300LC:
Max. 30
PC350, 350LC:
Max. 38
12
BKP00108
Travel
Hydraulic drift of travel
Hydraulic drift of work equipment
Work equipment
Leakage of travel motor

operation range
Engine stopped
Parking machine on slope of 12
degrees with sprocket facing
upslope
Sliding distance for 5 minutes
operation range
Traveling with sprocket locked
Oil leakage amount for one
minute with traveling in relief condition
Whole work equipment (tooth tip fall

amount)
Boom cylinder (cylinder retraction amount)
Arm cylinder (cylinder

extension amount)
Bucket cylinder (cylinder retraction amount)
PC300/350(LC)-7
BKP00110

operation range
Flat and level ground
Work equipment in measurement
posture as illustrated above
Bucket load: 2,160 kg
Engine stopped
Work equipment control lever in
NEUTRAL position
Fall amount for 15 minutes as
measured every 5 minutes starting immediately after initial setting
mm
20-7
RAISE
PC300, 300LC:
3.70.4
PC350, 350LC:
3.80.4
PC300, 300LC:
Max. 4.5
PC350, 350LC:
Max. 4.6
LOWER

operation range
Time required from raise stroke
end till bucket touches ground
Permissible value
2.50.3
Max. 3.0
IN
Work equipment speed
Work equipment
Boom
Standard value
3.80.4
Max. 4.5
OUT
Item
PC300, 300LC:
2.90.3
PC350, 350LC:
3.10.4
PC300, 300LC:
Max. 3.5
PC350, 350LC:
Max. 3.7
CURL
Category
PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-7
3.20.3
Max. 3.8
DUMP
Applicable model
Unit
2.30.3
Max. 2.9
Max. 3.0
Max. 3.6
Arm
operation range
Time required from dumping stroke
end to digging stroke end
sec.
Bucket
Time lag

operation range
Time required from dumping stroke
end to digging stroke end
20-8
BKP00114
Boom

range
Engine running at low idling
Time required from raise stroke end till
bucket touches ground and pushes up
machine front
sec.
PC300/350(LC)-7
Applicable model
Category
Item
PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-7
Unit
BKP00115
Time lag
Work equipment
Arm

range
Time required from dumping stroke end till
bucket stops momentarily after control
lever is tilted to digging and starts to move
again
PC300, 300LC:
Max. 3.0
PC350, 350LC:
Max. 4.0
PC300, 300LC:
Max. 3.6
PC350, 350LC:
Max. 4.6
Max. 3.0
Max. 5.0
4.5
20
10
50
Max. 400
Max. 440
BKP00116
Internal
leackage
Performance in compound operation
Permissible value
sec.

range
Time required from dumping stroke end till
bucket stops momentarily after control
lever is tilted to digging and starts to move
again
Cylinders
range
cc/min
Leakage amount for one minute with cylinCenter
der or travel to be measured in relief condiswivel joint
tion
Bucket
Performance of
hydraulic pump
Standard value
Swerving amount
in simultaneous
operation of work
equipment and
travel

range
Traveling speed: Lo
Flat and level ground
Swerving amount (X) when traveling 20 m
after initial trial run of 10 m
10m
Hydraulic pump
delivery
PC300/350(LC)-7
mm
20m
See next page
BKP00107
/min
See next page
20-9
Applicable model
Category
Item
PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-7
Unit
Standard value
Permissible value
Standard value
for discharge
amount Q
(/min)
Judgement
standard lower
limit Q
(/min)
See graph
See graph
Performance of hydraulic pump
Discharge amount of hydraulic pump (A mode)
Pump speed: At 1,950 rpm, PC current 280 mA
Check point
As desired
Test pump
discharge
pressure
(MPa {kg/cm2})
Discharge
pressure of
other pump
(MPa {kg/cm2})
P1
P2
Average
pressure
(MPa {kg/cm2})
P1+P2
2
As far as possible, bring pump discharge pressure P1 and P2 as close as possible to the average pressure
20-10
when measuring.
The error is large near the point where the graph curves, so avoid measuring at this point.
When measuring with the pump mounted on the machine, if it is impossible to set the engine speed to the specified speed with the fuel control dial, take the pump discharge amount and the engine speed at the point of
measurement, and use them as a base for calculating the pump discharge amount at the specified speed.
PC300/350(LC)-7

TOOLS FOR TESTING, ADJUSTING AND TROUBLESHOOTING ........................................................ 20-101-1
INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT OF ENGINE SPEED .......................................................................... 20-102
MEASUREMENT OF AIR BOOST PRESSURE......................................................................................... 20-104
MEASUREMENT OF EXHAUST GAS COLOR.......................................................................................... 20-105
ADJUSTMENT OF VALVE CLEARANCE................................................................................................... 20-106
MEASUREMENT OF COMPRESSION PRESSURE ................................................................................. 20-108
MEASUREMENT OF BLOW-BY PRESSURE............................................................................................ 20-109
INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT OF FUEL INJECTION TIMING........................................................... 20- 110
MEASUREMENT OF ENGINE OIL PRESSURE........................................................................................ 20- 112
ADJUSTMENT OF ENGINE SPEED SENSOR.......................................................................................... 20- 113
INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT OF AIR COMPRESSOR BELT TENSION.......................................... 20- 113
EMERGENT ESCAPE FROM FAILURE IN ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM............................................... 20- 114
MEASUREMENT OF CLEARANCE IN SWING CIRCLE BEARINGS........................................................ 20- 115
INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT OF TRACK SHOE TENSION ............................................................. 20- 116
INSPECTION OF WEAR ON SPROCKET ................................................................................................. 20- 116
INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT OF HYDRAULIC OIL PRESSURE
IN HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT FOR WORK EQUIPMENT, SWING AND TRAVEL .................................... 20- 117
INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT OF CONTROL CIRCUIT OIL PRESSURE......................................... 20-121
INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT OF PUMP PC CONTROL CIRCUIT OIL PRESSURE ....................... 20-122
INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT OF PUMP LS CONTROL CIRCUIT OIL PRESSURE........................ 20-125
MEASUREMENT OF SOLENOID VALVE OUTPUT PRESSURE .............................................................. 20-129
MEASUREMENT OF PPC VALVE OUTPUT PRESSURE ......................................................................... 20-132
ADJUSTMENT OF WORK EQUIPMENT AND SWING PPC VALVE ......................................................... 20-133
INSPECTION OF LOCATIONS OF HYDRAULIC DRIFT OF WORK EQUIPMENT................................... 20-134
RELEASE OF REMAINING PRESSURE IN HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT ......................................................... 20-135
MEASUREMENT OF OIL LEAKAGE AMOUNT ......................................................................................... 20-136
AIR BLEEDING OF VARIOUS PARTS ....................................................................................................... 20-138
INSPECTION PROCEDURES FOR DIODE............................................................................................... 20-140
SPECIAL FUNCTION OF MULTI-MONITOR PANEL ................................................................................. 20-141
SPECIAL FUNCTIONS OF 7-SEGMENTS MONITOR PANEL .................................................................. 20-165
PREPARATIONS FOR TROUBLESHOOTING ELECTRICAL SYSTEM.................................................... 20-178
PC300/350(LC)-7
20-101
(8)
TOOLS FOR TESTING, ADJUSTING AND TROUBLESHOOTING
Part No.
Intake pressure
(boost pressure)
1
2
1
B
2
799-205-1100
795-790-2600
799-201-2202
799-101-5210
Exhaust gas color
Test, measurement item

Engine speed
1
2
1
Engine valve clearance
Compression pressure
Blow-by pressure
Fuel injection timing
D 2
3
1
E
2
1
F
2
1
G 2
3
Part name
Tachometer kit
Take off drive
Boost gauge kit
Nipple
Handy smoke
799-201-9001
checker
Commercially
Smoke meter
available
795-799-1131 Gear
Commercially
Thickness gauge
available
795-799-1900 Pin assembly
795-790-3610 Compression gauge
795-790-3710 Tester
799-201-1504 Blow-by kit
795-790-3300 Tool (Nozzle)
795-799-1131 Gear
795-799-1900 Pin assembly
795-799-1950 Lock pin
799-101-5002 Hydraulic tester
Engine oil pressure
Qty
Symbol
1 Digital indication: 6 99,999.9 rpm

1
1 101 200 kPa {760 1,500 mmHg}
1 R1/4
1
Bosch index: 0 9
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 0 4.9 kPa {0 500 mmH2O}
1
1
1
1
Pressure gauge: 2.5, 5.9, 39.2, 58.8 MPa
1
{25, 60, 400, 600 kg/cm2}
Hydraulic tester
(Digital type)
2 799-401-2320 Hydraulic tester
6732-81-3170 Joint
3
6215-81-9710 O-ring
Commercially
J
Dial gauge
available
K 796-627-1130 Wear gauge
Hydraulic tester
790-261-1204
Swing circle bearing

clearance
Sprocket wear
Work equipment, swing,
799-101-5002
travel circuit hydraulic oil
1
pressure
790-261-1204
L
Control circuit oil pressure
799-101-5220
Pump PC control circuit
2
07002-11023
oil pressure
1 Pressure gauge: 58.8 MPa {600 kg/cm2}

1
1
1
1 10 x 1.25 mm
O-ring
20-101-1
(8)
Hydraulic tester
(Digital type)
M
799-101-5220 Nipple
2
07002-11023 O-ring
Differential pressure
3 799-401-2701
gauge
790-261-1204

{25, 60, 400, 600 kg/cm2}
Hydraulic tester
(Digital type)
Nipple

Pump LS control circuit
oil pressure
Remarks

{25, 60, 400, 600 kg/cm2}

1 10 x 1.25 mm
1
1
PC300/350(LC)-7
Part No.
Part name

Solenoid valve output
pressure
PPC valve output pressure

Internal oil leakage inside
hydraulic cylinder
Coolant temperature, oil
temperature
Operating force
Stroke, hydraulic drift
Work equipment speed
Voltage, resistance
Troubleshooting of sensors and wiring harnesses
PC300/350(LC)-7
Qty
Test, measurement item
Symbol
Remarks

{25, 60, 400, 600 kg/cm2}
Hydraulic tester
(Digital type)
2 790-401-3100 Adapter
3 799-401-3200 Adapter
790-261-1204

P
799-261-1204
Hydraulic tester
(Digital type)

1 02 size
1 03 size
1
{25, 60, 400, 600 kg/cm2}
Commercially
Cylinder
available
799-101-1502 Digital thermometer 1 99.9 1,299 C
79A-264-0021
79A-264-0091
Commercially
T
available
Commercially
U
available
Commercially
V
available
799-601-7400
799-601-7310
799-601-7320
799-601-7330
1
799-601-7340
W
799-601-7350
799-601-7360
799-601-7520
2 799-601-9000
3 799-601-9300
S
Push-pull scale
Push-pull scale
1 0 294 N {0 30 kg}
1 0 490 N {0 50 kg}
Scale
Stopwatch
Tester
T-adapter assembly
Adapter
Adapter
Adapter
Adapter
Adapter
Adapter
Adapter
T-adapter assembly
T-adapter assembly
1
1 For SWP-12
1 For SWP-16
1 For S-16(white)
For M-8
1 For S-12(white)
1 For relay (5-pin)
1 For AMP070-12
1 For DT connector
1 For DT connector (for 24, 40-pin)
20-101-2
(8)
INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT OF ENGINE SPEED

a Engine inspection and maintenance tools
Mark
1
A
2
Part No.
799-205-1100
795-790-2600
Part name
Tachometer kit
Take off drive
Inspection
1. Open up the engine hood and take off cover (1).
a Remove cover using filter wrench.
a Engine speed may be detected using a monitoring function in the monitor panel (special function
furnished to the monitor panel).
Multi monitor
2. Fit take off drive A2, and connect pickup set [1]
and tachometer [2] of tachometer kit A1.
7-Segment monitor
k Be careful not to touch the strongly heated por-
tion of the engine by accident while installing a

measurement equipment.
20-102
(8)
3. Measure the engine speed after setting each

measurement condition.
1) Engine speed at low idle:
i) Set the fuel dial at low idle (MIN).
ii) Move all the control levers of work
equipment, swing and travel to the
NEUTRAL position.
2) Engine speed at high idle:
i) Turn the auto-decelerator OFF.
ii) Set the fuel dial at high idle (MAX).
iii) Operate any of the work equipment,
swing and travel control levers.
a Operate the lever lightly enough to turn
on the PPC hydraulic switch, but not to
start the work equipment, swing or travel.
3) Engine speed at fuel pump relief
i) Set the fuel dial at high idle (MAX)
ii) Put the arm in the digging relief position.
PC300/350(LC)-7
4) Engine speed when 2 pump relief and onetouch power max. switch are set (near rated
engine speed)
i) Set the fuel dial at high idle (MAX).
ii) Put the arm in digging relief position and
keep the one-touch max. power switch
depressed.
a The one-touch power max. function is
automatically released in 8.5 seconds,
even if the knob switch is kept depressed. Take measurement during the
period.
5) Engine speed when auto-decelerator is set
i) Turn the auto-decelerator ON.
ii) Set the fuel dial at high idle (MAX).
iii) Move all the control levers of work
equipment, swing and travel to the
NEUTRAL position.
a Approx. 5 seconds after all the control
levers are moved to the NEUTRAL position, the engine speed falls automatically. That is when the engine speed
with the auto-decelerator in motion
should be measured.
Adjustment
1. Adjustment of engine speed at low idle
a If the engine speed at low idle deviates from
the standard value, make adjustment using
the adjustment function provided in the monitor panel.
a For the adjustment procedures, refer to the
section, "Special Function of Monitor Panel"
2. Adjustment of Governor Spring
a If the engine speed at high idle deviates from
the standard value, or it is unsteady (hunting), adjust the governor spring securing dimensions, using the adjustment function in
the monitor panel.
a For the adjustment procedures, refer to the
section, "Special Function of Monitor Panel"
4. Detach all the measurement tools after the

inspection, and make sure that the machine is
back to normal condition.
PC300/350(LC)-7
20-103
(8)
MEASUREMENT OF AIR BOOST PRESSURE
MEASUREMENT OF AIR BOOST PRESSURE

a Air boost pressure measurement tool
Mark
1
B
2
Part No.
799-201-2202
799-101-5210
Part name
Boost gauge kit
Fitting (R1/4)
1. Open up the engine hood.
6. Take measurement of air boost pressure at high

idle after setting the following measurement
conditions.
Swing lock switch: ON (High pressure relief)
Work equipment, swing and travel: Arm digging relief
2. Remove air boost pressure measurement plug

(1).
7. Detach the measurement tool after the measurement, and return the machine to the normal
condition.
3. Install fitting B2 and connect it with gauge [1] of
air boost gauge kit B1.
4. Start the engine and wait for the engine coolant

temperature and hydraulic oil temperature to
rise to the operation range.
5. Run the engine at a medium speed and drain oil
in the hose.
a Oil can be drained by inserting the gauge
into the hose halfway and then repeating to
open and close the self- seal on the hose
side.
a If Pm Kit (A) is available, an air bleeding coupling (790-261-1130) included in the kit may
well be used.
a Be sure to drain oil thoroughly. If there is oil
remaining in the hose, the gauge does not
function properly.
20-104
(8)
PC300/350(LC)-7
MEASUREMENT OF EXHAUST GAS COLOR
MEASUREMENT OF EXHAUST GAS COLOR

a Exhaust gas color measurement tool
Mark
Part No.
1
799-201-9001
C
2 Commercial product
Part name
Handy smoke checker
Smoke meter
k Be careful not to touch the highly heated parts,
while fitting and detaching a measurement tool.

a If no compressed air or power is not available in
the field, use Handy Smoke Checker C1. For recording official data, use Smoke Meter C2.
1. Measurement with Handy Smoke Checker C1
1) Fit a filtering paper to Handy Smoke Checker
C1.
2) Insert the exhaust gas intake pipe into the
exhaust pipe.
3) Start the engine and keep it running until the
engine coolant temperature comes within
the operating range.
4) Let the exhaust gas stay on the filtering
paper by operating a handle of Handy
Smoke Checker C1, when the engine speed
is suddenly accelerated or kept at high idle.
5) Take out the filtering paper and compare it

with the attached scale for judgement.
6) Detach the measurement tool after the
measurement, and make sure the machine
is back to normal condition.
2. Measurement with Smoke Meter C2
1) Insert probe [1] of the Smoke Meter C2 into
the exhaust gas pipe outlet, and fasten it to
the outlet with a clip.
PC300/350(LC)-7
2) Connect the probe hose, accelerator switch

outlet and air hose to the Smoke Meter C2.
a Keep the pressure of the supplied compressed air below 1.5 MPa {15 kg/cm2}.
3) Connect the power cable to an outlet of AC
socket.
a Confirm that the Smoke Meter power
switch is in the OFF position, before connecting the power cable to an outlet.
4) Fit a filtering paper by loosening the suction
pump cap nut.
a Fit the filtering paper securely so that air
may not leak.
5) Move the Smoke Meter C2 power switch to
the ON position.

engine coolant temperature rises to the
operating range.
7) Let the exhaust gas stay on the filtering
paper by depressing the accelerator pedal
of Smoke Meter C2, when the engine speed
is suddenly accelerated or kept at high idle.
8) Put the polluted filtering paper on non-polluted filtering paper (more than 10 sheets) in
the filtering paper holder, and read the indicated value.
9) Detach the measurement tool after the
measurement, and make sure that the
machine is back to normal condition.
20-105
(8)
ADJUSTMENT OF VALVE CLEARANCE

a Valve clearance adjustment tools
Mark
Part No.
1
795-799-1131
D 2 Commercial product
3
795-799-1900
Part name
Gear
Thickness gauge
Pin assembly
a After setting the No. 1 cylinder to the top

dead center, stamp a counter mark on the
crank pulley and the front cover.
1. Open up the engine hood and remove air intake

connector (1).
2. Remove cylinder head covers (2).
5. When No. 1 cylinder is at the top dead center,

adjust valve clearances indicated with a black
bullet mark (z) in the valve layout chart in the
following manner.
Valve layout chart
3. Take off cap (3) and fit gear D1.
4. Turn the crankshaft clockwise (normal rotation)

with gear D1 until yellow paint mark "a" on the
crank pulley comes up to the top. Then set the
No. 1 cylinder to the top dead center with timing
pin (4).
a When No. 1 cylinder is at the top dead center, its rocker arm can be manually moved as
much as the valve clearance. If it cannot be
moved, that means that No. 1 cylinder is not
yet at the top dead center. In that case, rotate it by one more turn.
a Timing pin push-in depth: 8 mm
a If it proves difficult to make this check with
the timing pin installed in the engine, metallic
pin assembly D3 may be used instead.
20-106
(8)
1) Insert thickness gauge D2 in between

rocker arm (5) and valve stem (6), and
adjust the valve clearance "b" with adjusting
screw (7).
a For the adjustment, turn the adjusting
screw with filler gauge D2 inserted to the
extent that filler gauge D2 can be lightly
moved.
2) Fix adjusting screw (7) and then tighten lock
nut (8).
3 Lock nut: 244 Nm{2.450.41kgm}
a Check the valve clearance again after
tightening lock nut (8).
a Return timing pin (4) to the original position
and proceed to the next step, once all the
measurements of valve clearance indicated
with a black bullet mark (z) have been completed.
PC300/350(LC)-7

with gear D1 so as to match the counter marks
on the crank pulley and the front cover, and
bring up No. 6 cylinder to the top dead center.
7. When No. 6 cylinder is at the top dead center,
adjust valve clearances indicated with a white
bullet mark ({) in the valve layout chart.
a The adjustment procedures are the same as
introduced in Item 5 above.
8. After the adjustment, make sure that the
3 Cylinder head cover securing bolt:
24 4 Nm {2.45 0.41 kgm}
PC300/350(LC)-7
20-107
(7)
MEASUREMENT OF COMPRESSION PRESSURE
MEASUREMENT OF COMPRESSION PRESSURE

a Compression pressure measurement tools
Mark
1
E
2
Part No.
795-790-3610
795-790-3710
Part name
Compression gauge
Tester
k Be careful not to get burnt by touching the ex-
haust manifold or muffler, or get caught with a

rotating parts, while taking measurement of
compression pressure.
1. Adjust the valve clearances.
a For the adjustment, refer to the section, "Adjustment of Valve Clearance".
7. Crank up the engine with the engine starting

motor, and measure the compression pressure.
a Read off the value, when the needle of the
compression gauge steadies itself.
a When taking measurement of the compression pressure, be sure to measure the engine rpm, too, so that it stays within the range
of designated measurement conditions.
8. Detach the measurement tools after the measurement, and make sure that the machine is
2 Nozzle holder rubber boot:
Engine oil (EO10-CD)
2. Make preparations for measuring the engine

rpm.
a For the preparations, refer to the section, "Inspection and adjustment of engine speed".
3. Warm up the engine until the engine oil temperature rises up to 40 60C.
4. Detach nozzle holder (1) of a cylinder to be
measured.
5. Fit compression gauge E1 to the nozzle holder

mounting.
6. Disconnect E10 connector (2) of the engine stop
solenoid.
20-108
(8)
PC300/350(LC)-7
MEASUREMENT OF BLOW-BY PRESSURE
MEASUREMENT OF BLOW-BY PRESSURE

a Blow-by pressure measurement tools
Mark
1
F
2
Part No.
799-201-1504
795-790-3300
Part name
Blow-by kit
Tool (Nozzle)
1. Remove the engine under cover.

2. Fit tool F2 to blow-by hose (1) and connect it
with gauge [1] of blow-by kit F1.
3. Start the engine and keep it running until the

engine coolant temperature rises to the operating range.
4. Measure the blow-by pressure at high idle and
under the following conditions.
Swing lock switch: ON (High pressure relief)
Work equipment, swing and travel:
Arm IN relief
a Read off the blow-by pressure value, when
the needle of the gauge steadies itself.
PC300/350(LC)-7
20-109
(8)
INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT OF FUEL INJECTION TIMING

a Fuel injection timing inspection and adjustment
tools
Mark
1
G 2
3
Part No.
795-799-1131
795-799-1900
795-799-1950
Part name
Gear
Pin assembly
Lock pin
Inspection
2. Take off cover (1) and fit gear G1.

with gear G1 until yellow paint mark "a" on the
crank pulley comes up to the top. Then set the
No. 1 cylinder to the top dead center with timing
pin (2).
a Remove the head cover and check that No.
1 cylinder rocker arm moves as much as the
valve clearance. If not, that means that the
No. 1 cylinder is not yet at the top dead center. In that case, turn the crankshaft by one
more turn.
a Timing pin push-in depth: 8 mm
a If the pin cannot be pushed in, turn the crankshaft slightly back and forth with gear G1.
a If it proves difficult to make this checking with
the pin installed in the engine, metallic pin
assembly G2 may be used instead.
20-110
(8)
4. Disconnect plug (3) of the fuel injection pump.

5. Reverse and push in timing pin (4) of the fuel
injection pump, and confirm its cut-out portion
matches with protruding portion "b" inside the
pump.
a If timing pin (4) can be pushed in smoothly,
then injection timing is correct.
a If timing pin (4) cannot be pushed in smoothly, injection timing is incorrect and requires
adjustment.
a If it is found difficult to confirm the push-in
depth with timing pin (4) as installed in the
engine, metallic pin ass'y G3 may well be
used instead.
3 Cylinder head cover securing bolt:
24 4 Nm {2.45 0.45 kgm}
k Do not forget to bring driving gear timing pin
(4) and injection pump timing pin (4) back to
the pre-inspection condition.
a In case the adjustment follows, leave gear
G1 and timing pin (2) as they are.
PC300/350(LC)-7
Adjustment
a If fuel injection timing is found incorrect, adjust it
in the following manner.
1. Confirm that drive gear injection timing is fixed
with driving gear timing pin (2).
a If timing pin was pulled back after the inspection had been completed, push it in again following the foregoing inspection procedures.
4. Mount the fuel injection pump.

a For mounting the pump, refer to the same
section mentioned in Item 2 above.
5. Detach the measurement tools after the adjustment, and make sure that the machine is back
to normal condition.
k Before starting the engine again, check that
driving gear timing pin (2) and fuel injection
pump timing pin (4) have been brought back
to the pre-adjustment condition.
2. Dismantle the fuel injection pump.

a For dismantling the fuel injection pump, refer
to the section, "FUEL INJECTION PUMP
ASSEMBLY" in the chapter of "DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY".
3. Reverse and push in timing pin (4) of the fuel
injection pump, then match the pin cut-out portion and protruding portion "b" inside the fuel
injection pump by turning the shaft.
a After fuel timing has been set, fix it by fitting
plug (3).
PC300/350(LC)-7
20-111
MEASUREMENT OF ENGINE OIL PRESSURE
MEASUREMENT OF ENGINE OIL PRESSURE

a Engine oil pressure measurement tools
Mark
1
H
Part No.
799-101-5002
790-261-1204
799-401-2320
6732-81-3170
6215-81-9710
Part name
Hydraulic tester
Digital type
hydraulic tester
Hydraulic tester
(1.0 MPa {10 kg/cm2})
Joint
O-ring
4. Measure engine oil pressure at low idle as well

as at high idle.
1. Remove hydraulic measurement plug (1) on the

cylinder block.
2. Install joint H3, then fix nipple [1] and connect it

with hydraulic tester H2.

engine coolant temperature rises to the operating range.
20-112
(8)
PC300/350(LC)-7
ADJUSTMENT OF ENGINE SPEED SENSOR

INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT OF AIR COMPRESSOR BELT TENSION
ADJUSTMENT OF ENGINE
SPEED SENSOR
INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT OF AIR COMPRESSOR

BELT TENSION
a Detach engine speed sensor (1) before the adjustment, then check that there is no metal dust
stuck or damage at the tip and fit it again.
Inspection
Check belt deflection amount "a" when depressing
the mid point between the fan pulley and the compressor with a thumb.
Belt depressing force:
Equivalent to 63.7 N {6.5 kg}
1. Screw in sensor (1) until its tip comes to contact

with the tip of flywheel ring gear teeth (2).
3 Threaded portion:
Gasket sealant (LG-6)
2. Screw back sensor (1) from that position by the
prescribed angle.
a Screw-back angle: 11/6 turn
a Adjust clearance "a" between the sensor tip
and gear tooth tip to be 1.251.75 mm.
3. Fasten sensor (1) with nut (3).
3 Nut: 49.0 68.6 Nm {5 7 kgm}
Adjustment
a If the belt deflection amount is not proper, adjust
it in the following manner.
1. Loosen two compressor bracket securing bolts
(1) (upper and lower).
2. Shift compressor mounting bracket (1) to adjust
the belt tension.
3. Tighten two compressor bracket (1) securing
bolts.
a Check the belt tension again after the adjustment.
4. After the adjustment, confirm that correct engine

speed is displayed in the monitor panel, using
the special monitoring function.
a For monitoring engine speed, refer to the
section, "Special function of monitor panel".
PC300/350(LC)-7
20-113
(8)
EMERGENT ESCAPE FROM FAILURE IN ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM
EMERGENT ESCAPE FROM FAILURE IN ENGINE CONTROL

SYSTEM
a If a failure occurs on any of the engine control devices like fuel dial, governor pump controller or
governor motor potentiometer, and the engine
gets out of control, first fix the engine speed and
take the following steps to avoid the immediate
danger.
a The suggested steps are provisional ones. Identify the cause for the failure and carry out repairs
promptly thereafter.
3. Remove bolt (4), connect governor spring (3)

and fix it at the original position.
a Tilt the governor motor lever to the fuel injection pump side, but stop short of the governor spring.
a The governor lever of the fuel injection pump
is fixed at a near-idle position.
1. Disconnect E11 connector (1) of the governor

motor from E10 connector (2) of the governor
potentiometer.
k If the governor motor potentiometer connector is left connected, the governor motor
will be suddenly activated while the engine
is running, causing a mechanical damage.
Be sure to disconnect it.
4. Start the engine again and travel the machine to

a safe place.
5. Disconnect E10 connector (5) of the engine stop
solenoid.
k Operation of stopping the engine is to be
carried out while the engine is running at
high speed. Be careful not to touch the parts
of high temperature or get caught in rotating
parts.
2. Detach governor spring (3) on the governor
motor side.
20-114
(8)
PC300/350(LC)-7
MEASUREMENT OF CLEARANCE IN SWING CIRCLE BEARINGS
MEASUREMENT OF CLEARANCE IN SWING CIRCLE BEARINGS

a Swing circle bearing clearance measurement
tools
Mark
Part No.
J
Commercial product
Part name
Dial gauge
a Follow the steps explained below, when measuring clearance in the swing circle bearing in the
actual machine.
k Be careful not to put a hand or foot under the undercarriage, while taking measurement.
4. Hold the arm nearly perpendicular to the

ground, and lower the boom until the track
shoes will be lifted at the machine front.
a The upper structure is raised at the front and
lowered at the rear at that time.
5. Read off the value in dial gauge J in this condition.
a The value indicated in dial gauge J expresses clearance in the bearings.
1. Fasten dial gauge J to swing circle outer race

(1) or inner race (2), and contact the probe with
the end surface of inner race (2) or outer race
(1) on the opposite side.
a Set dial gauge J at the machine front or rear.
6. Return the machine to the posture in Item 2

above, and confirm reading of dial gauge J is
zero.
a If zero value is not indicated, repeat the
steps in Items 3 through 5.
2. Keep the work equipment in the max. reach posture and keep the height of the bucket teeth tip
level with the lower height of the revolving
frame.
a The upper structure is lowered at the front
and raised at the rear at that time.
3. Set dial gauge J at zero point.
PC300/350(LC)-7
20-115
(8)
INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT OF TRACK SHOE TENSION

INSPECTION OF WEAR ON SPROCKET
INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT OF TRACK SHOE

TENSION
INSPECTION OF WEAR ON
SPROCKET
Inspection
1. Travel the machine forward by the length of
track on ground, keeping the engine at low idle,
and stop the machine slowly.
a Inspection tool for sprocket wear

Mark
K
Part No.
796-627-1130
Part name
Wear gauge
2. Place straight bar [1] on the track shoe between

the idler and the 1st carrier roller.
a L beam is recommended for bar [1], because
of its deflection-free nature.
3. Measure max. clearance "a" between bar [1]
and the track shoe.
Max. standard clearance a: 10 30 mm
Adjustment
a If the track shoe tension is not proper, adjust it in
the following manner.
1. When the tension is too strong
Discharge grease by loosening valve (1).
k Do not loosen valve (1) by more than one
turn, because grease will spurt out due to its
internal high pressure.
2. When the tension is too weak
Add grease through grease fitting (2).
a If the normal track shoe tension is not restored even after greasing, move the machine slowly back and forth.
20-116
(8)
PC300/350(LC)-7
INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT OF HYDRAULIC OIL PRESSURE IN

HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT FOR WORK EQUIPMENT, SWING AND TRAVEL
INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT OF HYDRAULIC OIL PRESSURE IN HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT FOR WORK EQUIPMENT, SWING
AND TRAVEL
a Inspection and adjustment tools for hydraulic oil
pressure in hydraulic circuit for work equipment,
swing and travel
Mark
1
Part No.
799-101-5002
790-261-1204
L
2
799-101-5220
07002-11023
Part name
Hydraulic tester
Digital type
hydraulic tester
Nipple
(10 x 1.25 mm)
O-ring
a Hydraulic oil pressure in the hydraulic circuit for

work equipment, swing and travel (hydraulic
pump output pressure) may be also confirmed
with a monitoring function in the monitor panel
(special function of monitor panel).
Measurement
1. Pre-measurement work
k Lower the work equipment to the ground,
then release the remaining pressure in the
piping by operating the control lever several
times after stopping the engine, and release
the pressure inside the hydraulic tank by
gradually loosening the oil filler cap.
1) Remove hydraulic oil pressure measuring
plugs (1) and (2).
Plug (1): For the circuit of front hydraulic
pump (at the machine rear part)
Plug (2): For the circuit of rear hydraulic
pump (at the machine front part)
PC300/350(LC)-7
2) Fit nipple L2 and connect it to oil pressure

gauge [1] of hydraulic tester L1.
a Use an oil pressure gauge with the capacity of 58 MPa {600 kg/cm2}.

hydraulic oil temperature rises to the operating range.
20-117
(8)

2. Combination of pump, actuator and valve

a You will know that when oil flow from the
pumps is divided, the front and rear pumps
work independently of each other for each
actuator, as well as that different relief valves
are activated then.
a Oil flow from the pumps is merged in the single pressure relief when the work equipment
swings, while it is divided in the single pressure relief when the machine travels.
a The actuators in the table below are arranged in the order that the control valves
are viewed from the machine front.
Pump
Actuator
Relieved valve
(Front unload valve) (Front main relief valve)
Service
Service safety valve
Boom Hi
Front main relief valve
Arm Hi
Front
Bucket
Front main relief valve
Left travel Front main relief valve
Raise: Front main relief valve
Boom
Lower: Safety-suction valve
(Merge-divider valve) (Travel junction valve)
(Self-reducing pressure valve)
Swing
Swing motor safety valve
Rear Right travel Rear main relief valve
Arm Lo
Rear main relief valve
(Rear unload valve) (Rear main relief valve)
(Centralized safety valve) (Back pressure valve)
a Except in boom LOWER, the constant 2stage relief solenoid valve is turned ON and
the relief pressure of high pressure is indicated, when the swing lock switch is turned ON.
For this reason, keep the swing lock switch in
the OFF position, while in the measurement.
a In boom LOWER, pressure when the safety
valve is relieved is indicated.
a The relief pressure in boom LOWER is lower
than the main relief pressure.
a In boom LOWER, the relief pressure of low
pressure is indicated if the machine push-up
switch is turned OFF, and the relief pressure
of high pressure is indicated if it is turned ON.
5. Measurement of swing relief pressure
1) Start the engine and move the swing lock
switch to the ON position.
2) Measure hydraulic oil pressure when the
engine is running at high idle and the swing
circuit is relieved.
a Hydraulic oil pressure when the swing motor
safety valve is relieved is displayed.
a The swing motor relief pressure is lower than
the main relief pressure.
6. Measurement of travel circuit relief pressure
1) Start the engine and lock travel.
k Put pin [2] in between the sprocket and the
track frame to make sure locking travel.
3. Measurement of Unload Pressure

1) Start the engine.
2) Measure hydraulic oil pressure, when the
engine is running at high idle and all the
control levers are moved to the NEUTRAL
position.
a Hydraulic oil pressure when the unload valve
unloads is displayed.
4. Measurement of work equipment relief pressure
1) Start the engine and move the cylinder to be
measured to its stroke end.
2) Measure hydraulic oil pressure, when the
engine is running at high idle and the cylinder is in relief condition.
a Except in boom LOWER, the relief pressure
of the main relief valve is indicated.
a Except in boom LOWER, the relief pressure
of low pressure is indicated when the onetouch power max. switch is not depressed
and the relief pressure of high pressure is indicated, when it is depressed.
20-118
(8)
2) Measure hydraulic oil pressure when the

engine is running at high idle and the travel
circuit is relieved.
a Hydraulic oil pressure with the main relief
valve in relief condition is displayed. In the
travel circuit relief, the pressure is high pressure relief all the time.
PC300/350(LC)-7

Adjustment
a The unload valve cannot be adjusted.
1. Adjustment of main relief pressure
a If relief pressure in the work equipment and
travel circuits is not normal, adjust the high
pressure setting side of main relief valves (3)
and (4) in the following manner.
(3): For the front main relief valve
(4): For the rear main relief valve
a The main relief valve adjusts the relief pressure of high pressure. (When the relief pressure of low pressure is adjusted, the relief
pressure of high pressure is also adjusted
automatically)
a The relief pressure of low pressure is such
condition that the 2-stage relief solenoid
valve is in the OFF position and no pilot pressure is applied to the switching port.
1) Disconnect the pilot hose.

2) Fix holder (6) and loosen lock nut (5).
3) Adjust the pressure by turning holder (6).
a If the holder is turned to the right, the
pressure rises.
If the holder is turned to the left, the pressure falls.
a Adjustment amount per turn of holder:
Approx. 20.5 MPa{approx. 209 kg/cm2}
4) Fix holder (6) and tighten lock nut (5).
3 Lock nut:
49.058.8 Nm{56 kgm}
PC300/350(LC)-7
5) Connect the pilot hose.

6) Check the pressure again after the adjustment, following the aforementioned steps
for measurement.
2. Adjustment of relief pressure in boom
LOWER (High pressure setting side)
a If the relief pressure of high pressure in
boom LOWER is not normal, adjust the high
pressure setting side of safety and suction
valve (7) for boom LOWER in the following
manner.
a The relief pressure of high pressure is such
condition that the machine push-up switch is
in the ON position, and the switching port
and the pilot pressure do not function.
1) Disconnect pilot hose.

pressure rises.
a Adjustment amount per turn of holder:
Approx. 21.8 MPa{approx. 222 kg/cm2}
3 Lock nut:
93123 Nm{9.512.5 kgm}
20-119
(7)


for measurement.
a If high pressure setting side is adjusted,
low pressure setting side is also affected, so adjust it, too.
3. Adjustment of relief pressure in boom
LOWER (Low pressure setting side)
a If the relief pressure of low pressure in boom
LOWER is not normal, or the high pressure
setting side has been adjusted, adjust the
low pressure setting side of safety and suction valve for boom LOWER in the following
manner.
a The relief pressure of low pressure is such
condition that the machine push-up switch is
in the OFF position, and the pilot pressure is
applied to the switching port.
1) Disconnect the pilot hose.
a Turn the holder:
To the right to increase the pressure
To the left to lower the pressure
a Adjustment volume of holder per turn:
Approx. 21.8 MPa{Approx. 222 kg/cm2}
3 Lock nut: 7893 Nm{8.09.5 kgm}

for measurement.
20-120
(7)
4. Adjustment of swing relief pressure

a If the swing relief pressure is not normal, adjust it with swing motor safety valve (12) in
1) Fix adjusting screw (14) and loosen lock nut

(13).
2) Adjust the pressure by turning adjusting
screw (14).
pressure rises.
a Adjustment amount per turn of adjusting
screw:
Approx. 4.70 MPa{approx. 47.9 kg/cm2}
3) Fix adjusting screw (14) and tighten lock nut
(13).
3 Lock nut:
147196 Nm{1520 kgm}
for measurement.
PC300/350(LC)-7
INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT OF CONTROL CIRCUIT OIL PRESSURE
INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT OF CONTROL CIRCUIT OIL

PRESSURE
a Control circuit oil pressure inspection and adjustment tools
Mark
1
Part No.
799-101-5002
790-261-1204
L
2
799-101-5220
07002-11023
Part name
Hydraulic tester
Digital type
hydraulic tester
Nipple
(10 x 1.25 mm)
O-ring

hydraulic oil temperature rises to the operating
range.
4. Measure oil pressure with the engine running at
high idle and all the control levers in the NEUTRAL position.
Measurement
k Lower the work equipment to the ground and
stop the engine. After the engine stops, operate
the control lever several times to release the remaining pressure in the piping. Then loosen the
oil filler cap to release the pressure inside the hydraulic tank.
1. Remove oil pressure measurement plug (1).
5. Detach all the measurement tools after the measurement, and make sure that the machine is
a Do not attempt to adjust the control circuit oil
pressure relief valve.
2. Fit nipple L2 and connect it to oil pressure

a Use an oil pressure gauge with the capacity
of 5.9 MPa {60 kg/cm2}.
PC300/350(LC)-7
20-121
(8)
INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT OF PUMP PC CONTROL

CIRCUIT OIL PRESSURE

a Pump PC control circuit oil pressure inspection
and adjustment tools
Mark
1
Part No.
799-101-5002
790-261-1204
L
2
799-101-5220
07002-11023
1. Measurement of PC valve output pressure

(servo piston inlet pressure)
a Measure PC valve output pressure (servo
piston inlet pressure) and pump delivery
pressure together, and compare the two
pressures.
1) Remove oil pressure measurement plugs
(1), (2), (3) and (4).
Plug (1): For measuring the front pump
delivery pressure (at the machine rear
part)
Plug (2): For measuring the rear pump
delivery pressure (at the machine front
part)
(8)
Part name
Hydraulic tester
Digital type
hydraulic tester
Nipple
(10 x 1.25 mm)
O-ring
Measurement
a Implement measuring the pump PC control circuit oil pressure after confirming that the work
equipment, swing and travel circuit oil pressure
as well as the control circuit original oil pressure
are normal.
20-122

PC valve delivery pressure
PC valve delivery pressure
2) Fit nipple L2 and connect to oil pressure

a Use an oil pressure gauge with the capacity of 58.8 MPa {600 kg/cm2}.
Photo shows pump delivery pressure side.
Photo shows PC valve output pressure side.
PC300/350(LC)-7


2. Measurement of PC-EPC output pressure

1) Remove oil pressure measurement plug (5).
a The plug is fitted at the machine front.
4) Measure the pump delivery pressure and

PC valve output pressure (servo piston inlet
pressure) together with the engine running
at high idle, after setting the machine at the
following conditions.
Swing lock switch: ON (switched to high
pressure relief with 2-stage relief turned
ON)
Work equipment, swing and travel circuit: Arm digging relief
a Judgement method:
When the ratio between the pump delivery pressure and PC valve output pressure (servo piston output pressure)
reaches the following values, both pressures are judged normal.
2) Fit nipple L2 and connect it to oil pressure

Pressure to be
measured
Pump delivery
pressure
PC valve outlet
pressure
Pressure ratio
1

hydraulic oil pressure rises to the operating
range.
Approx. 0.6
a If there is any abnormality with PC valve

or servo piston, the PC valve output
pressure (servo piston output pressure)
equals to the pump delivery pressure, or
approximates to 0 pressure.
PC300/350(LC)-7
20-123
(8)

4) Measure the hydraulic oil pressure with all

the control levers kept in the NEUTRAL
position and the engine running at high idle
and at low idle.
a If PC-EPC valve output pressure changes to the following values, it is judged
normal.
Engine
speed
Control
lever
Low idle
Neutral
High idle
Hydraulic oil
pressure
2.9 MPa
{30 kg/cm2}
0 MPa
{0 kg/cm2}
Adjustment
a If any of the phenomena mentioned below occurs and PC valve malfunctioning is suspected,
adjust PC valves (6) and (7) in the following manner.
As workload increases, the engine speed
sharply drops.
While the engine speed is normal, the work
equipment moves slowly.
(6): Front pump PC valve
(7): Rear pump PC valve
a The width across flats of the locknut for the PC
valve is 13 mm and that of the adjustment screw
(inside width) is 4 mm. Do not turn any other locknut or adjustment screw since it has effects on
the performance of the hydraulic pumps.
2. Turn adjustment screw (9) to the right or left to

adjust.
a Turn the adjustment screw in the following
directions.
In the work equipment speed is low, turn
the adjustment screw to the right (to increase the pump absorption torque).
If the engine speed lowers, turn the adjustment screw to the left (to decrease
the pump absorption torque).
3. Tighten lock nut (8).
3 Lock nut:
27.50 34.3 Nm {2.83.5 kgm}
4. Confirm that the PC valve output pressure

(servo piston inlet pressure) is normal after the
adjustment, following the measurement steps
explained earlier.
1. Loosen lock nut (8).

a Before loosening the lock nut, make match
marks at the adjustment screw end so that
you can see the position of the lock nut before the adjustment (and you can return the
lock nut to its original position after turning it
in reverse).
20-124
(8)
PC300/350(LC)-7
INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT OF PUMP LS CONTROL


a Pump LS control circuit oil pressure inspection
and adjustment tools
Mark
1
M
Part No.
799-101-5002
790-261-1204
799-101-5220
07002-11023
799-401-2701
Part name
Hydraulic tester
Digital type
hydraulic tester
Nipple
(10 x 1.25 mm)
O-ring
Differential pressure
gauge
Measurement
a Measure pump LS control circuit oil pressure after confirming that the work equipment, swing
and travel circuit oil pressure as well as control
circuit original pressure are normal.
1. Measurement of LS valve output pressure
(servo piston inlet pressure)
a Measure LS valve output pressure (servo
piston inlet pressure) and pump delivery
pressure together, and compare both pressures thereafter.
(1), (2), (3) and (4).
Plug (1): For measuring the front pump delivery pressure (at the machine rear part)
Plug (2): For measuring the rear pump delivery pressure (at the machine front part)
PC300/350(LC)-7

LS valve delivery pressure
LS valve delivery pressure
2) Fit nipple M2 and connect it to oil pressure

gauge [1] of hydraulic tester M1.
Photo shows LS valve output pressure side.
20-125
(8)

3) Run the engine and raise the hydraulic oil

temperature to the operating range and
push up the track shoe on the side to be
measured with the work equipment.
For measuring oil pressure in front circuit: Right track shoe
For measuring oil pressure in rear circuit: Left track shoe
k Provide a working area of sufficient space,
as the raised track shoe will be idly rotated.
4) Measure pump delivery pressure and PC

valve output pressure (servo piston inlet
pressure) together with the machine set at
the following conditions and the engine running at high idle.
All the control levers of the work equipment, swing and travel are kept in the
NEUTRAL position and the travel control
lever is kept at half stroke (one side of
the track shoes idly rotates).
a Let the raised track shoe idly rotate, paying enough attention to the surroundings
for safety.
a Judgement method:
When the ratio between the pump delivery pressure and LS valve output pressure (servo piston output pressure)
reaches the following values, both pressures are judged normal.
Oil pressure ratio
Oil pressure to be
All control levers Travel at half
measured
in NEUTRAL
stroke
Pump delivery
1
pressure
Nearly equal
pressure
LS valve delivery
Approx. 0.6
pressure
5) Detach all the measurement tools after the
measurement and make sure that the
20-126
(8)
2. Measurement of LS differential pressure

a LS differential pressure can be obtained by
measuring pump delivery pressure and LS
pressure (actuator loaded pressure) at the
same time and computing the difference of
both pressures.
(1), (2), (5) and (6).
delivery pressure (at the machine rear
part)
delivery pressure (at the machine front
part)

LS pressure (at the machine rear part)
LS pressure (at the machine rear part)
2) Fit nipple M2 and connect it to oil pressure

gauge [1] of hydraulic tester M1 or differential pressure gauge M3.
a When using a differential pressure gauge:
Connect pump delivery pressure to the
high pressure side and LS pressure to
the low pressure side.
A differential pressure gauge requires DC
12V power. Connect it with one battery.
a When using an oil pressure gauge:
Use an oil pressure gauge with the capacity of 58.8 MPa{600 kg/cm2}.
PC300/350(LC)-7

The max. differential pressure is no

more than approx. 3.9 MPa {40 kg/cm2}.
The same gauge may be used throughout the measurement.
Photo shows LS pressure side.
4) Measure pump delivery pressure and LS

pressure (actuator loaded pressure)
together with the machine set at the following conditions and the engine running at
high idle.
Traveling speed: Hi
All the control levers of the work equipment, swing and travel are kept in the
NEUTRAL position and the travel control
lever is kept at half stroke (one side of
the track shoes idly rotates).
a Let the raised track shoe idly rotate, paying enough attention to the surroundings
for safety.
a Calculation of LS differential pressure:
LS differential pressure = Pump delivery
pressure LS pressure
a If LS differential pressure is in the following conditions, it is judged normal.
Control lever position
LS differential pressure
All levers in
Unload pressure
NEUTRAL
(see standard value table)
Travel lever at half Max. LS differential pressure
stroke (Run track idle) (see standard value table)
3) Run the engine and raise the hydraulic oil

temperature to the operating range and
push up the track shoe on the side to be
measured with the work equipment.
For measuring oil pressure in front circuit: Left track shoe
For measuring oil pressure in rear circuit: Right track shoe
k Provide a working area of sufficient
space, as the raised track shoe will be
idly rotated.
PC300/350(LC)-7
3. Measurement of LS-EPC valve output pressure

1) Remove oil pressure measurement plug (7).
a The plug is fitted on the rear pump.
20-127
(8)

2) Fit nipple M2 and connect it with oil pressure

gauge [1] of hydraulic tester M1.

Adjustment
a When LS differential pressure is not normal, adjust it with LS valves (8) and (9).
(8): Front pump LS valve
(9): Rear pump LS valve
1. Fix adjusting screw (11) and loosen lock nut

(10).
2. Adjust the pressure by turning adjusting screw
(11).
a If the adjusting screw is turned to the right,
the differential pressure rises.
If the adjusting screw is turned to the left, the
differential pressure falls.
a Adjustment amount (LS differential pressure) per turn of adjusting screw:
1.3 MPa {13.3 kg/cm2}
3. Fix adjusting screw (11) and tighten lock nut
(10).
3 Lock nut: 49 64 Nm {57 kgm}
4) Measure the oil pressure when the engine is

running at high idling and the travel speed
switch and travel lever are operated.
a If LS-EPC valve output pressure changes to the following values, the pressure
is normal.
Travel
speed
Travel control
lever
Lo
Neutral
Hi
Fine control (Note)
Hydraulic
pressure
Approx. 1.4 MPa
{approx. 14 kg/cm2}
0 MPa {0 kg/cm2}
Note: Operate the travel control lever

slightly to the extent that the PPC
hydraulic oil pressure is turned ON.
(Stop the operation short of starting
the machine)
20-128
(8)
4. After the adjustment, confirm that LS differential

pressure is normal, following the steps for measurement explained earlier.
PC300/350(LC)-7
MEASUREMENT OF SOLENOID VALVE OUTPUT PRESSURE

a Solenoid valve output pressure measurement
tools
Mark
1
N
2
3
Part No.
799-101-5002
790-261-1203
799-401-3100
799-401-3200
Part name
Hydraulic tester
Digital type
hydraulic tester
Adapter (Size 02)
Adapter (Size 03)
a Measure solenoid valve output pressure after

confirming that control circuit original pressure is
normal.
2. Fix adapter N2 or N3 and connect the disconnected hose again.

3. Fit nipple [1] of hydraulic tester N1 and connect
it to oil pressure gauge [2].
of 5.9 MPa {60 kg/cm2}.
1. Disconnect the hoses of solenoid valve to be

measured at the outlet side.
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Solenoid valve to be measured

PPC lock solenoid valve
Travel interconnection solenoid valve
Merge/divide solenoid valve
Travel speed shifting solenoid valve
Swing and parking brake solenoid valve
Machine push-up solenoid valve
2-stage relief solenoid valve
a Hose (1) is installed at the rear of operator's
cab, and hoses (2) through (7) are installed
at the center of revolving frame.
PC300/350(LC)-7

range.
20-129
(8)
5. Run the engine at full throttle, then turn each

solenoid valve ON or OFF by operating the control lever switch, and measure the pressure.
a For conditions for turning each solenoid
valve ON or OFF, refer to the ensuing "Table
for Functioning Conditions" for each solenoid valve.
a How each solenoid valve functions can be
confirmed with monitoring function in the
monitor panel. (Special Function of Machine
Monitor)
a When each output pressure shows the following values, it is judged normal.
Solenoid valve
OFF (Demagnetization)
Output pressure
0 MPa {0 kg/cm2}
ON (Excitation)
3 MPa {30 kg/cm2}
6. Detach all the measurement tools after the measurement, and make sure that the machine is
Table for Functioning conditions
- Swing and parking brake solenoid

- PPC lock solenoid valve
Functioning condition
Locked
Safety lock lever
Released
Functioning
OFF
ON

- Machine push-up solenoid valve
OFF
ON
Machine push-up
switch
When all of them
Work equipment, is OFF
swing, travel,
When any of
signaling
them
is ON
Functioning
OFF
ON
Functioning
ON
OFF
Table for Functioning conditions - Travel interconnection solenoid valve

When the travel steering signal is ON
When the travel steering signal is OFF
20-130
(8)
Functioning
ON
If front or rear pump pressure

is over 24.5 MPa {250 kg/cm2}
In conditions other than above
Traveling operation only
ON
OFF
PC300/350(LC)-7
Table for Functioning conditions - Travel speed shifting solenoid valve

When overheat setting of the 2nd stage is ON
When the fuel dial indicates less than 1,200 rpm
When the travel speed switch is at Lo (or Mi (*1))
The travel signal is OFF
If front or rear pump pressure is
When the travel speed switch is at Hi The travel
32.3 MPa {330 kg/cm2}
signal is ON
If front or rear pump pressure is
18.6 MPa {190 kg/cm2}
Functioning
OFF
ON
*1: The "Mi" mode is on the multi-monitor specification machine only.
Table for Functioning conditions - 2-stage relief solenoid valve

Functioning
When overheat setting of the 1st stage is ON
OFF
When all the signals for work equipment, swing and travel are OFF
When swing lock switch is ON
When travel signal is ON
When working mode is L mode (*2)
ON
When boom LOWER signal is ON
When working mode is A or E When left knob If signals other than swing operation only is ON
mode
switch is ON
If swing operation only is ON
OFF
Table for Functioning conditions - Merge/divide solenoid valve
When working mode is B mode
When travel signal only is ON
When service signal is ON
When F or R pump pressure is higher than

2
Other than L 19.6 MPa {200 kg/cm }
When F or R pump pressure is lower than
When the work mode
14.7 MPa {150 kg/cm2}
When the travel equipment and
signal is ON
swing signals
When F or R pump pressure is higher than
are ON
16.7 MPa {170 kg/cm2}
L mode (*2)
When F or R pump pressure is lower than
11.8 MPa {120 kg/cm2}
Functioning
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
*2: The "L" mode is on the multi-monitor specification machine only.
PC300/350(LC)-7
20-131
(8)
MEASUREMENT OF PPC VALVE OUTPUT PRESSURE
MEASUREMENT OF PPC VALVE OUTPUT PRESSURE

a PPC valve output pressure measurement tools
Mark
P
Part No.
799-101-5002
790-261-1204
Part name
Hydraulic tester
Digital type
hydraulic tester
2. Fit nipple [1] of hydraulic tester P and connect

oil pressure gauge [2].
of 5.9 MPa {60 kg/cm2}.
a Measure PPC valve output pressure after confirming that control circuit original pressure is
normal.
1. Remove PPC oil pressure switches (1) through
(10) in the hydraulic circuits to be measured.
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
Circuit to be
No.
measured
Boom, RAISE (S06) 7
Boom, LOWER (S02) 8
Arm, DIGGING (S04) 9
Arm, DUMPING (S08) 10
Bucket, DIGGING (S01)
Bucket, DUMPING (S05)
Circuit to be
measured
Swing, left (S03)
Swing, right (S07)
Travel (black) (S30)
Steering (red) (S31)

range.
a Oil pressure switches (1) through (8) are installed in the PPC relay block, and (9) and (10)
are installed at the rear of operator's cab.
4. Measure the pressure when the engine is running at high idling and the control lever of the circuit to be measured is kept in the NEUTRAL
position and at the full stroke.
a If PPC valve output pressure is at the level
shown below, it is judged normal.
Lever control
In NEUTRAL
At full stroke
Hydraulic pressure
0 MPa {0 kg/cm2}
Nearly equal to control
original pressure
(see standard value table)
5. Detach all the measurement tools, and make

sure that the machine is back to normal condition.
20-132
(8)
PC300/350(LC)-7
ADJUSTMENT OF WORK EQUIPMENT AND SWING PPC VALVE
ADJUSTMENT OF WORK EQUIPMENT AND SWING PPC VALVE

a If there is excessive play in the work equipment
or swing lever, adjust it in the following manner.
1. Remove work equipment and swing PPC valve
ass'y.
2. Take off boot (1).
3. Loosen lock nut (2) and screw in disc (3) until it
contacts the heads of four pistons (4).
a Do not move the piston while doing this work.
4. Keep disc (3) in place and tighten lock nut (2) to
the specified tightening torque.
3 Lock nut: 98 127 Nm {10 13 kgm}
5. Install boot (1).
6. Install work equipment and swing PPC valve
assembly.
PC300/350(LC)-7
20-133
(8)
INSPECTION OF LOCATIONS OF HYDRAULIC DRIFT OF

WORK EQUIPMENT
INSPECTION OF LOCATIONS OF HYDRAULIC DRIFT OF WORK

EQUIPMENT
a If there is any hydraulic drift in the work equipment (cylinders), check in the following manner
to determine if the cause is in the cylinder packing or in the control valve.
2. Inspection of arm cylinder

1) Operate the arm cylinder to move the arm to
the position 100 mm before the digging
stroke end, and stop the engine.
1. Inspection of boom and bucket cylinders

1) Set the work equipment in the same posture
as when measuring hydraulic drift, and stop
the engine.
a Fill the bucket with earth or apply the rated load to the bucket.
2) Operate the control lever to the RAISE position or the bucket control lever to the CURL
position.
If the lowering speed increases, the cylinder packing is defective.
If there is no change, the control valve is
defective.
a Operate the control lever with the engine
starting switch in the ON position.
a If pressure in the accumulator has
dropped, run the engine for approx. 10
seconds to charge the accumulator
again.
20-134
2) Operate the arm control lever to move the

arm to the digging side.
If the lowering speed increases, the cylinder packing is defective.
If there is no change, the control valve is
defective.
a If pressure in the accumulator has
dropped, run the engine for approx. 10
seconds to charge the accumulator again.
[Reference]If the cause of the hydraulic drift is in the
defective packing, and the above operation is carried out, downward movement
is accelerated for the following reasons.
1) If the work equipment is set to the above posture (holding pressure applied to the bottom
end), the oil at the bottom end leaks to the head
end. However, the volume at the head end is
small than the volume at the bottom end by the
volume of the rod end, so the internal pressure
at the head end increases because of the oil
flowing in from the bottom end.
2) When the internal pressure at the head end
increases, the pressure at the bottom end also
rises in proportion to this. The balance is maintained at a certain pressure (this differs according to the amount of leakage) by repeating this
procedure.
3) When the pressure is balanced, the downward
movement becomes slower. If the lever is then
operated according to the procedure given
above, the circuit at the head end is opened to
the drain circuit (the bottom end is closed by the
check valve), so the oil at the head end flows to
the drain circuit and the downward movement
becomes faster.
PC300/350(LC)-7
INSPECTION OF LOCATIONS OF HYDRAULIC DRIFT OF WORK EQUIPMENT

RELEASE OF REMAINING PRESSURE IN HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT
RELEASE OF REMAINING
PRESSURE IN HYDRAULIC
CIRCUIT
3. Inspection of boom lock valve
1) Set the work equipment at the maximum
reach and the boom top horizontal. Then
stop the engine.
k Lock the work equipment control levers and
release the pressure inside the hydraulic
tank.
k Do not allow anyone to come under the
work equipment during the work.
2) Disconnect drain hose (1) of the control
valve, and install a blind plug in the hose.
Part No. for the blind hose: 07376-70210
a Leave the control valve end open.
a If any oil leaks out from the port that is
left open, following hydraulic drift of the
work equipment, the boom lock valve is
defective (loose contact).
k If the piping between the hydraulic cylinders or
the hydraulic motor and control valves is to be

disconnected, release the remaining pressure in
a There is no pressure remaining in the swing motor circuit and travel motor circuit, but the internal
pressure in the hydraulic tank affects them. So
open the oil filler cap of the hydraulic tank.
1. Stop the engine, and loosen the oil filler cap
gradually to release the pressure inside the
tank.
2. Turn the engine starting switch to the ON position and operate the control levers several
times.
a There must be power supply to the PPC lock
valve. Be sure to operate the control levers
with the engine starting switch in the ON position.
a When the levers are operated 2-3 times, the
pressure stored in the accumulator is removed.
3. Start the engine, run at low idling for approx. 10
seconds to accumulate pressure in the accumulator, then stop the engine.
4. Repeat the steps in Item 2 to 3 above several
times.
4. Inspection of PPC valve

Measure the amount of hydraulic drift of the
work equipment when the accumulator is
charged with pressure and the safety lock lever
is put to the LOCK and FREE positions.
a If pressure in the accumulator has dropped,
run the engine for approx. 10 seconds to
charge the accumulator again.
a If there is any difference in the hydraulic drift
between LOCK and FREE positions, the
PPC valve is defective (some internal failure).
PC300/350(LC)-7
20-135
MEASUREMENT OF OIL LEAKAGE AMOUNT

1. Measurement of oil leakage amount from
boom cylinder
hydraulic oil temperature rises to the operating range. Then extend the boom cylinder to
the stroke end.
k Release the pressure remaining in the piping, referring to the foregoing section of
"Release of remaining pressure in hydraulic
circuit".
2) Disconnect hose (1) at the cylinder head
end and block the hose end with a plate.
k Be careful not to disconnect the hose at the
cylinder bottom end.
3) Start the engine and apply the relief pressure to the bottom end of the cylinder with
the engine running at high idle.
4) Continue this condition for 30 seconds, then
measure the oil leakage amount for one
minute.
5) After the measurement, make sure that the

arm cylinder
hydraulic oil temperature rises to the operating range. Then extend the arm cylinder to
the digging stroke end.
circuit".
2) Disconnect hose (2) on the cylinder head
end and block the hose end with a plate.
the engine running at high idle.
20-136
(8)

minute.

bucket cylinder
hydraulic oil temperature rises to the operating range. Then extend the bucket cylinder
to the digging stroke end.
circuit".
2) Disconnect hose (3) at the cylinder head
end block the hose end with a plate.
the engine running at high idling.
minute.

PC300/350(LC)-7

swing motor
1) Disconnect drain hose (4) and fit a blind
plug in the hoses.
2) Turn the swing lock switch to the ON position.
3) Start the engine. Apply the swing relief pressure with the engine running at high idle and
measure an oil leakage amount under such
conditions.
a After keeping the conditions in 3) above
for 30 seconds, measure the oil leakage
amount for one minute.
a After the first measurement, turn the upper structure by 180 degrees and take
measurement again in the same way.
3) Disconnect drain hose (5) of the travel

motor and fit a blind plug in the hose end.
4) Start the engine and apply the travel relief
pressure with the engine running at high
idle, then measure an oil leakage amount
under such conditions.
kIn this measurement, an erroneous operation of the control lever will likely lead to
a serious accident. Make sure that all the
signals and confirmations are followed
without fail.
a After keeping the conditions in 4) above
for 30 seconds, measure the oil leakage
amount for one minute.
a Repeat the measurement several times,
slightly rotating the motor, i.e. shifting
the position of valve plate and cylinder,
and the position of cylinder and piston,
and take measurement several times.

travel motor
1) Take off the travel motor cover.
2) Start the engine and lock the travel.
k Put pin [1] in between the sprocket and the
track frame to block the travel.
PC300/350(LC)-7

20-137
(8)
AIR BLEEDING OF VARIOUS PARTS

Air bleeding item
Contents of Work
Change of hydraulic oil
Cleaning of strainer
Steps for air bleeding

1
Hydraulic
pump air
bleeding
Engine
start
Cylinder
air
bleeding
Swing
motor air
bleeding
Travel
Operation
motor air
start
bleeding
(Note)
(Note)
Replacement of return filter element

Repair or replacement of
hydraulic pump
Removing suction pipe
{
{
Repair or replacement of control valve
Replacement of cylinder
Removing cylinder piping
Replacement of swing motor

Removing swing motor piping
Replacement of travel motor swivel

Removing travel motor swivel piping
{
{
Note: Bleed air from the swing motor and travel motor only when oil in the casing is drained.
1. Air bleeding from hydraulic pump
1) Loosen air bleeding plug (1) and confirm
that oil seeps out from the plug.
2) If the oil seepage is confirmed, tighten air
bleeding plug (1).
3 Air bleeding plug:
7.8 9.8 Nm {0.8 1.0 kgm}
a Precautions for starting engine
When starting the engine after the air bleeding work explained above, run the engine at
low idle for 10 minutes.
If the engine cooling water temperature is
low and an automatic engine warming-up
function is relied on, use the fuel dial, when it
becomes necessary to cancel it.
20-138
(8)
2. Air bleeding from hydraulic cylinder

1) Start the engine and kept it running at low
idle for 5 minutes.
2) Raise and lower the boom 4 to 5 times with
the engine running at low idle.
a Be careful not to apply the relief pressure, stopping the piston rod approx.
100 mm before its stroke end.
3) Repeat the steps in Item 2) above, but this
time with the engine running at high idle.
4) Apply the relief pressure by extending the
piston rod to its stroke end and with the
engine running at low idle.
5) For bleeding air from the arm cylinder and
bucket cylinder, follow the same steps
explained in Item 2) through 4) above.
a In case a cylinder is replaced with new one,
it is advised to bleed air from the new one before mounting the work equipment. It is especially so with the boom cylinder, because
its rod does not extend to the stroke end of
LOWER side, after the work equipment is
mounted.
PC300/350(LC)-7
3. Air bleeding from swing motor

1) Start the engine and run it at low idle.
2) Bleed air from the motor by swinging the
upper structure slowly.
4. Air bleeding from travel motor
1) Start the engine and run it at low idle.
2) Loosen air bleeding plug (2) and confirm
that oil seeps out from the plug.
3) If the oil seepage is confirmed, tighten air
bleeding plug (2).
3 Air bleeding plug:
27.5 35.3 Nm {2.8 3.6 kgm}
PC300/350(LC)-7
20-139
(8)
INSPECTION PROCEDURES FOR DIODE
INSPECTION PROCEDURES FOR DIODE

a Check an assembled-type diode (8 pins) and single diode (2 pins) in the following manner.
a The continuity direction of an assembled-type diode is as shown in the diagram below.
a The continuity direction of a single diode is
shown on the diode surface.
1. When using digital type circuit tester

1) Switch the testing mode to diode range and
confirm the indicated value.
a Voltage of the battery inside is displayed
with conventional circuit testers.
2) Put the red probe (+) of the test lead to the
anode (P) and the black probe () to the
cathode (N) of diode, and confirm the displayed value.
20-140
(8)
3) Determine if a specific diode is good or no

good with the indicated value.
No change in the indicated value: No
continuity (defective).
Change in the indicated value: Continuity established (normal) (Note)
Note: A silicon diode shows a value between
400 and 600.
2. When using analog type circuit tester

1) Switch the testing mode to resistance range.
2) Check the needle swing in case of the following connections.
i) Put the red probe (+) of the test lead to
the anode (P) and the black probe () to
the cathode (N) of diode.
ii) Put the red probe (+) of the test lead to
the cathode (N) and the black probe ()
to the anode (P) of diode.
3) Determine if a specific diode is good or no
good by the way the needle swings.
If the needle swings in Case i), but does
not swing in Case ii): Normal (but the
breadth of swing (i.e. resistance value)
will differ depending on a circuit tester
type or a selected measurement range)
If the needle swings in either case of i)
and ii): Defective (short-circuited internally)
If the needle does not swing in any case
of i) and ii): Defective (short-circuited internally)
PC300/350(LC)-7
SPECIAL FUNCTION OF MULTI-MONITOR PANEL
[1] Figure input switch 1
] Return switch
] Upward move switch
] Downward move switch
] Input confirmation switch
PC300/350(LC)-7
20-141
Monitor panel functions - conventional and special

The monitor panel is provided with conventional and special functions, and various kind of information are
shown in the multi-display. Display items consists of automatic display items that are preset in the monitor panel
and others that are shown by switch operations.
1. Conventional function: Operator's Menu
This is a function by which an operator can set or show displays by switch operations. The display contents
are those which are normally shown.
2. Special function: Service Menu
This is a function by which a service mechanic can set or show displays by special switch operations. The
display contents are those which are not normally shown. It is mainly used for inspection, adjustment, trouble-shooting or special setting of machines.
Operator's Menu
1
Function for inputting and setting password
Function for showing Komatsu's logo
Function for machine inspection before starting day's work
Function for showing machine maintenance
Function for showing precaution items
Function for confirming working mode and

travel speed
Function for display of ordinary items
Function for adjusting display luminance and

contrast
Function for adjusting breaker and attachment flow rate
10
Function for confirming maintenance information
11
Function for showing service meter reading
12
Function for checking display LCD
13
Function for showing occurrence of caution

item
14
Function for showing users' code No.
15
Function for showing service code No. and

failure code No.
20-142
Service Menu
16
Function for monitoring [01]
17
Function for fail- Electrical system

ure history [02] Mechanical system
18
Function for maintenance history [03]
19
Function for maintenance mode change [04]
20
Function for recording phone No. [05]
21
Function for initial value setting and default

[06]
Mode with key ON

Language
Unit
Attachment installed/No
attachment installed
Adjustment of governor
lever stroke
22
Function for
adjustment [07]
Fuel pump absorbin torque

RPM at low idling
Adjustment of oil flow to
attachment
PC300/350(LC)-7
Operation of Operator's Menu and

Display (Outline)
This section introduces only the outline of the operator's menu. For details on the contents and
operation steps of each menu, refer to the operation and maintenance manual or the chapter of
"STRUCTURE AND FUNCTION" in this shop
manual.
1. Function for inputting and setting password
When the engine starting switch is turned ON,
the password inputting display is shown.
This display is shown only when a password
is registered.
2. Function for showing KOMATSU logo
When a password is inputted, or when the
engine starting switch is turned ON, KOMATSU
logo is shown for two seconds.
3. Function for machine inspection before

starting day's work
Following the KOMATSU logo, the display of
machine inspection before starting day's work is
shown for 2 seconds.
4. Function for machine maintenance

Following the display of machine inspection
before starting day's work, the maintenance
mark appears for 30 seconds, if there is an oil filter whose maintenance time is approaching or
has just passed.
This display appears only when the maintenance function is set.
PC300/350(LC)-7
20-143
5. Function for showing precaution items

If there is any item of machine inspection before
starting day's work that indicates some abnormality, a corresponding symbol mark is shown
after the display of machine inspection before
starting day's work.
6. Function for confirming working mode and

travel speed
After the display of machine inspection before
day's work, amplified symbol marks for working
mode and travel speed are shown for two seconds to urge an operator to confirm the setting.
7. Function for display of ordinary items

The display of confirming working mode and
travel speed is switched to this display of ordinary items.
If the working mode setting or travel speed
setting is changed, or auto-deceleration or
windshield wiper setting is activated while
this is in display, an amplified corresponding
symbol mark is shown for two seconds.
In this display, a symbol mark for preheat
monitor is shown only when preheating is
carried out.
8. Function for adjusting display luminance
and contrast
Luminance as well as contrast of the display can
be adjusted by operating the display adjusting
switch.
20-144
PC300/350(LC)-7
9. Function for adjusting breaker and attachment flow rate (For machines equipped with
breaker attachment)
When a breaker or other attachments are used,
hydraulic pump flow rate can be adjusted by
operating the select switch.
Note that the symbol mark and contents of
display partially differ between the breaker
and the other attachments.
10. Function for confirming maintenance information

Detailed information on maintenance items (set
time and elapse of time) can be confirmed and
resetting after the confirmation is feasible by
operating the maintenance switch.
Use service Menu for setting or releasing
maintenance items and setting maintenance
time.
11. Function for showing service meter reading

Only the service meter reading can be shown by
the following switching operation, when the
engine starting switch is turned OFF.
Switching operation: [ ] + [ ] (synchronized switching operation)
12. Function for checking display LCD

Display of the Display LCD can be confirmed by
the following switching operation in the display
of inputting and setting password as well as in
the display of ordinary items
Switching operation: [ ] + [A] (synchronized switching operation)
All the LCD light up, turning the entire screen
white. If there is no showing in black, the display is normal.
This display returns to the immediately preceding one, if making any other switching
operation.
PC300/350(LC)-7
20-145
13. Function for showing occurrence of caution

item
If any of the caution items occurs, the magnified
corresponding symbol mark is shown for two
seconds and thereafter stays on the display as a
small symbol mark until it is dissolved.
14. Function for showing users' code No.

When a trouble occurs on the machine, the
user's code is automatically displayed depending on the magnitude of the trouble to call attention of the operator for a proper action.
This display turns to the display of service
code and failure code, if operating the switch
(Refer to Item No. 15)
Relation between User Code and Action Directed to Operator

User
Code
Failed System
Action Directed to Operator
E02
PC-EPC Valve
Ordinary work may be resumed by turning the emergency pump drive switch ON,
but call for the inspection service immediately.
E03
Swing Brake
Release the brake after turning emergency swing and parking brake switch ON.
When applying the swing brake, operate the swing lock switch manually. The
swing brake may not be released depending on the nature of the trouble. In either
case, call for the inspection service immediately.
E05
Governor
The governor control has become inoperable. Operate the governor control lever
manually. For fixing the lever at full throttle position, use a fixing bolt provided at
the bracket. In this case, call for the inspection service immediately.
20-146
PC300/350(LC)-7
15. Function for showing service code No. and

failure code No.
If the following switching operation is made
while the users' code No. is shown, a phone
symbol (if registered), phone numbers (if registered), service code No. and failure code No.
are shown in turn.
Switching operation: [ ] (keep the switch
depressed)
a The following items are repeatedly displayed
in order according to the operation of the
switch.
Telephone symbol mark
Telephone No.
Service code No. and failure code No.

a The telephone symbol mark and telephone
No. are shown only when they are registered
in the monitor panel.
For registration, correction and deletion of
telephone No., use Service Menu.
a For details on the displayed service code No.
and failure code No., refer to the Table for
Service and Failure Code Nos.
PC300/350(LC)-7
20-147
(7)
Code
No.
Content
E101 Abnormal data in error history

Short circuit in wiper motor drive, normal rotation system
Short circuit in wiper motor drive, reverse rotation system
Short circuit in windshield washer drive
Abnormality of windshield wiper in motion
Abnormality of windshield wiper in retraction
Failure Code
Code No.
Location
DAF0KT Failure history
Windshield wiper motor (normal rotation)

Windshield wiper motor
E113
DY2EKB
(reverse rotation)
E114
DY2CKB Windshield washer motor
E115
DY20KA Windshield wiper motor
E116
DY20MA Windshield wiper motor
Travel interlocking solenoid
E201 Short circuit in travel interconnection solenoid DW91KB
valve
E03 E203 Short circuit in swing holding brake solenoid
DW45KB Swing holding solenoid valve
E204 Short circuit in merge/divide solenoid
DWJ0KB Merge solenoid valve
E205 Short circuit in 2-stage relief solenoid
DWK0KB 2-stage relief solenoid valve
Travel Hi-Lo shifting solenoid
E206 Short circuit in travel speed shifting solenoid
DW43KB
valve
Travel interlocking solenoid
E211 Disconnection in travel interlocking solenoid
DW91KA
valve
E03 E213 Disconnection in swing holding brake solenoid DW45KA Swing holding solenoid valve
E214 Disconnection in merge/divide solenoid
DWJ0KA Merge solenoid valve
E215 Disconnection in 2-stage relief solenoid
DWK0KA 2-stage relief solenoid valve
Travel Hi-Lo shifting solenoid
E216 Disconnection in travel speed shifting solenoid DW43KA
valve
E112
DY2DKB
E217 Abnormality in model code input
DA2SKQ S_NET
DA2SKA S_NET
DXE0KB LS-EPC solenoid valve
DXE0KA LS-EPC solenoid valve
DHPAMA F pump pressure sensor
DHPBMA R pump pressure sensor
E218 Disconnection in S_NET signal

E222 Short circuit in LS-EPC solenoid
E223 Disconnection in LS-EPC solenoid
E224 Abnormality in F pump pressure sensor
E225 Abnormality in R pump pressure sensor
E226 Abnormality in pressure sensor power source

E227 Abnormality in engine revolution sensor
E228 Short circuit in ATT return switching relay
E02 E232 Short circuit in PC-EPC solenoid
E02 E233 Disconnection in PC-EPC solenoid
E238 Disconnection in ATT return switching relay
E245 Short circuit in ATT flow rate adjusting EPC
E246 Disconnection in ATT flow rate adjusting EPC
E256 Incorrect nonvolatile memory data
E304 Short circuit in engine stop solenoid relay
E306 Abnormality in motor potentiometer
20-148
DA25KP Governor pump controller

DLE2MA
D196KB
DXA0KB
DXA0KA
D196KA
Phenomenon
Failure
Classification
Service Code
Abnormality
in data
Short circuit
Short circuit
Short circuit
Disconnection
Malfunctioning
Short circuit
Short circuit
Short circuit
Short circuit
Short circuit
Disconnection
Disconnection
Disconnection
Disconnection
Disconnection
Nonconformance in model
selecting signal
Disconnection
Short circuit
Disconnection
Malfunctioning
Malfunctioning
Lowering in output voltage
Malfunctioning
Short circuit
Short circuit
Disconnection
Disconnection
Electrical system
User Code
No.
Table for Service and Failure Code Nos.
Engine revolution sensor

ATT switching relay
TVC solenoid valve
TVC solenoid valve
ATT switching relay
ATT flow rate throttling EPC
DXE4KB
Short circuit
valve
ATT flow rate throttling EPC
DXE4KA
Disconnection
valve
Abnormality in
DA20KT Nonvolatile memory
data
DY45KB Engine stop solenoid relay
Short circuit
Governor motor feedback
DK54KZ
Malfunctioning
potentiometer
PC300/350(LC)-7
Service Code
Code
No.
Content
E05 E308 Abnormality in throttle potentiometer

E314 Disconnection in engine stop solenoid relay
E315 Short circuit in battery relay output
E316 Abnormality in governor motor step-out
E05 E317 Disconnection in both governor motors A and B
E05 E318 Short circuit in both governor motors A and B
None Engine high idling out of rate
Failure Code
Code No.
DK10KZ
DY45KA
D110KB
DY10K4
DY10KA
DY10KB
A000N1
Location
Throttle potentiometer
Engine stop solenoid relay
Battery relay
Governor motor
Governor motor
Governor motor
Engine
Phenomenon
Malfunctioning
Disconnection
Short circuit
Out of control
Disconnection
Short circuit
Overrunning
Low idling out of
rate
Clogging
Insufficient
charging
Oil pressure lowered
Oil level lowered
Overheating
Cooling water
level lowered
Overheating
None Engine low idling out of rate
A000N2 Engine
None Air cleaner clogged
AA10NX Air cleaner element
None Charging voltage abnormally low
AB00KE Alternator
None Engine oil pressure abnormally low
B@BAZG Engine oil
None Engine oil level abnormally low

None Engine cooling water overheated
B@BAZK Engine oil

B@BCNS Engine cooling water
None Radiator water level abnormally low
B@BCZK Engine cooling water
None Hydraulic oil overheated
B@HANS Hydraulic oil

Auto-lubrication system conDA80MA
Malfunction
troller
None Auto-lubrication system abnormal
Failure
Electrical system Classification
Mechanical system
User Code
No.
This table is arranged in the sequence of Service Code No.

In case there is no number assigned in the column of User Code No., or in case "none" is described in the
column of Code No. of Service Code, the corresponding service code or failure code is not shown in the display of ordinary items, even if some abnormality occurs. It is recorded only in the failure history (either in electrical system or mechanical system) of Service Menu.
History Classification indicates that a specific failure is classified as belonging to either electrical system or
mechanical system, when it is recorded in Service Menu.
"E" at the head of Code No. of Service Code means the following status of a specific failure.
With "E":
The failure is yet to be dissolved and continues.
Without "E": The failure has already been dissolved.
PC300/350(LC)-7
20-149
Operation and Display of Service Menu

Way of switching to Service Menu
When using Service Menu, change the display to
Service Menu display through the following special operation.
1) Confirmation of display
Confirm that the display of ordinary items is
shown.
Changing to Service Menu cannot be made
from displays other than this.
2) Switch operation
Operate the switch as instructed below.
Switch operation: [ ] + [1] [2] [3]
(Enter a figure, depressing [
])
3) Showing Service Menu display

The display is changed to the initial display of
Service Menu program. Select an appropriate
item from among the menu.
No.
Service Menu
00
Return (Termination of Service Menu)
01
Monitoring
02
Abnormality Record
03
Maintenance Record
04
Maintenance Mode Change
05
Phone Number Entry
06
/ Default
07
Adjustment
08
4) Termination of Service Menu function

When terminating the initial display or any subsequent display of Service Menu, do that
through any one of the following methods.
Depress [ ] switch. (This method may be
used for terminating any display)
If "Return" switch is shown, depress it.
If "Return" menu is shown, call that menu
and depress [ ] switch.
20-150
PC300/350(LC)-7
16. Function of monitoring [01]

The monitor panel monitors signals from an
assortment of switches, sensors and actuators
installed in various parts of the machine. Monitored information can be put in display or confirmed on a real time basis through the following
operations.
1) Selection of menu
Select "01 Monitoring" in the initial display of
Service Menu and depress [ ] switch.
2) Setting of monitoring item
Select or register an item to be monitored
through the following switch operation.
[ ] switch: Selection
[ ] switch: Selection
[ ] switch: Registration
A monitoring item can be set in any number
between the min. one to the max. four. (Depending upon the selected item, the max.
number is less than four)
In case of monitoring 1 to 3 items, move to
the monitored information display through
any of the following switch operations, after
the registration work has been completed.
Keep [ ] switch depressed. (For about
3 seconds)
Select Menu 999 and depress [ ]
switch.
The display automatically moves to the display of monitored information, when all of the
registrable items have been duly registered.
Monitored information are transmitted via
communication circuits. Thus the number of
selected items can impact the communication speed. If truly real time monitoring is required, reduce the selected items to the
minimum.
For details on the monitoring items, display
unit, etc., refer to the Table for Monitoring
Items.
PC300/350(LC)-7
20-151
3) Monitoring operation
Call the monitoring information display and
confirm the monitored information, while
operating the machine.
4) Monitored information holding function

If [ ] switch is depressed while monitoring,
all the monitored information are put on
hold. If [ ] switch is depressed in this condition, information holding is released.
5) Machine setting mode switching function

If it becomes necessary to change settings
of working mode, select mode, travel speed
and auto-decel while monitoring, depress
the corresponding switch, then the mode
confirmation display is shown.
An illustration at right shows the display in A
mode and E mode. Symbol marks are partially different in B mode.
When a specific setting is confirmed, depress [ ] switch, then the display returns to
that of monitoring.
In case a specific setting has been changed
while monitoring, the new setting is still
maintained when returning from Service
Menu to Operator's Menu after the monitoring is finished.
20-152
PC300/350(LC)-7
Table for Monitoring Items

Code
No.
Item to be monitored
000
Return
999
To Display Screen
002
003
010
011
Controller Model Select

Controller Model Select
Engine Speed
F Pump Pressure
012
013
015
016
017
R Pump Pressure
PC-EPC Sol. Curr.
LS-EPC Sol. Curr.
2nd Eng. Speed Command
Service Sol. Curr.
Swing
Travel
Boom Lower
Pressure
Switch 1
Boom Raise
Arm Curl
Arm Dump
Bucket Curl
Bucket Dump
Pressure
Switch 2
Service
Travel Steering
Lever Sw.
Switch Input 1
Swing Release Sw.
Swing Brake Sw.
Travel Junction
Swing Brake
Solenoid valve 1 Merge-divider
2-stage Relief
Travel Speed
Solenoid valve 2 Service Return
Model Select 1
Model Select 2
Model Select 3
Switch Input 2
Model Select 4
Model Select 5
Fuel Dial Vol.
Gov. Motor Potentio Vol.
Battery Voltage
Gov. Motor Phase A Curr.
Gov. Motor Phase B Curr.
Battery Relay O/P Vol.
Switch Input 3
Key Switch
Batt. Relay Dr.
Controller Output
Engine Stop SOL.
Engine Water Temperature
Fuel Lever Sensor Vol.
019
021
022
023
024
027
030
031
032
033
034
035
036
037
041
042
PC300/350(LC)-7
Unit (Default: ISO)

ISO
Meter
Inch
(Not displayed)
(Not displayed)
r/min
MPa
MPa
mA
mA
r/min
mA
V
V
V
mA
mA
V
C
V
Figure
Figure
rpm
kg/cm
kg/cm2
mA
mA
rpm
mA
ON/OFF
ON/OFF
ON/OFF
ON/OFF
ON/OFF
ON/OFF
ON/OFF
ON/OFF
ON/OFF
ON/OFF
ON/OFF
ON/OFF
ON/OFF
ON/OFF
ON/OFF
ON/OFF
ON/OFF
ON/OFF
ON/OFF
ON/OFF
ON/OFF
ON/OFF
ON/OFF
ON/OFF
V
V
V
mA
mA
V
ON/OFF
ON/OFF
ON/OFF
C
V
Remark
Termination menu
Execute
Command menu
rpm
PSI
PSI
mA
mA
rpm
mA
V
V
V
mA
mA
V
F
V
20-153
Code
No.
043
044
045
046
049
200
201
Item to be monitored
Battery Charge Vol.
Hydr. Oil Temperature
Key Switch
Start
Preheat
Monitor Input 1
Light
Rad. level
Hydr. Oil Level
Aircleaner
Eng. Oil Press.
Monitor Input 2
Eng. Oil Level.
Spare
Battery Charge
Swing Brake Sw.
Buzzer cancel Sw.
Window Limit Sw.
Monitor Input 3
W Limit Sw.
P Limit Sw.
Monitor Prog. Version
Controller Prog. Version
Unit (Default: ISO)

ISO
Meter
Inch
V
V
V
C
C
F
ON/OFF
ON/OFF
ON/OFF
ON/OFF
ON/OFF
ON/OFF
ON/OFF
ON/OFF
ON/OFF
ON/OFF
ABNNOR
ON/OFF
ON/OFF
ON/OFF
ON/OFF
ON/OFF
Figure
Figure
Remark
Select the most favorite display unit from among the prepared three kinds, i.e. ISO, meter and inch. When
changing one display unit for another, refer to "Unit" in the initial value setting of Service Menu.
Abbreviations, ABN and NOR, stand for the following conditions.
ABN: Abnormal, NOR: Normal
It cannot be monitored how the machine push-up solenoid valve works.
20-154
PC300/350(LC)-7
17. Function for Abnormality Record [02]

The monitor panel records failures that occurred
on the machines in the past after classifying
them into failures in the electric system and
those in the mechanical system. Information on
them can be displayed through the following
operation.
Select 02 Abnormality Record in the initial
display of Service Menu and depress [ ]
switch.
2) Selection of Submenu
Select an appropriate item from Submenu in
the Abnormality Record display and depress
[ ] switch.
No.
00
01
02
Abnormality Record Submenu

Return
(termination of Abnormality Record)
Electrical System
Mechanical Systems
3) Information shown in display of Abnormality

Record in the electrical system
: The numerator expresses sequence of
failure occurrence, counting from the
latest one. The denominator expresses
the total number of a specific failure
recorded.
: Service Code
: Abnormality Code No. (system in 4 digits and phenomenon in 2 digits)
: Time elapsed since the occurrence of
the first failure
: Contents of failure
Refer to "Table for Service Code and Abnormality Code" in Operator's Menu.
4) Information shown in display of Failure History in the mechanical systems
: Record No.
: Contents of Abnormality
: Abnormality Code No. (system in 4 digits and phenomenon in 2 digits)
: Total number of occurrence
: Service meter reading at the initial
occurrence
Refer to "Table for Service Code and Abnormality Code" in Operator's Menu.
PC300/350(LC)-7
20-155
5) Resetting Electrical Systems

Resetting Electrical Systems (deletion)
is possible only with the electrical system. The failure history in the mechanical system cannot be reset.
For resetting any specific or all information in the Electrical Systems, follow the
operation explained below.
i) Through the following switch operation,
call the resetting display in the display of
Electrical Systems.
Switch operation: [ ] +[1] [2] [3]
This is the same switch operation in
changing the display to Service Menu.
ii) Operate the switch, following the instructions shown in the resetting display.
When resetting specific information
only, call the display of that specific
information and reset it with either
[ ] switch or [ ] switch.
When resetting all the information, a
display of any information will do.
20-156
PC300/350(LC)-7
18. Function for Maintenance Record [03]

The monitor panel records information on the
maintenance of filters and oils. The stored information can be displayed through the following
switch operation.
Select 03 Maintenance Record in Service
Menu and depress [ ] switch.
2) Information to be displayed
: Name of oils and filters
: Times of replacement to date
: Service meter reading at the latest
replacement
PC300/350(LC)-7
20-157
19. Function for Maintenance Mode Change [04]

Conditions set for controlling maintenance display function can be changed in the following
manner.
Turn the function effectual or ineffectual.
Change the set interval for replacement.
Select 04 Maintenance Mode Change in the
initial display of Service Menu, and depress
[ ] switch.
2) Selection of item to be changed

Select an item to be changed in the display
of Maintenance Mode Change Selecting
Menu.
No.
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
Maintenance mode change item

Return
Maintenance Mode On/Off
Engine Oil Exch. Int.
Engine Oil Filter Exch. Int.
Fuel Filter Exch. Int.
Hydr. Oil Filter Exch. Int.
H/Tank Breather Exch. Int.
Corro. Resis. Exch. Int.
PTO Oil Service Int.
Final Drive Oil Exch. Int.
S/Machinery Oil Exch. Int.
Hydraulic Oil Exch. Int.
Use Default Values
01 and 12 menus are provided for setting the

whole maintenance mode, while those from
02 through 11 are for setting individual items.
3) Contents of Maintenance Mode On/Off
Use: The maintenance display function
of all oil and filter-related items are
turned effectual. (Irrespective of whether
"On" or "Off" set for individual items, this
setting prevails)
Do not use: The maintenance display
function of all oil and filter-related items
are turned ineffectual. (Irrespective of
whether "On" or "Off" set for individual
items, this setting prevails)
20-158
PC300/350(LC)-7
4) Set contents of individual items

: Default: The maintenance time set in
the monitor (recommended by the manufacturer and cannot be changed).
: Set: Maintenance time that can be
freely set. The maintenance mode program functions based on this maintenance time. (The maintenance time can
be increased or decreased by 50 hours
with [ ] or [ ] switch)
: On: Maintenance display function with
this instruction becomes effectual.
: Off: Maintenance display with this
instruction becomes ineffectual.
The lowest maintenance time is 50 h.
5) Set contents of "Use Default Values"
When selecting this menu and depressing
the switch [ ], all individual time settings
are reduced to the initial settings.
PC300/350(LC)-7
20-159
20. Function for Phone Number Entry [05]

In the display of User Code, a telephone number
and Service Code are shown alternately. Phone
number can be inputted or modified in the following manner.
If there is no Phone number registered, the
display for Phone numbers does not appear.
Select 05 Phone Number Entry menu in the
display of Service Menu, and depress [ ]
switch.
2) Changing the display
Select Entry next to change the display to
the Phone Number Entry display.
Even if a Phone number is already inputted, it is deleted, upon switching to the
Phone Number Entry display.
3) Entry and setting Phone number

Following the method explained below,
Entry a Phone number in the Phone
Number Entry display. (Entry automatically
begins with a cursor at the left end)
i) Enter a number into a cursor at the left
end with a ten-key.
ii) Depress [ ] switch when all the numbers have been entered.
Numbers can be entered up to the max.
12 digits, but omit unnecessary digits.
When entering a wrong number, depress [B] switch, then the cursor goes
back by one digit.
When input is finished, the display
changes to Entry display shown above.
If the inputted Phone number is shown in
this display, the input is normal.
20-160
PC300/350(LC)-7
21. Function for /Default

[06]

It is possible to change the following settings for
the monitor panel as well as the machine. Make
a change as is required.
Working mode when the engine starting
switch is in the ON position.
Display language in Service Menu
Display unit in the monitoring function
With/Without Service Cir.
Select 06 "/Default menu" in the
initial display of Service Menu, and depress
[ ] switch.
2) Selection of submenu
Select an item to change from the submenu,
No.
00
01
02
03
04
/Default submenu
Return (termination of /Default)
Key-on Mode
/Language
Unit
With/Without Service Cir.
3) Function for Key-on Mode

When the engine starting switch is turned
ON, a working mode can be set that is
shown in the monitor panel.
A, E, L and B Modes: If any of them is
set, the machine always ramps up with
that working mode, when turning the engine starting switch ON.
Mode at Previous Key-off: If this mode is
set, the machine ramps up with the
working mode that was last used in the
previous machine operation.
Default Value: If this mode is set, the
machine ramps up with the default mode
(A mode) that was originally set at the
time of delivery from the factory.
Irrespective of this setting mode, a machine "With attachment" always ramps
up with B mode, when the engine starting switch is turned ON at the subsequent operation, if that was the working
mode used in the last machine work.
PC300/350(LC)-7
20-161
4) Function for /Language

In Service Menu, the language in use can
be changed between Japanese and English.
English is used as the language for default setting in the monitor panel.
If the monitor panel for spare parts is to
be used in a Japanese-speaking region
or organization, change the language
from English to Japanese, using this
function.
5) Function for unit selection

As the unit to be used in the monitoring
function display of Service Menu, three
kinds of unit are provided.
Unit used for default setting in the monitor panel is SI, i.e. International System
of Units.
6) Function for selecting distinction of With/

Without Service Cir.
It is possible in this function to set a distinction between with or without attachment.
With Service Circuit: When an attachment is installed.
Without Service Circuit: When no attachment is installed.
If "With Service Circuit" setting is not
made in this display, while it is actually
installed on a specific machine, SELECT
function in Operator's Mode (attachment
oil flow rate adjustment) cannot be utilized.
20-162
PC300/350(LC)-7
22. Function for Adjustment [07]

The monitor panel has a function of making various adjustments of the machine.
Select 07 adjustment in the initial display of
Service Menu, and depress [ ] switch.
2) Selection of submenu
Select an item to change from the submenu
No.
00
01
02
03
04
Adjustment submenu
Return (termination of adjustment)
Governor Motor Adjustment
Pump Absorption Torque
Low Idle Speed
Service Current Adjust.
3) Function for Governor Stroke Adjustment

a If the governor actuator, fuel injection
pump, or governor spring is removed
and installed or the high idling speed is
low or the engine speed is unstable, adjust the governor lever stroke according
to the following procedure.
i) Call the display of governor lever stroke
adjustment and set the fuel dial at MAX.
a Under this condition, the governor
actuator lever moves to the FULL
position. Keep this display until adjustment is finished.
a The engine speed is indicated in 10
rpm at the center of the display.
a The turning direction of the governor
spring when the fuel injection pump
is seen from the governor actuator is
indicated.
PC300/350(LC)-7
20-163
(7)
ii)
iii)
iv)
v)
vi)
vii)
Loosen locknuts (2) of rod (1).

a Locknut (2) has left-hand threads.
Turn rod (1) counterclockwise to
increase installed length (a) of governor
spring (3) and return governor lever (4)
of the fuel injection pump to a position at
which it will not touch the full stop.
a Take care that the outer cylinder of
governor spring (3) will not be
dragged and the water drain hole will
not be moved from the bottom.
Turn rod (1) clockwise to decrease
installed length (a) of governor spring
(3). If governor lever (4) touches the full
stop, stop turning the rod.
Standard installed length (a): 261.75
mm (Reference)
Turn rod (1) 3 more turns to compress
the spring in governor spring (3).
a Since the internal spring is compressed, only the outside cylinder of
governor spring (3) moves about
3.75 mm toward the governor actuator (The installed length does not
change).
Fixing rod (1), tighten locknuts (2).
a Before tightening the locknuts,
check that the water drain hole of the
governor spring is directed down.
3 Nut:
11.8 19.6 Nm {1.2 2.0 kgm}
Return the fuel control dial to the MIN
position, and then turn it toward the
MAX side gradually. At this time, check
that governor spring (3) is lengthened
about 3.75 mm after governor lever (4)
touches the full stop.
20-163-1
(7)
PC300/350(LC)-7
4) Function for Pump Absorption Torque

adjustment
The pump absorption torque can be
adjusted within the range shown in the table
below.
Adjustment value Torque adjustment value
220
+4.0 kgm
221
+3.0 kgm
222
+2.0 kgm
223
+1.0 kgm
224
0.0 kgm
225
1.0 kgm
226
2.0 kgm
227
3.0 kgm
228
4.0 kgm
5) Function for Low Idle Speed adjustment
The engine rotation at low idling can be
adjusted within the range shown in the table
below.
Adjustment value
320
321
322
323
Low idling rotation

900 rpm
1,000 rpm
1,100 rpm
1,200 rpm
6) Function for Service Current Adjust.

When a machine is used for a compound
operation, distribution of hydraulic pump oil
flow can be adjusted within the range shown
in the table below.
Adjustment value
370
371
372
373
20-164
Distribution of oil flow

to attachment
0.5 Time
0.7 Time
1.0 Time
0.4 Time
PC300/350(LC)-7
SPECIAL FUNCTIONS OF 7-SEGMENTS MONITOR PANEL
Section to display
special functions
Section to operate special

function 1 (Basic operation)
Section to operate special function 2

(Selecting operation and special operation)
1. Display section
3. Caution buzzer stop switch
7. Working mode selector (UP) switch
2. Service meter
section
4. Auto-decelerator switch
8. Working mode selector (DOWN) switch
5. Setting switch (Black switch)

6. Travel speed shifting switch
PC300/350(LC)-7
20-165
(5)
Ordinary functions and special functions of monitor panel

The monitor panel has the ordinary functions and special functions and displays various pieces of information
on display section (1) and service meter section (2).
Some items are displayed automatically according to the internal setting of the monitor panel and the others are
displayed by operating switches.
1. Ordinary functions: Operator menu
The items in this menu are displayed normally or displayed automatically when a trouble occurs.
2. Special functions: Service menu
The items in this menu are not displayed normally. Each serviceman can display them by operating special
switches. These functions are used for special setting, testing, adjusting, or troubleshooting.
Flow of each function
1 Function of displaying service meter

O <Automatic>
2 Function of displaying user code
Special functions (Service menu)

<Operation of switch> O
Ordinary functions (Operator menu)
3 Function of displaying service code [01]

4 Monitoring function [02]
5 Function of adjusting governor [03]
6 Function of selecting maintenance period [04]
7 Function of selecting default working mode [05]
8 Function of setting installation of attachment [16]
9
Special function of monitoring replacement

of engine oil
a Each number in [ ] is a code No. displayed in the service meter section when the menu is selected.
20-166
(5)
PC300/350(LC)-7
Display of operator menu

a Only outline of the operator menu is described in
this section. For details of each menu, see OPERATION MANUAL or the volume of STRUCTURE AND FUNCTION.
1. Function of displaying service meter

While the machine is used normally, the monitor
panel displays the following information.
Display section (1): Nothing is displayed
Service meter section (2): Service meter
2. Function of displaying user code

If the machine has any trouble, the corresponding user code is displayed automatically in display section (1) and the caution buzzer is turned
ON to urge the operator to take a proper remedy, depending on the degree of the trouble.
a Service meter section (2) continues displaying the service meter.
a For displayed user codes and the remedies
shown to the operator, see "User codes and
remedies shown to operator".
a Each user code simply shows occurrence of
a trouble to the operator. To find out the
cause of the trouble, a serviceman must
check the service code with the "Function of
displaying service code [01]" in the service
menu.
<Reference>
A user code is displayed only when a serious
trouble occurs.
Even if a user code is not displayed, a trouble
may have occurred. If you feel any abnormality,
be sure to check for a service code with the
"Function of displaying service code [01]" in the
service menu.
a User codes and remedies shown to operator
User
code
Error mode
E02
Error in pump
control system
Error in swing
E03
brake system
E05
Remedy (shown to operator)
Caution
buzzer
If the emergency pump drive switch is set in the upper position, the
machine can operate normally. Have the machine inspected immediately,
however.
Set the swing holding brake release switch in the upper position to release
the brake. When applying the swing brake, operate the swing lock switch
manually. The brake may not be released, depending on the cause of the
failure. In this case, have the machine inspected immediately.
Error in governor
Have the machine inspected immediately.
system
PC300/350(LC)-7
20-167
(5)
Operation and display of service menu

How to select service menu
a When using the general functions in the service
menu, perform the following switch operation to
change the screen of the monitor panel.
3. Function of displaying service code [01]
4. Monitoring function [02]
5. Function of adjusting governor [03]
6. Function of selecting maintenance period
[04]
7. Function of selecting default working
mode [05]
8. Function of setting installation of attachment [16]
1) Operating switches
While holding caution buzzer stop switch (3),
hold auto decelerator switch (4) for 2.5 seconds.
2) Displaying display section and service meter
section
If the switches are operated as shown above,
the first menu No. [01] (Monitoring function) is
displayed in service meter section (2).
a Nothing is displayed in display section (1).
3) Selecting menu
operate working mode selector switches (7) and
(8) to select a menu you will use.
UP switch (7): Increase Menu No.
DOWN switch (8): Decrease Menu No.
Menu
No.
01
02
03
04
05
16
Service menu
(Excluding special functions)
Function of displaying error code
Monitoring function
Function of adjusting governor
Function of selecting maintenance period
Function of selecting default working mode
Function of setting installation of attachment
4) Executing menu
Select a menu you will use and press set switch
(5), and the menu is executed.
5) Finishing service menu
hold auto decelerator switch (4) for 2.5 seconds
(similarly to the selecting operation).
a The service menu is finished and the ordinary screen appears.
a The service menu can be also finished by
turning the starting switch OFF while the
service menu is selected. (In this case, the
ordinary screen appears when the starting
switch is turned ON again.)
20-168
(5)
PC300/350(LC)-7
a To use the following special function, you must

operate the switches differently from the above.
See details of this function "9. Special function
of monitoring replacement of engine oil".
3. Function of displaying service code [01]

With this function, you can check the service
code of a trouble which is occurring at present
or has occurred in the past.
1) Selecting and executing function
i) Select menu No. [01] in the menu selection mode.
ii) Press set switch (5) to execute this
function.
2) Information displayed in display section and
service meter section 1 (When service code
is recorded)
If a service code is recorded, the following
information is displayed in display section
(1) and service meter section (2).
(a): Service code
(b): Service meter reading increased after
trouble occurred
(c): Mark [E] to indicate that trouble is occurring at present
a Mark [E] to indicate that a trouble is occurring at present indicates that the service code is being detected now. It is not
displayed if the trouble has been repaired or the service code is not detected.
a For the service codes which the monitor
panel and engine throttle and pump controller can detect, see the "Service
codes table".
service meter section 2 (When service code
is not recorded)
If a service code is not recorded, display
section (1) and service meter section (2)
display as shown in the figure.
4) Number of recorded service codes and display order of them
This function can record up to 20 service
codes, which are displayed in order from the
latest one.
a If a new trouble occurs while 20 service
codes are recorded, the oldest service
code is deleted and the service code of
the new trouble is recorded.
PC300/350(LC)-7
20-169
(5)
5) Change of displayed service codes

While holding caution buzzer stop switch
(3), operate working mode selector switches
(7) and (8) to change the displayed service
codes.
UP switch (7):
Next service code appears.
DOWN switch (8):
Previous service code appears.
6) How to delete service code
i) While holding caution buzzer stop
switch (3), turn the starting switch OFF
and keep holding caution buzzer stop
switch (3).
ii) Under the above condition, turn the
starting switch ON again and hold caution buzzer stop switch (3) for 5 seconds.
a A service code having the mark [E] is not
deleted.
20-170
(5)
PC300/350(LC)-7
Service codes table

User code
Service code
Trouble
E101
Abnormality in error history data
E104
Clogging of air cleaner (Equivalent to error code [AA10NX])
E108
Overheating of engine coolant (Equivalent to error code [B@BCNS])
E112
Short circuit in wiper motor drive forward system
E113
Short circuit in wiper motor drive reverse system
E114
Short circuit in windshield washer drive system
E115
Trouble in operation of windshield wiper
E116
Trouble in storage of windshield wiper
E201
Short circuit in travel junction solenoid
E03
E203
Short circuit in swing holding brake solenoid
E204
Short circuit in merge-divider solenoid
E205
Short circuit in 2-stage relief solenoid
E206
Short circuit in travel speed shifting solenoid
E211
Disconnection in travel junction solenoid
E03
E213
Disconnection in swing holding brake solenoid
E214
Disconnection in merge-divider solenoid
E215
Disconnection in 2-stage relief solenoid
E216
Disconnection in travel speed shifting solenoid
E217
Abnormality in input model code
E218
Disconnection in S-NET signal line
E222
Short circuit in LS-EPC solenoid
E223
Disconnection in LS-EPC solenoid
E224
Abnormality in F pump pressure sensor
E225
Abnormality in R pump pressure sensor
E226
Abnormality in pressure sensor power supply
E227
Abnormality in engine speed sensor
E228
Short circuit in ATT return selector relay
E02
E232
Short circuit in PC-EPC solenoid
E02
E233
Disconnection in PC-EPC solenoid
E238
Disconnection in ATT return selector relay
E256
Illegal non-volatile memory data
E304
Short circuit in engine stop solenoid relay
E306
Abnormality in governor potentiometer
E05
E308
Abnormality in fuel control dials
E313
Abnormality in auto grease system (Equivalent to error code [DA80MA])
E314
Disconnection in engine stop solenoid relay
E315
Short circuit in battery relay output line
E316
Abnormality in step-out of governor motor
E05
E317
Disconnection in phases A and B of governor motor
E05
E318
Short circuit in phases A and B of governor motor
a For troubleshooting for a service code having the description of (Equivalent to error code [******]), see the
section of the corresponding "Error code of mechanical system".
a "E" at the head of each service code indicates the following condition.
With E: The trouble has not been repaired.
Without E: The trouble has been repaired.
PC300/350(LC)-7
20-171
(5)
4. Monitoring function [02]

With this function, you can monitor the revolution speed, oil pressure, current, voltage, input
condition, output condition, etc. in real time by
the signals from the sensors, switches, and
solenoids installed to various parts of the
machine.
function.
2) Selecting and executing monitoring code
While holding caution buzzer stop switch
(3), operate working mode selector switches
(7) and (8) to select a monitoring code displayed in service meter section (1).
UP switch (7): Increase code No.
DOWN switch (8): Decrease code No.
a This function displays monitoring code
[001] and its information first.
a For the items and code Nos. which you
can monitor, see the "Monitoring codes
table".

service meter section 1 (When numeral
code is displayed)
If a numeral monitoring code is selected, the
following information is displayed in display
section (1) and service meter section (2).
(a): Monitoring code
(b): Monitoring information (Value is displayed)

service meter section 2 (When 6-bit code is
displayed)
If a 6-bit monitoring code is selected, the following information is displayed in display
section (1) and service meter section (2).
(a): Monitoring code
(b): Monitoring information (6 pieces of
information are displayed in bits)
a In the 6-bit display mode, only the top
and bottom of the 7-segments mark are
used to display. "Solid black" indicates
the ON state, and "white on black background" indicates the OFF state.
a For the No. of each bit, see the "Monitoring codes table" and the drawing attached to it.
20-172
(5)
PC300/350(LC)-7
Monitoring codes table

Code
Monitoring item
Unit
002
Engine throttle and pump controller model code
Numeral
003
Engine throttle and pump controller model code
Numeral
010
Engine speed
10 rpm
011
F pump discharge pressure
kg/cm2
012
R pump discharge pressure
kg/cm2
013
PC-EPC solenoid output current
10 mA
015
LS-EPC solenoid output current
10 mA
016
2nd throttle speed
10 rpm
017
(Unused)
019
021
022
023
024
Input condition 1 of switch
Drive condition of solenoid

valve 1
Drive condition of solenoid

valve 2
PC300/350(LC)-7
Remarks
a Swing oil pressure switch (ON)
(6 bit)
b Travel oil pressure switch (ON)
(6 bit)
c Boom LOWER oil pressure switch (ON)
(6 bit)
d Boom RAISE oil pressure switch (ON)
(6 bit)
e Arm IN oil pressure switch (ON)
(6 bit)
f Arm OUT oil pressure switch (ON)
(6 bit)
a Bucket CURL oil pressure switch (ON)
(6 bit)
b Bucket DUMP oil pressure switch (ON)
(6 bit)
c (Unused)
(6 bit)
d Service oil pressure switch (ON)
(6 bit)
e Travel differential pressure switch
(6 bit)
f (Unused)
(6 bit)
a (Unused)
(6 bit)
b (Unused)
(6 bit)
c One-touch power maximizing switch (ON)
(6 bit)
d Swing holding brake release switch (RELEASE)
(6 bit)
e Swing lock switch (LOCK)
(6 bit)
f (Unused)
(6 bit)
a (Unused)
(6 bit)
b Travel junction solenoid (ON)
(6 bit)
c Swing holding brake solenoid (ON)
(6 bit)
d Merge-divider solenoid (ON)
(6 bit)
e 2-stage relief solenoid (ON)
(6 bit)
f Travel speed shifting solenoid (ON)
(6 bit)
a (Unused)
(6 bit)
b (Unused)
(6 bit)
c (Unused)
(6 bit)
d ATT return selector relay (ON)
(6 bit)
e (Unused)
(6 bit)
f (Unused)
(6 bit)
20-173
(5)
Code
027
Monitoring item
Input condition of model

selection signal
Unit
a Model selection 1 (Connected to ground)
(6 bit)
b Model selection 2 (Connected to ground)
(6 bit)
c Model selection 3 (Connected to ground)
(6 bit)
d Model selection 4 (Connected to ground)
(6 bit)
e Model selection 5 (Connected to ground)
(6 bit)
f Kerosene mode (Connected to ground)
(6 bit)
030
Fuel control dial input voltage
10 mV
031
Governor potentiometer input voltage
10 mV
032
Controller power source voltage
100 mV
033
Governor motor phase A output current
10 mA
034
Governor motor phase B output current
10 mA
035
Battery relay BR output voltage
100 mV
036
037
Input condition of signal
Output condition of signal
a (Unused)
(6 bit)
b (Unused)
(6 bit)
c (Unused)
(6 bit)
d (Unused)
(6 bit)
e Starting switch signal C (START)
(6 bit)
f (Unused)
(6 bit)
a Battery relay (DRIVEN)
(6 bit)
b (Unused)
(6 bit)
c Engine stop solenoid relay (DRIVEN)
(6 bit)
d (Unused)
(6 bit)
e (Unused)
(6 bit)
f (Unused)
(6 bit)
041
Engine coolant sensor input voltage
10 mV
042
Fuel level sensor input voltage
10 mV
043
Alternator input voltage
100 mV
044
Hydraulic oil temperature sensor input voltage
10 mV
045
046
Input condition of switch 4
Input condition of sensor
20-174
(5)
a Starting switch signal ACC (ON)
(6 bit)
b Starting switch signal C (START)
(6 bit)
c Starting switch signal R1 (HEAT)
(6 bit)
d Lamp switch (ON)
(6 bit)
e Radiator coolant level switch (OPEN)
(6 bit)
f (Unused)
(6 bit)
a Air cleaner clogging switch (OPEN)
(6 bit)
b (Unused)
(6 bit)
c Engine oil pressure switch (OPEN)
(6 bit)
d Engine oil level switch (OPEN)
(6 bit)
e (Unused)
(6 bit)
f Alternator (Normal generation)
(6 bit)
Remarks
PC300/350(LC)-7
Code
049
Monitoring item
Input condition of switch 5
Unit
a Swing lock switch (LOCK)
(6 bit)
b Caution buzzer stop switch (ON)
(6 bit)
c Windows limit switch (ON)
(6 bit)
d Wiper contact W (ON)
(6 bit)
e Wiper contact P (ON)
(6 bit)
f (Unused)
(6 bit)
200
Monitor panel program version
Numeral
201
Engine throttle and pump controller program version
Numeral
Remarks
a When the wiper is stopped, (d) and (f) of code No. [048] light up. When the wiper is operated, (c) and (f) or
(d) and (e) light up.
Display of numeral code
PC300/350(LC)-7
Display of 6-bit code
20-175
(5)
5. Function of adjusting governor [03]

This function is used to adjust the governor lever
stroke after the governor actuator, fuel injection
pump, or governor spring is removed and
installed or replaced, or when the high idling
speed is low or engine speed is not stabilized.
function.
2) Condition of governor motor

If this function is executed, all the governor
control functions are cancelled, and then the
operating angle of the governor actuator follows up only the operation signal of the fuel
control dial.
a While this function is executed, [GOV] is
displayed in display section (1) and
[gSET] is displayed in service meter section (2).
3) Adjusting governor lever stroke

i) Keep the fuel control dial to the MAX
position.
ii) Loosen nuts (2) and (3) of governor
spring (1).
a Nut (2) is left-handed.
iii) Turn and adjust rod (5) so that governor
lever (4) of the fuel injection pump will
touch the full stopper.
iv) Tighten rod (5) a little less than 1 turn to
compress governor spring (1) by 2.0
mm.
a At this time, distance (a) between
the pins does not change but the
spring in the governor spring is compressed.
v) Tighten nuts (2) and (3).
3 Nut:
11.8 19.6 Nm {1.2 2.0 kgm}
vi) Return the fuel control dial to the MIN
position, and then turn it again slowly
toward the MAX position. At this time,
check that governor spring (1) expands
by about 2.0 mm after it reaches the full
stopper.
20-176
(5)
PC300/350(LC)-7
6. Function of selecting maintenance period [04]

With this function, you can adjust the maintenance period of the engine oil for the function of
the engine oil replacement monitor.
function.
2) Selecting maintenance period

The current display mode or maintenance
period is displayed in service meter section
(2). Press set switch (5) to select a maintenance period.
a Nothing is displayed in display section
(1).
a Each time the set switch is pressed, the
display mode or maintenance period
changes in the following order.
Display
Display mode/
Maintenance period
Maintenance function is reset.
125
125-hour interval
250
250-hour interval
500
500-hour interval
Demonstration mode
3) Settling maintenance period

The display or maintenance period
becomes effective when it is selected.
Accordingly, perform the ordinary finishing
operation.
<Special functions of engine oil replacement
monitor>
a For the method of displaying the engine oil
replacement monitor, method of checking
the elapsed time after replacement of engine
oil, method of clearing the elapsed time, and
method of displaying demonstration mode,
see "9. Special functions of engine oil replacement monitor".
PC300/350(LC)-7
20-177
(5)
7. Function of selecting default working mode [05]

With this function, you can freely select the
working mode which is set automatically when
the starting switch is turned ON (When the
machine is delivered, mode A is set).
function.
2) Selecting default working mode

The currently set working mode is displayed
in service meter section (2). Press working
mode selector switches (7) and (8) to select
a working mode.
UP switch (7): Next mode is displayed.
DOWN switch (8): Previous mode is displayed.
a Nothing is displayed in display section
(1).
a The working mode changes in the following order: A o E o B
3) Settling default working mode
Press set switch (5) to settle the selected
working mode.
20-177-1
(5)
PC300/350(LC)-7
8. Function of setting installation of attachment [16]

With this function, you can set installation of
attachment.
a When an attachment is installed, if INSTALLED is not set with this function, the Bmode function (automatic single/double operation selecting function) cannot be used.
function.
a While this function is executed, [16SET]
is displayed in the service meter section
(2) and [0] or [1] is displayed in display
section (1).
2) Selecting installation of attachment
i) The current setting is displayed in service meter section (1). Check the actual
installation of attachment and setting.
[0]: Attachment is not installed.
[1]: Attachment is installed.
ii) While holding caution buzzer stop
switch (3), operate working mode selector switches (7) and (8) to select [0] or
[1].
UP switch (7): [1] is selected.
DOWN switch (8): [0] is selected.
3) Settling installation of attachment
Press set switch (5) to settle the selected
setting of installation of attachment.
PC300/350(LC)-7
20-177-2
(5)
9. Special functions of engine oil replacement monitor

1) Ordinary display of engine oil replacement
monitor
If the rest of time before the set engine oil
replacement time is 10 hours or shorter,
engine oil replacement monitor (10) lights
up and display the elapsed time in service
meter section (2) for 20 seconds each time
the starting switch is turned ON.
2) Checking elapsed time
To check the elapsed time while engine oil
replacement monitor (10) is OFF, turn the
starting switch OFF and press set switch (5)
and then turn the starting switch ON and
keep holding set switch (5).
3) Clearing elapsed time
To clear the elapsed time after replacing the
engine oil, hold set switch (5) for 3 seconds
while the elapsed time is displayed in service meter section (2).
a If the above operation is performed, the
elapsed time in the monitor panel is set
to 0 hours.
4) Function of demonstration mode
If the demonstration mode is selected, you
can perform demonstration of the oil maintenance function when teaching the operation
to a customer.
The functions and display of the demonstration mode are as follows.
i) The internally set interval is recognized
as 250 hours and the elapsed time is
recognized as 240 hours.
ii) When the starting switch is turned ON
after the demonstration mode is set, the
ordinary display is repeated up to 3
times (number of the times of turning
the starting switch ON).
iii) After the demonstration is finished,
resetting of maintenance setting [0] is
recognized.
a When the demonstration is repeated 3
times, resetting of maintenance setting
is recognized. If setting is necessary at
this time, see "Function of selecting
maintenance period".
20-177-3
(5)
PC300/350(LC)-7
PREPARATIONS FOR TROUBLESHOOTING ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
PREPARATIONS FOR TROUBLESHOOTING ELECTRICAL

SYSTEM
PC300, 300LC-7 Serial No. 40001 45000
PC350, 350LC-7 Serial No. 20001 25000
a When diagnosing electric circuits related to the
monitor panel and governor pump controller, first
open up the connector portions in the following
manner.
2. Governor pump controller

a The governor pump controller is installed under a cover behind the operator's seat.
1) Remove three caps (1) and then three
securing bolts.
a When removing the caps, use of a thin
flat-head screw driver is recommended.
2) Take off cover (2).
1. Monitor panel
a The cover is fixed with two upper and
lower clips. Pull it up for the removal.
a If a sunlight sensor is equipped for an air
conditioner, detach P15 connector at the
cover rear side.
2) Remove three securing screws and take

monitor panel (2) off the mount.
a Be careful not to let fall the securing
screws inside the console.
3) Insert or connect a T-adaptor for diagnosis
with P01, P02 and P70 (multi-monitor only)
connectors.
20-178
(7)
3) Insert or connect a T-adapter for diagnosis

with C01, C02 and C03 connectors of governor pump controller (3).
a The connectors are fixed with screws.
Loosen the screws and detach the connectors.
a When putting the connectors back into
position, tighten them to the specified
torque.
3 Screw: 2.82 Nm{0.288 kgm}
PC300/350(LC)-7
PREPARATIONS FOR TROUBLESHOOTING ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
PC300, 300LC-7 Serial No. 45001 and up

a When diagnosing electric circuits related to the
monitor panel and governor pump controller, first
open up the connector portions in the following
manner.
2. Governor pump controller

a The governor pump controller is installed under a cover behind the operator's seat.
1) Remove three bolts and then cover (5).
1. Monitor panel
a The cover is fixed with two upper and
lower clips. Pull it up for the removal.
a If a sunlight sensor is equipped for an air
conditioner, detach P15 connector at the
cover rear side.
2) Insert or connect a T-adapter for diagnosis

with C01, C02 and C03 connectors of governor pump controller (6).
a The connectors are fixed with screws.
Loosen the screws and detach the connectors.
a When putting the connectors back into
position, tighten them to the specified
torque.
3 Screw: 2.82 Nm {0.288 kgm}
2) Remove three securing screws and take
monitor panel (2) off the mount.
a Be careful not to let fall the securing
screws inside the console.
3) Insert or connect a T-adaptor for diagnosis
with P01, P02 and P70 (multi-monitor only)
connectors.
PC300/350(LC)-7
20-178-1
(7)
PC300/350(LC)-7
20-179
20-180
PC300/350(LC)-7
Engine
Hydraulic system
PC300/350(LC)-7
20-181
Full
Low
Full
Fuel dial
Full
Fuel dial
E
( L)
Boom and arm held level
Boom held level

Bucket DIGGING
Arm DIGGING
Fully extended
No.
Engine stop
Fuel dial
Swing (5 turns)
Boom and arm held

level, Bucket loaded
Hydraulic drift amount at

bucket tooth tip (15 min.)
Hydraulic oil temperature (45 55oC)

Condition setting
Measurement item
Working
mode Work equipment posture
3. Work equipment hydraulic drift amount
mm
Unit
Sec.
Unit
Arm (extended) relief
Right
Left
Right
Lo
Left
A
Right
Track
shoe
raised
Travel
( Mi)
8
at one side
Left
(5 turns)
Right
Hi
Left
: The "Mi" and "L" modes are on the multi-monitor specification machine only.
1
2
3
4
5
6
No.
OFF
ON
Operating travel control lever

(Do not travel machine)
Hydraulic oil temperature (45 55oC)

Condition setting
Working Work equipment posture Measurement item
mode
Boom RAISE
No load, fully extended
Arm DUMPING
A
ON
OFF
OFF
rpm
MPa{kg/cm2}
rpm
MPa{kg/cm2}
rpm
kPa{mmH2O}
rpm
Engine rotation
Engine oil pressure
Engine rotation
Engine oil pressure
Engine rotation
Blow-by pressure
Engine rotation
2,090 2,230
0.36 0.61{3.5 6.0}
850 925
Min. 0.10{Min. 1.0}
1,770 1,970
Max. 1.0{Max. 100}
1,300 1,500
New machine
0.18{1.8}
0.07{0.7}
2.0{200}
Failure judgement
Standard value
Implemented on:
PC300: 28.0 39.0

PC300LC: 32.0 41.5
PC300: 31.5 48.5
PC300LC: 34.0 51.5
PC300: 42.0 70.0
PC300LC: 45.0 74.5
PC300: 30.0 34.0

PC300LC: 32.0 36.0
PC300: 33.5 44.5
PC300LC: 35.5 47.5
PC300: 44.0 66.0
PC300LC: 46.5 69.5
PC350: 33.5 44.5

PC350LC: 35.5 47.5
PC350: 44.0 66.0
PC350LC: 46.5 69.5
PC350: 30.0 34.0

PC350LC: 32.0 36.0
28.7 34.5
3.4 4.2
2.7 3.5
3.4 4.2
3.5 4.5
4.4 5.4
2.9 3.5
PC350: 31.5 48.5

PC350LC: 34.0 51.5
PC350: 42.0 70.0
PC350LC: 45.0 74.5
PC350: 28.0 39.0

PC350LC: 32.0 41.5
Max. 30
Max. 4.6
Max. 3.7
Max. 4.5
Max. 4.8
Max. 5.7
Max. 3.8
450
Max. 675
550
Max. 825
Standard value
PC350, 350LC-7
PC300, 300LC-7
Failure judgement
New model
Failure judgement
New model
Max. 30
Max. 4.5
Max. 3.5
Max. 4.5
Max. 4.9
Max. 5.7
Max. 3.8
28.7 34.5
3.3 4.1
2.6 3.2
3.4 4.2
3.6 4.6
4.4 5.4
2.9 3.5
Standard value
PC350, 350LC-7
PC300, 300LC-7
New model
Failure judgement
New model
Failure judgement
Unit
Client user's name
Measurement item
Service meter reading
Work equipment operation
Serial No.
Condition setting
Working
Auto
One-touch pomode decelerator wer max. switch
2. Work equipment speed
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
No.
1. Engine
Model
Measured value
Measured value
Measured value
Good / No good
Judgement
Good / No good
Good / No good
Good / No good
Good / No good
Good / No good
Good / No good
Good / No good
Good / No good
Good / No good
Good / No good
Good / No good
Good / No good
Good / No good
Good / No good
Judgement
Good / No good
Good / No good
Good / No good
Good / No good
Good / No good
Good / No good
Good / No good
Judgement
Inspected by:
20-182
PC300/350(LC)-7
Part to be checked
Servo
Part to be checked
PC-EPC valve
No.
No.
Full
Full
Low
Fuel dial
Full
Fuel dial
Full
Fuel dial
L)
L)
Working
mode
Working
mode
Working
mode
: The "L" mode is on the multi-monitor specification machine only
LS-EPC valve
Main relief valve,

Travel safety valve,
Travel interlocking valve
Swing safety valve
Self-decompression valve
Main relief valve
(When power increased)
Part to be checked
LS valve
(LS differential
pressure valve)
No.
4. Inspection of hydraulic circuit
Condition setting
OFF
Condition setting
OFF
Left reverse
Left forward
Right reverse
Right forward
Left relief
Right relief
Left
Right
Arm dumping relief
Track shoe
locked
Swing lock
switch ON
Travel without load,

engine at Hi idling and
control lever at half stroke
Neutral
Arm dumping relief
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
Right lever at
halfway position
Left lever at
halfway position
Right lever at
halfway position
Left lever at
halfway position
Neutral
Neutral
Neutral
F main pump
600 kg/cm2
R main pump
600 kg/cm2
R main pump
600 kg/cm2
600 kg/cm2
F main pump
R main pump
600 kg/cm2
F main pump
600 kg/cm2
Do not travel the machine.
Arm IN relief
Arm dumping
relief
Neutral
Neutral
AutoOne-touch po- Work equipment

Travel lever
decelerator wer max. switch operation
OFF
AutoOne-touch podecelerator wer max. switch
OFF
ON
OFF
Auto-dece- One-touch polerator wer max. switch
Condition setting
Control circuit
pressure
60 kg/cm2
600 kg/cm2
60 kg/cm2
PC
EPC
60 kg/cm2
Remarks
LS
EPC
60 kg/cm2
Control circuit
pressure
60 kg/cm2
When one pump relieved: 1.5 MPa {15 kg/cm2}
At neutral: 2.9 MPa {30 kg/cm2}

When 2 pumps relieved: 0 MPa {0 kg/cm2}
<11>
<10>
< 0>
<10>
<32>
Remarks <Reference value: kg/cm2>
Connection to be changed to hoses and , and gauge to be replaced

with one with 60 K capacity.
Main servo pressure balance

/ = / = 3/5
Remarks
38.2 MPa {390 kg/cm2}
30.9 MPa {315 kg/cm2}
MainLS=2.5 MPa{25.0 kg/cm2} (LS pressure)
MainLS=2.9 MPa{30 kg/cm2}

(LS differential pressure = Unload pressure)
Circuit pressure 3.2 MPa {33 kg/cm2}

34.8 37.3 MPa
{355 380 kg/cm2}
Connection to be changed to hoses and
R pump LS
600 kg/cm2
circuit
F pump servo R pump servo Control
pressure
600 kg/cm2
F pump LS
600 kg/cm2
TROUBLESHOOTING
POINTS TO REMEMBER WHEN TROUBLESHOOTING.......................................................................... 20-202
SEQUENCE OF EVENTS IN TROUBLESHOOTING................................................................................. 20-203
POINTS TO REMEMBER WHEN CARRYING OUT MAINTENANCE ....................................................... 20-204
CHECKS BEFORE TROUBLESHOOTING ................................................................................................ 20-212
CLASSIFICATION AND STEPS FOR TROUBLESHOOTING.................................................................... 20-213
CONNECTOR LOCATION CHART AND ELECTRICAL CIRCUIT DIAGRAM BY SYSTEM...................... 20-218
CONNECTION TABLE FOR CONNECTOR PIN NUMBERS ..................................................................... 20-236
TROUBLESHOOTING WHEN SERVICE CODE "ELECTRICAL SYSTEM" AND FAILURE CODE
"MECHANICAL SYSTEM" ARE INDICATED ...................................................................................... 20-301
TROUBLESHOOTING OF ELECTRICAL SYSTEM (E-MODE) ................................................................. 20-501
TROUBLESHOOTING OF HYDRAULIC AND MECHANICAL SYSTEM (H-MODE) ................................. 20-601
PC300/350(LC)-7
20-201
POINTS TO REMEMBER WHEN TROUBLESHOOTING
POINTS TO REMEMBER WHEN TROUBLESHOOTING

k
k
k
k
k
k
Stop the machine in a level place, and check that the safety pin, blocks, and parking brake are securely fitted.
When carrying out the operation with two or more workers, keep strictly to the agreed signals, and do not
allow any unauthorized person to come near.
If the radiator cap is removed when the engine is hot, hot water may spurt out and cause burns, so wait for
the engine to cool down before starting troubleshooting.
Be extremely careful not to touch any hot parts or to get caught in any rotating parts.
When disconnecting wiring, always disconnect the negative () terminal of the battery first.
When removing the plug or cap from a location which is under pressure from oil, water, or air, always release
the internal pressure first. When installing measuring equipment, be sure to connect it properly.
The aim of troubleshooting is to pinpoint the basic cause of the failure, to carry out repairs swiftly, and to
prevent reoccurrence of the failure.
When carrying out troubleshooting, and important point is of course to understand the structure and function.
However, a short cut to effective troubleshooting is to ask the operator various questions to form some idea
of possible causes of the failure that would produce the reported symptoms.
1. When carrying out troubleshooting, do not hurry

to disassemble the components.
If components are disassembled immediately
any failure occurs:
Parts that have no connection with the failure
or other unnecessary parts will be disassembled.
It will become impossible to find the cause of
the failure.
It will also cause a waste of manhours, parts, or
oil or grease, and at the same time, will also lose
the confidence of the user or operator.
For this reason, when carrying out troubleshooting, it is necessary to carry out thorough prior
investigation and to carry out troubleshooting in
accordance with the fixed procedure.
2. Points to ask user or operator
1) Have any other problems occurred apart
from the problem that has been reported?
2) Was there anything strange about the
machine before the failure occurred?
3) Did the failure occur suddenly, or were there
problems with the machine condition before
this?
4) Under what conditions did the failure occur?
5) Had any repairs been carried out before the
failure?
When were these repairs carried out?
6) Has the same kind of failure occurred
before?
3. Check before troubleshooting
1) Check the oil level
2) Check for any external leakage of oil from
the piping or hydraulic equipment.
3) Check the travel of the control levers.
4) Check the stroke of the control valve spool.
20-202
5) Other maintenance items can be checked

externally, so check any item that is considered to be necessary.
4. Confirming failure
Confirm the extent of the failure yourself, and
judge whether to handle it as a real failure or
as a problem with the method of operation,
etc.
When operating the machine to reenact
the troubleshooting symptoms, do not
carry out any investigation or measurement that may make the problem worse.
5. Troubleshooting
Use the results of the investigation and inspection in Items 2 4 to narrow down the
causes of failure, then use the troubleshooting flowchart to locate the position of the failure exactly.
The basic procedure for troubleshooting
is as follows.
1)Start from the simple points.
2)Start from the most likely points.
3)Investigate other related parts or information.
6. Measures to remove root cause of failure
Even if the failure is repaired, if the root
cause of the failure is not repaired, the same
failure will occur again.
To prevent this, always investigate why the
problem occurred. Then, remove the root
cause.
PC300/350(LC)-7
SEQUENCE OF EVENTS IN TROUBLESHOOTING
SEQUENCE OF EVENTS IN TROUBLESHOOTING
PC300/350(LC)-7
20-203
POINTS TO REMEMBER WHEN CARRYING OUT MAINTENANCE

To maintain the performance of the machine over a long period, and to prevent failures or other troubles before
they occur, correct operation, maintenance and inspection, troubleshooting, and repairs must be carried out.
This section deals particularly with correct repair procedures for mechatronics and is aimed at improving the
quality of repairs. For this purpose, it gives sections on "Handling electric equipment" and "Handling hydraulic
equipment" (particularly gear oil and hydraulic oil).
1. Points to remember when handling electric
equipment
1) Handling wiring harnesses and connectors
Wiring harnesses consist of wiring connecting
one component to another component, connectors used for connecting and disconnecting one
wire from another wire, and protectors or tubes
used for protecting the wiring.
Compared with other electrical components fitted in boxes or cases, wiring harnesses are
more likely to be affected by the direct effects of
rain, water, heat, or vibration. Furthermore, during inspection and repair operations, they are
frequently removed and installed again, so they
are likely to suffer deformation or damage. For
this reason, it is necessary to be extremely careful when handling wiring harnesses.
Main failures occurring in wiring harness
1) Defective contact of connectors (defective
contact between male and female)
Problems with defective contact are likely to
occur because the male connector is not
properly inserted into the female connector,
or because one or both of the connectors is
deformed or the position is not correctly
aligned, or because there is corrosion or
oxidization of the contact surfaces.
2) Defective crimping or soldering of connectors

The pins of the male and female connectors
are in contact at the crimped terminal or soldered portion, but if there is excessive force
brought to bear on the wiring, the plating at
the joint will peel and cause improper connection or breakage.
20-204
PC300/350(LC)-7
3) Disconnections in wiring
If the wiring is held and the connectors are
pulled apart, or components are lifted with a
crane with the wiring still connected, or a
heavy object hits the wiring, the crimping of
the connector may separate, or the soldering may be damaged, or the wiring may be
broken.
4) High-pressure water entering connector

The connector is designed to make it difficult for water to enter (drip-proof structure),
but if high-pressure water is sprayed directly
on the connector, water may enter the connector, depending on the direction of the
water jet.
As already said, the connector is designed
to prevent water from entering, but at the
same time, if water does enter, it is difficult
for it to be drained. Therefore, if water
should get into the connector, the pins will
be short-circuited by the water, so if any
water gets in, immediately dry the connector
or take other appropriate action before
passing electricity through it.
5) Oil or dirt stuck to connector
If oil or grease are stuck to the connector
and an oil film is formed on the mating surface between the male and female pins, the
oil will not let the electricity pass, so there
will be defective contact.
If there is oil or grease stuck to the connector, wipe it off with a dry cloth or blow it dry
with compressed air and spray it with a contact restorer.
When wiping the mating portion of the
connector, be careful not to use excessive force or deform the pins.
If there is oil or water in the compressed
air, the contacts will become even dirtier,
so remove the oil and water from the
compressed air completely before
cleaning with compressed air.
PC300/350(LC)-7
20-205
2) Removing, installing, and drying connectors

and wiring harnesses
Disconnecting connectors
1) Hold the connectors when disconnecting.
When disconnecting the connectors, hold
the connectors and not the wires. For connectors held by a screw, loosen the screw
fully, then hold the male and female connectors in each hand and pull apart. For connectors which have a lock stopper, press
down the stopper with your thumb and pull
the connectors apart.
Never pull with one hand.
2) When removing from clips
When removing a connector from a clip, pull
the connector in a parallel direction to the
clip.
If the connector is twisted up and down
or to the left or right, the housing may
break.
3) Action to take after removing connectors

After removing any connector, cover it with a
vinyl bag to prevent any dust, dirt, oil, or
water from getting in the connector portion.
If the machine is left disassembled for a
long time, it is particularly easy for improper contact to occur, so always cover
the connector.
20-206
PC300/350(LC)-7
Connecting connectors
1) Check the connector visually.
1) Check that there is no oil, dirt, or water
stuck to the connector pins (mating portion).
2) Check that there is no deformation,
defective contact, corrosion, or damage
to the connector pins.
3) Check that there is no damage or breakage to the outside of the connector.
If there is any oil, water, or dirt stuck to
the connector, wipe it off with a dry cloth.
If any water has got inside the connector, warm the inside of the wiring with a
dryer, but be careful not to make it too
hot as this will cause short circuits.
If there is any damage or breakage, replace the connector.
2) Fix the connector securely.
Align the position of the connector correctly,
then insert it securely.
For connectors with lock stopper, push in
the connector until the stopper clicks into
position.
3) Correct any protrusion of the boot and any
misalignment of the wiring harness
For connectors fitted with boots, correct any
protrusion of the boot. In addition, if the wiring harness is misaligned, or the clamp is
out of position, adjust it to its correct position.
If the connector cannot be corrected
easily, remove the clamp and adjust the
position.
4) If the connector clamp has been removed,
be sure to return it to its original position.
Check also that there are no loose clamps.
Connecting connectors (DT type connector)

Since the DT 8-pole and 12-pole DT type connectors have 2 latches respectively, push them
in until they click 2 times.
1. Male connector, 2. Female connector
Normal locking state (Horizontal): a, b, d
Incomplete locking state (Diagonal): c
PC300/350(LC)-7
20-207
Drying wiring harness

If there is any oil or dirt on the wiring harness,
wipe it off with a dry cloth. Avoid washing it in
water or using steam. If the connector must be
washed in water, do not use high-pressure
water or steam directly on the wiring harness.
If water gets directly on the connector, do as follows.
1) Disconnect the connector and wipe off the
water with a dry cloth.
If the connector is blown dry with compressed air, there is the risk that oil in the
air may cause defective contact, so remove all oil and water from the compressed air before blowing with air.
2) Dry the inside of the connector with a dryer.
If water gets inside the connector, use a
dryer to dry the connector.
Hot air from the dryer can be used, but
regulate the time that the hot air is used
in order not to make the connector or related parts too hot, as this will cause deformation or damage to the connector.
3) Carry out a continuity test on the connector.

After drying, leave the wiring harness disconnected and carry out a continuity test to
check for any short circuits between pins
caused by water.
After completely drying the connector,
blow it with contact restorer and reassemble.
20-208
PC300/350(LC)-7
3) Handling control box

1) The control box contains a microcomputer
and electronic control circuits. These control
all of the electronic circuits on the machine,
so be extremely careful when handling the
control box.
2) Do not open the cover of the control box
unless necessary.
3) Do not place objects on top of the control

box.
4) Cover the control connectors with tape or a
vinyl bag.
Never touch the connector contacts with
your hand.
5) During rainy weather, do not leave the control box in a place where it is exposed to
rain.
6) Do not place the control box on oil, water, or

soil, or in any hot place, even for a short
time.
(Place it on a suitable dry stand).
7) Precautions when carrying out arc welding
When carrying out arc welding on the body,
disconnect all wiring harness connectors
connected to the control box. Fit an arc
welding ground close to the welding point.
2. Points to remember when troubleshooting electric circuits

1) Always turn the power OFF before disconnecting or connect connectors.
2) Before carrying out troubleshooting, check that all the related connectors are properly inserted.
Disconnect and connect the related connectors several times to check.
3) Always connect any disconnected connectors before going on to the next step.
If the power is turned ON with the connectors still disconnected, unnecessary abnormality displays
will be generated.
4) When carrying out troubleshooting of circuits (measuring the voltage, resistance, continuity, or current),
move the related wiring and connectors several times and check that there is no change in the reading
of the tester.
If there is any change, there is probably
defective contact in that circuit.
PC300/350(LC)-7
20-209
3. Points to remember when handling hydraulic

equipment
With the increase in pressure and precision of
hydraulic equipment, the most common cause of
failure is dirt (foreign material) in the hydraulic circuit. When adding hydraulic oil, or when disassembling or assembling hydraulic equipment, it is
necessary to be particularly careful.
1) Be careful of the operating environment.
Avoid adding hydraulic oil, replacing filters, or
repairing the machine in rain or high winds, or
places where there is a lot of dust.
2) Disassembly and maintenance work in the
field
If disassembly or maintenance work is carried
out on hydraulic equipment in the field, there is
danger of dust entering the equipment. It is also
difficult to confirm the performance after repairs,
so it is desirable to use unit exchange. Disassembly and main-tenance of hydraulic equipment should be carried out in a specially
prepared dustproof workshop, and the performance should be confirmed with special test
equipment.
3) Sealing openings
After any piping or equipment is removed, the
openings should be sealed with caps, tapes, or
vinyl bags to prevent any dirt or dust from entering. If the opening is left open or is blocked with
a rag, there is danger of dirt entering or of the
surrounding area being made dirty by leaking oil
so never do this.
Do not simply drain oil out on to the ground, collect it and ask the customer to dispose of it, or
take it back with you for disposal.
4) Do not let any dirt or dust get in during refilling operations.

Be careful not to let any dirt or dust get in when
refilling with hydraulic oil. Always keep the oil
filler and the area around it clean, and also use
clean pumps and oil containers. If an oil cleaning device is used, it is possible to filter out the
dirt that has collected during storage, so this is
an even more effective method.
20-210
PC300/350(LC)-7
5) Change hydraulic oil when the temperature

is high.
When hydraulic oil or other oil is warm, it flows
easily. In addition, the sludge can also be
drained out easily from the circuit together with
the oil, so it is best to change the oil when it is
still warm. When changing the oil, as much as
possible of the old hydraulic oil must be drained
out. (Drain the oil from the hydraulic tank; also
drain the oil from the filter and from the drain
plug in the circuit.) If any old oil is left, the contaminants and sludge in it will mix with the new
oil and will shorten the life of the hydraulic oil.
6) Flushing operations
After disassembling and assembling the equipment, or changing the oil, use flushing oil to
remove the contaminants, sludge, and old oil
from the hydraulic circuit.
Normally, flushing is carried out twice: primary
flushing is carried out with flushing oil, and secondary flushing is carried out with the specified
hydraulic oil.
7) Cleaning operations
After repairing the hydraulic equipment (pump,
c o n tr o l v a lv e , e t c .) o r wh e n r u n ni n g t he
machine, carry out oil cleaning to remove the
sludge or contaminants in the hydraulic oil circuit.
The oil cleaning equipment is used to remove
the ultrafine (about 3) particles that the filter
built into the hydraulic equipment cannot
remove, so it is an extremely effective device.
PC300/350(LC)-7
20-211
CHECKS BEFORE TROUBLESHOOTING
CHECKS BEFORE TROUBLESHOOTING
Electrics, electrical equipment
Hydraulic, Electrical
mechanical equipment
equipment
Lubricating oil,
coolant
Item
Judgement
value
Action
Add fuel
Clean, drain
Add oil
Clean, drain
Add oil
Add oil
Add water
Clean or replace
Replace
Add oil
1. Check for looseness, corrosion of battery terminal, wiring

2. Check for looseness, corrosion of alternator terminal, wiring
3. Check for looseness, corrosion of starting motor terminal, wiring
Tighten or replace
Tighten or replace
Tighten or replace
1. Check for abnormal noise, smell

2. Check for oil leakage
3. Carry out air bleeding
Repair
Repair
Bleed air
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
Check fuel level, type of fuel

Check for impurities in fuel
Check hydraulic oil level
Check hydraulic oil strainer
Check swing machinery oil level
Check engine oil level (oil pan oil level)
Check coolant level
Check dust indicator for clogging
Check hydraulic filter
Check final drive oil level
20 30V
Check battery voltage (engine stopped)
Check battery electrolyte level
Check for discolored, burnt, exposed wiring
Check for missing wiring clamps, hanging wiring
Check for water leaking on wiring (be particularly careful attention

to water leaking on connectors or terminals)
6. Check for blown, corroded fuses

7. Check alternator voltage (engine running at 1/2 throttle or above) After
running for
several
minutes :
27.5 29.5V
8. Check operating sound of battery relay

(when switch is turned ON/OFF)
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
20-212
Replace
Add or replace
Replace
Repair
Disconnect
connector and dry
Replace
Replace
Replace
PC300/350(LC)-7
TROUBLESHOOTING
CLASSIFICATION AND STEPS FOR TROUBLESHOOTING

Classification of troubleshooting
Mode
Content
Code display
Troubleshooting when Service Code (electrical system) and Failure Code (mechanical
system) are displayed.
E mode
Troubleshooting of electrical system
H mode
Troubleshooting of hydraulic and mechanical systems
S mode
Troubleshooting of engine assembly
Steps for troubleshooting

If some phenomenon occurs on a machine that looks like a failure, identify the corresponding troubleshooting
No. and proceed to the explanations for diagnosis.
1. Troubleshooting steps when calling User Code display in the monitor panel
In the User Code display, select and depress [ ] switch to display Service Code. Following displayed Service Code for the electrical system, carry out the troubleshooting along the corresponding code display.
2. Troubleshooting steps when the electrical system Service Code or mechanical system Failure Code
is recorded in the failure history:
If not calling User Code in the monitor panel, check the electrical system Service Code or mechanical system Failure Code, using the failure history function of the monitor panel.
If Service Code in the electrical system is recorded, delete the all codes once and revive the code in the
display again to check if the same abnormality still persists.
Failure Code in the mechanical system cannot be deleted.
3. Troubleshooting steps without User Code display and no failure history is available
If there is no display of User Code nor the failure history in the monitor panel, it is possible that a failure that
the monitor panel cannot diagnose by itself may have occurred in any of the electrical, hydraulic or mechanical system. In such a case, reexamine the phenomenon, find out the most similar phenomenon from
among "Failure like Phenomena and Troubleshooting No." and carry out E mode or H mode troubleshooting
related to the phenomenon in question.
PC300/350(LC)-7
20-213
(7)
TROUBLESHOOTING
Failure-looking Phenomenon and Troubleshooting No.

Troubleshooting
No.
Failure-looking phenomenon
Code
display
E mode H mode S mode
Action to be taken concerning Service Code, User Code and Failure Code
1 Display User Code in monitor panel
Display Service Code in electrical system after checking failure
2
history
3
Display Failure Code in mechanical system after checking failure

history
According to
displayed
code
Engine-related failure
4
Engine does not start up easily. (It always takes some time to start
up the engine)
5
6
Engine does not rotate

Engine does not start
S-1
E-1
S-2 (1)
Engine rotates, but there is no exhaust gas
S-2 (2)
There is exhaust gas, but engine does not

start
S-2 (3)
8 Engine pickup is poor. (Engine does not follow acceleration)
S-3
9 Engine stops while in operation
E-2
10 Engine rotation is irregular. (There is hunting)
E-3
11 Engine is short of output, or lacks power
H-2
S-4
S-5
H-1
S-6
12 Color of exhaust gas is too dark. (Incomplete combustion)
S-7
13 Excessive engine oil consumption, or color of exhaust gas is blue
S-8
14 Premature engine oil contamination
S-9
15 Excessive fuel consumption
S-10
16
Engine cooling water is mixed with engine oil, spurts out or

decreases
S-11
17 Engine oil amount increases. (Water or fuel gets in)
S-13
18 Abnormal noises are heard
S-15
19 Excessive vibrations are caused
S-16
20 Engine does not stop
E-4
21 Auto-decelerator does not work
E-5
22 Engine auto warming-up device does not work
E-6
23 Engine preheater does not work
E-7
H-5
Failure related to work equipment, swing and travel

24
Speeds of all work equipment, travel and swing are slow, or they
lack power
25 Engine rotation drops sharply or stalls

26 All work equipment, travel and swing do not move
E-8
H-1
S-6
H-2
S-4
H-3
27 There are abnormal noises from around hydraulic pump
H-4
28 Fine control mode function works poorly, or shows slow response
H-6
20-214
(7)
PC300/350(LC)-7
TROUBLESHOOTING
Troubleshooting
No.
Code
display
Work equipment-related failure

29 Boom moves slowly or lacks power
E-21, 22
H-7
30 Arm moves slowly or lacks power
E-23, 24
H-8
31 Bucket moves slowly or lacks power
E-25, 26
H-9
32 Work equipment does not move singly
H-10
33 Natural drift of work equipment is too fast
H-11
34 Work equipment time lag is too big
H-12
35
Other work equipment moves, when specific work equipment is

relieved
H-13
36 One-touch power max. switch does not work
E-9, 2126
H-14
Compound operation-related failure

37
In compound operation, work equipment with larger load moves

slowly
H-15
38 In swing + boom RAISE operation, boom moves slowly
H-16
39 In swing + travel operation, travel speed drops sharply
H-17
Travel-related failure
40 Machine tends to swerve while in travel
H-18
41 Travel speed is slow

42 Machine is difficult to steer, or lacks power
43 Travel speed cannot be shifted or is slow or fast
E-28
H-19
E-28, 29
H-20
E-28
H-21
44 Track shoe does not move (only on one side)
H-22
Swing-related failure
45 Machine does not swing
E-27
H-23
46 Swing acceleration is poor, or swing speed is slow
H-24
47 Upper structure overruns excessively, when stopping swing
H-25
48 There is a big shock caused when stopping swing
H-26
49 There is abnormal noise generated when stopping swing
H-27
50 Hydraulic drift of swing is large
H-28
Monitor panel-related failure (Operator's Menu: ordinary display)

51 No display appears in monitor panel at all
E-10
52 Part of display is missing in monitor panel
E-11
53 Descriptions on monitor panel do not apply to the machine model
E-12
In startup inspection, radiator water level monitor lamp lights up

red ( )
B@BCZK
55 In startup inspection, engine oil level monitor lamp lights up red
B@BAZK
54
: The multi-monitor specification machine only.
PC300/350(LC)-7
20-215
(7)
TROUBLESHOOTING
Troubleshooting
No.
56 In startup inspection, maintenance hour monitor lamp lights up red

57
Code
display
Refer to Operation and Maintenance

Manual
While engine is running, battery charging level monitor lamp lights

AB00KE
up red
58 While engine is running, fuel level monitor lamp lights up red
E-13
59
While engine is running, air cleaner clogging monitor lamp lights up

AA10NX
red
60
While engine is running, engine cooling water temperature monitor

B@BCNS
lamp lights up red
61
While engine is running, hydraulic oil temperature monitor lamp

lights up red ( )
B@HANS
62 Engine cooling water temperature gauge does not display correctly
E-14
63 Hydraulic oil temperature gauge does not display correctly ( )
E-15
64 Fuel gauge does not display correctly
E-16
65 Swing lock monitor does not display correctly
E-17
66 When operating monitor switch, no display appears
E-18
67 Windshield wiper does not work
E-19
68 Warning buzzer cannot be stopped
E-20
Monitor panel-related failure (Service Menu: Special Function Display)

69
In monitoring function, "Boom RAISE" cannot be displayed correctly
E-21
70
In monitoring function, "Boom LOWER" cannot be displayed correctly
E-22
71
In monitoring function, "Arm DIGGING" cannot be displayed correctly
E-23
72
In monitoring function, "Arm DUMPING" cannot be displayed correctly
E-24
73
In monitoring function, "Bucket DIGGING" cannot be displayed

correctly
E-25
74
In monitoring function, "Bucket DUMPING" cannot be displayed

correctly
E-26
75 In monitoring function, "Swing" cannot be displayed correctly
E-27
76 In monitoring function, "Travel" cannot be displayed correctly
E-28
77
In monitoring function, "Travel Differential Pressure" cannot be displayed correctly
78 In monitoring function, "Service" cannot be displayed correctly
E-29
E-30
Other failure
79 Air conditioner does not work
E-31
80 Travel alarm does not sound
E-32
20-216
(7)
PC300/350(LC)-7
CONNECTOR LOCATION CHART AND ELECTRICAL

CIRCUIT DIAGRAM BY SYSTEM
TROUBLESHOOTING
CONNECTOR LOCATION CHART AND ELECTRICAL CIRCUIT

DIAGRAM BY SYSTEM
Connector table
PC300, 300LC-7 Serial No. 40001 45000
PC350, 350LC-7 Serial No. 20001 25000
Address
Connector
No.
Type
No. of
pin
A01
Intermediate connector
T-1
H-6
I-6
A02
T-2
H-6
I-5
A03
12
N-1
H-6
I-2
A04
SWP
12
O-1
A05
SWP
14
T-1
H-5
I-7
A06
SWP
14
N-1
H-5
I-5
A07
SWP
16
S-1
H-4
A09
SWP
N-2
A10
Terminal
Revolving frame grounding
H-1
H-1
A11
Terminal
H-2
I-1
A12
Terminal
H-2
I-1
A13
Terminal
I-2
I-1
A14
Terminal
C-2
I-1
A15
Terminal
I-2
I-1
J-4
A16
Terminal
I-2
I-1
J-4
A20
Terminal
Battery relay (E terminal)
C-1
J-5
J-5
A21
Terminal
Battery relay (BR terminal)
C-2
J-6
J-5
A22
Terminal
Battery relay (M terminal)
C-1
J-5
K-5
A23
Terminal
Battery relay (B terminal)
C-2
J-6
K-5
A30
YAZAKI
Air conditioner outside air temperature sensor
L-4
A31
K-4
K-4
A33
Radiator water level sensor
K-4
K-5
A34
Fusible link (65A)
A-5
K-6
K-6
A35
Fusible link (30A)
A-4
K-6
K-6
A36
Fusible link (30A)
A-5
A40
AMP
Alarm horn (low tone)
H-1
A41
AMP
Alarm horn (high tone)
H-1
A42
G-9
A43
Travel alarm
J-2
A44
Front right lamp
A-5
20-218
(7)
Name of device
Stereo
M
G
P
-gram circuit circuit circuit
I-8
I-8
I-7
I-4
I-4
I-3
J-3
J-4
J-6
J-8
K-6
J-7
K-4
K-7
PC300/350(LC)-7

TROUBLESHOOTING
Address
Connector
No.
Type
No. of
pin
A50
KES0
Window washer monitor (tank)
K-3
A51
F pump hydraulic oil pressure sensor
J-3
K-5
A52
R pump hydraulic oil pressure sensor
J-3
K-4
A60
Fuel level sensor
D-9
K-4
A61
L-5
K-5
A80
S-1
C01
DRC
24
Governor pump controller
V-9
C02
DRC
40
W-9
C03
DRC
40
W-9
C09
Model selection connector
W-6
D01
SWP
Assembled type diode
W-7
A-9
D-1
D02
SWP
W-7
A-8
D-1
D03
SWP
P-1
D04
SWP
Q-1
E06
Fuel dial
O-8
E07
Engine speed sensor
L-8
E08
12
K-9
E10
Fuel shut-off valve
E10
Governor potentiometer
J-9
K-2
E11
Governor motor
J-9
K-2
F02
YAZAKI
Revolving warning lamp
AA-9
FB1
Fuse box
W-5
H-9
H08
W-4
J-8
H09
W-4
J-8
H10
16
T-9
D-6
I-8
H11
16
S-9
D-5
I-8
H12
12
S-9
D-5
I-7
H15
S090
20
N-7
C-2
G-2
PC300/350(LC)-7
Name of device
Stereo
M
G
P
K-5
I-3
A-3
A-3
A-8
A-8
A-7
A-7
A-4
A-4
C-9
G-1
H-1
A-8
I-1
H-1
L-8
J-3
J-3
K-8
K-3
C-4
F-9
B-9
C-2
20-219
(7)

Address
Connector
No.
Type
No. of
pin
J01
20
Junction connector (black)
W-8
C-9
D-9
C-9
J02
20
W-8
D-9
D-9
D-9
J03
20
Junction connector (green)
W-8
D-9
E-9
D-9
J04
20
W-7
D-9
E-9
E-9
J05
20
Junction connector (pink)
W-6
E-9
F-9
E-9
J06
20
Junction connector (orange)
W-6
F-9
J07
20
U-9
F-9
J08
20
U-9
K19
Pump resistor (for driving emergency pump)
U-2
K30
CAN terminating resistor
S-9
A-2
C-1
K31
N-4
A-4
K-7
M02
Starting motor
L-7
K-3
M07
Lamp switch
O-8
C-1
M09
Working lamp (front right)
E-9
K-7
M13
KES0
Speaker (right)
AC-8
M19
YAZAKI
Cigarette lighter
N-3
M21
PA
Radio
U-2
M22
Y090
Horn switch
N-7
M23
Y090
One-touch power max. switch
T-1
M26
12
W-5
M27
SWP
16
W-5
M28
SWP
12
W-4
M29
040
20
Air control panel
W-3
M30
040
16
Air control panel
W-3
M31
Option power source (2)
U-2
M32
S-9
M33
M33
SWP
W-4
M34
Air compressor electromagnetic clutch
W-8
M38
Machine push-up switch
Q-9
M40
YAZAKI
Working lamp
Z-8
K-8
M41
YAZAKI
Working lamp (additional)
Y-7
K-8
M42
J-3
J-7
M43
Working lamp (rear)
K-7
M45
12
U-2
M46
S090
RS232C relaying connector
U-9
M71
Room lamp
Z-8
M72
DC/AC converter
U-2
M73
KES0
Speaker (left)
M79
YAZAKI
12V electrical equipment socket
20-220
Name of device
Stereo
M
G
P
G-9
G-9
H-9
H-9
H-9
E-3
B-9
D-2
C-9
AD-8
V-9
PC300/350(LC)-7

Address
Connector
No.
Type
No. of
pin
P01
070
12
Monitor panel
N-6
A-7
K-8
P02
040
20
Monitor panel
N-5
A-6
K-8
P03
Buzzer canceling switch
P-9
D-1
P05
Revolving warning lamp switch
W-3
P05
Engine oil temperature switch
K-9
K-2
P07
Engine cooling water switch
L-8
K-1
P15
Y050
Air conditioner sun light sensor
N-6
P70
040
16
Monitor panel
N-4
A-5
R10
Lamp relay
O-8
E-1
R11
Engine starting motor cutting relay (PPC lock)
P-8
E-1
R13
Engine starting motor cutting relay (personal

code)
P-9
F-1
R20
Attachment circuit switching relay
W-6
R22
L-8
S01
Bucket digging oil pressure switch
L-7
K-2
S02
Boom lowering oil pressure switch
L-7
K-3
S03
Swing oil pressure switch, left
L-6
K-2
S04
Arm digging oil pressure switch
L-6
K-3
S05
Bucket dumping oil pressure switch
L-5
K-2
S06
Boom raise oil pressure switch
L-5
K-3
S07
Swing oil pressure switch, right
K-3
K-2
S08
Arm dumping oil pressure switch
J-3
K-3
S09
Service oil pressure switch (intermediate connector)
K-3
K-1
S10
Service oil pressure switch, front
K-1
S11
Service oil pressure switch, rear
K-1
S14
Safety lever lock switch
S-1
S21
Terminal
Pump emergency driving switch
R-9
E-2
S22
Terminal
Swing and parking brake emergency releasing

switch
Q-9
F-2
S23
Terminal
Emergency engine starting switch
R-9
S25
S090
16
R-9
S30
Travel hydraulic switch
O-1
A-1
S31
Travel steering hydraulic switch
O-1
A-1
T05
Terminal
Floor frame grounding
W-3
T06
Terminal
Radio body grounding
T06A
T-2
T11
Terminal
Operator's cab grounding
PC300/350(LC)-7
Name of device
Stereo
M
G
P
A-9
K-7
C-9
D-1
K-9
F-8
F-1
J-8
AD-3
20-221

Address
Connector
No.
Type
No. of
pin
V01
PPC hydraulic lock solenoid valve
L-3
K-6
V02
Travel interlocking solenoid valve
L-3
K-6
V03
Merge/divide valve solenoid valve
L-2
K-7
V04
L-2
K-5
V05
L-2
K-6
V06
L-1
K-5
V08
L-1
K-6
V12
Attachment return switching solenoid valve
G-9
K-4
V21
PC-EPC solenoid valve
V22
LS-EPC solenoid valve
L-6
K-7
V30
Attachment oil flow rate adjusting EPC solenoid

valve
P-1
A-1
W03
Rear limit switch (window)
W04
X05
Name of device
K-7
AB-9
K-8
Y-4
B-9
Swing lock switch
Q-9
D-1
Connector No.
D or DT
Stereo
M
G
P
C-2
Detailed information
Japanese and German makes DT type connector (08192-XXXXX)
Product of Yazaki Corporation L type connector (08056-2XXXX)
Product of Sumitomo Wiring Systems 090 type splice
Product of Yazaki M type connector (08056-0XXXX)
Product of Ryosei Electro-Circuit Systems* PH166-05020 type connector
Product of Yazaki S type connector (08056-1XXXX)
Product of Yazaki X type connector (08055-0XXXX)
PA
Product of Yazaki PA type connector
SWP
Product of Yazaki SWP type connector (08055-1XXXX)
DRC
Japanese and German makes DRC type connector
040
Product of Japan AMP 040 type connector
070
Y050
Product of Yazaki 050 type connector
S090
Product of Sumitomo 090 type connector
Y090
YAZAKI
KES0
Yazaki-made connector
KESO type connector (08027-0XXXX)
Terminal
Round pin type single terminal connector
Terminal
Round terminal
*An affiliated company of Mitsubishi Cable Industries, Ltd.
20-222
PC300/350(LC)-7

TROUBLESHOOTING

Address
Connector
No.
Type
No. of
pin
A01
T-1
H-6
I-6
A02
T-1
H-6
I-5
A03
12
N-2
H-6
I-2
A04
SWP
O-1
A05
SWP
14
T-1
H-5
I-7
A06
SWP
14
O-1
H-5
I-5
A07
SWP
16
S-1
H-4
A09
SWP
N-2
A10
Terminal
H-1
H-1
A11
Terminal
H-2
I-1
A12
Terminal
H-2
I-1
A13
Terminal
I-2
I-1
A14
Terminal
C-2
I-1
A15
Terminal
I-2
I-1
J-4
A16
Terminal
I-2
I-1
J-4
A20
Terminal
Battery relay (E terminal)
C-1
J-5
J-5
A21
Terminal
Battery relay (BR terminal)
C-2
J-6
J-5
A22
Terminal
Battery relay (M terminal)
C-1
J-5
K-5
A23
Terminal
Battery relay (B terminal)
C-2
J-6
K-5
A31
K-4
K-4
A33
Radiator water level sensor
K-4
K-5
A34
Fusible link (65A)
A-5
K-6
K-6
A35
Fusible link (30A)
A-4
K-6
K-6
A36
Fusible link (30A)
A-5
A40
AMP
Alarm horn (low tone)
H-1
A41
AMP
Alarm horn (high tone)
H-1
A42
G-9
A43
Travel alarm
J-2
A44
Front right lamp
A-5
PC300/350(LC)-7
Name of device
Stereo
M
G
P
I-8
I-8
I-7
I-4
I-4
I-3
J-3
J-4
J-6
J-8
K-6
J-7
K-4
K-7
20-222-1
(7)

TROUBLESHOOTING
Address
Connector
No.
Type
No. of
pin
A50
KES0
Window washer monitor (tank)
K-3
A51
F pump hydraulic oil pressure sensor
J-3
K-5
A52
R pump hydraulic oil pressure sensor
J-3
K-4
A60
Fuel level sensor
D-9
K-4
A61
L-5
K-5
A70
Boom cylinder bottom pressure sensor (Overload alarm)
G-1
A80
S-1
C01
DRC
24
U-9
C02
DRC
40
U-9
C03
DRC
40
V-9
C09
Model selection connector
W-9
D01
SWP
W-7
A-9
D-1
D02
SWP
W-5
A-8
D-1
D04
SWP
W-5
A-8
E06
Fuel dial
O-7
E07
Engine speed sensor
L-8
E08
12
K-9
E10
Fuel shut-off valve
E10
J-9
K-2
E11
Governor motor
J-9
K-2
F02
YAZAKI
Revolving warning lamp
FB1
Fuse box
V-2
H-9
H08
W-6
J-8
H09
W-6
J-8
H10
16
T-9
D-6
I-8
H11
16
S-9
D-5
I-8
H12
12
S-9
D-5
I-7
H15
S090
20
N-7
C-2
G-2
20-222-2
(7)
Name of device
Stereo
M
G
P
K-5
I-3
A-3
A-3
A-8
A-8
A-7
A-7
A-4
A-4
C-9
G-1
I-1
H-1
L-8
J-3
J-3
K-8
K-3
AA-9
C-4
F-9
B-9
C-2
PC300/350(LC)-7

TROUBLESHOOTING
Address
Connector
No.
Type
No. of
pin
J01
20
T-9
C-9
D-9
C-9
J02
20
T-9
D-9
D-9
D-9
J03
20
U-9
D-9
E-9
D-9
J04
20
V-2
D-9
E-9
E-9
J05
20
V-3
E-9
F-9
E-9
J06
20
V-3
F-9
J07
20
W-5
F-9
J08
20
W-5
K19
Pump resistor (for driving emergency pump)
W-5
K30
K31
M02
M07
M09
Name of device
Stereo
M
G
P
G-9
G-9
H-9
H-9
H-9
E-3
A-2
C-1
N-4
A-4
K-7
Starting motor
L-7
K-3
Lamp switch
P-8
C-1
Working lamp (front right)
E-9
K-7
M13
KES0
Speaker (right)
AC-8
M19
YAZAKI
Cigarette lighter
N-3
M21
PA
Radio
U-2
M22
Y090
Horn switch
O-7
M23
Y090
T-1
M26
12
W-4
B-9
M27
Y090
18
W-4
M29
040
20
Air control panel
U-2
M30
040
16
Air control panel
U-2
M31
W-7
M32
W-6
M33
V-9
M33
SUMITOMO
W-4
M34
Air compressor electromagnetic clutch
M38
Machine push-up switch
Q-8
M40
YAZAKI
Working lamp
Z-8
K-8
M41
YAZAKI
Working lamp (additional)
Y-7
K-8
M42
J-3
J-7
M43
Working lamp (rear)
K-7
M45
12
W-7
M46
S090
RS232C relaying connector
V-9
M71
Room lamp
Z-8
M72
DC/AC converter
U-2
M73
KES0
Speaker (left)
M79
YAZAKI
12V electrical equipment socket
PC300/350(LC)-7
D-2
C-9
AD-8
V-9
20-222-3
(7)

TROUBLESHOOTING
Address
Connector
No.
Type
No. of
pin
P01
070
12
Monitor panel
N-6
A-7
K-8
P02
040
20
Monitor panel
N-5
A-6
K-8
P03
Buzzer canceling switch
P-8
D-1
P05
Revolving warning lamp switch
U-2
P05
Engine oil temperature switch
K-9
K-2
P07
Engine cooling water switch
L-8
K-1
P15
Y050
Air conditioner sun light sensor
N-5
P17
090
Air conditioner high-low pressure switch
P70
040
16
Monitor panel
N-5
A-5
R10
Lamp relay
P-8
E-1
R11
Engine starting motor cutting relay (PPC lock)
P-8
E-1
R13
Engine starting motor cutting relay (personal

code)
Q-8
F-1
R20
Attachment circuit switching relay
W-7
R22
W-6
R30
SUMITOMO
Air conditioner blower relay
W-4
R31
AMP
Air conditioner compressor relay
W-3
S01
Bucket digging oil pressure switch
L-7
K-2
S02
Boom lowering oil pressure switch
L-7
K-3
S03
Swing oil pressure switch, left
L-6
K-2
S04
Arm digging oil pressure switch
L-6
K-3
S05
Bucket dumping oil pressure switch
L-5
K-2
S06
Boom raise oil pressure switch
L-5
K-3
S07
Swing oil pressure switch, right
K-3
K-2
S08
Arm dumping oil pressure switch
J-3
K-3
S09
Service oil pressure switch (intermediate connector)
K-3
K-1
S10
Service oil pressure switch, front
K-1
S11
Service oil pressure switch, rear
K-1
S14
Safety lever lock switch
S-1
S21
Terminal
Pump emergency driving switch
R-9
E-2
S22
Terminal
Swing and parking brake emergency releasing

switch
Q-8
F-2
S23
Terminal
Emergency engine starting switch
R-9
S25
S090
16
R-9
S30
Travel hydraulic switch
O-1
A-1
S31
Travel steering hydraulic switch
P-1
A-1
T05
Terminal
Floor frame grounding
V-3
T06
Terminal
Radio body grounding
S-9
T06A
T-2
T11
Terminal
Operator's cab grounding
20-222-4
(7)
Name of device
Stereo
M
G
P
A-9
K-7
C-9
D-1
K-9
F-8
F-1
J-8
PC300/350(LC)-7

TROUBLESHOOTING
Address
Connector
No.
Type
No. of
pin
V01
PPC hydraulic lock solenoid valve
L-3
K-6
V02
Travel interlocking solenoid valve
L-3
K-6
V03
Merge/divide valve solenoid valve
L-2
K-7
V04
L-2
K-5
V05
L-2
K-6
V06
L-1
K-5
V08
L-1
K-6
V12
Attachment return switching solenoid valve
G-9
K-4
V21
PC-EPC solenoid valve
V22
LS-EPC solenoid valve
L-6
K-7
V30
Attachment oil flow rate adjusting EPC solenoid

valve
P-1
A-1
W03
Rear limit switch (window)
W04
X05
Name of device
K-7
AB-9
K-8
Y-4
B-9
Swing lock switch
Q-9
D-1
Connector No.
D or DT
Stereo
M
G
P
C-2
Detailed information
Japanese and German makes DT type connector (08192-XXXXX)
Product of Yazaki Corporation L type connector (08056-2XXXX)
Product of Sumitomo Wiring Systems 090 type splice
Product of Yazaki M type connector (08056-0XXXX)
Product of Ryosei Electro-Circuit Systems PH166-05020 type connector
Product of Yazaki S type connector (08056-1XXXX)
Product of Yazaki X type connector (08055-0XXXX)
PA
Product of Yazaki PA type connector
SWP
Product of Yazaki SWP type connector (08055-1XXXX)
DRC
Japanese and German makes DRC type connector
040
070
Y050
S090
Product of Sumitomo 090 type connector
Y090
YAZAKI
KES0
Yazaki-made connector
KESO type connector (08027-0XXXX)
Terminal
Round pin type single terminal connector
Terminal
Round terminal
Y090
AMP
PC300/350(LC)-7
Product of Yazaki Y090
type connector
Japan AMP-made connector
20-223
(7)
TROUBLESHOOTING

CONNECTOR LOCATION STEREOGRAM

PC300, 300LC-7 Serial No. 40001 45000
PC350, 350LC-7 Serial No. 20001 25000
20-224
(7)
PC300/350(LC)-7
TROUBLESHOOTING
PC300/350(LC)-7

20-225
(7)
TROUBLESHOOTING
20-226

PC300/350(LC)-7
TROUBLESHOOTING
PC300/350(LC)-7

20-227
(7)
TROUBLESHOOTING
20-228

PC300/350(LC)-7
TROUBLESHOOTING

CONNECTOR LOCATION STEREOGRAM

20-229-1
(7)
PC300/350(LC)-7
TROUBLESHOOTING
PC300/350(LC)-7

20-229-2
(7)
TROUBLESHOOTING
20-229-3
(7)

PC300/350(LC)-7
TROUBLESHOOTING
PC300/350(LC)-7

20-229-4
(7)
TROUBLESHOOTING
20-229-5
(7)

PC300/350(LC)-7
TROUBLESHOOTING

Monitor Panel System Circuit Diagram (M Circuit)

PC300, 300LC-7 Serial No. 40001 45000
PC350, 350LC-7 Serial No. 20001 25000
20-230
(7)
PC300/350(LC)-7
TROUBLESHOOTING

This circuit diagram has been compiled by extracting the monitor panel system and engine starting system
from the overall electrical circuit diagram.
PC300/350(LC)-7
20-231
TROUBLESHOOTING

Monitor Panel System Circuit Diagram (M Circuit)

20-231-1
(7)
PC300/350(LC)-7
TROUBLESHOOTING

This circuit diagram has been compiled by extracting the monitor panel system and engine starting system
from the overall electrical circuit diagram.
PC300/350(LC)-7
20-231-2
(7)
TROUBLESHOOTING

Governor Control System Circuit Diagram (G Circuit) of GovernorPump Controller

PC300, 300LC-7 Serial No. 40001 45000
PC350, 350LC-7 Serial No. 20001 25000
20-232
(7)
PC300/350(LC)-7
TROUBLESHOOTING

This circuit diagram has been compiled by extracting the governorpump controller system (power source,
governor control, model selection and communication) from the overall electrical circuit diagram.
PC300/350(LC)-7
20-233
TROUBLESHOOTING

Governor Control System Circuit Diagram (G Circuit) of GovernorPump Controller

20-233-1
(7)
PC300/350(LC)-7
TROUBLESHOOTING

This circuit diagram has been compiled by extracting the governorpump controller system (power source,
governor control, model selection and communication) from the overall electrical circuit diagram.
PC300/350(LC)-7
20-233-2
(7)
TROUBLESHOOTING

Pump Control System Circuit Diagram (P Circuit) of GovernorPump Controller

PC300, 300LC-7 Serial No. 40001 45000
PC350, 350LC-7 Serial No. 20001 25000
20-234
(7)
PC300/350(LC)-7
TROUBLESHOOTING

This circuit diagram has been compiled by extracting the governorpump controller system (pump control), PPC
lock system, machine push-up system and backup alarm system from the overall electrical circuit diagram.
PC300/350(LC)-7
20-235
(7)
TROUBLESHOOTING

Pump Control System Circuit Diagram (P Circuit) of GovernorPump Controller

20-235-1
(7)
PC300/350(LC)-7
TROUBLESHOOTING

This circuit diagram has been compiled by extracting the governorpump controller system (pump control), PPC
lock system, machine push-up system and backup alarm system from the overall electrical circuit diagram.
PC300/350(LC)-7
20-235-2
(7)
CONNECTION TABLE FOR CONNECTOR PIN NUMBERS

The terms male and female refer to the pins, while the terms male housing and female housing refer to the
mating portion of the housing.
X type connector
No.of
pins
Male (female housing)
Female (male housing)
T-adapter
Part No.
Part No.: 08055-00181
Part No.: 08055-00191
799-601-7010
799-601-7020
Part No.: 08055-00282
Part No.: 08055-00292
799-601-7030
Part No.: 08055-00381
Part No.: 08055-00391
799-601-7040
Part No.: 08055-00481
Part No.: 08055-00491
Terminal part No.: 79A-222-3370

Electric wire size: 0.85
Grommet: Black
Qty: 20

Grommet: Black
Qty : 20

Grommet: Red
Qty: 20

Grommet: Red
Qty: 20
20-236
PC300/350(LC)-7
No.of
pins
SWP type connector

T-adapter
Part No.
799-601-7050
Part No.: 08055-10681
Part No.: 08055-10691
799-601-7060
Part No.: 08055-10881
Part No.: 08055-10891
12
799-601-7310
Part No.: 08055-11281
Part No.: 08055-11291
14
799-601-7070
Part No.: 08055-11481
PC300/350(LC)-7
Part No.: 08055-11491
20-237
SWP type connector
No. of
pins
16
T-adapter
Part No.
799-601-7320
Part No.: 08055-11681
Part No.: 08055-11691
Terminal part No.:

Grommet: Black
Qty: 20
Terminal part No.:

Grommet: Black
Qty: 20
Terminal part No.:

Grommet: Red
Qty: 20
Terminal part No.:

Grommet: Red
Qty: 20
20-238
PC300/350(LC)-7
TROUBLESHOOTING
M type connector
No.of
pins
T-adapter Part
No.
Part No.: 08056-00171
Part No.: 08056-00181
799-601-7080
799-601-7090
Part No.: 08056-00271
Part No.: 08056-00281
799-601-7110
Part No.: 08056-00371
Part No.: 08056-00381
799-601-7120
Part No.: 08056-00471
Part No.: 08056-00481
799-601-7130
Part No.: 08056-00671
Part No.: 08056-00681
799-601-7340
Part No.: 08056-00871
PC300/350(LC)-7
Part No.: 08056-00881
20-239
(7)
No.of
pins
S type connector
799-601-7140
Part No.: 08056-10871
Part No.: 08056-10881
10
(White)
799-601-7150
Part No.: 08056-11071
Part No.: 08056-11081
12
(White)
799-601-7350
Part No.: 08056-11271
Part No.: 08056-11281
16
(White)
799-601-7330
Part No.: 08056-11671
20-240
T-adapter
Part No.
Part No.: 08056-11681
PC300/350(LC)-7
No.of
pins
S type connector
10
(Blue)
12
(Blue)
799-601-7160
Part No.: 08056-11272
Part No.: 08056-11282
16
(Blue)
799-601-7170
Part No.: 08056-11672
PC300/350(LC)-7
T-adapter
Part No.
Part No.: 08056-11682
20-241
MIC type connector
No.of
pins
T-adapter Part
No.
Body part No.: 79A-222-2640 (Qty: 5)
Body part No.: 79A-222-2630 (Qty: 5)
11
Body part No.: 79A-222-2680 (Qty: 5)
Body part No.: 79A-222-2670 (Qty: 5)
799-601-2710
Body part No.: 79A-222-2620 (Qty: 5)
Body part No.: 79A-222-2610 (Qty: 5)
799-601-2950
Body part No.: 79A-222-2660 (Qty: 5)
Body part No.: 79A-222-2650 (Qty: 5)
13
799-601-2720
Body part No.: 79A-222-2710 (Qty: 2)
20-242
Body part No.: 79A-222-2690 (Qty: 2)
PC300/350(LC)-7
No.of
pins
MIC type connector

17
T-adapter Part
No.
799-601-2730
Body part No.: 79A-222-2730 (Qty: 2)
Body part No.: 79A-222-2720 (Qty: 2)
21
799-601-2740
Body part No.: 79A-222-2750 (Qty: 2)
Body part No.: 79A-222-2740 (Qty: 2)

(Qty: 50)

(Qty: 50)
PC300/350(LC)-7
20-243
No.of
pins
AMP040 type connector

T-adapter Part
No.
799-601-7180
Housing part No.: 79A-222-3430 (Qty: 5)
12
799-601-7190
16
799-601-7210
20
799-601-7220
Terminal part No.: 79A-222-3470 (No relation with number of pins)
20-244
PC300/350(LC)-7
TROUBLESHOOTING
No.of
pins
AMP070 type connector

10
799-601-7510
Part No.: 7821-92-7330
12
799-601-7520
Part No.: 7821-92-7340
14
799-601-7530
Part No.: 7821-92-7350
18
799-601-7540
Part No.: 7821-92-7360
20
799-601-7550
PC300/350(LC)-7
T-adapter Part
No.
Part No.: 7821-92-7370
20-245
(8)
No.of
pins
L type connector
No.of
pins
Connector for PA
Bendix MS connector
10
T-adapter Part
No.
799-601-3460
20-246
T-adapter Part
No.
No.of
pins
T-adapter Part
No.
PC300/350(LC)-7
No.of
pins
KES 1 (Automobile) connector

T-adapter Part
No.
Part No.: 08027-10210 (Natural color)

08027-10220 (Black)

08027-10270 (Black)
Part No.:08027-10310
Part No.:08027-10360

08027-10420 (Black)

08027-10470 (Black)

08027-10620 (Black)
PC300/350(LC)-7

08027-10670 (Black)
20-247
KES 1 (Automobile) connector
No.of
pins
T-adapter Part
No.

08027-10820 (Black)
No.of
pins

08027-10870 (Black)
Connector for relay (Socket type)

799-601-7360
799-601-7370
20-248
T-adapter Part
No.
PC300/350(LC)-7
No.of
pins
F type connector
PC300/350(LC)-7
T-adapter
Part No.
20-249
[The pin No. is also marked on the connector (electric wire insertion end)]
HD30 Series connector
Type
(shell
size
code)
Body (plug)
Body (receptacle)
Pin (male terminal)
Pin (female termial)
T-adapter
Part No.
799-601-9210
18-8
(1)
Part No.: 08191-11201, 08191-11202,

08191-11205, 08191-11206
Pin (female terminal)
Part No.: 08191-14101, 08191-14102,

08191-14105, 08191-14106
Pin (male termial)
799-601-9210
Part No.: 08191-12201, 08191-12202,

08191-12205, 08191-12206
Pin (male terminal)
Part No.: 08191-13101, 08191-13102,

08191-13105, 08191-13106
799-601-9220
Part No.: 08191-21201, 08191-12202,

08191-21205, 08191-12206
18-14
(2)
Part No.: 08191-24101, 08191-24102,

08191-24105, 08191-24106
Pin (male termial)
799-601-9220
Part No.: 08191-22201, 08191-22202,

08191-22205, 08191-22206
20-250
Part No.: 08191-23101, 08191-23102,

08191-23105, 08191-23106
PC300/350(LC)-7
Type
(shell
size
code)
Body (plug)
Body (receptacle)
Pin (male terminal)
T-adapter
Part No.
799-601-9230
18-20
(3)
Part No.:08191-31201, 08191-31202
Part No.:08191-34101, 08191-34102
Pin (male termial)
799-601-9230
Part No.:08191-32201, 08191-32202
Part No.:08191-33101, 08191-33102
Pin (male terminal)
799-601-9240
18-21
(4)
Part No.:08191-41201, 08191-42202
Part No.:08191-44101, 08191-44102
Pin (male termial)
799-601-9240
Part No.:08191-42201, 08191-42202
PC300/350(LC)-7
Part No.:08191-43101, 08191-43102
20-251
Type
(shell
size
code)
Body (plug)
Body (receptacle)
Pin (male terminal)
T-adapter
Part No.
799-601-9250
24-9
(5)
Part No.:08191-51201, 08191-51202
Part No.:08191-54101, 08191-54102
Pin (male termial)
799-601-9250
Part No.:08191-52201, 08191-52202
Part No.:08191-53101, 08191-53102
Pin (male terminal)
799-601-9260
Part No.: 08191-61201, 08191-62202,

08191-61205, 08191-62206
24-16
(6)
Part No.: 08191-64101, 08191-64102,

08191-64105, 08191-64106
Pin (male termial)
799-601-9260
Part No.: 08191-62201, 08191-62202,

08191-62205, 08191-62206
20-252
Part No.: 08191-63101, 08191-63102,

08191-63105, 08191-63106
PC300/350(LC)-7
TROUBLESHOOTING
Type
(shell
size
code)
Body (plug)
Body (receptacle)
Pin (male terminal)
T-adapter
Part No.
799-601-9270
24-21
(7)
Part No.: 08191-71201, 08191-71202,

08191-71205, 08191-71206
Part No.: 08191-74101, 08191-74102,

08191-74105, 08191-74106
Pin (male termial)
799-601-9270
Part No.: 08191-72201, 08191-72202,

08191-72205, 08191-72206
Pin (male terminal)
Part No.: 08191-73101, 08191-73102,

08191-73105, 08191-73106
799-601-9280
Part No.: 08191-81201, 08191-81202

08191-81203, 08191-81204
08191-81205, 08191-80206
24-23
(8)
Part No.: 08191-84101,

08191-84103,
08191-84105,
08191-84102
08191-84104
08191-84106
Pin (male termial)
799-601-9280
Part No.: 08191-82201,

08191-82203,
08191-82205,
PC300/350(LC)-7
08191-82202
08191-82204
08191-82206
Part No.: 08191-83101,

08191-83103,
08191-83105,
08191-83102
08191-83104
08191-83106
20-253
(7)
Type
(shell
size
code)
Body (plug)
Body (receptacle)
Pin (male termial)
T-adapter
Part No.
799-601-9290
24-31
(9)
Part No.: 08191-91203, 08191-91204,

08191-91205, 08191-91206
Part No.: 08191-94103, 08191-94104,

08191-94105, 08191-94106
Pin (male termial)
799-601-9290
Part No.: 08191-92203, 08191-92204,

08191-92205, 08191-92206
20-254
Part No.: 08191-93103, 08191-93104,

08191-93105, 08191-93106
PC300/350(LC)-7
DT Series connector
No.of
pins
Body (plug)
Body (receptacle)
T-adapter
Part No.
799-601-9020
Part No.: 08192-12200 (normal type)

08192-22200 (fine wire type)

799-601-9030


799-601-9040


799-601-9050

PC300/350(LC)-7

20-255
TROUBLESHOOTING
DT Series connector
No.of
pins
Body (plug)
Body (receptacle)
T-adapter Part No.
8GR:
8B:
8G:
8BR:
799-601-9060
799-601-9070
799-601-9080
799-601-9090
Part No.: 08192-1820 (normal type) Part No.: 08192-1810 (normal type)
12GR:
12B:
12G:
12BR:
12
799-601-9110
799-601-9120
799-601-9130
799-601-9140
Part No.: 08192-1920 (normal type) Part No.: 08192-1910 (normal type)
20-256
(7)
PC300/350(LC)-7
TROUBLESHOOTING
DTM Series connector
No.of
pins
Body (plug)
Body (receptacle)
T-adapter Part
No.
799-601-9010
Part No.: 08192-02200
Part No.: 08192-02100
DTHD Series connector
No.of
pins
Body (plug)
Body (receptacle)
T-adapter Part
No.
Part No.: 08192-31200 (Contact size#12) Part No.: 08192-31100 (Contact size#12)
08192-41200 (Contact size #8)
08192-41100 (Contact size #8)
08192-51200 (Contact size #4)
08192-51100 (Contact size #4)
PC300/350(LC)-7
20-257
TROUBLESHOOTING
No.of
pins
DRC26 Series connector

Body (plug)
Body (receptacle)
24
799-601-9360
Part No.:7821-93-3110
40
(A)
799-601-9350
Part No.:7821-93-3120
40
(B)
799-601-9350
20-258
(7)
T-adapter Part
No.
Part No.:7821-93-3130
PC300/350(LC)-7
TROUBLESHOOTING
T-BRANCH BOX AND T-BRANCH TABLE
799-601-2600
799-601-3100
799-601-3200
799-601-3300
799-601-3360
799-601-3370
799-601-3380
799-601-3410
799-601-3420
799-601-3430
799-601-3440
799-601-3450
799-601-3460
799-601-3510
799-601-3520
799-601-3530
799-601-2910
799-601-3470
799-601-2710
799-601-2720
799-601-2730
799-601-2740
799-601-2950
799-601-2750
799-601-2760
799-601-2770
799-601-2780
799-601-2790
799-601-2810
799-601-2820
799-601-2830
799-601-2840
799-601-2850
799-601-7010
799-601-7020
799-601-7030
799-601-7040
799-601-7050
799-601-7060
799-601-7310
799-601-7070
799-601-7320
799-601-7080
799-601-7090
799-601-7110
799-601-7120
799-601-7130
799-601-7340
20-260
(7)
Measurement box
Measurement box
Measurement box
Measurement box
Plate
Plate
Plate
BENDIX (MS)
BENDIX (MS)
BENDIX (MS)
BENDIX (MS)
BENDIX (MS)
BENDIX (MS)
BENDIX (MS)
BENDIX (MS)
BENDIX (MS)
BENDIX (MS)
Case
MIC
MIC
MIC
MIC
MIC
ECONO
ECONO
ECONO
ECONO
ECONO
DLI
DLI
DLI
Additional cable
Case
X
X
X
X
SWP
SWP
SWP
SWP
SWP
M
M
M
M
M
M
Econo-21P Q
MS-37P
MS-37P
Econo-24P
For MS box
For MS box
For MS box
24P
24P
17P
17P
5P
10P
5P
14P
19P
14P
Q Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q Q Q
Q Q Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
5P
13P
17P
21P
9P
2P
3P
4P
8P
12P
8P
12P
16P
1P
2P
3P
4P
6P
8P
12P
14P
16P
1P
2P
3P
4P
6P
8P
Q
Q
Q Q
Q
Q
Q Q
Q Q
Q Q Q
Q
Q
Q
799-601-9300
799-601-9200
799-601-9100
799-601-9000
799-601-8000
799-601-7500
799-601-7400
799-601-7100
799-601-7000
799-601-6500
799-601-6000
799-601-5500
799-601-3000
799-601-2900
799-601-2800
Connector type or
No. of pins
part name
799-601-2700
Part No.
799-601-2500
The vertical column shows part number of T-Branch Box or T-Branch, and horizontal column shows part
number of Harness Checker Ass'y.
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
PC300/350(LC)-7
PC300/350(LC)-7
10P
12P
14P
18P
20P
5P
6P
2P
2P
2P
3P
4P
6P
8P-Gray
8P-Black
8P-Green
8P-Brown
12P-Gray
12P-Black
12P-Green
12P-Brown
18-8
18-14
18-20
18-21
24-9
24-16
24-21
24-23
24-31
For HD30
For DT, HD
40P
24P
2P
Q
Q
Q Q Q
Q Q Q
Q Q Q
Q Q
Q
799-601-9300
799-601-9200
799-601-9100
Q
Q
Q
Q
799-601-9000
Q
Q
Q
Q
799-601-8000
Q
Q
Q
Q
799-601-7500
799-601-6500
799-601-6000
799-601-5500
799-601-3000
799-601-2900
799-601-7400
8P
10P-White
12P-Blue
16P-Blue
16P-White
12P-White
8P
12P
16P
20P
X-2
799-601-7100
S
S
S
S
S
S
AMP040
AMP040
AMP040
AMP040
Short connector
Case
Case
070
070
070
070
070
Relay connector
Relay connector
JFC connector
DTM
DT
DT
DT
DT
DT
DT
DT
DT
DT
DT
DT
DT
HD30
HD30
HD30
HD30
HD24
HD30
HD30
HD30
HD30
Plate
Measurement box
Case
Case
DRC26
DRC26
For NE, G sensor
For fuel, boost
799-601-9420
press.
799-601-9430 PVC socket
799-601-7000
799-601-7140
799-601-7150
799-601-7160
799-601-7170
799-601-7330
799-601-7350
799-601-7180
799-601-7190
799-601-7210
799-601-7220
799-601-7230
799-601-7240
799-601-7270
799-601-7510
799-601-7520
799-601-7530
799-601-7540
799-601-7550
799-601-7360
799-601-7370
799-601-7380
799-601-9010
799-601-9020
799-601-9030
799-601-9040
799-601-9050
799-601-9060
799-601-9070
799-601-9080
799-601-9090
799-601-9110
799-601-9120
799-601-9130
799-601-9140
799-601-9210
799-601-9220
799-601-9230
799-601-9240
799-601-9250
799-601-9260
799-601-9270
799-601-9280
799-601-9290
799-601-9310
799-601-9320
799-601-9330
799-601-9340
799-601-9350
799-601-9360
799-601-9410
799-601-2800
Connector type or
No. of pins
part name
799-601-2700
Part No.
799-601-2500
TROUBLESHOOTING
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
3P
2P
20-261
(7)
TROUBLESHOOTING WHEN SERVICE CODE

"ELECTRICAL SYSTEM" AND FAILURE CODE
"MECHANICAL SYSTEM" ARE INDICATED
INFORMATION CONTAINED IN TROUBLESHOOTING TABLE ............................................................... 20-304

Service Code in Electrical System E101 (Abnormal data in Error History) ................................................ 20-306
Service Code in Electrical System E112 (Short-circuiting in normal rotation system of
windshield wiper motor drive)............................................................................................................... 20-308
Service Code in Electrical System E113 (Short-circuiting in reverse rotation system of
windshield wiper motor drive)............................................................................................................... 20-310
Service Code in Electrical System E114 (Short-circuiting in window washer drive system) ...................... 20-312
Service Code in Electrical System E115 (Abnormal Windshield Wiper Motion) ........................................ 20-314
Service Code in Electrical System E116 (Abnormality in retracting windshield wiper) .............................. 20-316
Service Code in Electrical System E201 (Short-circuiting in travel interlocking solenoid) ......................... 20-318
Service Code in Electrical System E203 (Short-circuiting in swing and parking brake solenoid in governor pump controller system).................................................................................................. 20-320
Service Code in Electrical System E204 (Short-circuiting in merge/divide solenoid)................................. 20-322
Service Code in Electrical System E205 (Short-circuiting in 2-stage relief solenoid)................................. 20-324
Service Code in Electrical System E206 (Short-circuiting in travel speed shifting solenoid) ..................... 20-326
Service Code in Electrical System E211 (Disconnection in travel interlocking solenoid)........................... 20-328
Service Code in Electrical System E213 (Disconnection in Swing Parking Brake Solenoid)..................... 20-330
Service Code in Electrical System E214 (Disconnection of merge/divide solenoid) .................................. 20-332
Service Code in Electrical System E215 (Disconnection in 2-stage relief solenoid) .................................. 20-334
Service Code in Electrical System E216 (Disconnection in travel speed shifting solenoid)....................... 20-336
Service Code in Electrical System E217 (Abnormality in inputting model code)........................................ 20-338
Service Code in Electrical System E218 Disconnection of S-NET signal) ................................................. 20-340
Service Code in Electrical System E222 (Short-circuiting in LS-EPC solenoid) ........................................ 20-342
Service Code in Electrical System E223 (Disconnection in LS-EPC solenoid system) ............................. 20-343
Service Code in Electrical System E224 (Abnormality in F pump pressure sensor).................................. 20-344
Service Code in Electrical System E225 (Abnormality in R pump pressure sensor) ................................. 20-346
Service Code in Electrical System E226 (Abnormality in Pressure sensor power source) ........................ 20-348
Service Code in Electrical System E227 (Abnormality in engine rotation sensor
in governor pump controller system).................................................................................................. 20-350
Service Code in Electrical System E228 (Short-circuiting in attachment return switching relay) ............... 20-351
Service Code in Electrical System E232 (Short-circuiting in PC-EPC Solenoid ........................................ 20-352
Service Code in Electrical System E233 (Disconnection in PC-EPC solenoid system)............................. 20-354
Service Code in Electrical System E238 (Disconnection in attachment return switching relay) ................ 20-356
Service Code in Electrical Equipment E245 (Short-circuiting in attachment oil flow rate adjusting EPC)
(Multi-monitor only)............................................................................................................................... 20-358
Service Code in Electrical System E246 (Disconnection in attachment oil flow rate adjusting EPC)
(Multi-monitor only)............................................................................................................................... 20-359
Service Code in Electrical System E256 (Incorrect nonvolatile memory data) .......................................... 20-360
Service Code in Electrical System E304 (Short circuit of engine stop solenoid relay)............................... 20-362
Service Code in Electrical System E306 (Abnormality in governor potentiometer).................................... 20-364
PC300/350(LC)-7
20-301
Service Code in Electrical System E308 (Abnormality in fuel dial)............................................................. 20-366

Service Code in Electrical System E314 (Disconnection of engine stop solenoid relay) ........................... 20-368
Service Code in Electrical System E315 (Short-circuiting in battery relay) ................................................ 20-370
Service Code in Electrical System E316 (Step-out in governor motor) ...................................................... 20-372
Service Code in Electrical System E317 (Disconnection in governor motor Phase A and B) .................... 20-374
Service Code in Electrical System E318 (Short-circuiting in governor motor Phase A and Phase B) ....... 20-376
Failure Code in Mechanical System A000N1 (Out-of-rate engine rotation at high idling) .......................... 20-378
Failure Code in Mechanical System A000N2 (Out-of-rate engine rotation at low idling)............................ 20-378
Failure Code in Mechanical System AA10NX (Air cleaner clogging) ......................................................... 20-379
Failure Code in Mechanical System AB00KE (Abnormally lowered charging voltage).............................. 20-380
Failure Code in Mechanical System B@BAZG (Abnormally lowered engine oil pressure) ........................ 20-382
Failure Code in Mechanical System B@BAZK (Abnormally lowered engine oil level)............................... 20-383
Failure Code in Mechanical System B@BCNS (Engine cooling water overheating).................................. 20-384
Failure Code in Mechanical System B@BCZK (Abnormally lowered radiator water level) ........................ 20-385
Failure Code in Mechanical System B@HANS (Hydraulic oil overheating)................................................ 20-386
20-302
PC300/350(LC)-7
Defective battery relay
Service
code
Failure
code
E101
E112
E113
E114
E115
E116
E201
E203
E204
E205
E206
E211
E213
E214
E215
E216
E217
E218
E222
E223
E224
E225
E226
E227
E228
E232
E233
E238
E245
E246
E256
E304
E306
E308
E314
DAF0KT
DY2DKB
DY2EKB
DY2CKB
DY20KA
DY20MA
DW91KB
DW45KB
DWJ0KB
DWK0KB
DW43KB
DW91KA
DW45KA
DWJ0KA
DWK0KA
DW43KA
DA2SKQ
DA2SKA
DXE0KB
DXE0KA
DHPAMA
DHPBMA
DA25KP
DLE2MA
D196KB
DXA0KB
DXA0KA
D196KA
DXE4KB
DXE4KA
DA20KT
DY45KB
DK54KZ
DK10KZ
DY45KA
20-303-1
(7)
q
q
q
q
q
q
q
q
q
q
q
q q
q
q
q
q
q
q
q
q
q
q
q
q
q
q
q
q
q
q
q q
q
q
q
q
q
q
q
Lowering of engine oil level
Lowering of engine oil pressure
Defective fuel control of engine
Defective adjustment of governor lever
Defective mechanical system of engine
Defective alternator
Defective air cleaner clogging switch
Defective radiator coolant level switch
Defective engine coolant temperature sensor
Defective engine oil level switch
Defective engine oil pressure switch
Defective engine speed sensor (including adjustment)
Defective engine stop solenoid relay
Defective governor potentiometer
Defective governor motor
Defective fuel control dial
Defective emergency pump drive switch
Defective swing lock switch
Defective windshield washer motor
Defective wiper motor
Defective sensor power supply (5 V)
Defective engine throttle and pump controller
Defective monitor panel
Defective fuse or fusible link
TROUBLESHOOTING
BEFORE TROUBLESHOOTING FOR DISPLAYED CODE
Error codes, failure codes, and possible causes

Possible causes
q
q
q
q
q
q
q
q
q
PC300/350(LC)-7
PC300/350(LC)-7
q
q
q
q
q
q
q
q
q
q
q
q
q
q
q
q q
q
q
q
q
q
q
q q
q
q
q
q
q q
q
q
q q
q q
q
q
Short circuit with power source in wiring harness
Grounding fault in wiring harness
Disconnection in wiring harness
Defective concentrated diodes
Overheating of hydraulic oil
Defective hydraulic oil temperature sensor
F pump pressure sensor
Defective attachment flow control EPC solenoid
Defective attachment return selector relay
Defective travel speed shifting solenoid
Defective 2-stage relief solenoid
Defective pump merge-divider solenoid
Defective swing holding brake solenoid
Defective travel junction solenoid
Defective LS-EPC Solenoid
Defective PC-EPC Solenoid
Clogging of air cleaner
Lowering of water level in radiator sub tank
Overheating of engine
TROUBLESHOOTING
Possible causes
q q
q
q
q
q
q
q
q
q
q
q
q
q
q
q
q
q
q
q
q
q
q
q
q
q q
q
q
q
q
q q q
q q q
q
q
20-303-2
(7)
Service
code
20-303-3
(7)
Failure
code
E315
D110KB q
E316
DY10K4
E317
DY10KA
E318
DY10KB
989EKX
A000N1
A000N2
(E104) AA10NX
AB00KE
B@BAZG
B@BAZK
(E108) B@BCNS
B@BCZK
B@HANS
(E313) DA80MA
q
q
q
q
q
q
q
q
q
q
q
q
q
q
q q q
q
q
q
q
Lowering of engine oil level
Lowering of engine oil pressure
Defective fuel control of engine
Defective adjustment of governor lever
Defective mechanical system of engine
Defective alternator
Defective air cleaner clogging switch
Defective radiator coolant level switch
Defective engine coolant temperature sensor
Defective engine oil level switch
Defective engine oil pressure switch
Defective engine speed sensor (including adjustment)
Defective engine stop solenoid relay
Defective governor potentiometer
Defective governor motor
Defective fuel control dial
Defective emergency pump drive switch
Defective swing lock switch
Defective windshield washer motor
Defective wiper motor
Defective sensor power supply (5 V)
Defective engine throttle and pump controller
Defective monitor panel
Defective fuse or fusible link
Defective battery relay
TROUBLESHOOTING
Possible causes
q q
q
q
q
q
q
q
q
Service codes (E104), (E108), and (E313) are displayed in only the 7-segment monitor panel.
They are not displayed in the multi-monitor panel.
PC300/350(LC)-7
PC300/350(LC)-7
q
q
q
q q
Short circuit with power source in wiring harness
Grounding fault in wiring harness
Disconnection in wiring harness
Defective concentrated diodes
Overheating of hydraulic oil
Defective hydraulic oil temperature sensor
Defective attachment flow control EPC solenoid
Defective attachment return selector relay
Defective travel speed shifting solenoid
Defective 2-stage relief solenoid
Defective pump merge-divider solenoid
Defective swing holding brake solenoid
Defective travel junction solenoid
Defective LS-EPC Solenoid
Defective PC-EPC Solenoid
Clogging of air cleaner
Lowering of water level in radiator sub tank
Overheating of engine
TROUBLESHOOTING
Possible causes
q
q
q
q q
q
q
q
q
q
20-303-4
(7)
TROUBLESHOOTING
Connection table of fuse box

This connection table shows the devices to which each power supply of the fuse box supplies power directly
(A switch power supply is a device which supplies power while the starting switch is at the ON position and
a constant power supply is a device which supplies power while the starting switch is at the OFF position).
When carrying out troubleshooting for an electric system, you should check its fuse box and fusible link to
see if the power is supplied normally.
Type of power
supply
Fuse No.
Fuse capacity
Destination of power
Engine throttle and pump controller (Controller power supply)
10A
Emergency pump drive resistor

Swing holding brake release switch
Switch power
supply
(Fusible link:
A34)
Switch power
supply
(Fusible link:
A34)
Switch power
supply
(Fusible link:
A34)
Constant power
supply
(Fusible link:
A35)
20-303-5
(7)
Engine throttle and pump controller (Solenoid power supply)

2
20A
Machine push up switch

Attachment return switching relay (Coil side and contact side)
10A
Work equipment lock switch
10A
10A
Horn switch
10A
(Spare)
10A
Rotary lamp switch
10A
Light relay (Contact side)
10A
10
10A
(Spare)
11
20A
12
20A
13
20A
Light switch
14
10A
Service power supply (M32 connector)
15
10A
16
10A
Radio
17
10A
Monitor panel
18
10A
Starting switch
19
10A
Room lamp
20
10A
(Spare)
Cigarette lighter
Windshield washer motor
One-touch power maximizing switch

Radio
Starting motor cut-out (Personal code) relay (Coil side)

Monitor panel
Travel alarm
DC/DC converter
PC300/350(LC)-7
TROUBLESHOOTING
Problems which occur when solenoid power supply of engine throttle and pump controller is defective
The solenoid power supply (FB1-2) of the engine throttle and pump controller is used by the controller to drive
the solenoids and relays.
Accordingly, if the solenoid power supply is turned off, when the controller outputs the power to the solenoids
or relays, the power is not supplied to any of the solenoids and relays and all or some of the following error
codes are displayed simultaneously.
[E211]: Disconnection in travel junction solenoid
[E213]: Disconnection in swing holding brake solenoid
[E214]: Disconnection in pump merge-divider solenoid
[E215]: Disconnection in 2-stage relief solenoid
[E216]: Disconnection in travel speed shifting solenoid
[E223]: Disconnection in LS-EPC solenoid
[E233]: Disconnection in PC-EPC solenoid
If the above problems occur, check the related fuse (FB1-2) and inlet voltage of the engine throttle and pump
controller.
1) Disconnect connector C03 of the controller and connect a T-adapter to the wiring harness side.
2) Turn the starting switch ON.
3) Measure the voltage between each of pins (2) and (12) and each of pins (31), (32), and (33).
Pins (2) and (3) are the power supply pins and pins (31), (32), and (33) are the ground pins.
If the voltage is 20 30 V, it is normal.
Power supply connector (C03) of engine throttle and pump controller
PC300/350(LC)-7
20-303-6
(7)
TROUBLESHOOTING
INFORMATION CONTAINED IN TROUBLESHOOTING TABLE

The troubleshooting table and the related circuit diagrams contain the following information. Grasp their contents fully before proceeding to actual troubleshooting work.
User Code
Service Code
Failure Code
Display in
monitor panel
Display in
monitor panel
Display in
monitor panel
Failure
phenomenon
Title of failure phenomenon shown in failure history
Failure content
Failure status as detected by monitor panel or controller
Response from
monitor panel
or controller
Action taken by the monitor panel or controller to protect an affected system or equipment, when they
detect some failure.
Phenomenon
occurring on
machine
Phenomenon that occurs on the machine, resulting from the above action taken by the monitor panel or
controller
Relative
information
Information on the failure occurred as well as the troubleshooting

Cause
Presumed cause and standard value in normalcy
Cause that presumably

triggered failure in question
3 (The assigned No. is for
filing purpose only. It
does not stand for any
priority)
20-304
Standard value in normalcy and references for troubleshooting

<Content Included>
Standard value in normalcy by which to pass "Good" or "No good" judgement over the
presumed cause
Reference for passing the above "Good" or "No Good" judgement
<Phenomenon of Wiring Harness Failure>
Disconnection
There is a faulty contact at the connector or disconnection of wiring harness occurred.
Defective grounding
A wiring harness that is not connected with a grounding circuit has a contact with the
grounding circuit.
Short-circuiting
A wiring harness that is not connected with a 24 V electric circuit has a contact with the
electric circuit.
<Precaution for Troubleshooting>
1) Connector No. display method and handling of T-adapter
Insert or connect T-adapters in the following manner before starting troubleshooting
unless otherwise instructed.
If there is no indication of "male" or "female" in a specific connector No., disconnect
the connector and insert the T-adapter into both male and female sides.
If there is an indication of "male" or "female" in a specific connector No., disconnect
the connector and connect the T-adepter with only one side of either "male" or "female".
2) Entry sequence of pin No. and handling of circuit tester lead
Connect the positive (+) lead and the negative () lead OFF a circuit tester in the following manner unless otherwise instructed.
Connect the positive (+) lead with the pin No. indicated at the front or the wiring harness.
Connect the negative () lead with the pin No. indicated at the front or the wiring harness.
PC300/350(LC)-7
TROUBLESHOOTING
Relative Electrical Circuit Diagram
This is part of the electrical circuit diagram which shows the portion where the failure occurred.
Connector No.: Indicates (Type - numbers of a pin) (color)
Arrow: Roughly indicates the location in the machine where it is installed.
PC300/350(LC)-7
20-305
TROUBLESHOOTING
E101
Service Code in Electrical System E101 (Abnormal data in Error History)

PC300, 300LC-7 Serial No. 40001 45000
PC350, 350LC-7 Serial No. 20001 25000
User Code
Service Code
Failure Code
E101
DAF0KT
Failure
phenomenon
Abnormal data in the error history

(in Monitor Panel system)
Failure content
The voltage in the firm power source circuit for Monitor Panel (battery) has dropped below 12 V or
exceeded 36 V.
Response from
Monitor Panel
None in particular
Phenomenon
occurring on
machine
A display for information on the failure history (in the electrical system) cannot be called.
Cause
1 Fuse No. 17 defective
Fusible link No. A35

defective

If the fuse is blown, there is a big possibility that the circuit has a grounding fault.
(See Cause 4)
If the fusible link is blown, there is a big possibility that the circuit has a grounding fault.
Turn the engine starting switch OFF for the preparations, and hold it in the OFF position
for the troubleshooting.
Disconnection of wiring
harness
3
(Disconnection or
connector contact fault)
Resistance
value
Above 1
Wiring harness between FB1-17 inlet and A35 (male)
Resistance
value
Above 1
Wiring harness between A35 (male)

nal)
Resistance
value
Above 1
Wiring harness from P01 (female)

let
to J07 to FB1-17 out-
and A23 (B termi-
Grounding fault of wiring
harness
4
(Contact with grounding
circuit)
Resistance
value
Above
1 M
Between wiring harness between FB1-17 inlet and A35

(male)
and grounding
Resistance
value
Above
1 M
Between wiring harness between A35 (male)

(B terminal) and grounding
Resistance
value
Above
1 M
Between wiring harness between P01 (female)

and FB1-17 outlet and grounding
to J07
and A23
Turn the engine starting switch OFF for the preparations, and hold it in the ON position
5 Monitor Panel defective
C03
Between
20-306
(7)
and
Voltage
20 30 V
PC300/350(LC)-7
TROUBLESHOOTING
E101
Monitor Panel Power Source Electric Circuit Diagram
PC300/350(LC)-7
20-307
(7)
TROUBLESHOOTING
E101

User Code
Service Code
Failure Code
E101
DAF0KT
Failure
phenomenon
Abnormal data in the error history

Failure content
The voltage in the firm power source circuit for Monitor Panel (battery) has dropped below 12 V or
exceeded 36 V.
Response from
Monitor Panel
None in particular
Phenomenon
occurring on
machine
A display for information on the failure history (in the electrical system) cannot be called.
Cause
1 Fuse No. 18 defective
Fusible link No. A35

defective

If the fuse is blown, there is a big possibility that the circuit has a grounding fault.
(See Cause 4)
If the fusible link is blown, there is a big possibility that the circuit has a grounding fault.
harness
3
(Disconnection or
connector contact fault)
Resistance
value
Above 1
Wiring harness between FB1-18 inlet and A35 (male)
Resistance
value
Above 1
Wiring harness between A35 (male)

nal)
Resistance
value
Above 1

let
to J07 to FB1-18 out-
and A23 (B termi-
harness
4
circuit)
Resistance
value
Above
1 M
Between wiring harness between FB1-18 inlet and A35

(male)
and grounding
Resistance
value
Above
1 M
Between wiring harness between A35 (male)

(B terminal) and grounding
Resistance
value
Above
1 M

and FB1-18 outlet and grounding
to J07
and A23
5 Monitor Panel defective
C03
Between
20-307-1
(7)
and
Voltage
20 30 V
PC300/350(LC)-7
TROUBLESHOOTING
E101
Monitor Panel Power Source Electric Circuit Diagram
PC300/350(LC)-7
20-307-2
(7)
TROUBLESHOOTING
E112
Service Code in Electrical System E112

(Short-circuiting in normal rotation system of windshield wiper motor drive)
User Code
Service Code
Failure Code
E112
DY2DKB
Failure
phenomenon
Short-circuiting in normal rotation system of windshield wiper motor drive (in monitor panel system)
Failure content
Abnormal current flew to the windshield wiper motor normal rotation circuit, when power is provided.
Response from
Monitor Panel
Power supply to the windshield wiper motor normal rotation circuit is turned OFF.
Phenomenon
occurring on
machine
The windshield wiper stops moving.
Cause
defective
1
(Internal short-circuiting
or grounding fault)

W04 (female)
Between
Between

harness
2
circuit)
Continuity and resistance value

Continued
and
Above 1 M
and grounding
W04 (male)
and grounding
and
Resistance
value
Above 1 M
P01
3 Monitor panel defective
20-308
Between
and grounding
Windshield wiper switch
Voltage
OFF
Below 3 V
ON
Below 3 V20 30 V
(at constant cycle)
PC300/350(LC)-7
TROUBLESHOOTING
E112
Electric Circuit Diagram for Monitor Panel Windshield Wiper Motor

PC300, 300LC-7 Serial No. 40001 45000
PC350, 350LC-7 Serial No. 20001 25000

PC300/350(LC)-7
20-309
(7)
TROUBLESHOOTING
E113

(Short-circuiting in reverse rotation system of windshield wiper motor drive)
User Code
Service Code
Failure Code
E113
DY2EKB
Failure
phenomenon
Short-circuiting in reverse rotation system of windshield wiper motor drive (in Monitor Panel system)
Failure content
Abnormal current flew to the reverse rotation circuit of the windshield wiper motor drive, when the
windshield wiper was set in motion.
Response from
Monitor Panel
Power supply to the reverse rotation circuit of the windshield wiper motor drive was switched OFF.
Phenomenon
occurring on
machine
The windshield wiper stopped moving.
Cause
defective
1
or grounding fault)

W04 (female)
Between
Between

harness
2
circuit)

Continued
and
Above 1 M
and grounding
W04 (male)
and grounding
and
Resistance
value
Above 1 M
P01
20-310
Between
and grounding
Voltage
OFF
Below 3 V
ON
Below 3 V20 30 V
(at constant cycle)
PC300/350(LC)-7
TROUBLESHOOTING
E113
Electric Circuit Diagram for Monitor Panel Windshield Wiper Motor

PC300, 300LC-7 Serial No. 40001 45000
PC350, 350LC-7 Serial No. 20001 25000

PC300/350(LC)-7
20-311
(7)
E114

(Short-circuiting in window washer drive system)
User Code
Service Code
Failure Code
E114
DY2CKB
Failure
phenomenon
Short-circuiting in window washer drive system

Failure content
Abnormal current flew to the window washer drive circuit, when the circuit was grounded and power was
switched ON.
Response from
Monitor Panel
Power supply to the grounding in the window washer motor circuit was switched OFF.
Phenomenon
occurring on
machine
The window washer stopped moving.
Cause
Window washer drive
1 motor defective
(Internal short-circuiting)

A50 (male)
Between
Short-circuiting of wiring
harness
2
(Contact with 24 V
circuit)
Resistance value
5 20
and
Between wiring harness from P01 (female)
to J04 to
A50 (female)
and grounding, or between wiring harness between P01 (female)
and D04 (female)
and
grounding
Voltage
Below 1 V
P01
20-312
Between
and grounding
Voltage
OFF
20 30 V
ON
Below 1 V
PC300/350(LC)-7
E114
Monitor Panel Window Washer Motor Electrical Circuit Diagram
PC300/350(LC)-7
20-313
E115
Service Code in Electrical System E115 (Abnormal Windshield Wiper Motion)

User Code
Service Code
Failure Code
E115
DY20KA
Failure
phenomenon
Abnormal operation of windshield wiper

Failure content
A W signal is not inputted at both ends of movement, when it is in motion.
Response from
Monitor Panel
Power to the windshield wiper motor is turned OFF.
Phenomenon
occurring on
machine
The windshield wiper motor does not work.
Relative
information
Input of W signal at both ends of movement (ON or OFF) can be confirmed in the monitor function.
(Code No. 049: Monitor input 3)
Cause
1 defective
(Internal disconnection)
W04 (female)
Between
harness
2
(Disconnection or faulty
contact with connector)
and
Windshield wiper blade
Resistance value
At upper end of operation

range
Below 1
Outside upper end of

operation range
Above 1 M
Wiring harness between P01 (female)
Wiring harness between W04 (male)
and W04 (male)
and grounding
Resistance
value
Below 1
Resistance
value
Below 1
P01
Between
20-314
and grounding
Voltage
At upper end of operation

range
Below 1 V
Outside upper end of

operation range
20 30 V
PC300/350(LC)-7
TROUBLESHOOTING
E115
Monitor Panel Windshield Wiper Motor Electrical Circuit Diagram

PC300, 300LC-7 Serial No. 40001 45000
PC350, 350LC-7 Serial No. 20001 25000

PC300/350(LC)-7
20-315
(7)
TROUBLESHOOTING
E116
Service Code in Electrical System E116 (Abnormality in retracting windshield wiper)

User Code
Service Code
Failure Code
E116
DY20MA
Failure
phenomenon
Abnormal operation of retracting windshield wiper

Failure content
P signal in the retraction range is not inputted, when the wiper is retracted.
Response from
Monitor Panel
Power supply to the windshield wiper motor is switched OFF, when the wiper is
retracted.
Phenomenon
occurring on
machine
The windshield wiper cannot be retracted completely.
Relative
information
It can be checked in the monitoring function whether P signal (ON or OFF) in the retraction operation
range is inputted or not. (Code No. 049: Monitor Input 3)
Cause
1 defective

W04 (female)
Between
harness
2 (Disconnection or defective contact with connector)
and
Resistance value
Retraction range
Below 1
Operation range
Above 1 M
during the troubleshooting.
Between wiring harness W04 (male)
and W04 (male)
and grounding
Resistance
value
Below 1
Resistance
value
Below 1
P01

Between
20-316
and grounding
Voltage
Retraction range
Below 1V
Operation range
20 30 V
PC300/350(LC)-7
TROUBLESHOOTING
E116
Monitor Panel Windshield Wiper Motor Electrical Circuit Diagram

PC300, 300LC-7 Serial No. 40001 45000
PC350, 350LC-7 Serial No. 20001 25000

PC300/350(LC)-7
20-317
(7)
TROUBLESHOOTING
E201

(Short-circuiting in travel interlocking solenoid)
PC300, 300LC-7 Serial No. 40001 45000
PC350, 350LC-7 Serial No. 20001 25000
User Code
Service Code
Failure Code
E201
DW91KB
Failure
phenomenon
Short-circuiting in travel interlocking solenoid

(in governor pump controller system)
Failure content
Abnormal current flew to the travel interlocking circuit, when power was supplied to the circuit.
Response from
controller
Power supply to the travel interlocking circuit is switched OFF.

Even if the failure cause disappears of itself, the solenoid circuit does not return to normalcy, unless the
engine starting switch is once turned OFF.
Phenomenon
occurring on
machine
It is difficult to steer the machine at turns. (L.H. and R.H. travel circuits cannot be disconnected.)
Relative
information
Operation of the travel interlocking solenoid (ON or OFF) can be checked in the monitoring function.
(Code No. 023: Solenoid)
Cause
Travel interlocking solenoid defective
1
or grounding fault)

V02 (male)
Between
Between
Assembled-type diode
2 D03 defective
Above 1 M
D03 (male)
Resistance value
Above 1 M
and
Between wiring harness from C03 (female)
to J06 to
V02 (female)
and grounding, or between wiring harness between C03 (female)
and D03 (female)
and
grounding
Resistance
value
Above 1 M
Turn the engine starting switch OFF for the preparations, and hold it running during the
troubleshooting.
4
Governor pump
controller defective
C03
Between
20-318
(7)
20 60
and
and grounding
Between
harness
3
circuit)
Resistance value
and grounding
Voltage
Straight forward
Below 1 V
Steering
20 30 V
PC300/350(LC)-7
TROUBLESHOOTING
E201
Electrical Circuit for Travel Interlocking Solenoid in Governor Pump Controller
PC300/350(LC)-7
20-319
TROUBLESHOOTING
E201

User Code
Service Code
Failure Code
E201
DW91KB
Failure
phenomenon
Short-circuiting in travel interlocking solenoid

Abnormal current flew to the travel interlocking circuit, when power was supplied to the circuit.
Response from
controller
Power supply to the travel interlocking circuit is switched OFF.

Even if the failure cause disappears of itself, the solenoid circuit does not return to normalcy, unless the
Phenomenon
occurring on
machine
It is difficult to steer the machine at turns. (L.H. and R.H. travel circuits cannot be disconnected.)
Relative
information
(Code No. 023: Solenoid)
Failure content
Cause
Travel interlocking solenoid defective
1
or grounding fault)
V02 (male)
Between
Between

harness
2
circuit)
Resistance value
20 60
and
Above 1 M
and grounding
(female)
and grounding
to V02
Resistance
value
Above 1 M
troubleshooting.
3
Governor pump
20-319-1
(7)
C03
Between
and grounding
Voltage
Straight forward
Below 1 V
Steering
20 30 V
PC300/350(LC)-7
TROUBLESHOOTING
E201
Electrical Circuit for Travel Interlocking Solenoid in Governor Pump Controller
PC300/350(LC)-7
20-319-2
(7)
TROUBLESHOOTING
E203

(Short-circuiting in swing and parking brake solenoid - in governor pump controller
system)
PC300, 300LC-7 Serial No. 40001 45000
PC350, 350LC-7 Serial No. 20001 25000
User Code
Service Code
Failure Code
E03
E203
DW45KB
Failure
phenomenon
Short-circuiting in swing and parking brake solenoid

Failure content
Abnormal current flew to the swing and parking brake solenoid circuit, when power was supplied to the
circuit.
Response from
controller
Power supply to the swing and parking brake solenoid circuit is switched OFF.
Even after the failure cause disappears of itself, the swing and steering brake does not return to normalcy, unless the engine starting switch is once turned OFF.
Phenomenon
occurring on
machine
The upper structure cannot swing. (The swing holding brake cannot be released.)
Relative
information
Operation of the swing and parking brake solenoid (ON or OFF) can be checked in the monitoring function. (Code No. 023: Solenoid 1)
If there is no abnormality with the solenoid or wiring harness, the upper structure can swing by turning
the emergency swing brake releasing switch to the FREE position.
(In this case, however, the parking brake does not work, when stopping the machine)
Cause
Swing and parking brake
solenoid defective
1
or grounding fault)

V05 (male)
Between
Between
2 D03 defective
Above 1 M
D03 (male)
Resistance value
Above 1 M
and
Wiring harness from C03 (female)
to D01 to J02 to X05
to J06 to V05 (female) , or between wiring harness
between C03 (female)
and D03 (female)
and
grounding
Resistance
value
Above 1 M
troubleshooting.
4
Governor pump
C03
Between
20-320
(7)
20 60
and
and grounding
Between
harness
3
circuit)
Resistance value
and grounding
Swing control lever
Voltage
NEUTRAL
Below 1 V
Swing
20 30 V
PC300/350(LC)-7
TROUBLESHOOTING
E203
Electrical Circuit Diagram for Swing and Parking Brake of Governor Pump Controller
PC300/350(LC)-7
20-321
TROUBLESHOOTING
E203

User Code
Service Code
Failure Code
E03
E203
DW45KB
Failure
phenomenon
Short-circuiting in swing holding brake solenoid (in

governor pump controller system)
Failure content
Abnormal current flew to the swing holding brake solenoid circuit, when power was supplied to the circuit.
Response from
controller
Power supply to the swing holding brake solenoid circuit is switched OFF.
Even after the failure cause disappears of itself, the swing holding brake does not return to normalcy,
unless the engine starting switch is once turned OFF.
Phenomenon
occurring on
machine
The upper structure cannot swing. (The swing holding brake is not released)
Relative
information
Operation of the swing holding brake solenoid (ON or OFF) can be checked in the monitoring function.
(Code No. 023: Solenoid 1)
If there is no abnormality with the solenoid or wiring harness, the upper structure can swing by turning
the emergency swing brake releasing switch to the FREE position.
(In this case, however, the swing holding brake does not work, when stopping the machine)
Cause
Swing holding brake
solenoid defective
1
or grounding fault)

harness
2
circuit)
V05 (male)
Resistance value
Between (1) and (2)
20 60 z
Between (1) and grounding
Above 1 Mz
Wiring harness from C03 (female) (37) to D01 to J02 to
X05 to V05 (female) (2), or between wiring harness
between C03 (female) (37) and grounding
Resistance
value
Above 1 Mz
troubleshooting.
3
Governor pump
20-321-1
(7)
C03
Swing control lever
Voltage
NEUTRAL
Below 1 V
Swing
20 30 V
PC300/350(LC)-7
TROUBLESHOOTING
E203
Electrical Circuit Diagram for Swing Holding Brake of Governor Pump Controller
PC300/350(LC)-7
20-321-2
(7)
TROUBLESHOOTING
E204
Service Code in Electrical System E204 (Short-circuiting in merge/divide solenoid)

PC300, 300LC-7 Serial No. 40001 45000
PC350, 350LC-7 Serial No. 20001 25000
User Code
Service Code
Failure Code
E204
DWJ0KB
Failure
phenomenon
Short-circuiting in merge/divide solenoid

Failure content
Abnormal current flew to the merge/divide solenoid circuit, when power was supplied to the circuit.
Response from
controller
Power supply to the merge/divide solenoid circuit is switched OFF.

Even after the failure cause disappears of itself, the machine operation does not return to normalcy, unless the engine starting switch is once turned OFF.
Phenomenon
occurring on
machine
In L mode, the work equipment moves slowly, or the swing speed is slow in its single operation.
(Front and rear pumps cannot be disconnected.)
Relative
information
Operation of the merge/divide solenoid (ON or OFF) can be checked in the monitoring function.
Cause
Merge/divide solenoid
defective
1
or grounding fault)

V03 (male)
Between
Between
2 D03 defective
Above 1 M
D03 (male)
Resistance value
Above 1 M
and
to J06 to V03
(female) , or between wiring harness between C03
(female)
and D03 (female)
and grounding
Resistance
value
Above 1 M
troubleshooting.
4
C03
Governor pump
Between
20-322
(7)
20 60
and
and grounding
Between
harness
3
circuit)
Resistance value
and grounding
Voltage
NEUTRAL
Below 1 V
When operating one side

only
20 30 V
PC300/350(LC)-7
TROUBLESHOOTING
E204
Electrical Circuit Diagram for Merge/Divide Solenoid in Governor Pump Controller
PC300/350(LC)-7
20-323
TROUBLESHOOTING
E204

User Code
Service Code
Failure Code
E204
DWJ0KB
Failure
phenomenon
Short-circuiting in merge/divide solenoid

Failure content
Abnormal current flew to the merge/divide solenoid circuit, when power was supplied to the circuit.
Response from
controller
Power supply to the merge/divide solenoid circuit is switched OFF.

Even after the failure cause disappears of itself, the machine operation does not return to normalcy, unless the engine starting switch is once turned OFF.
Phenomenon
occurring on
machine
In L mode, the work equipment moves slowly, or the swing speed is slow in its single operation.
(Front and rear pumps are not separated)
Relative
information
Cause
defective
1
or grounding fault)

harness
2
circuit)
V03 (male)
Resistance value
Between (1) and (2)
20 60 z
Above 1 Mz
Wiring harness from C03 (female) (17) to V03 (female)
(2), or between wiring harness between C03 (female) (17)
and grounding
Resistance
value
Above 1 Mz
troubleshooting.
3
Governor pump
20-323-1
(7)
C03
Voltage
NEUTRAL
Below 1 V
When operating one side

only
20 30 V
PC300/350(LC)-7
TROUBLESHOOTING
E204
PC300/350(LC)-7
20-323-2
(7)
TROUBLESHOOTING
E205
Service Code in Electrical System E205 (Short-circuiting in 2-stage relief solenoid)

PC300, 300LC-7 Serial No. 40001 45000
PC350, 350LC-7 Serial No. 20001 25000
User Code
Service Code
Failure Code
E205
DWK0KB
Failure
phenomenon
Short-circuiting in 2-stage relief solenoid

Failure content
Abnormal current flew to the 2-stage relief solenoid circuit, when power was supplied to the circuit.
Response from
controller
Power supply to the 2-stage relief solenoid circuit is switched OFF.

Even after the failure cause disappears of itself, the machine operation does not return to normalcy,
Phenomenon
occurring on
machine
The one-touch power max. switch does not work.

(The main relief valve cannot be set to high-pressure set.)
Relative
information
Operation of the 2-stage relief solenoid (ON or OFF) can be checked in the monitoring function.
Cause
defective
1
or grounding fault)

V08 (male)
Between
Between
2 D03 defective
Above 1 M
D03 (male)
Resistance value
Above 1 M
and
to J06 to V06
(female)
and D03 (female)
and grounding
Resistance
value
Above 1 M
4
Governor pump
C03
Between
20-324
(7)
20 60
and
and grounding
Between
harness
3
circuit)
Resistance value
and grounding
Working mode
Voltage
Other than L mode
Below 1 V
L mode
20 30 V
PC300/350(LC)-7
TROUBLESHOOTING
E205
Electric Circuit Diagram for 2-stage Relief Solenoid in Governor Pump Controller
PC300/350(LC)-7
20-325
(7)
TROUBLESHOOTING
E205

User Code
Service Code
Failure Code
E205
DWK0KB
Failure
phenomenon
Short-circuiting in 2-stage relief solenoid

Failure content
Abnormal current flew to the 2-stage relief solenoid circuit, when power was supplied to the circuit.
Response from
controller
Power supply to the 2-stage relief solenoid circuit is switched OFF.

Phenomenon
occurring on
machine
The one-touch power max. switch does not work. (The main relief valve is not set to high pressure)
Relative
information
Cause
defective
1
or grounding fault)

harness
2
circuit)
V08 (male)
Resistance value
Between (1) and (2)
20 60 z
Above 1 Mz
and grounding
Resistance
value
Above 1 Mz
3
Governor pump
20-325-1
(7)
C03
Working mode
Voltage
Other than L mode
Below 1 V
L mode
20 30 V
PC300/350(LC)-7
TROUBLESHOOTING
E205
Electric Circuit Diagram for 2-stage Relief Solenoid in Governor Pump Controller
PC300/350(LC)-7
20-325-2
(7)
TROUBLESHOOTING
E206

(Short-circuiting in travel speed shifting solenoid)
PC300, 300LC-7 Serial No. 40001 45000
PC350, 350LC-7 Serial No. 20001 25000
User Code
Service Code
Failure Code
E206
DW43KB
Failure
phenomenon
Short-circuiting in travel speed shifting solenoid

Failure content
Abnormal current flew to the travel speed shifting solenoid, when power was supplied to the circuit.
Response from
controller
Power supply to the travel speed shifting solenoid circuit is switched OFF.
Phenomenon
occurring on
machine
The travel speed does not turn to Hi.

(The travel motor swash plate angle does not turn to minimum.)
Relative
information
Operation of the travel speed shifting solenoid (ON or OFF) can be checked in the monitoring function.
Cause
Travel speed shifting
solenoid defective
1
or grounding fault)

V04 (male)
Between
Between
2 D04 defective
Above 1 M
D04 (male)
Resistance value
Above 1 M
and
to J06 to V04
(female)
and D04 (female)
and grounding
Resistance
value
Above 1 M
troubleshooting.
4
Governor pump
C03
Between
20-326
(7)
20 60
and
and grounding
Between
harness
3
circuit)
Resistance value
and grounding
Travel speed
Voltage
Lo
Below 1 V
Hi + Travel operation
20 30 V
PC300/350(LC)-7
TROUBLESHOOTING
E206
Electrical Circuit Diagram for Travel Speed Shifting Solenoid in Governor Pump Controller
PC300/350(LC)-7
20-327
TROUBLESHOOTING
E206

User Code
Service Code
Failure Code
E206
DW43KB
Failure
phenomenon
Short-circuiting in travel speed shifting solenoid

Failure content
Abnormal current flew to the travel speed shifting solenoid, when power was supplied to the circuit.
Response from
controller
Power supply to the travel speed shifting solenoid circuit is switched OFF.
Phenomenon
occurring on
machine
The travel speed does not turn to Hi.

(The travel motor swash plate angle is not set to the minimum)
Relative
information
Cause
solenoid defective
1
or grounding fault)

harness
2
circuit)
V04 (male)
Resistance value
Between (1) and (2)
20 60 z
Above 1 Mz
and grounding
Resistance
value
Above 1 Mz
troubleshooting.
3
Governor pump
20-327-1
(7)
C03
Travel speed &

Travel lever
Voltage
Lo + Neutral
Below 1 V
Hi + Travel
20 30 V
PC300/350(LC)-7
TROUBLESHOOTING
E206
PC300/350(LC)-7
20-327-2
(7)
TROUBLESHOOTING
E211
Service Code in Electrical System E211 (Disconnection in travel interlocking solenoid)

PC300, 300LC-7 Serial No. 40001 45000
PC350, 350LC-7 Serial No. 20001 25000
User Code
Service Code
Failure Code
E211
DW91KA
Failure
phenomenon
Disconnection in travel interlocking solenoid

Failure content
No current flows to the travel interlocking solenoid circuit, when power is supplied to the circuit.
Response from
controller
None in particular (The solenoid does not function as there is current flowing to it)
When the failure cause disappears of itself, the machine operation returns to normalcy.
Phenomenon
occurring on
machine
It is difficult to steer the machine while traveling.

(L.H. and R.H. travel circuits cannot be disconnected.)
Relative
information
The solenoid detects disconnection, when power is ON. Hence be sure to check it with power ON after
the repairs. (For how to turn power ON or OFF, refer to the troubleshooting under Service Code [E201].)
Cause
Travel interlocking
1 solenoid defective

V02 (male)
Between
harness
harness
3
(Contact with 24 V circuit)
Governor pump
(7)
20 60
and
(female)
to J06 to V02
Wiring harness between V02 (female)
and grounding
Resistance
value
Below 1
Resistance
value
Below 1
to J06 to V02
(female) , or between wiring harness C03 (female)
and D03 (female)
and grounding
Voltage
Below 1 V
C03 (female)
Between
20-328
Resistance value
and grounding
Resistance value
20 60
PC300/350(LC)-7
TROUBLESHOOTING
E211
Electrical Circuit Diagram for Travel Interlocking Solenoid in Governor Pump Controller
PC300/350(LC)-7
20-329
TROUBLESHOOTING
E211

User Code
Service Code
Failure Code
E211
DW91KA
Failure
phenomenon
Disconnection in travel interlocking solenoid

Failure content
No current flows to the travel interlocking solenoid circuit, when power is supplied to the circuit.
Response from
controller
None in particular (The solenoid does not function as there is current flowing to it)
Phenomenon
occurring on
machine
It is difficult to steer the machine while traveling.

(The right and left travel circuits are not separated from each other)
Relative
information
Cause
Travel interlocking
harness
harness
3
Governor pump
20-329-1
(7)

V02 (male)
Resistance value
Between (1) and (2)
20 60 z
Wiring harness from C03 (female) (7) to V02 (female) (2)
Resistance
value
Below 1 z
Wiring harness between C03 (female) (3) (13) (23) and

V02 (female) (1)
Resistance
value
Below 1 z
Wiring harness from C03 (female) (7) to V02 (female) (2),
or between wiring harness C03 (female) (7) and grounding
Voltage
Below 1 V
C03 (female)
Resistance value
20 60 z
PC300/350(LC)-7
TROUBLESHOOTING
E211
Electrical Circuit Diagram for Travel Interlocking Solenoid in Governor Pump Controller
PC300/350(LC)-7
20-329-2
(7)
TROUBLESHOOTING
E213

(Disconnection in Swing Parking Brake Solenoid)
PC300, 300LC-7 Serial No. 40001 45000
PC350, 350LC-7 Serial No. 20001 25000
User Code
E03
Failure content
Response from
controller
Phenomenon
occurring on
machine
Relative
information
Service Code
E213
Failure Code
DW45KA
Failure
phenomenon
Disconnection in swing and parking brake solenoid

No current flows to the swing parking brake solenoid circuit, when power is supplied to the circuit.
None in particular (The solenoid does not function as there is no current flowing to it)
The machine's upper structure does not swing.
(The swing holding brake cannot be released.)
Operation of the swing parking brake solenoid (ON or OFF) can be checked in the monitoring function.
If there is abnormality neither with the solenoid nor with wiring harnesses, the upper structure can swing
by moving the emergency swing brake release switch to the FREE position. (In this case, however, the
parking brake does not work, when stopping the machine)
While in troubleshooting, hold both the swing lock switch and the emergency swing release switch in the
OFF position.
Cause
Swing parking brake

solenoid defective
1
Swing lock switch

defective
2
Assembled-type
diode D01 defective
3
V05 (male)
Between
and
Resistance value
20 60
X05 (female)
Between
Swing lock switch

OFF
and
Resistance value
Below 1
LOCK
Above 1 M
D01 (male)
Between
and
Digital type circuit tester

Diode mode
Continuity
Continued
Disconnection of
wiring harness
4 (Disconnection or
defective contact
with connector)
Short-circuiting of
Wiring harness
5
(Contact with 24V
circuit)
Governor pump
Wiring harness between C03 (female)
(7)
Resistance
value
Below 1
Resistance
Below 1
value
Resistance
Wiring harness from X05 (male)
to J06 to V05 (female)
Below 1
value
Resistance
and grounding
Below 1
value
Turn the engine starting switch OFF for the preparations, and hold it in the ON position during the troubleshooting.
Wiring harness from D01 (female)
to J02 to X05 (male)
Between wiring harness between C03 (female)

(female)
and grounding
and D01
Voltage
Below 1 V
C03 (female)
Between
20-330
and D01 (female)
and grounding
Disconnect D01 and connect pins

and
of the
male side.
Resistance value
20 60
PC300/350(LC)-7
TROUBLESHOOTING
E213
Electrical Circuit Diagram for Swing and Parking Brake Solenoid in Governor Pump Controller
PC300/350(LC)-7
20-331
TROUBLESHOOTING
E213

User Code
Service Code
Failure Code
E03
E213
DW45KA
Failure
phenomenon
Disconnection in swing holding brake solenoid

No current flows to the swing holding brake solenoid circuit, when power is supplied to the circuit.
Response from
controller
Phenomenon
occurring on
machine
The machine's upper structure does not swing. (The swing holding brake is not released)
Relative
information
Operation of the swing holding brake solenoid (ON or OFF) can be checked in the monitoring function.
If there is abnormality neither with the solenoid nor with wiring harnesses, the upper structure can swing
by moving the emergency swing brake release switch to the FREE position. (In this case, however, the
parking brake does not work, when stopping the machine)
While in troubleshooting, hold both the swing lock switch and the emergency swing release switch in the
OFF position.
Failure content
Cause
Swing holding brake

solenoid defective
1
Swing lock switch

defective
2
Assembled-type
diode D01 defective
3
V05 (male)
Resistance value
Between (1) and (2)
20 60 z
X05 (female)
Between (3) and (4)
Swing lock switch
Resistance value
OFF
Below 1 z
LOCK
Above 1 Mz
D01 (male)
Digital type circuit tester
Continuity
Between (7) and (3)
Diode mode
Continued
Disconnection of
wiring harness
4 (Disconnection or
defective contact
with connector)
Short-circuiting of
Wiring harness
5
(Contact with 24V
circuit)
Governor pump
20-331-1
(7)
Wiring harness between C03 (female) (37) and D01 (female) (7)
Resistance
value
Below 1 z
Wiring harness from D01 (female) (3) to J02 to X05 (male) (3)
Resistance
value
Below 1 z
Wiring harness from X05 (male) (4) to V05 (female) (2)
Resistance
value
Below 1 z
Wiring harness between C03 (female) (3) (13) (23) and V05
(female) (1)
Resistance
value
Below 1 z
Between wiring harness between C03 (female) (37) and D01
(female) (7) and grounding
Voltage
Below 1 V
C03 (female)
Between (37) and (3) (13)
(23)
Disconnect D01 and connect pins

(3) and (7) of the female side.
Resistance value
20 60 z
PC300/350(LC)-7
TROUBLESHOOTING
E213
Electrical Circuit Diagram for Swing Holding Brake Solenoid in Governor Pump Controller
PC300/350(LC)-7
20-331-2
(7)
TROUBLESHOOTING
E214
Service Code in Electrical System E214 (Disconnection of merge/divide solenoid)

PC300, 300LC-7 Serial No. 40001 45000
PC350, 350LC-7 Serial No. 20001 25000
User Code
Service Code
Failure Code
E214
DWJ0KA
Failure
phenomenon
Disconnection in merge/divide solenoid

Failure content
No current flows to the merge/divide solenoid circuit, when power is supplied to the circuit.
Response from
controller
Phenomenon
occurring on
machine
In L mode, speeds of the work equipment and swing in its single operation are too fast
(Front and rear pumps cannot be disconnected.)
Relative
information
Cause
1 defective

V03 (male)
Between
harness
harness
3
Governor pump
(7)
20 60
and
(female)
to J06 to V03
and grounding
Resistance
value
Below 1
Resistance
value
Below 1
to J06 to V03
(female)
and D03 (female)
and grounding
Voltage
Below 1 V
C03 (female)
Between
20-332
Resistance value
and grounding
Resistance value
20 60
PC300/350(LC)-7
TROUBLESHOOTING
E214
PC300/350(LC)-7
20-333
TROUBLESHOOTING
E214

User Code
Service Code
Failure Code
E214
DWJ0KA
Failure
phenomenon
Disconnection in merge/divide solenoid

Failure content
No current flows to the merge/divide solenoid circuit, when power is supplied to the circuit.
Response from
controller
Phenomenon
occurring on
machine
In L mode, speeds of the work equipment and swing in its single operation are too fast
(Front and rear pumps are not separated)
Relative
information
Cause
1 defective
harness
harness
3
Governor pump
20-333-1
(7)

V03 (male)
Resistance value
Between (1) and (2)
20 60 z
Resistance
value
Below 1 z

V03 (female) (1)
Resistance
value
Below 1 z
and grounding
Voltage
Below 1 V
C03 (female)
Resistance value
Between (17) and (3) (13) (23)
20 60 z
PC300/350(LC)-7
TROUBLESHOOTING
E214
PC300/350(LC)-7
20-333-2
(7)
TROUBLESHOOTING
E215
Service Code in Electrical System E215 (Disconnection in 2-stage relief solenoid)

PC300, 300LC-7 Serial No. 40001 45000
PC350, 350LC-7 Serial No. 20001 25000
User Code
Service Code
Failure Code
E215
DWK0KA
Failure
phenomenon

Failure content
No current flows to the 2-stage relief solenoid circuit, when power is supplied to the circuit.
Response from
controller
Phenomenon
occurring on
machine

(The main relief valve cannot be set to high-pressure set.)
Relative
information
Cause
1 defective

V08 (male)
Between
harness
harness
3
Governor pump
(7)
20 60
and
(female)
to J06 to V06
and grounding
Resistance
value
Below 1
Resistance
value
Below 1
to J06 to V06
(female)
and D03 (female)
and grounding
Voltage
Below 1 V
C03 (female)
Between
20-334
Resistance value
and grounding
Resistance value
20 60
PC300/350(LC)-7
TROUBLESHOOTING
E215
Electrical Circuit Diagram for 2-stage Relief Solenoid in Governor Pump Controller
PC300/350(LC)-7
20-335
(7)
TROUBLESHOOTING
E215

User Code
Service Code
Failure Code
E215
DWK0KA
Failure
phenomenon

Failure content
No current flows to the 2-stage relief solenoid circuit, when power is supplied to the circuit.
Response from
controller
Phenomenon
occurring on
machine

(The main relief valve cannot be set to high-pressure set)
Relative
information
Cause
1 defective
harness
harness
3
Governor pump
20-335-1
(7)

V08 (male)
Resistance value
Between (1) and (2)
20 60 z
Wiring harness between C03 (female) (28) and V08
(female) (2)
Resistance
value
Max. 1 z

V08 (female) (1)
Resistance
value
Max. 1 z
and grounding
Voltage
Max. 1 V
C03 (female)
Resistance value
Between (28) and (3) (13) (23)
20 60 z
PC300/350(LC)-7
TROUBLESHOOTING
E215
Electrical Circuit Diagram for 2-stage Relief Solenoid in Governor Pump Controller
PC300/350(LC)-7
20-335-2
(7)
TROUBLESHOOTING
E216

(Disconnection in travel speed shifting solenoid)
User Code
Service Code
Failure Code
E216
DW43KA
Failure
phenomenon

Failure content
No current flows to the travel speed shifting solenoid circuit, when power is supplied to the circuit.
Response from
controller
Phenomenon
occurring on
machine
The travel speed does not shift to Hi.

(The travel motor swash plate angle does not turn to minimum.)
Relative
information
Cause

V04 (male)
Between
harness
harness
3
Governor pump
(7)
20 60
and
(female)
to J06 to V04
and grounding
Resistance
value
Below 1
Resistance
value
Below 1
to J06 to V04
(female)
and D04 (female)
and grounding
Voltage
Below 1 V
C03 (female)
Between
20-336
Resistance value
and grounding
Resistance value
20 60
PC300/350(LC)-7
TROUBLESHOOTING
E216
PC300/350(LC)-7
20-337
TROUBLESHOOTING
E216

User Code
Service Code
Failure Code
E216
DW43KA
Failure
phenomenon

Failure content
No current flows to the travel speed shifting solenoid circuit, when power is supplied to the circuit.
Response from
controller
Phenomenon
occurring on
machine
The travel speed does not shift to Hi.

(The travel motor swash plate angle does not turn to minimum)
Relative
information
Cause
harness
harness
3
Governor pump
20-337-1
(7)

V04 (male)
Resistance value
Between (1) and (2)
20 60 z
Wiring harness between C03 (female) (27) and V04
(female) (2)
Resistance
value
Max. 1 z

V04 (female) (1) and grounding
Resistance
value
Max. 1 z
and grounding
Voltage
Max. 1 V
C03 (female)
Resistance value
Between (27) and (3) (13) (23)
20 60 z
PC300/350(LC)-7
TROUBLESHOOTING
E216
PC300/350(LC)-7
20-337-2
(7)
TROUBLESHOOTING
E217
Service Code in Electrical System E217 (Abnormality in inputting model code)

User Code
Service Code
Failure Code
E217
DA2SKQ
Failure
phenomenon
Abnormality in inputting model code

Failure content
A model code signal was inputted which indicates another model that is not registered in the controller.
Response from
controller
The controller treats it as a default-set model (PC300).

Even if the failure cause disappears of itself, the machine operation does not return to normalcy, unless
the engine starting switch is once turned OFF.
Phenomenon
occurring on
machine
None in particular
Relative
information
Model names (expressed in number) that the controller recognizes can be confirmed in the monitoring
function. (Code No. 002 and 003: Controller Model Code)
Input of model selecting signals (ON or OFF) can be confirmed in the monitoring
function.(Code No. 027:Switch Input 2)
Cause
Model selecting connector defective

1
(Internal disconnection
or short-circuiting)

C09 (female)
Resistance value
Between
and
Below 1
Between
and
Above 1 M
harness

(male)
and C09
Resistance
value
Below 1

(male)
and C09
Resistance
value
Below 1
Resistance
value
Below 1
Between wiring harness between C09 (male)

and grounding
and J05
harness
3
circuit)

C09 (male)
and grounding
and
Resistance
value
Above 1 M

C09 (male)
and grounding
and
Resistance
value
Above 1 M

C09 (male)
and grounding
and
Resistance
value
Above 1 M
4
Governor pump
20-338
(7)
C02
Between
or
and grounding
Between
and grounding
Voltage
20 30 V
Below 1 V
PC300/350(LC)-7
TROUBLESHOOTING
E217
Electrical Circuit Diagram for Model Selecting Connector in Governor Pump Controller
PC300/350(LC)-7
20-339
(7)
TROUBLESHOOTING
E218
Service Code in Electrical System E218 Disconnection of S-NET signal)

User Code
Service Code
Failure Code
E218
DA2SKA
Failure
phenomenon
Disconnection in S-NET signal

Failure content
A failure occurred in S-NET communication between the monitor and controller in the past.
(The machine operation returned to normalcy, when the display was resumed)
Response from
controller
While the failure is still continuing, the machine operation is controlled by the following default setting.
1) Working mode: E mode
2) Travel speed: Lo
3) Auto-decelerator: ON
4) Attachment oil flow rate: Minimum ( )
Phenomenon
occurring on
machine
Relative
information
This Service Code No. is displayed to inform that there was a failure occurred in the past, when S-NET
communication between the monitor panel and the governor pump controller is returned to normalcy.
The communication has already returned to normalcy by the time this Service Code No. is displayed.
But thoroughly diagnose all the related equipment and circuits, and remove all potential causes for a
failure in order to prevent recurrence of failures.
The working mode cannot be changed. (The display changes normally in the monitor panel)
The travel speed cannot be shifted. (The display changes normally in the monitor panel)
The auto-decelerator cannot be released. (The display changes normally in the monitor panel)
The attachment oil flow rate cannot be changed. (The display changes normally in the monitor panel) ( )
Cause
harness

harness
2
circuit)
harness
3

(female)
(female)
and C02
and C02
Resistance
value
Below 1
Resistance
value
Below 1
C02 (female)
and grounding
and
Resistance
value
Above 1 M
C02 (female)
and grounding
and
Voltage
Below 1 V
P02 (male)
Between
Governor pump
69V
C02 (male)
Between
20-340
and
Voltage
and
Voltage
69V
PC300/350(LC)-7
TROUBLESHOOTING
E218
Electrical Circuit Diagram for S-NET Communication between Monitor Panel and Governor Pump
Controller
PC300/350(LC)-7
20-341
TROUBLESHOOTING
E222
Service Code in Electrical System E222 (Short-circuiting in LS-EPC solenoid)

User Code
Service Code
Failure Code
E222
DXE0KB
Failure
phenomenon

Failure content
Abnormal current flew to the LS-EPC solenoid circuit.
Response from
controller
The controller reduces the output to the LS-EPC solenoid circuit to 0.

Even if the failure cause disappears, the current does not return to normalcy, unless the engine starting
switch is once turned OFF.
Phenomenon
occurring on
machine
The travel speed is slow at Mi and Lo, or in Lmode, speed of the work equipment and swing are too fast.
(The LS valve set pressure cannot be controlled.)
Relative
information
Output to LS-EPC solenoid (ampere) can be confirmed in the monitor function.

(Code No. 015: LS-EPC solenoid current)
Cause
LS-EPC solenoid defective
1
or grounding fault)

V22 (male)
Between
Between

harness
2
circuit)
Resistance value
7 14
and
Above 1 M
and grounding
V22 (female)
and grounding
and
Resistance
value
Above 1 M
3
Governor pump
C03 (female)
Between
Between
Resistance value
and
and grounding
7 14
Above 1 M
Electrical Circuit Diagram for LS-EPC Solenoid in Governor Pump Controller
20-342
(7)
PC300/350(LC)-7
TROUBLESHOOTING
E223
Service Code in Electrical System E223 (Disconnection in LS-EPC solenoid system)

User Code
Service Code
Failure Code
E223
DXE0KA
Failure
phenomenon

Failure content
No current flows to the LS-EPC solenoid circuit.
Response from
controller
Phenomenon
occurring on
machine
The travel speed is slow at Mi and Lo, or in Lmode, speeds of the work equipment and swing are too
fast. (The LS valve set pressure cannot be controlled.)
Relative
information
Output to LS-EPC solenoid (ampere) can be confirmed in the monitor function.

(Code No. 015: LS-EPC solenoid current)
Cause
LS-EPC solenoid defec1 tive

V22 (male)
Between
harness
harness
3
Governor pump
Resistance value
7 14
and
V22 (female)
and grounding
(female)
and
and V22
Resistance
value
Below 1
Resistance
value
Below 1
V22 (female)
and grounding
and
Voltage
Below 1 V
C03 (female)
Between
Resistance value
and
7 14
Electrical Circuit Diagram for LS-EPC Solenoid in Governor Pump Controller
PC300/350(LC)-7
20-343
(7)
TROUBLESHOOTING
E224
Service Code in Electrical System E224 (Abnormality in F pump pressure sensor)

User Code
Service Code
Failure Code
E224
DHPAMA
Failure
phenomenon
Abnormality in F pump pressure sensor

Failure content
Signal voltage from the F pump pressure sensor dropped below 0.3 V or exceeded 4.72 V.
Response from
controller
The controller controls the F pump pressure at 0 MPa{0 kg/cm2}.

If the failure cause disappears, the sensor returns to normalcy of itself.
Phenomenon
occurring on
machine
The travel speed does not shift automatically.
Relative
information
Input from the F pump pressure sensor (pressure) can be confirmed in the monitor function.
(Code No. 011: F pump pressure)
Cause
Sensor power source

fault

If the Service Code No. [E226] is displayed, troubleshoot the failure first.
Turn the engine starting switch OFF for the preparations, and keep the engine running

2 defective
(Internal failure)
A51
Voltage
Between (B) and (A)
Power supply
4.5 5.5 V
Between (C) and (A)
Signal
0.5 4.5 V
The pressure sensor voltage is measured with the wiring harness connected.
Accrdinaly, if the voltage is abnormal, check the wiring harness and controller, too, for
another cause of the trouble, and then judge.
harness

harness
4
circuit)
harness
5
Wiring harness from C01 (female) (22) to J07 to A51

(female) (B)
Resistance
value
Max. 1 z
Wiring harness between C01 (female) (10) and A51

(female) (A)
Resistance
value
Max. 1 z

(female) (C)
Resistance
value
Max. 1 z
Between wiring harness between C01 (female) (8) and
A51 (female) (C) and grounding
Resistance
value
Min. 1 Mz
Between wiring harness between C01 (female) (22), J07
and A51 (female) (B) and grounding
Voltage
Max. 1 V

A51 (female) (C) ang grounding
Voltage
Max. 1 V
6
Governor pump
20-344
(7)
C01
Voltage
Between (22) and (10)
Power supply
4.5 5.5 V
Signal
0.5 4.5 V
PC300/350(LC)-7
TROUBLESHOOTING
E224
Electrical Circuit Diagram for F Pump Pressure Sensor in Governor Pump Controller
PC300/350(LC)-7
20-345
(7)
TROUBLESHOOTING
E225
Service Code in Electrical System E225 (Abnormality in R pump pressure sensor)

User Code
Service Code
Failure Code
E225
DHPBMA
Failure
phenomenon
Abnormality in R pump pressure sensor

Failure content
Signal voltage from the R pump pressure sensor dropped below 0.3 V or exceeded 4.42 V.
Response from
controller
The controller controls the R pump pressure as 0 MPa {0 kg/cm2}.

If the failure cause disappears, the sensor returns to normalcy of itself.
Phenomenon
occurring on
machine
The travel speed does not shift automatically.
Relative
information
Input from the R pump pressure sensor (pressure) can be confirmed in the monitor function.
(Code No. 012: R pump pressure)
Cause
Sensor power source

fault

If the Service Code No. [E226] is displayed, troubleshoot the failure first.
R pump pressure sen2 sor defective

(Internal failure)
A52
Voltage
Between (B) and (A)
Power supply
4.5 5.5 V
Between (C) and (A)
Signal
0.5 4.5 V
The pressure sensor voltage is measured with the wiring harness connected.
Accrdinaly, if the voltage is abnormal, check the wiring harness and controller, too, for
another cause of the trouble, and then judge.
harness

harness
4
circuit)
harness
5
Wiring harness from C01 (female) (22) to J07 to A52

(female) (B)
Resistance
value
Max. 1 z

(female) (A)
Resistance
value
Max. 1 z

(female) (C)
Resistance
value
Max. 1 z
Resistance
value
Min. 1 Mz
Between wiring harness between C01 (female) (22), J07
and A52 (female) (B) and grounding
Voltage
Max. 1 V

Voltage
Max. 1 V
6
Governor pump
20-346
(7)
C01
Voltage
Power supply
4.5 5.5 V
Signal
0.5 4.5 V
PC300/350(LC)-7
TROUBLESHOOTING
E225
Electrical Circuit Diagram for R Pump Pressure Sensor in Governor Pump Controller
PC300/350(LC)-7
20-347
(7)
TROUBLESHOOTING
E226
Service Code in Electrical System E226 (Abnormality in Pressure sensor power source)
User Code
Service Code
Failure Code
E226
DA25KP
Failure
phenomenon
Abnormality in pressure sensor power source

Failure content
Abnormal current flew to the power source circuit (5 V) for the pressure sensors and potentiometer.
Response from
controller
The controller turns OFF power supply to the power source circuit (5 V).
Even when the failure cause disappears of itself, the current does not return to normalcy, unless the engine starting switch is once turned OFF.
Phenomenon
occurring on
machine
Signals from the pressure sensors and potentiometer are not inputted correctly.
The Service Code of "pressure sensor abnormal" and that of "potentiometer abnormal" are displayed at
the same time.
Cause
Pressure sensor or
1 potentiometer defective
(Internal short-circuit)
Disconnect the parts

shown at right in order.
If the error code goes off
when one of those parts
is disconnected, that part
is defective.
Turn the engine starting switch OFF for the preparations,

and hold it in the ON position during the troubleshooting.
Fuel dial
E06 Connector
Governor motor potentiometer
E10 Connector
A51 Connector
A52 Connector
harness
2
circuit)
Governor pump
20-348
(7)
Between wiring harness from C01 (female) (22) to J07 to

E06 (female) (1) and grounding [Fuel dial system]
Resistance
value
Min. 1 Mz

E10 (female) (A) and grounding
[Governor potentiometer system]
Resistance
value
Min. 1 Mz

A51 (female) (B) and grounding
[F pump pressure sensor system]
Resistance
value
Min. 1 Mz
C01
Voltage
Between (22) and (10) (21)
4.5 5.5 V
PC300/350(LC)-7
TROUBLESHOOTING
E226
Electrical Circuit Diagram for Sensor Power Source in Governor Pump Controller
PC300/350(LC)-7
20-349
TROUBLESHOOTING
E227

(Abnormality in engine rotation sensor in governor pump controller system)
User Code
Service Code
Failure Code
E227
DLE2MA
Failure
phenomenon
Abnormality in engine rotation sensor

Failure content
A normal pulse signal is not inputted to the signal circuit in the engine rotation sensor.
Response from
controller
The controller exercises a control equivalent to E mode.

If the failure cause disappears of itself, the signal input returns to normalcy.
Phenomenon
occurring on
machine
The machine lacks power a bit.
Relative
information
Input from the engine rotation sensor (rpm) can be confirmed in the monitor function.
(Code No. 010: Engine RPM)
Cause
Engine rotation sensor
fault
1
or disconnection)

E07 (male)
Between
Between
Engine rotation sensor

adjustment improper
harness
harness
Resistance value
500 1,000
and
Above 1 M
and grounding
For the inspection and adjustment, refer to the section of "Adjusting Engine Rotation
Sensor" in this manual.
(female)
(female)
and E07
and E07
Resistance
value
Below 1
Resistance
value
Below 1
(Contact with 24 V cir- Between wiring harness between C02 (female)

cuit)
E07 (female)
and grounding
and
Voltage
Below 1 V
5
Governor pump
C02 (female)
Between
Between
and
and grounding
Resistance value
500 1,000
Above 1 M
Electrical Circuit Diagram for Engine Rotation Sensor in Governor Pump Controller System
20-350
(7)
PC300/350(LC)-7
TROUBLESHOOTING
E228

(Short-circuiting in attachment return switching relay)
User Code
Service Code
Failure Code
E228
D196KB
Failure
phenomenon
Short-circuiting in attachment return switching relay

Abnormal current flew to the attachment return switching relay circuit , when it was grounded (power ON).
Response from
controller
The controller turned OFF power to the attachment return switching relay circuit.
Even when the failure cause disappears of itself, the current does not return to normalcy.
Phenomenon
occurring on
machine
The hydraulic circuit for attachments is not switched to the single operation circuit.
(The switching valve is not switched to the tank circuit.)
Relative
information
In this code, a failure is diagnosed only when the setting mode is "with ATT". (Check the setting mode
shown in the monitor panel)
This code detects only failures occurring on the primary ATT return switching relay (coil side). If the ATT
return switching solenoid is suspected of a defect, check the power source, wiring harness or solenoid
of the secondary relay (contact side).
It can be confirmed in the monitor function how the attachment return switching relay circuit works (ON
or OFF). (Code No. 024:Solenoid 2)
Failure content
Cause
Attachment return
1 switching relay defective

R20 (male)
Between
harness
2
Resistance value
100 500
and
R20 (female)
and grounding
and
Voltage
Below 1 V
3
Governor pump
C02
Between
and grounding
Working mode
Voltage
Other than B mode
20 30 V
B mode
Below 1 V
Electrical Circuit Diagram for Attachment Return Switching Relay and Solenoid
PC300/350(LC)-7
20-351
(7)
TROUBLESHOOTING
E232
Service Code in Electrical System E232 (Short-circuiting in PC-EPC Solenoid

User Code
Service Code
Failure Code
E02
E232
DXA0KB
Failure
phenomenon

Failure content
Abnormal current flew to the PC-EPC solenoid circuit.
Response from
controller
The controller reduces the output to the PC-EPC solenoid circuit to 0.

Even if the failure cause disappears, the current does not return to normalcy, unless the engine starting
switch is once turned OFF.
Phenomenon
occurring on
machine
As load to the pump increases, the engine rotation drops sharply and sometimes the engine stalls.
(The pump absorption torque cannot be controlled)
Relative
information
Output to PC-EPC solenoid (ampere) can be confirmed in the monitor function.

(Code No. 013: PC-EPC solenoid current)
If there is no abnormality with the solenoid or any of the wiring harnesses, the machine can be operated
in a working mode equivalent to E mode by turning the emergency drive switch ON.
(At that time the monitor panel continues to display service code No. [E232], but this is not abnormal)
Turn the emergency driving switch ON during the troubleshooting.
Cause
PC-EPC solenoid defective
1
or grounding fault)
Emergency pump driving

switch defective
2
or grounding fault)
V21 (male)
Resistance value
Between (1) and (2)
7 14 z
Min. 1 Mz
S25 (male)
Emergency pump
drive switch
Between (3) and (4)


harness
3
circuit)
Normal
Resistance value
Min. 1 Mz
Min. 1 Mz
Between wiring harness from C03 (female) (16) to S25
Resistance
value
Min. 1 Mz
Between wiring harness from S25 (female) (2) to V21

Resistance
value
Min. 1 Mz
4
Governor pump
20-352
(7)
C03 (female)
Resistance value
Between (16) and (3) (13) (23)
7 14 z
Min. 1 Mz
PC300/350(LC)-7
TROUBLESHOOTING
E232
Electrical Circuit Diagram for PC-EPC Solenoid in Governor Pump Controller
PC300/350(LC)-7
20-353
TROUBLESHOOTING
E233
Service Code in Electrical System E233 (Disconnection in PC-EPC solenoid system)

User Code
Service Code
Failure Code
E02
E233
DXA0KA
Failure
phenomenon

Failure content
No current flows to the PC-EPC solenoid circuit.
Response from
controller
When the failure cause disappears of itself, the current returns to normalcy.
Phenomenon
occurring on
machine
As load to the pump increases, the engine rotation drops sharply and sometimes the engine stalls.
(The pump absorption torque cannot be controlled)
Relative
information
Output to PC-EPC solenoid (ampere) can be confirmed in the monitor function.

(Code No. 013: PC-EPC solenoid current)
If there is no abnormality with the solenoid or any of the wiring harnesses, the machine can be operated
in a working mode equivalent to E mode by turning the emergency driving switch ON. (At that time the
monitor panel continues to display Service Code No. [E233], but this is not abnormal)
Cause
PC-EPC solenoid
1 defective

V21 (male)
Resistance value
Between (1) and (2)
7 14 z
2 switch defective
Emergency pump
driving switch
Resistance value
Normal
Max. 1 z
Emergency
Min. 1 Mz
Between (2) and (5)

Between (5) and (6)
Normal
Max. 1 z
Emergency
Min. 1 Mz
harness
3 (Disconnection or
defective contact with
connector)
harness
4
Governor pump
20-354
(7)
S25
Wiring harness between C03 (female) (16) and S25

(female) (3)
Resistance
value
Max. 1 z
Wiring harness between S25 (female) (2) and V21

(female) (1)
Resistance
value
Max. 1 z

S25 (female) (6)
Resistance
value
Max. 1 z
Wiring harness between S25 (female) (5) and V21

(female) (2)
Resistance
value
Max. 1 z
S25 (female) (3) and grounding
Voltage
Max. 1 V
Between wiring harness between S25 (female) (2) and

V21 (female) (1) and grounding
Voltage
Max. 1 V
C03 (female)
Resistance value
Between (16) and (3) (13) (23)
7 14 z
PC300/350(LC)-7
TROUBLESHOOTING
E233
Electrical Circuit Diagram for PC-EPC Solenoid in Governor Pump Controller
PC300/350(LC)-7
20-355
TROUBLESHOOTING
E238

(Disconnection in attachment return switching relay)
User Code
Service Code
Failure Code
E238
D196KA
Failure
phenomenon
Disconnection in attachment return switching relay

Failure content
When the attachment switching relay circuit is disconnected from grounding (power OFF), 24 V voltage
is not generated.
Response from
controller
None in particular
If the failure cause disappears, the governor returns to normalcy.
Phenomenon
occurring on
machine
The hydraulic circuit for attachments cannot be switched to the single operation
(The switching valve is not switched to the tank circuit.)
Relative
information
This code detects only failures occurring on the primary ATT return switching relay (coil side). If the ATT
return switching solenoid is suspected of a defect, check the power source, wiring harness or solenoid
of the secondary relay (contact side).
It can be confirmed in the monitor function how the attachment return switching relay circuit works (ON
or OFF). (Code No. 024:Solenoid 2)
Cause
1 Fuse No. 2 fault

Attachment return
2 switching relay defective

If the fuse has been blown, there is a big possibility that grounding fault occurred in the
relay circuit. (See Cause 4)
R20 (male)
Between
100 500
and
3 switch defective

(female)
Wiring harness from R20 (female)
outlet

harness
4
circuit)
and R20
Resistance
value
Below 1
to J03 to FB1-2
Resistance
value
Below 1
R20 (female)
and grounding
Between wiring harness from R20 (female)
FB1-2 outlet and grounding
and
to J03 to
Resistance
value
Above 1 M
Resistance
value
Above 1 M
5
Governor pump
C03
Between
20-356
(7)
Resistance value
and grounding
Working mode
Voltage
Other than B mode
20 30 V
B mode
Below 1 V
PC300/350(LC)-7
TROUBLESHOOTING
E238
Electrical Circuit Diagram for Attachment Return Switching Relay and Solenoid in Governor Pump
Controller
PC300/350(LC)-7
20-357
TROUBLESHOOTING
E245
Service Code in Electrical Equipment E245

(Short-circuiting in attachment oil flow rate adjusting EPC) (Multi-monitor only)
User Code
Service Code
Failure Code
E245
DXE4KB
Failure
phenomenon
Short-circuiting in attachment oil flow rate adjusting

EPC (in governor pump controller system)
Abnormal current flew to the attachment oil flow rate adjusting EPC solenoid circuit.
Response from
controller
The controller reduces to zero (0) power to the attachment oil flow rate adjusting EPC solenoid circuit.
Even when the failure cause disappears, the EPC solenoid circuit does not return to normalcy, unless
the engine starting switch is once turned OFF.
Phenomenon
occurring on
machine
The attachments do not move.

(The PPC source pressure is not supplied to the service PPC valve.)
Relative
information
It can be confirmed in the monitor function how power (ampere) is supplied to the attachment oil flow
rate adjusting EPC solenoid circuit. (Code No. 017: Service solenoid current)
Failure content
Cause
Attachment oil flow rate
adjusting EPC defective
1
or grounding fault)

V30 (male)
Between
Between

harness
2
circuit)
Resistance value
7 14
and
Above 1 M
and grounding
V30 (female)
and grounding
and
Resistance
value
Above 1 M
3
Governor pump
C03 (female)
Between
Between
and
and grounding
Resistance value
7 14
Above 1 M
Electrical Circuit Diagram for Attachment Oil Flow Rate Adjusting EPC Solenoid in Governor Pump
Controller
20-358
(7)
PC300/350(LC)-7
TROUBLESHOOTING
E246

(Disconnection in attachment oil flow rate adjusting EPC) (Multi-monitor only)
User Code
Service Code
Failure Code
E246
DXE4KA
Failure
phenomenon
Disconnection in attachment oil flow rate adjusting

EPC (in governor pump controller system)
Failure content
No current flew to the attachment oil flow rate adjusting EPC solenoid circuit.
Response from
controller
None in particular (The solenoid does not work, as there is no current flowing to it)
If the failure cause disappears, the EPC solenoid circuit returns to normalcy of itself.
Phenomenon
occurring on
machine
The attachments do not move.

(The PPC source pressure is not supplied to the service PPC valve.)
Relative
information
It can be confirmed in the monitor function how power (ampere) is supplied to the attachment oil flow
rate adjusting EPC solenoid circuit. (Code No. 017: Service solenoid current)
Cause
Attachment oil flow rate
adjusting EPC defective
1
or grounding fault)
harness
harness
3
Governor pump

V30 (male)
Between
Resistance value
7 14
and
V30 (male)
and grounding
and

and V30 (male)
and grounding
Resistance
value
Below 1
Resistance
value
Below 1
V30 (female)
and grounding
and
Voltage
Below 1 V
C03 (female)
Between
and
Resistance value
7 14
Electrical Circuit Diagram for Attachment Oil Flow Rate Adjusting EPC Solenoid in Governor Pump
Controller
PC300/350(LC)-7
20-359
(7)
E256
Service Code in Electrical System E256 (Incorrect nonvolatile memory data)

User Code
Service Code
Failure Code
E256
DA20KT
Failure
phenomenon
Incorrect nonvolatile memory data

(in governor pump controller)
Failure content
The data in the nonvolatile memory in the controller cannot be updated.
Response from
controller
None in particular
Even if the failure cause disappears, the nonvolatile memory does not return to normalcy, unless the
Phenomenon
occurring on
machine
In some cases control parameters of the machines change, resulting in increase or decrease of the machine's power.
Relative
information
Recorded in the nonvolatile memory are part of the machine control parameters
Presumed
cause and
standard value
in normalcy
20-360
Cause
Governor pump
As it is an internal failure, troubleshooting is impossible.

(There is no problem with continuing with use of the controller, so long as no
failure is visually evident)
PC300/350(LC)-7
E304
Service Code in Electrical System E304 (Short circuit of engine stop solenoid relay)
User Code
Service Code
Failure Code
E304
DY45KB
Failure
phenomenon
Short circuit of engine stop solenoid relay

Failure content
Abnormal current flew to the engine stop solenoid relay circuit, when power is supplied to the circuit.
Response from
controller
Switch OFF power to the engine stop solenoid relay circuit.

Even when the failure dissolves itself, the circuit does not return to normalcy, if the engine starting switch
is not turned off once.
Phenomenon
occurring on
machine
The engine cannot be started.
Relative
information
This code detects only failures occurring on the primary engine stop solenoid relay (coil side). If the engine stop solenoid is suspected of a defect, check the power source, wiring harness or solenoid of the
secondary relay (contact side).
It can be checked in the monitoring function how the engine stop solenoid relay works (ON and OFF).
(Code 023: Controller output)
If there is nothing abnormal with the relay or wiring harness, the engine can be started again by moving
the emergency fuel solenoid driving switch to the EMERGENCY side.
Cause
Fault of engine stop
1 solenoid relay (Internal
short circuiting)

R22 (male)
Between
Fault of emergency fuel

2 solenoid driving switch
(Internal short circuiting)
100 500
and
S25 (male)
Resistance value
and
Above 1 M
Between
harness
3
circuit)
Resistance value
grounding
to J01 to R22
(female)
and S25 (female).
Resistance
value
Above 1 M
troubleshooting.
4
Governor pump
C03
Between
20-362
and grounding
Engine starting switch
Voltage
ON
Below 1 V
Engine start-up
20 30 V
PC300/350(LC)-7
TROUBLESHOOTING
E304
Electrical Circuit Diagram for Engine Stop Solenoid and Relay in Monitor Panel
PC300, 300LC-7 Serial No. 40001 45000
PC350, 350LC-7 Serial No. 20001 25000
PC300/350(LC)-7
20-363
(7)
TROUBLESHOOTING
E304

20-363-1
(7)
PC300/350(LC)-7
TROUBLESHOOTING
E306
Service Code in Electrical System E306 (Abnormality in governor potentiometer)

User Code
Service Code
Failure Code
E306
DK54KZ
Failure
phenomenon
Abnormality in governor potentiometer

Failure content
Signal voltage from the governor potentiometer dropped below 0.4 V or exceeded 4.6 V.
Response from
controller
The controller exercises control by computing the motor position through voltage right before a failure
occurred.
Even if the failure cause disappears of itself, the governor potentiometer does not return to normalcy,
Phenomenon
occurring on
machine
Relative
information
Input from the governor potentiometer (voltage) can be confirmed in the monitor function.
(Code No. 031: Governor potentiometer voltage)
The engine cannot attain the specified rotation at high idling. (A bit lower)
The engine cannot attain the specified rotation at low idling (A bit higher)
The auto-decelerator or automatic warming-up function does not work.
There is hunting while the engine is running.
The engine stalls.
The engine does not stop.
Cause
1
Sensor power source

defective

If Service Code No. [E226] is displayed, troubleshoot the failure first.
2 defective
(Internal failure)
E10 (male)
Resistance value
Between
and
4.0 6.0 k
Between
and
0.25 5.0 k
Between
and
0.25 5.0 k
harness

harness
4
circuit)
harness
5

(female)
to J07 to E10
Resistance
value
Below 1

(female)
and E10
Resistance
value
Below 1

(female)
and E10
Resistance
value
Below 1
E10 (female)
and grounding
and
Resistance
value
Above 1 M
E10 (female)
and grounding
to J07 to

E10 (female)
and grounding
and
Voltage
Below 1 V
Voltage
Below 1 V
6
Governor pump
20-364
(7)
C01
Resistance value
Between
and
Power
supply
4.5 5.5 V
Between
and
Signal
0.5 4.5 V
PC300/350(LC)-7
TROUBLESHOOTING
E306
Electrical Circuit Diagram for Governor Motor in Governor Pump Controller
PC300/350(LC)-7
20-365
TROUBLESHOOTING
E308
Service Code in Electrical System E308 (Abnormality in fuel dial)

User Code
Service Code
Failure Code
E05
E308
DK10KZ
Failure
phenomenon
Abnormality in governor fuel dial

Failure content
Signal voltage from the from fuel dropped below 0.23 V or exceeded 4.77 V.
Response from
controller
The controller exercises control by computing the fuel dial position through voltage right before a failure
occurred.
If the failure cause disappears, the fuel dial returns to normalcy.
Phenomenon
occurring on
machine
Relative
information
Input from the fuel dial (voltage) can be confirmed in the monitor function.
(Code No. 030: Fuel dial voltage)
If the fuel dial had been set at FULL before a failure occurred, it does not change to PARTIAL.
If the fuel dial had been set at PARTIALLY before a failure occurred, it does not change to FULL.
There is hunting while the engine is running.
The engine cannot attain the specified rotation at high idling and lacks power.
Cause
Sensor power source
1
defective
harness

If Service Code No. [E226] is displayed, troubleshoot the failure first.
E06 (male)
Resistance value
Between
and
4.0 6.0 k
Between
and
0.25 5.0 k
Between
and
0.25 5.0 k
harness

harness
4
circuit)
harness
5

(female)
to J07 to E06
Resistance
value
Below 1

(female)
and E06
Resistance
value
Below 1

(female)
and E06
Resistance
value
Below 1
E06 (female)
and grounding
and
Resistance
value
Above 1 M
E06 (female)
and grounding
to J07 to

E06 (female)
and grounding
and
Voltage
Below 1 V
Voltage
Below 1 V
6
Governor pump
20-366
(7)
C01
Resistance value
Between
and
Power
supply
4.5 5.5 V
Between
and
Signal
0.5 4.5 V
PC300/350(LC)-7
E308
Electrical Circuit Diagram for Fuel Dial in Governor Pump Controller
PC300/350(LC)-7
20-367
E314
Service Code in Electrical System E314 (Disconnection of engine stop solenoid relay)
User Code
Service Code
Failure Code
E314
DY45KA
Failure
phenomenon
Disconnection of engine stop

Failure content
No current flows to the engine stop solenoid relay, when power is supplied to it.
Response from
controller
No response in particular (The solenoid does not function without current)

When the failure dissolves itself, the relay returns to the normalcy.
Phenomenon
occurring on
machine
The engine cannot be started.
Relative
information
This code detects only failures occurring on the primary engine stop solenoid relay (coil side). If the engine stop solenoid is suspected of a defect, check the power source, wiring harness or solenoid of the
secondary relay (contact side).
It can be checked in the monitoring function how the engine stop solenoid relay works (ON and OFF).
(Code 023: Controller output)
If there is nothing abnormal with the relay or wiring harness, the engine can be started again by moving
the emergency fuel solenoid driving switch to the EMERGENCY side.
+The solenoid detects disconnection with power ON. Be sure to make a test for checking after the repair
with power ON. (For the operation with power ON and OFF, refer to Diagnosis of Service Code [E201].
Cause
1 solenoid relay

+Turn the engine starting switch OFF for the preparations, and hold it in the OFF position
R22 (male)
Between
harness
harness
3
Governor pump
100 500 :
and
(female)
to J01 to R22
Wiring harness between R22 (female) to J08 to J04 and

grounding
Resistance
value
Below 1 :
Resistance
value
Below 1 :
+Turn the engine starting switch OFF for the preparations, and hold it in the ON position
to J01 to R22
(female) , or between wiring harness C03 (female)
and S25 (female)
and grounding.
Voltage
Below 1 V
C03
Between
20-368
Resistance value
and grounding
Resistance value
100 500 :
PC300/350(LC)-7
TROUBLESHOOTING
E314
Electrical Circuit Diagram for Engine Stop Solenoid and Relay in Monitor Panel
PC300, 300LC-7 Serial No. 40001 45000
PC350, 350LC-7 Serial No. 20001 25000
PC300/350(LC)-7
20-369
(7)
TROUBLESHOOTING
E314

20-369-1
(7)
PC300/350(LC)-7
TROUBLESHOOTING
E315
Service Code in Electrical System E315 (Short-circuiting in battery relay)

User Code
Service Code
Failure Code
E315
D110KB
Failure
phenomenon
Short-circuiting in battery relay

Abnormal current flew to the battery relay drive circuit, when power was supplied to the circuit.
Response from
controller
The controller turns OFF power to the battery drive circuit.

Even when the failure cause disappears, the relay does not return to normalcy, unless the engine starting switch is once turned OFF.
Phenomenon
occurring on
machine
Relative
information
It can be confirmed in the monitor function how the battery relay works (ON or OFF).
(Code No. 037: Controller output)
Failure content
Cause
Battery relay defective

(Internal failure)
Battery relay
Continuity & Resistance value
Between A21 (BR terminal) and A20 (E

terminal)
Continued
Between A21 (BR terminal) and grounding

harness
2
circuit)
Governor pump
20-370
(7)

Above 1 M
J01 to A21 (BR terminal) and grounding
to D01 to
Resistance
value
Above 1 M
C03
Between
and grounding
Voltage
ON OFF
20 30 V
(for 4 to 7 seconds)
PC300/350(LC)-7
TROUBLESHOOTING
E315
Electrical Circuit Diagram for Battery Relay in Governor Pump Controller
PC300/350(LC)-7
20-371
(7)
E316
Service Code in Electrical System E316 (Step-out in governor motor)

User Code
Service Code
Failure Code
E316
DY10K4
Failure
phenomenon
Step-out in governor motor

Failure content
There is a big difference between signals from the potentiometer and the set values in the controller.
Response from
controller
The controller repeats the same controlling motions (step-out).

Even when the failure cause disappears, the governor motor does not return to normalcy, unless the
Phenomenon
occurring on
machine
The engine rotation cannot be controlled.

There is hunting in the rotation.
Presumed cause and standard

value in normalcy
Cause
1 Fuel dial defective
If Service Code [E308] is displayed, troubleshoot that failure first.
2 Governor potentiometer defective
3 Governor motor defective (disconnection)
4 Governor motor defective (short-circuiting) If Service Code [E318] is displayed, troubleshoot that failure first.
5 Governor lever adjustment improper
Refer to the section of "Inspection and Adjustment - Special Function of Monitor Panel" in this manual.
6 Engine fuel control system defective
Refer to Engine Shop Manual.
7 Governor pump controller defective
As this is an internal failure, no troubleshooting can be carried out.

(If there is none of the failures listed above, the controller is judged
as defective)
20-372
PC300/350(LC)-7
E317
Service Code in Electrical System E317 (Disconnection in governor motor Phase A and B)
User Code
Service Code
Failure Code
E05
E317
DY10KA
Failure
phenomenon
Disconnection in governor motor Phase A and B

Failure content
No current flew to the governor motor, when power was supplied to the motor.
Response from
controller
None in particular.
If the failure cause disappears, the governor returns to normalcy.
Phenomenon
occurring on
machine
Relative
information
Operation of the governor motor (current) can be confirmed in the monitor function.
(Code No. 033: Governor motor Phase A current, Code No. 034: Governor motor Phase B current)
The engine rotation drops to low idling.

There is hunting in the rotation
The governor motor steps out.
Cause
Governor motor defec1 tive


E11 (male)
Resistance value
Between
and
2.5 7.5
Between
and
2.5 7.5
harness

(female)
and E11
Resistance
value
Below 1

(female)
and E11
Resistance
value
Below 1

(female)
and E11
Resistance
value
Below 1

(female)
and E11
Resistance
value
Below 1
3
Governor pump
20-374
C03 (female)
Resistance value
Between
and
2.5 7.5
Between
and
2.5 7.5
PC300/350(LC)-7
E317
PC300/350(LC)-7
20-375
E318

(Short-circuiting in governor motor Phase A and Phase B)
User Code
Service Code
Failure Code
E318
DY10KB
E05
Failure
phenomenon
Disconnection in governor motor Phase A and

Phase B (in governor pump controller system)
Failure content
Abnormal current flew to the governor motor, when power is supplied to the motor.
Response from
controller
None in particular
If the failure cause disappears, the governor motor returns to normalcy.
Phenomenon
occurring on
machine
Relative
information
Operation of the governor motor (current) can be confirmed in the monitor function.
(Code No. 033: Governor motor Phase A current, Code No. 034: Governor motor Phase B current)
The engine rotation cannot be controlled.

The engine rotation drops to low idling.
There is hunting in the rotation.
Cause

Governor motor defective

1
or grounding fault)
E11 (male)
Resistance value
Between
and
2.5 7.5
Between
and
2.5 7.5
Between
and grounding
Above 1 M
Between
and grounding
Above 1 M
harness

E11 (female)
and grounding
and
Resistance
value
Above 1 M

E11 (female)
and grounding
and
Resistance
value
Above 1 M

E11 (female)
and grounding
and
Resistance
value
Above 1 M

E11 (female)
and grounding
and
Resistance
value
Above 1 M
C03 (female)
Governor pump
20-376
Resistance value
Between
and
2.5 7.5
Between
and
2.5 7.5
Between
and grounding
Above 1 M
Between
and grounding
Above 1 M
Between
and grounding
Above 1 M
Between
and grounding
Above 1 M
PC300/350(LC)-7
E318
PC300/350(LC)-7
20-377
TROUBLESHOOTING
A000N1 / A000N2
Failure Code in Mechanical System A000N1 (Out-of-rate engine rotation at high idling)
User Code
Service Code
Failure Code
A000N1
Failure
phenomenon
Out-of-rate engine rotation at high idling

(in mechanical system)
Failure content
Engine rotation above 2,350 rpm was detected for more than 10 seconds, while the engine was running.
Response from
controller
None in particular
If the failure cause disappears of itself, the engine rotation returns to normalcy.
Phenomenon
occurring on
machine
There is a possibility that the engine is damaged, if is used continuously without adjustment.
Relative
information
(Code No. 010: Engine rotation)
Cause
Presumed
cause and
standard value
in normalcy
Check if there has been an internal or external factor that would cause
Failure in engine mechanthe engine to overrun at high idling, and troubleshoot the mechanical
ical system
system of the engine.
Governor pump
As this is an internal failure, troubleshooting cannot be conducted.

(Unless there is any visible trouble found in the machine, use of the controller may be continued as it is)
Failure Code in Mechanical System A000N2 (Out-of-rate engine rotation at low idling)
User Code
Service Code
Failure Code
A000N2
Failure
phenomenon
Out-of-rate engine rotation at low idling

Failure content
Engine rotation below 500 rpm was detected for more than 10 seconds, while the engine was running.
Response from
controller
None in particular
If the failure cause disappears of itself, the rotation returns to normalcy.
Phenomenon
occurring on
machine
There is a possibility that the engine is damaged, if it is used continuously without adjustment.
Relative
information
Cause
Presumed
cause and
standard value
in normalcy
20-378
(7)
Check if there has been an internal or external factor that would cause
Failure in engine mechanthe engine to overrun at high idling, and troubleshoot the mechanical
ical system
system of the engine.
Governor pump

(Unless there is any visible trouble found in the machine, use of the controller may be continued as it is)
PC300/350(LC)-7
TROUBLESHOOTING
AA10NX
Failure Code in Mechanical System AA10NX (Air cleaner clogging)

User Code
Service Code
Failure Code
(E104)
AA10NX
Failure
phenomenon
Air cleaner clogged

Failure content
While the engine was running, the signal circuit in the air cleaner clogging switch was opened (i.e. disconnected from grounding circuit).
Response from
monitor panel
None in particular
Phenomenon
occurring on
machine
There is a possibility that the engine is damaged, if it is used continuously without corrective action.
Relative
information
Service code (E104) is displayed in the 7-segment monitor panel.

This Failure Code is recorded, when the air cleaner clogging caution symbol is displayed in the monitor
panel while the engine is running.
Input from the air cleaner clogging switch (ON or OFF) can be confirmed in the monitor panel.
Cause
Air cleaner clogged
1 (when the system is in
normal condition)
2 switch defective

Check the air cleaner for clogging. If it is clogged, clean or replace it with new one.
A31 (male)
Between
harness
and
Air cleaner
Resistance value
When in normal condition
Below 1
When clogged
Above 1 M
troubleshooting.
(female)
and A31
Between wiring harness A31 (female)
and grounding
Resistance
value
Below 1
Resistance
value
Below 1
P02

Between
and grounding
Air cleaner
Voltage
Below 1 V
When clogged
20 30 V
Electrical Circuit for Air Cleaner Clogging Switch in Monitor Panel
PC300/350(LC)-7
20-379
(7)
TROUBLESHOOTING
AB00KE
Failure Code in Mechanical System AB00KE (Abnormally lowered charging voltage)

User Code
Service Code
Failure Code
AB00KE
Failure
phenomenon
Charging voltage abnormally lowered

Failure content
Generation signal from the alternator is not inputted, while the engine is running.
Response from
monitor panel
None in particular
Phenomenon
occurring on
machine
There is a possibility that the battery may not be charged, if charging is continued without corrective
action.
Relative
information
This Failure Code is recorded, if the charging caution symbol is displayed in the monitor panel, while the
engine is running.
Input from the alternator (voltage) can be confirmed in the monitor function.
(Code No. 043: Charging voltage)
Cause
Alternator defective
(short generating output)
harness
harness
3
circuit)

troubleshooting.
E12 (male)
Engine rotation
Voltage
Between terminal R and

grounding
Above medium speed
27.5 29.5 V
terminal R.
Resistance
value
Below 1
to J02 to alternator
terminal R, or between P02 (female)
and D01 (female)
, or between P02 (female)
to M02 (female)
and
grounding
Resistance
value
Above 1 M
P02
Between
20-380
(7)
to J02 to alternator
and grounding
Engine rotation
Voltage
Above medium speed
27.5 29.5 V
PC300/350(LC)-7
TROUBLESHOOTING
AB00KE
Electrical Circuit Diagram for Engine Start, Stop and Charging in Monitor Panel
PC300, 300LC-7 Serial No. 40001 45000
PC350, 350LC-7 Serial No. 20001 25000
PC300/350(LC)-7
20-381
(7)
TROUBLESHOOTING
AB00KE

20-381-1
(7)
PC300/350(LC)-7
TROUBLESHOOTING
B@BAZG
Failure Code in Mechanical System B@BAZG (Abnormally lowered engine oil pressure)
User Code
Service Code
Failure Code
B@BAZG
Failure
phenomenon
Engine oil pressure abnormally lowered

Failure content
The signal circuit in the engine oil pressure switch was closed (i.e. connected with grounding), while the
engine was running.
Response from
monitor panel
None in particular
Phenomenon
occurring on
machine
There is a possibility that the engine may seize, if the engine is kept running without corrective action.
Relative
information
This Failure Code is recorded, if the engine oil pressure caution symbol is displayed in the monitor panel,
while the engine is running.
Input from the engine oil pressure switch (ON or OFF) can be confirmed in the monitor function.
Cause
Engine oil pressure low1 ered (the system in normal condition)
Engine oil pressure
2 switch defective

harness
3
circuit)

Check the failure cause and damage to the engine, and then make repairs.
E02 (on switch side)
Engine oil pressure
Resistance value
Between terminal and

grounding
Above 1 M
When lowered
Below 1
Between wiring harness between P02 (female) (7) and E02
(terminal) and grounding
Resistance
value
Above 1 M
P02

Between
and grounding
Engine oil pressure
Voltage
20 30 V
When lowered
Below 1 V
Electrical Circuit Diagram for Engine Oil Pressure Switch in Monitor Panel
20-382
(7)
PC300/350(LC)-7
TROUBLESHOOTING
B@BAZK
Failure Code in Mechanical System B@BAZK (Abnormally lowered engine oil level)
User Code
Service Code
Failure Code
B@BAZK
Failure
phenomenon
Engine oil level abnormally lowered

Failure content
The signal circuit in the engine oil level switch was opened (i.e. disconnected from grounding), when the
engine is stopped (with the starting switch in the ON position).
Response from
monitor panel
None in particular
Phenomenon
occurring on
machine
There is a possibility that the engine seizes if it is kept running without a corrective action.
Relative
information
This Failure Code is recorded if the engine oil level caution symbol is displayed, when the engine is
stopped (with the starting key in the ON position).
Input from the engine oil level switch (ON or OFF) can be confirmed in the monitor function. (Code No.
046: Monitor input 2)
Cause
Engine oil level lowered

Check the engine oil level, and refill oil.
1 (System in normal condi(If the phenomenon occurs frequently, check the cause)
tion)
Engine oil level switch
2 defective
P05 (male)
Between
harness
and grounding
Engine oil level
Resistance value
Below 1
When lowered
Above 1 M
and P05 (female)
Resistance
value
Below 1
P02

Between
and grounding
Engine oil pressure
Voltage
Below 1 V
When lowered
20 30 V
Electrical Circuit Diagram for Engine Oil Level Switch in Monitor Panel
PC300/350(LC)-7
20-383
(7)
TROUBLESHOOTING
B@BCNS
Failure Code in Mechanical System B@BCNS (Engine cooling water overheating)

User Code
Service Code
Failure Code
(E108)
B@BCNS
Failure
phenomenon
Engine cooling water overheated

Failure content
The engine cooling water sensor inputted a signal of 102C, while the engine was running.
Response from
monitor panel
Response from controller
Phenomenon
occurring on
machine
There is a possibility that the engine seizes, if it is kept running without a corrective action.
Relative
information
Service code (E108) is displayed in the 7-segment monitor panel.

This Failure Code is recorded, if the engine cooling water temperature gauge is displayed in the red
range, when the engine is running.
Input from the engine cooling water temperature sensor (temperature) can be confirmed in the monitor
function. (Code No. 041: Engine cooling water temperature)
Cause
Engine Overheating
1 (system in normal condition)
Engine cooling water

temperature sensor
2
defective

Check the engine for the cause and damage, and repair it.
P07 (male)
Between
Between

harness
3
circuit)
and
and grounding
Engine cooling water temperature
Resistance value
90 3.5k
10 100 C
Above 1 M
P07 (female)
and grounding
and
Resistance
value
Above 1 M
P02 (female)
Between
Between
and
and grounding

10 100 C
Resistance value
90 3.5k
Above 1 M
Electrical Circuit Diagram for Engine Cooling Water Temperature Sensor in Monitor Panel
20-384
(7)
PC300/350(LC)-7
TROUBLESHOOTING
B@BCZK
Failure Code in Mechanical System B@BCZK (Abnormally lowered radiator water level)
(Multi-monitor only)
User Code
Service Code
Failure Code
B@BCZK
Failure
phenomenon
Radiator water level abnormally lowered

Failure content
The signal circuit in the radiator water level switch was opened (i.e. disconnected from grounding).
Response from
monitor panel
None in particular
Phenomenon
occurring on
machine
Relative
information
This Failure Code is recorded, if the radiator water level caution symbol is displayed in the monitor panel,
when the engine is running.
Input from the radiator water level switch (ON or OFF) can be confirmed in the monitor function.
Cause
Radiator water level low1 ered (system in normal
condition)
2 switch defective

Check the water level and refill cooling water.
(If this phenomenon occurs frequently, check the cause)
A33 (male)
Between
harness
and
Engine cooling water level
Resistance value
Below 1
When lowered
Above 1 M
and A33 (female)
Wiring harness between A33 (female)
and grounding
Resistance
value
Below 1
Resistance
value
Below 1
P02

Between
and grounding
Resistance value
Below 1 V
When lowered
20 30 V
Electrical Circuit Diagram for Radiator Water Level Switch in Monitor Panel
PC300/350(LC)-7
20-385
(7)
TROUBLESHOOTING
B@HANS
Failure Code in Mechanical System B@HANS (Hydraulic oil overheating)

User Code
Service Code
Failure Code
B@HANS
Failure
phenomenon
Hydraulic oil overheated

Failure content
The hydraulic oil temperature sensor inputted a signal of 102C, while the engine was running.
Response from
monitor panel
None in particular
Phenomenon
occurring on
machine
Relative
information
This Failure Code is recorded, if the hydraulic oil temperature gauge is displayed in the red range, when
the engine is running.
Input from the hydraulic oil temperature sensor (temperature) can be confirmed in the monitor function.
(Code No. 044: hydraulic oil temperature)
Cause
Hydraulic oil overheat1 ing (system in normal
condition)
Hydraulic oil temperature

2 sensor defective

Check the cause and damage to the hydraulic equipment, and repair it.
A61 (male)
Between
Between

harness
3
circuit)
and
and grounding
Hydraulic oil temperature
Resistance value
90 3.5k
10 100 C
Above 1 M
A61 (female)
and grounding
and
Resistance
value
Above 1 M
P02 (female)
Between
Between
and
and grounding

10 100 C
Resistance value
90 3.5k
Above 1 M
Electrical Circuit Diagram for Hydraulic Oil Temperature Sensor in Monitor Panel
20-386
(7)
PC300/350(LC)-7
TROUBLESHOOTING OF
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM (E-MODE)

E-1 Engine does not start........................................................................................................................ 20-503
E-2 Engine stops while in operation ........................................................................................................ 20-508
E-3 Engine speed is irregular, or there is hunting ................................................................................... 20-510
E-4 Engine does not stop ........................................................................................................................ 20-512
E-5 Auto-decelerator does not work ........................................................................................................ 20-514
E-6 Auto engine warm-up device does not work ..................................................................................... 20-515
E-7 Preheater does not work................................................................................................................... 20-516
E-8 All work equipment, swing and travel do not move........................................................................... 20-518
E-9 One-touch Power Max. Switch does not work .................................................................................. 20-520
E-10 No display in monitor panel at all ................................................................................................... 20-521-1
E-11 Part of display on monitor panel is missing ...................................................................................... 20-522
E-12 Monitor panel displays contents irrelevant to the model ................................................................... 20-522
E-13 Fuel level monitor red lamp lights up while engine is running .......................................................... 20-523
E-14 Engine cooling water temperature gauge does not indicate correctly .............................................. 20-524
E-15 Hydraulic oil temperature gauge does not display correctly ............................................................. 20-525
E-16 Fuel gauge does not display correctly .............................................................................................. 20-526
E-17 Swing lock monitor does not display correctly .................................................................................. 20-527
E-18 When the monitor switch is operated, no display appears ............................................................... 20-528
E-19 Windshield wiper does not work ....................................................................................................... 20-530
E-20 Alarming buzzer cannot be cancelled ............................................................................................... 20-532
E-21 "Boom RAISE" is not correctly displayed in monitor function ........................................................... 20-533
E-22 "Boom LOWER" is not correctly displayed in monitor function ......................................................... 20-534
E-23 "Arm DIGGING" is not correctly displayed in monitor function ......................................................... 20-535
E-24 "Arm DUMPING" is not correctly displayed in monitor function ........................................................ 20-536
E-25 "Bucket DIGGING" is not correctly displayed in monitor function ..................................................... 20-537
E-26 "Bucket DUMPING" is not correctly displayed in monitor function.................................................... 20-538
E-27 "SWING" is not correctly displayed in monitor function .................................................................... 20-540
E-28 "TRAVEL" is not correctly displayed in monitor function................................................................... 20-542
E-29 "Travel Differential Pressure" is not correctly displayed in monitor function ..................................... 20-544
E-30 "Service" is not correctly displayed in monitor function..................................................................... 20-546
E-31 Air Conditioner does not work........................................................................................................... 20-548
E-32 Travel alarm does not sound ............................................................................................................ 20-561
PC300/350(LC)-7
20-501
(7)

The following information are edited and contained in the "Information Contained in Troubleshooting Table".
You are required to proceed with troubleshooting after fully grasping the contents.
Failure
information
Phenomena occurring on machine
Relative
information
Information on occurred failures and troubleshooting

Cause
<Contents>
The standard values in normalcy by which to judge "good" or "no good" about presumed causes.
References for making judgement of "good" or "no good"
Cause for presumed

failure
(The attached No. for
filing and reference
purpose only. It does not
stand for any priority)
<Phenomena of wiring harness fault>

Failure due to disconnection
Defective contact with connector or disconnection of wiring harness has occurred.
Grounding fault
A wiring harness that is not originally connected with a grounding circuit is in contact
with it.
Failure due to short-circuiting
A wiring harness that is not originally connected with a power source circuit (24 V) is
in contact with it.
<Points to remember in troubleshooting>
1) Connector denotation method and handling of T-adapters
Insert or connect T-adapters in the following manner, unless specifically otherwise
instructed.
If there is no indication of (male) or (female) in the connector No., pull off a connector and insert a T-adapter into both sides of male and female.
If there is an indication of (male9 and (female) in the connection No., pull off a connector and insert a T-adapter into only one side of (male) or (female).
2) Description sequence of pin No. and handling of circuit tester leads
Connect the positive lead (+) and negative lead () for troubleshooting in the following manner unless specifically otherwise instructed.
Connect the positive lead (+) to a pin No. marked at the front or wiring harness.
Connect the negative lead () to a pin No. marked at the rear or wiring harness.
Relative Electrical Circuit Diagram
This is part of the electrical circuit diagram which shows the portion where the failure occurred.
Connector No.: Indicates (Type - numbers of a pin) (color)
Arrow: Roughly indicates the location in the machine where it is installed.
20-502
PC300/350(LC)-7
E-1
E-1 Engine does not start

Failure
information (1)
The engine does not start (the engine does not rotate).
Relative
information
The following two engine start locking mechanisms are provided in the engine starting circuit.
1) Engine start locking by means of password in the monitor panel ( )
2) Engine start locking by means of safety lock lever
Cause
1
Shortage in battery
capacity
Fuse Nos. 3 and 18

and Fusible Link A35
fault
Engine starting
switch fault
(Internal
disconnection)
Safety lock switch

fault
(Internal
short-circuiting)
Engine starting
motor cut relay, R11
and R13 defective
(Internal
disconnection or
short-circuiting)
Engine starting
motor fault
(Internal disconnection or damage)

Battery voltage
Battery electrolyte specific gravity
Above 24 V
Above 1.26
When a fuse or fusible link is blown, there is a big possibility that grounding fault occurred in
the circuit.
If a monitor lamp does not light up in the monitor panel, check the power source circuit
between the battery and the specific fuse.
H15 (male)
Between
Position
Resistance value
OFF
Above 1 M
Start
Below 1
and
S14 (female)
Between
Lock lever
and
Release
Below 1
LOCK
Above 1 M
R11 (female) & R13 (male)
and
100 500
Between
and
Above 1 M
Between
and
Below 1
Turn the engine starting switch OFF for the preparations, and keep the engine running during the troubleshooting. (If all of the power source, grounding (GND), generation signal and
engine start input are normal and yet the engine start output is not normal, the engine starting motor relay is defective)
Engine starting motor
Engine start input: C terminal and grounding

Alternator fault
(Internal
short-circuit)
PC300/350(LC)-7
Resistance value
Between
Power source: B terminal and grounding
Resistance value
Engine startVoltage
ing switch
Start
20 30 V
20 30 V
Turn the engine starting switch OFF for the preparations, and hold it in the ON position or
running during the troubleshooting.
Alternator
Voltage
R terminal and grounding
Below 1 V
20-503
Cause
E-1

Wiring harness between FB1-18 outlet and H15 (female)
Resistance
value
Below 1 :
Wiring harness from H15 (female)
Resistance
value
Below 1 :
Resistance
value
Below 1 :
Resistance
value
Below 1 :
to J01 to R11 (female)
Disconnection of wirWiring harness between R11 (female)

and M02 (female)
ing harness
(Disconnection or
defective contact
Wiring harness between FB1-3 and S14 (female)
with connector)
Wiring harness between S14 (female)
and R11 (female)
Resistance
value
Below 1 :
Wiring harness between R11 (female)
and R13 (female)
Resistance
value
Below 1 :
Resistance
value
Below 1 :
Wiring harness from R13 (female)
to J04 to grounding
Grounding fault of
wiring harness
(Contact with
grounding circuit)
Between wiring harness from battery relay B terminal (A23)

to A35 to FB1-18 and grounding
Resistance
value
Above 1 M:
Between wiring harness between FB1-18 outlet and H15

(female)
and grounding
Resistance
value
Above 1 M:
Between wiring harness from H15 (female)

(female)
and grounding
Resistance
value
Above 1 M:
Resistance
value
Above 1 M:
Between wiring harness between FB1-3 and S14 (female)

and grounding
Resistance
value
Above 1 M:
Between wiring harness between S14 (female)

(female)
and grounding
Resistance
value
Above 1 M:
Resistance
value
Above 1 M:
Between wiring harness between R11 (female)

(female)
and grounding
Between wiring harness from R13 (female)

(female)
and grounding
Short-circuiting of
wiring harness
10
(Contact with 24 V
circuit)
20-504
to J01 to R11
and M02
and R11
to J05 to P02
+Turn the engine starting switch OFF for the preparations, and hold it in the ON position during the troubleshooting.
to J02 to M02 (female)
, or wiring harness between P02 (female)
and D01
(female) , or between wiring harness between P02
(female)
and alternator R terminal and grounding
Voltage
Below 1 V
PC300/350(LC)-7
TROUBLESHOOTING
E-1
Electrical Circuit Diagram for Engine Start and Battery Charging

PC300, 300LC-7 Serial No. 40001 45000
PC350, 350LC-7 Serial No. 20001 25000
PC300/350(LC)-7
20-505
(7)
TROUBLESHOOTING
E-1

20-505-1
(7)
PC300/350(LC)-7
E-1
Failure
information (2)
The engine cannot be started. (The engine can be rotated)
Relative
information
Cause

solenoid

E10 (male)
Resistance value
Between
and
0.6 1.0 :
Between
and
37 46 :

solenoid relay
Check by replacing it with another relay
Fault of fusible link

A36
When the fusible link is blown, there is a big possibility that grounding fault has occurred in
the circuit.
Fault of assembledtype diode

D02 (male)
Between
Resistance value
Above 1 M:
and
Wiring harness disconnected

(Disconnection or
defective contact of
connector)
Wiring harness from battery relay M terminal (A22) to A36 to

R22 (female)
Resistance
value
Below 1 :
Wiring harness between R22 (female)
Resistance
value
Below 1 :
Wiring harness from the engine starting switch ACC terminal

to J07 to J03 to E10 (female)
Resistance
value
Below 1 :
Wiring harness between E10 (female)
Resistance
value
Below 1 :
and E10 (female)
and grounding
Grounding fault of
wiring harness
(Contact with GND
circuit)
Fault of governor
pump controller
20-506
Wiring harness from battery relay M terminal (A22) to A36 to

R22 (female) , or between wiring harness from battery
relay M terminal (A22) to A34 to FB1 inlet and grounding
Resistance
value
Above 1 M:

(female)
and grounding
Resistance
value
Above 1 M:
Resistance
value
Above 1 M:
and E10
Wiring harness from engine starting switch ACC terminal to

J07 to J03 to E10 (female) , or wiring harness between
engine starting switch ACC terminal and C01 (female) , or
wiring harness between the engine starting switch ACC terminal and D02 (female) , or wiring harness between S25
(female)
and grounding
If the engine can be started with the engine starting switch ON, after the emergency fuel
solenoid driving switch is once moved to the EMERGENCY side, then the governor pump
controller is defective.
PC300/350(LC)-7
TROUBLESHOOTING
E-1

PC300, 300LC-7 Serial No. 40001 45000
PC350, 350LC-7 Serial No. 20001 25000
PC300/350(LC)-7
20-507
(7)
TROUBLESHOOTING
E-1

20-507-1
(7)
PC300/350(LC)-7
TROUBLESHOOTING
E-2
E-2 Engine stops while in operation

Failure
information
The engine suddenly stopped while in operation.
Relative
information
Input from the governor potentiometer (voltage) can be confirmed in the monitor function.
(Code No. 031: governor potentiometer voltage)
Cause
1
Governor potentiometer fault

(Internal failure)
E06 (male)
Resistance value
Between
and
4.0 6.0 k
Between
and
0.25 5.0 k
Between
and
0.25 5.0 k
Disconnection of wir- Turn the engine starting switch OFF for the preparations, and hold it in the OFF position
ing harness
(Disconnection or
and E10 (female)
Resistance
defective contact
Below 1
value
with connector)
Grounding fault of
wiring harness
(Contact with
grounding circuit)
(female)
and grounding
and E10
Resistance
value
Above 1 M
4
Governor pump
C01
Voltage
Between
and
4.5 5.5 V
Between
and
0.5 4.5 V
Electrical Circuit Diagram for Fuel Dial
20-508
(7)
PC300/350(LC)-7
E-3
E-3 Engine speed is irregular, or there is hunting

Failure
information
Engine speed is irregular at low idling.

There is hunting.
Engine speed is lower than specified at high idling.
Relative
information
Engine rotation can be confirmed in the monitor function.

Cause

If the monitor display is not normal, proceed to Service Code [E217].
Model code signal

fault
(Internal failure)
Monitoring Code
Item
Normal display
002
003
Controller model code
200
Governor lever
improperly adjusted
Refer to the section "Special Function of Monitor Panel" in this manual.
Governor motor
improperly working
If the governor motor lever moves smoothly in the following operations, it is judged as normal.
The fuel dial is operated between low idling and high idling.
The engine is stopped with the fuel dial.
Engine fuel control

system defective
Refer to the Engine Shop Manual.
ing harness
(Disconnection or
to J07 to H15 (female)
Resistance
defective contact
Below 1
value
with connector)
Grounding fault of
wiring harness
(Contact with
grounding circuit)
Governor pump
20-510
H15 (female)
and grounding
to J17 and
Resistance
value
Above 1 M

(If there is none of the causes from Item 1 to 6 above, the controller is judged as defective)
PC300/350(LC)-7
TROUBLESHOOTING
E-3

PC300, 300LC-7 Serial No. 40001 45000
PC350, 350LC-7 Serial No. 20001 25000
PC300/350(LC)-7
20-511
(7)
E-4
E-4 Engine does not stop

Failure
information
Relative
information
Cause


solenoid
(Internal fault)
E10 (male)
Resistance value
Between
and
0.6 1.0
Between
and
37 46
If the plunger rod can be moved smoothly by hand, then the engine stop solenoid is normal.
2

solenoid relay
Fault of emergency
fuel solenoid driving
switch
Check by replacing it with another relay.

S25 (male)
Between
and
Switch
Resistance value
In normalcy
Above 1 M
In emergency
Below 1
(female)
and grounding
and E10
Wiring harness
short-circuited (Con- Wiring harness from the engine starting switch ACC terminal
tact with 24 V circuit) to J07 to J03 to E10 (female) , or wiring harness between
the engine starting switch ACC terminal and C01 (female) ,
or wiring harness between the engine starting switch ACC
terminal and D02 (female) , or wiring harness between S25
(female)
and grounding
20-512
Voltage
Below 1 V
Voltage
Below 1 V
PC300/350(LC)-7
TROUBLESHOOTING
E-4
Electrical Circuit Diagram for Engine Stop

PC300, 300LC-7 Serial No. 40001 45000
PC350, 350LC-7 Serial No. 20001 25000
PC300/350(LC)-7
20-513
(7)
TROUBLESHOOTING
E-4
Electrical Circuit Diagram for Engine Stop

20-513-1
(7)
PC300/350(LC)-7
TROUBLESHOOTING
E-5
E-5 Auto-decelerator does not work

Failure
information
The auto-decelerator does not work.
Relative
information
Rotation of the auto-decelerator is set at 1,400 rpm. If the fuel dial is not set adjusting to this level, the
auto-decelerator does not work.
Confirm the display on the monitor panel, when the engine is running.
Cause
Boom RAISE signal

fault

Monitoring code
Item
Normal display
019
Boom RAISE
Lever operation: ON
Lever NEUTRAL: OFF
If the display on the monitor panel is not normal, proceed to No. E-21 Troubleshooting.
Boom LOWER signal fault
Monitoring code
Item
Normal display
019
Boom LOWER
Lever operation: ON
Lever NEUTRAL: OFF
Arm DIGGING signal

fault
Monitoring code
Item
Normal display
019
Arm DIGGING
Lever operation: ON
Lever NEUTRAL: OFF
Arm DUMPING
signal fault
Monitoring code
Item
Normal display
019
Arm DUMPING
Lever operation: ON
Lever NEUTRAL: OFF
Bucket DIGGING
signal fault
Monitoring code
Item
Normal display
021
Bucket DIGGING
Lever operation: ON
Lever NEUTRAL: OFF
Bucket DUMPING
signal fault
Monitoring code
Item
Normal display
021
Bucket DUMPING
Lever operation: ON
Lever NEUTRAL: OFF
Swing signal fault
Monitoring code
Item
Normal display
019
Swing
Lever operation: ON
Lever NEUTRAL: OFF
Travel signal fault
Monitoring code
Item
Normal display
019
Travel
Lever operation: ON
Lever NEUTRAL: OFF
Attachment signal
fault
Monitoring code
Item
Normal display
021
Service
Lever operation: ON
Lever NEUTRAL: OFF
Governor pump
10
20-514
(7)
As this is an internal failure, troubleshooting cannot be conducted. (If there is none of the
causes listed in Item 1 through 9, the controller is judged as defective.
PC300/350(LC)-7
TROUBLESHOOTING
E-6
E-6 Auto engine warm-up device does not work

The auto engine warm-up device does not work.
Relative
information
The auto engine warm-up device is activated, when the engine cooling water temperature is below 30C,
and raise the engine rotation up to 1,200 rpm.
The auto engine warm-up device is released by keeping the fuel dial opening at above 70% for more
than 3 seconds, when the engine starting switch is in the ON position or after the engine is started.

value in normalcy
Failure
information
Cause

temperature signal
fault
Governor pump
PC300/350(LC)-7

If the display on the monitor panel is not normal, proceed to No. E-14
Troubleshooting.
Monitoring code
041
Item
Normal display
Engine cooling water temperature
Compare with the actual

engine cooling water temperature.

(If the fault mentioned in the above item is not found, the Governor pump controller is
judged as defective)
20-515
(7)
E-7
E-7 Preheater does not work

Failure
information (1)
Even if the preheater switch is turned to the PREHEAT position, the preheating monitor lamp does not
light up.
Relative
information
Input of the preheating signal (ON or OFF) can be confirmed in the monitor function.

value in normalcy
Cause
Engine starting
switch fault
If preheating does not occur (the heater is not warmed up), refer to Failure Phenomenon (2) below.
Disconnection of wir- Turn the engine starting switch OFF for the preparations, and hold it in the OFF position during the troubleshooting.
ing harness
(Disconnection or
Resistance
defective contact
Below 1
and J02
value
with connector)
Turn the engine starting switch OFF for the preparations.
P02
Monitor panel fault

Between
Voltage
OFF
Below 1 V
HEAT
20 30 V
and grounding
Failure
information (2)
Even if the preheater switch is turned to the PREHEAT position, the preheater does not become warm.
Relative
information
In low cooling water temperature (lower than 30C), the governor pump controller drives the heater
relay for 100 seconds after the engine is started and automatically warms up the engine.
Cause

value in normalcy
20-516
Engine starting
switch fault
Heater relay fault

Electrical intake air

heater

Turn the engine starting switch OFF for the preparations.
H15 (male)
Between
Resistance value
OFF
Above 1 M
HEAT
Below 1
and
Turn the engine starting switch OFF for the preparations, and hold it in the OFF position during the troubleshooting.
Heater relay
Between coil terminal and grounding
Continued
Between contact terminals
Above 1 M
Turn the engine starting switch OFF for the preparations, and hold it in the OFF position during the troubleshooting.
Between heater terminals
Normal if continuity is established.
Turn the engine starting switch OFF for the preparations, and hold it in the OFF posiDisconnection of wirtion during the troubleshooting.
ing harness
Resistance
Wiring harness from H15 (female)
to J02 to heater
(Disconnection or
Below 1
value
relay terminal
defective contact
Wiring harness between battery relay M terminal (A22)
Resistance
with connector)
Below 1
and heater relay terminal
value
PC300/350(LC)-7
E-7
Electrical Circuit Diagram for Engine Preheater
PC300/350(LC)-7
20-517
TROUBLESHOOTING
E-8
E-8 All work equipment, swing and travel do not move

Failure
information
All the work equipment, swing and travel do not move.
Relative
information
Cause
1
Fuse No. 3 fault
Safety switch lock

defective
PPC lock solenoid

fault
(Internal disconnection or short-circuiting)
Assembled-type
diode D01 fault

If the fuse is blown, there is a big possibility that grounding fault occurred in the circuit.
during the troubleshooting. (See Cause 6)
S14 (female)
Between
Safety control lever
Resistance value
Lock
Above 1 M
Release
Below 1
and
V01 (male)
Between
Between
20 60
and
Above 1 M
and grounding
D01 (male)
Between
Resistance value
Above 1 M
and
Disconnection of wirWiring harness between FB1-3 outlet and S14 (male)

ing harness
(Disconnection or
defective contact
Wiring harness from S14 (male)
to J02 to V01 (female)
with connector)
Grounding fault of
wiring harness
(Contact with
grounding (GND)
circuit)
20-518
(7)
Resistance value
and grounding
Resistance
value
Below 1
Resistance
value
Below 1
Resistance
value
Below 1
Between wiring harness between FB1-3 outlet and S14
(male)
and grounding
Resistance
value
Above 1 M
Wiring harness from S14 (male)

to J02 to V01 (female) ,
or between wiring harness between S14 (male)
and D01
(female)
and grounding
Resistance
value
Above 1 M
PC300/350(LC)-7
TROUBLESHOOTING
E-8
Electrical Circuit Diagram for PPC Lock Solenoid
PC300/350(LC)-7
20-519
TROUBLESHOOTING
E-9
E-9 One-touch Power Max. Switch does not work

Failure
information
Relative
information
If the one-touch power max. switch is depressed, while the engine is running and the work equipment
is operated in either A mode or E mode, the symbol mark is displayed in the monitor panel.
Input from the one-touch power max. switch (left knob switch) can be confirmed in the monitor function.
(Code No. 022: Switch input 1)
Cause
1
Fuse No. 9 fault
One-touch power
max. switch fault

during the troubleshooting. (See Cause 4)
M23 (male)
Between
Resistance value
Release
Above 1 M
Depress
Below 1
and
Disconnection of wirduring the troubleshooting.
ing harness
Resistance
(Disconnection or
Above 1 M
Wiring harness between FB1-9 outlet and M23 (female)
value
defective contact
Resistance
with connector)
Above 1 M
Wiring harness between M23 (female)
and C01 (female)
value
Grounding fault of
wiring harness
(Contact with
grounding (GND)
circuit)
Between wiring harness between FB1-9 outlet and M23
(female)
and grounding, or related circuits
Resistance
value
Above 1 M
Between wiring harness between M23 (female)

(female)
and grounding
Resistance
value
Above 1 M
and C01
5
Governor pump
C01
Between
Voltage
Release
Below 1 V
Depress
20 30 V
and grounding
Electric Circuit Diagram for One-Touch Power Max. Switch
20-520
(7)
PC300/350(LC)-7
TROUBLESHOOTING
E-10
E-10 No display in monitor panel at all

Failure
information
When the engine starting switch is turned ON, there appears no display at all in the monitor panel.
Relative
information
Cause
1
Fuse No. 12 fault
Disconnection of wirduring the troubleshooting. (See Cause 3)
ing harness
Resistance
Below 1
(Disconnection or
to J07 to FB1-12
value
defect contact with
Resistance
connector)
Below 1
and grounding
value
Grounding fault of
wiring harness
(Contact with
grounding (GND)
circuit)
FB1-12 outlet and grounding
to J07 to
Resistance
value
Above 1 M
4
Monitor panel
defective
20-521-1
(7)
P01
Voltage and resistance value
Between
and grounding
Voltage: 20 30 V
Between
and grounding
Resistance value: Below 1
PC300/350(LC)-7
TROUBLESHOOTING
E-10
Electrical Circuit Diagram for Power Source in Monitor Panel

PC300, 300LC-7 Serial No. 40001 45000
PC350, 350LC-7 Serial No. 20001 25000

PC300/350(LC)-7
20-521-2
(7)
E-11, E-12
E-11 Part of display on monitor panel is missing

Part of the display in the monitor panel is missing.
Relative
information
Presumed cause and

standard value in normalcy
Failure
information
Cause
Monitor panel LCD

fault
If all the LCD in the monitor panel light up (i.e. the screen becomes totally white) by the
following switching operation, then the monitor panel is normal.
Switching operation: [ ] + [ A ] (simultaneous switching operation)
Monitor panel
defective
As this is an internal failure, troubleshooting cannot be conducted. (If there is no problem with the above switching operation, the controller is judged as defective)
E-12 Monitor panel displays contents irrelevant to the model

The monitor panels displays contents that have nothing to do with the model on which it is installed.
Relative
information
Presumed cause and

standard value in normalcy
Failure
information
Cause

If the display on the monitor panel is normal, proceed to Service Code [E217].
20-522
Model code signal

fault
(Internal failure)
Monitor panel
defective
Monitoring code
Item
Normal display
002
003
Controller model code
300
As this is an internal failure, troubleshooting cannot be conducted. (If there is no problem with the above switching operation, the monitor panel is judged as defective)
PC300/350(LC)-7
E-13
E-13 Fuel level monitor red lamp lights up while engine is running
Failure
information
The fuel level monitor red lamp lighted up while the engine was running.
Relative
information
If the fuel gauge shows in a red range on the monitor panel, the fuel level monitor lamp lights up red.
(5) Input signal from the fuel level sensor (voltage) can be confirmed in the monitor function.
(Code No. 042: Fuel level sensor)
Cause
1
Fuel level lowered

(system in normal
condition)
Fuel level sensor

fault
(Internal
disconnection)
Grounding fault of
wiring harness
(Contact with
grounding (GND)
circuit)

Refill fuel.
A60 (male)
Between
and grounding
Fuel level
Resistance value
FULL (Upper limit)
Approx. 12
EMPTY (Lower limit)
85 110
and A60 (female)
Resistance
value
Below 1
4
Monitor panel
defective
P02 (female)
Between
and grounding
Fuel level
Resistance value
FULL (Upper limit)
Approx. 12
EMPTY (Lower limit)
85 110
Electrical Circuit Diagram for Fuel Level Sensor
PC300/350(LC)-7
20-523
E-14
E-14 Engine cooling water temperature gauge does not indicate correctly
Failure
information
The engine cooling water rises normally, but the display does not exceed the white range (C).
The engine cooling water temperature remains stable, but the display rises to the red range (H).
Relative
information
Input from the engine cooling water temperature sensor can be confirmed in the monitor function.
(Code No. 041: Engine cooling water temperature)
Cause

temperature sensor
fault

temperature
P07
Between
Between
and
10 100 C
and grounding
Resistance value
90 3.5 k
Above 1 M
ing harness
Resistance
(Disconnection or
Below 1
and P07 (female)
value
defective contact
Resistance
with connector)
Below 1
and P07 (female)
value
Grounding fault of
wiring harness
(Contact with
grounding (GND)
circuit)
Short-circuiting of
wiring harness
(Contact with 24 V
circuit)
(female)
and grounding
and P07
Resistance
value
Above 1 M
(female)
and grounding
and P07
Voltage
Below 1 V
5
Monitor panel
defective

temperature
P02
Between
Between
and
10 100 C
and grounding
Resistance value
90 3.5 k
Above 1 M
Electrical Circuit Diagram for Engine Cooling Water Temperature Sensor
20-524
PC300/350(LC)-7
E-15
E-15 Hydraulic oil temperature gauge does not display correctly

Failure
information
Hydraulic oil temperature rises normally, but the display does not exceed the white range (C).
Hydraulic oil temperature remains stable, but the display rises up the red range (H).
Relative
information
Input from the hydraulic oil temperature sensor can be confirmed in the monitor function.
(Code No. 044: Hydraulic oil temperature)
Cause
Hydraulic oil temperature sensor fault


temperature
A61
Between
Between
and
10 100 C
and grounding
Resistance value
90 3.5 k
Above 1 M
ing harness
Resistance
(Disconnection or
Below 1
and A61 (female)
value
defective contact
Resistance
with connector)
Below 1
and A61 (female)
value
Grounding fault of
wiring harness
(Contact with
grounding (GND)
circuit)
Short-circuiting of
wiring harness
(Contact with 24 V
circuit)
(female)
and grounding
and A61
Resistance
value
Above 1 M
(female)
and grounding
and A61
Voltage
Below 1 V
5
Monitor panel
defective

temperature
P02
Between
Between
and
10 100 C
and grounding
Resistance value
90 3.5 k
Above 1 M
Electrical Circuit Diagram for Hydraulic Oil Temperature Sensor
PC300/350(LC)-7
20-525
E-16
E-16 Fuel gauge does not display correctly

Failure
information
Though fuel was refilled, the display does not exceed the red range (E).
Though the remaining fuel level is low, the display does not drop below the green range (F).
Relative
information
Input from the fuel level sensor (voltage) can be confirmed in the monitor function.
(Code No. 042: Fuel sensor voltage)
Cause
Fuel level sensor

fault

A60 (male)
Between
and grounding
Fuel level
Resistance value
FULL (Upper limit)
Approx. 12
EMPTY (Lower limit)
85 110
ing harness
(Disconnection or
Resistance
defective contact
Below 1
and A60 (female)
value
with connector)
Grounding fault of
wiring harness
(Contact with
grounding (GND)
circuit)
Short-circuiting of
wiring harness
(Contact with 24 V
circuit)
(female)
and grounding
and A60
Resistance
value
Above 1 M
(female)
and grounding
and A60
Voltage
Below 1 V
5
Monitor panel
defective
P02
Between
and grounding
Fuel level
Resistance value
FULL (Upper limit)
Approx. 12
EMPTY (Lower limit)
85 110
Electrical Circuit Diagram for Fuel Level Sensor
20-526
PC300/350(LC)-7
TROUBLESHOOTING
E-17
E-17 Swing lock monitor does not display correctly

Failure
information
Though the swing lock switch was turned ON, the swing lock monitor does not light up.
Though the swing lock switch was turned OFF, the swing lock monitor lights up.
Relative
information
Input from the swing lock switch (ON or OFF) can be confirmed in the monitor function.
Cause
Swing lock switch

fault

X05 (female)
Between
and
Swing lock switch
Resistance value
OFF
Above 1 M
ON
Below 1
ing harness
Resistance
(Disconnection or
Below 1
to J02 to X05 (male)
value
defective contact
Resistance
with connector)
Below 1
Wiring harness from X05 (male)
to J05 to grounding
value
Grounding fault of
wiring harness
(Contact with
grounding (GND)
circuit)
Short-circuiting of
wiring harness
(Contact with 24 V
circuit)

to J02 to X05
(male) , or C02 (female)
and grounding

to J02 to X05
(male) , or C02 (female)
and grounding
Resistance
value
Voltage
Above 1 M
Below 1 V
5
Monitor panel
defective
P02
Between
and grounding
Swing lock switch
Voltage
OFF
20 30 V
ON
Below 1 V
Electrical Circuit Diagram for Swing Lock Switch
PC300/350(LC)-7
20-527
(7)
E-18
E-18 When the monitor switch is operated, no display appears

Failure
information (1)
When operating the working mode changing switch, the working mode monitor does not appear.
Relative
information
Presumed
cause and
standard value
in normalcy
Cause
1
Monitor panel
defective

Failure
information (2)
When operating the auto-decelerator switch, the auto-deceleration monitor does not appear.
Relative
information
If the auto-decelerator itself does not work, either, carry out No. E-5 Troubleshooting.
Presumed
cause and
standard value
in normalcy
Cause
1
Monitor panel
defective

Failure
information (3)
When operating the travel speed shifting switch, the travel speed monitor does not appear.
Relative
information
If the travel speed does not actually change, carry out No. H-21 Troubleshooting.
Presumed
cause and
standard value
in normalcy
Cause
1
Monitor panel
defective

Failure
information (4)
When operating the windshield wiper switch, the windshield wiper monitor does not appear.
Relative
information
If the windshield wiper itself does not work, either, carry out No. E-19 Troubleshooting.
Presumed
cause and
standard value
in normalcy
Cause
1
Monitor panel
defective

Failure
information (5)
When operating the select switch, the adjustment display does not appear.
When operating the LCD monitor adjusting switch, the adjustment display does not appear.
When operating the maintenance switch, the item display does not appear.
Relative
information
Presumed
cause and
standard value
in normalcy
20-528
Cause
1
Monitor panel
defective

PC300/350(LC)-7
E-19
E-19 Windshield wiper does not work

Failure
information
The windshield wiper does not work.
Relative
information
Input from the window rear limit switch (ON or OFF) can be confirmed in the monitor function.
Cause
Window rear limit

switch fault
Windshield wiper
motor fault

W03 (Switch side)
Between
and
Front window
Resistance value
When installed at front
Above 1 M
When retracted at rear
Below 1
W04 (male)
Between
Between

Continued
and
Above 1 M
and grounding
ing harness
Resistance
(Disconnection or
Below 1
and W04 (female)
value
defective contact
Resistance
with connector)
Below 1
and W04 (female)
value
Grounding fault of
wiring harness
(Contact with
Resistance
grounding (GND) cir- Between wiring harness between P02 (female)
Above 1 M
and W03
value
cuit)
Monitor panel fault

(Rear limit switch
system)
P02
Between
and grounding
Front window
Voltage
When installed at front
20 30 V
When retracted at rear
Below 1 V
5
Monitor panel fault
(Windshield wiper
motor system)
20-530
P02
Between
Between
and grounding
and grounding
Resistance value
OFF
Below 3 V
ON
Below 3 V 20 30 V
(Constant cycle)
PC300/350(LC)-7
E-19
Electrical Circuit Diagram for Windshield Wiper Motor
PC300/350(LC)-7
20-531
E-20
E-20 Alarming buzzer cannot be cancelled

Failure
information
The alarming buzzer cannot be cancelled.
Relative
information
Input from the alarming buzzer cancellation switch (ON or OFF) can be confirmed in the monitor function.
Cause
Alarming buzzer
cancellation switch
fault

P03 (female)
Between
and
Alarming buzzer
cancellation switch
Resistance value
Release
Above 1 M
Depress
Below 1
ing harness
Resistance
(Disconnection or
Below 1
and P03 (male)
value
defective contact
Resistance
with connector)
Below 1
Wiring harness from P03 (male)
to J05 to grounding
value
Short-circuiting of
wiring harness
(Contact with 24 V
circuit)
(male)
and grounding
and P03
Voltage
Below 1 V
4
P02
Monitor panel fault

Between
and grounding
Alarming buzzer
cancellation switch
Voltage
Release
20 30 V
Depress
Below 1 V
Electrical Circuit Diagram for Alarming Buzzer Cancellation Switch
20-532
PC300/350(LC)-7
TROUBLESHOOTING
E-21
E-21 "Boom RAISE" is not correctly displayed in monitor function

Failure
information
"Boom RAISE" is not correctly displayed in the monitor function on the monitor panel.
Relative
information
Cause
Boom RAISE PPC

hydraulic switch fault

Turn the engine starting switch OFF for the preparations, and keep the engine running during the troubleshooting.
S06 (male)
Between
and
Boom control lever
Resistance value
NEUTRAL
Above 1 M
RAISE
Below 1
ing harness
Resistance
(Disconnection or
Below 1
and S06 (female)
value
defective contact
Resistance
with connector)
Below 1
and grounding
value
Grounding fault of
wiring harness
(Contact with
grounding (GND)
circuit)
Short-circuiting of
wiring harness
(Contact with 24 V
circuit)

(female)
and grounding

(female)
and grounding
and S06
and S06
Resistance
value
Voltage
Above 1 M
Below 1 V
Turn the engine starting switch OFF for the preparations, and start the engine during the
troubleshooting.
5
Governor pump
C03
Between
and grounding
Boom control lever
Voltage
NEUTRAL
20 30 V
RAISE
Below 1 V
Electrical Circuit Diagram for Boom RAISE PPC Hydraulic Switch
PC300/350(LC)-7
20-533
(7)
TROUBLESHOOTING
E-22
E-22 "Boom LOWER" is not correctly displayed in monitor function

Failure
information
"Boom LOWER" is not correctly displayed in the monitor function on the monitor panel.
Relative
information
Cause
Boom LOWER PPC


S02 (male)
Between
and
Boom control lever
Resistance value
NEUTRAL
Above 1 M
LOWER
Below 1
ing harness
Resistance
(Disconnection or
Below 1
and S02 (female)
value
defective contact
Resistance
with connector)
Below 1
and grounding
value
Grounding fault of
wiring harness
(Contact with
grounding (GND)
circuit)
Short-circuiting of
wiring harness
(Contact with 24 V
circuit)

(female)
and grounding

(female)
and grounding
and S02
and S02
Resistance
value
Voltage
Above 1 M
Below 1 V
troubleshooting.
5
Governor pump
C03
Between
and grounding
Boom control lever
Voltage
NEUTRAL
20 30 V
LOWER
Below 1 V
Electrical Circuit Diagram for Boom LOWER PPC Hydraulic Switch
20-534
(7)
PC300/350(LC)-7
TROUBLESHOOTING
E-23
E-23 "Arm DIGGING" is not correctly displayed in monitor function

Failure
information
"Arm DIGGING" is not correctly displayed in the monitor function (special function) on the monitor panel.
Relative
information
Cause
Arm DIGGING PPC


S04 (male)
Between
and
Arm control lever
Resistance value
NEUTRAL
Above 1 M
DIGGING
Below 1
ing harness
Resistance
(Disconnection or
Below 1
and S04 (female)
value
defective contact
Resistance
with connector)
Below 1
and grounding
value
Grounding fault of
wiring harness
(Contact with
grounding (GND)
circuit)
Short-circuiting of
wiring harness
(Contact with 24 V
circuit)

(female)
and grounding

(female)
and grounding
and S04
and S04
Resistance
value
Voltage
Above 1 M
Below 1 V
troubleshooting.
5
Governor pump
C03
Between
and grounding
Arm control lever
Voltage
NEUTRAL
20 30 V
DIGGING
Below 1 V
Electrical Circuit Diagram for Arm DIGGING PPC Hydraulic Switch
PC300/350(LC)-7
20-535
(7)
TROUBLESHOOTING
E-24
E-24 "Arm DUMPING" is not correctly displayed in monitor function

Failure
information
"Arm DUMPING" is not correctly displayed in the monitor function (special function) on the monitor panel.
Relative
information
Cause
Arm DUMPING PPC Turn the engine starting switch OFF for the preparations, and keep the engine running during the troubleshooting.
hydraulic switch
defect
S08 (male)
Arm control lever
Resistance value
(Internal disconnecNEUTRAL
Above 1 M
tion and short-circuitBetween
and
ing)
DUMPING
Below 1
ing harness
Resistance
(Disconnection or
Below 1
and S08 (female)
value
defective contact
Resistance
with connector)
Below 1
and grounding
value
Grounding fault of
wiring harness
(Contact with
grounding (GND)
circuit)
Short-circuiting of
wiring harness
(Contact with 24 V
circuit)

(female)
and grounding

(female)
and grounding
and S08
and S08
Resistance
value
Voltage
Above 1 M
Below 1 V
troubleshooting.
5
Governor pump
C03
Between
and grounding
Arm control lever
Voltage
NEUTRAL
20 30 V
DUMPING
Below 1 V
Electrical Circuit Diagram for Arm DUMPING PPC Hydraulic Switch
20-536
(7)
PC300/350(LC)-7
TROUBLESHOOTING
E-25
E-25 "Bucket DIGGING" is not correctly displayed in monitor function

Failure
information
"Bucket DIGGING" is not correctly displayed in the monitor function (special function) on the monitor panel.
Relative
information
Cause
Turn the engine starting switch OFF for the preparations, and keep the engine running durBucket DIGGING
ing the troubleshooting.
PPC hydraulic
switch fault
S01 (male)
Resistance value
Above 1 M
and
ing)
DIGGING
Below 1
ing harness
Resistance
(Disconnection or
Below 1
and S01 (female)
value
defective contact
Resistance
with connector)
Below 1
and grounding
value
Grounding fault of
wiring harness
(Contact with
grounding (GND)
circuit)
Short-circuiting of
wiring harness
(Contact with 24 V
circuit)

(female)
and grounding

(female)
and grounding
and S01
and S01
Resistance
value
Voltage
Above 1 M
Below 1 V
troubleshooting.
5
Governor pump
C03
Between
and grounding
Voltage
NEUTRAL
20 30 V
DIGGING
Below 1 V
Electrical Circuit Diagram for Bucket DIGGING PPC hydraulic Switch
PC300/350(LC)-7
20-537
(7)
TROUBLESHOOTING
E-26
E-26 "Bucket DUMPING" is not correctly displayed in monitor function

Failure
information
"Bucket DUMPING" is not correctly displayed in the monitor function (special function) on the monitor panel.
Relative
information
Cause
Turn the engine starting switch OFF for the preparations, and keep the engine running durBucket DUMPING
ing the troubleshooting.
PPC hydraulic
switch fault
S05 (male)
Resistance value
Above 1 M
and
ing)
DUMPING
Below 1
ing harness
Resistance
(Disconnection or
Below 1
and S05 (female)
value
defective contact
Resistance
with connector)
Below 1
and grounding
value
Grounding fault of
wiring harness
(Contact with
grounding (GND)
circuit)
Short-circuiting of
wiring harness
(Contact with 24 V
circuit)

(female)
and grounding

(female)
and grounding
and S05
and S05
Resistance
value
Voltage
Above 1 M
Below 1 V
troubleshooting.
5
Governor pump
C03
Between
and grounding
Voltage
NEUTRAL
20 30 V
DUMPING
Below 1 V
Electrical Circuit Diagram for Bucket DUMPING PPC hydraulic Switch
20-538
(7)
PC300/350(LC)-7
TROUBLESHOOTING
E-27
E-27 "SWING" is not correctly displayed in monitor function

Failure
information
"SWING" is not correctly displayed in the monitor function (special function) on the monitor panel.
Relative
information
Cause
Swing PPC hydraulic

switch, left, fault
Swing PPC hydraulic
switch, right, fault

S03 (male)
Between
Swing control lever
Resistance value
NEUTRAL
Above 1 M
Left
Below 1
and
S07 (male)
Between
Swing control lever
Resistance value
NEUTRAL
Above 1 M
Right
Below 1
and
Disconnection of wir- Wiring harness between C03 (female) and S03 (female) ,
or wiring harness between C03 (female)
and S07 (female)
ing harness
(Disconnection or
defective contact
and grounding
with connector)
Grounding fault of
wiring harness
(Contact with
grounding (GND)
circuit)
Short-circuiting of
wiring harness
(Contact with 24 V
circuit)
and grounding
Resistance
value
Below 1
Resistance
value
Below 1
Resistance
value
Below 1
Wiring harness between C03 (female) and S03 (female) ,
and S07 (female)
and grounding
Resistance
value
Above 1 M
and S07 (female)
and grounding
Voltage
Below 1 V
troubleshooting.
6
Governor pump
C03
Between
20-540
(7)
and grounding
Swing control lever
Voltage
NEUTRAL
20 30 V
Right or left
Below 1 V
PC300/350(LC)-7
TROUBLESHOOTING
E-27
Electrical Circuit Diagram for Right and Left Swing PPC hydraulic Switches
PC300/350(LC)-7
20-541
TROUBLESHOOTING
E-28
E-28 "TRAVEL" is not correctly displayed in monitor function

Failure
information
"TRAVEL" is not correctly displayed in the monitor function (special function) on the monitor panel.
Relative
information
Cause
Travel PPC hydraulic

switch fault

S30 (male)
Between
and
Resistance value
NEUTRAL
Above 1 M
Forward or reverse
Below 1
ing harness
Resistance
(Disconnection or
Below 1
to J01 to S30 (female)
value
defective contact
Resistance
with connector)
Below 1
Wiring harness from S30 (female)
to J05 to grounding
value
Grounding fault of
wiring harness
(Contact with
grounding (GND)
circuit)
Short-circuiting of
wiring harness
(Contact with 24 V
circuit)
, or between wiring harness between C03 (female)
and
A43 (female)
and grounding
Resistance
value
Above 1 M
, or between wiring harness between C03 (female)
and
A43 (female)
and grounding
Voltage
Below 1 V
troubleshooting.
5
Governor pump
C03
Between
20-542
(7)
and grounding
Voltage
NEUTRAL
20 30 V
Forward or backward
Below 1 V
PC300/350(LC)-7
TROUBLESHOOTING
E-28
Electrical Circuit Diagram for Travel PPC hydraulic Switch and Travel Alarm
PC300, 300LC-7 Serial No. 40001 45000
PC350, 350LC-7 Serial No. 20001 25000

PC300/350(LC)-7
20-543
(7)
TROUBLESHOOTING
E-29
E-29 "Travel Differential Pressure" is not correctly displayed in monitor function

Failure
information
"Travel Differential Pressure" is not correctly displayed in the monitor function (special function) on the monitor panel.
Relative
information
When pressure difference is created between the right and left travel PPC circuits (in steering), the travel
differential mechanism is turned ON.
Cause
Travel steering PPC


S31 (male)
Between
and
Resistance value
NEUTRAL
Above 1 M
One side of right or left only
Below 1
ing harness
Resistance
(Disconnection or
Below 1
and S31 (female)
value
defective contact
Resistance
with connector)
Below 1
Wiring harness from S31 (female)
to J05 to grounding
value
Grounding fault of
wiring harness
(Contact with
grounding (GND)
circuit)
Short-circuiting of
wiring harness
(Contact with 24 V
circuit)

(female)
and grounding

(female)
and grounding
and S31
and S31
Resistance
value
Voltage
Above 1 M
Below 1 V
troubleshooting.
5
Governor pump
C02
Between
20-544
(7)
and grounding
Voltage
NEUTRAL
20 30 V
One side of right or left only
Below 1 V
PC300/350(LC)-7
TROUBLESHOOTING
E-29
Electrical Circuit Diagram for Travel and Steering PPC hydraulic Switch
PC300/350(LC)-7
20-545
TROUBLESHOOTING
E-30
E-30 "Service" is not correctly displayed in monitor function

If attachment equipped
Failure
information
"Service" is not correctly displayed in the monitor function (special function) on the monitor panel.
Relative
information
Cause
Service (front) PPC

Service (rear) PPC

S10 (male)
Between
and
Service pedal
Resistance value
NEUTRAL
Above 1 M
Front
Below 1
S11 (male)
Between
and
Service pedal
Resistance value
NEUTRAL
Above 1 M
Rear
Below 1
Disconnection of wirWiring harness between C02 (female)

and S10 (female)
ing harness
(Disconnection or
, or wiring harness between C02 (female)
and S11
defective contact
(female)
with connector)
and grounding
Grounding fault of
wiring harness
(Contact with
grounding (GND)
circuit)
Short-circuiting of
wiring harness
(Contact with 24 V
circuit)
Resistance
value
Below 1
Resistance
value
Below 1
or between wiring harness between C02 (female)
and S11
(female)
and grounding
Resistance
value
Above 1 M
or between wiring harness between C02 (female)
and S11
(female)
and grounding
Voltage
Below 1 V
troubleshooting.
6
Governor pump
C02
Between
20-546
(7)
and grounding
Service pedal
Voltage
NEUTRAL
20 30 V
Front or rear
Below 1 V
PC300/350(LC)-7
TROUBLESHOOTING
E-30
Electrical Circuit Diagram for Service PPC hydraulic Switch
PC300/350(LC)-7
20-547
TROUBLESHOOTING
E-31
E-31 Air Conditioner does not work

PC300, 300LC-7 Serial No. 40001 45000
PC350, 350LC-7 Serial No. 20001 25000
The air conditioner does not work.
Relative
information
For the electrical circuit diagram inside the air conditioner unit, refer to the section of STRUCTURE AND
FUNCTION - Air Conditioner in this manual.
Failure
information
Cause
Fuse No. 11 fault
When the fuse is blown, there is a big possibility that grounding fault occurred in the circuit.
Disconnection of wirduring the troubleshooting. (See Cause 3)
ing harness
Resistance
(Disconnection or
Below 1
Wiring harness between FB1-11 outlet and M26 (male)
value
defective contact
Resistance
with connector)
Below 1
Wiring harness between M26 (male)
and grounding
value
Grounding fault of
wiring harness
(Contact with
grounding (GND)
circuit)

defective
Between wiring harness between FB1-11 outlet and M26
(male)
and grounding
(7)
Above 1 M
M26
Between
20-548
Voltage
Voltage
and
20 30 V
PC300/350(LC)-7
TROUBLESHOOTING
E-31
Electrical Circuit Diagram for Air Conditioner
PC300/350(LC)-7
20-549
(7)
TROUBLESHOOTING
E-31

Troubleshooting procedure for air conditioner system
The control panel of the air conditioner constantly monitors the sensors and other devices in the system .
When it detects any abnormality, Self-diagnosis notice is displayed by operating switches specially.
If you feel any abnormality in the air conditioner system, check the Self-diagnosis notice first according to
the procedure for Troubleshooting by self-diagnosis notice, and then;
If the Self-diagnosis notice is displayed, continue the Troubleshooting by self-diagnosis notice.
If the Self-diagnosis notice is not displayed, carry out the Troubleshooting by failure phenomenon.
Troubleshooting by self-diagnosis notice

Check the Self-diagnosis notice on the control
panel according to the following procedure.
How to display Self-diagnosis notice

1) Turn the starting switch ON.
2) Press OFF switch (1) and check that anything is not displayed on display monitor (2).
3) Hold the UP switch ( ) and DOWN switch
( ) of temperature setting switch (3) simultaneously for 3 seconds or more.
4) Check the Self-diagnosis notice displayed
on display monitor (2).
How to select Self-diagnosis notice

If multiple Self-diagnosis notices are recorded,
press the UP switch ( ) or DOWN switch ( )
of temperature setting switch (3) to select
another notice.
How to delete Self-diagnosis notice

When reproducing the Self-diagnosis notices
or after removing the cause of a failure, press
the switches on both sides of recirc/fresh air
selector switch (4) simultaneously for 3 seconds
or more, and all the Self-diagnosis notices are
deleted.
Finishing display of Self-diagnosis notice

To finish display of the Self-diagnosis notice,
press OFF switch (1) or turn the starting switch
OFF.
20-550
(7)
Self-diagnosis
Failure mode
notice
E-No failures
Disconnection in recirculated air
E11
sensor
E12
Short-circuit in recirculated air sensor
Disconnection in water temperature
E15
sensor
Short-circuit in water temperature
E16
sensor
E18
Short-circuit in daylight sensor
E43
Abnormality in air outlet damper
E44
Abnormality in air mix damper
Abnormality in recirculated and fresh
E45
air damper
PC300/350(LC)-7
TROUBLESHOOTING
Self-diagnosis
notice
Trouble
E-31
Disconnection in recirculated air sensor
E11
Contents of
trouble
Action of
control panel
Disconnection in the recirculated air sensor system is detected.

Fixes the recirculated air temperature for control.
When the following condition is satisfied, the operation returns to normalcy.
<Completion of removal of cause> + <Deletion of self-diagnosis notice> + <Turning starting switch OFF
and ON> + <Starting air conditioner>
Related
information
Possible causes and

standard value in normal state
Cause
Standard value in normal state/Remarks on troubleshooting
Defective recirculated
1 air sensor
harness (Disconnection
2
or defective contact with
connector)
Defective air conditioner

system
Self-diagnosis
notice
Trouble
Prepare with starting switch OFF, then carry out troubleshooting without turning
starting switch ON.
THI (male)
Resistance
Between (1) and (2)
300 z 430 kz
starting switch ON.
Wiring harness between M30 (female) (12) and TH I
(female) (2)
Resistance
Max. 1 z

(female) (1)
Resistance
Max. 1 z
If neither of causes 1 and 2 is the cause of the trouble, the air conditioner system
may be defective. Refer to CHASSIS COMPONENT, Shop Manual, Air conditioner.
Short circuit in recirculated air sensor
E12
Contents of
trouble
Action of
control panel
Short circuit in the recirculated air sensor system is detected.

Fixes the recirculated air temperature for control.
Related
information
Possible causes and

Cause
Defective recirculated air
1 sensor (Internal short circuit)
2
connector)

system
PC300/350(LC)-7

starting switch ON.
THI (male)
Resistance
Between (1) and (2)
300 z 430 kz
starting switch ON.
(female) (2)
Resistance
Max. 1 z

(female) (1)
Resistance
Max. 1 z
20-551
(7)
TROUBLESHOOTING
Self-diagnosis
notice
Trouble
E-31
Disconnection in water temperature sensor
E15
Contents of
trouble
Action of
control panel
Disconnection in the water temperature sensor system is detected.

Ignores the warm-up control and fixes the engine water temperature at 60C for control.
Related
information
Possible causes and

Cause
Defective water temperastarting switch ON.
1 ture sensor (Internal disTHW (male)
Resistance
connection)
Between (1) and (2)
95 z 455 kz
2
connector)

system
Self-diagnosis
notice
Trouble
starting switch ON.
Wiring harness between M30 (female) (14) and THW
(female) (2)
Resistance
Max. 1 z

(female) (1)
Resistance
Max. 1 z
Short circuit in water temperature sensor
E16
Contents of
trouble
Action of
control panel
Short circuit in the water temperature sensor system is detected.

Ignores the warm-up control and fixes the engine water temperature at 60C for control.
Related
information
Possible causes and

Cause
Defective water tempera1 ture sensor (Internal
short circuit)
2
connector)
20-552
(7)

system

starting switch ON.
THW (male)
Resistance
Between (1) and (2)
95 z 455 kz
starting switch ON.
(female) (2)
Resistance
Max. 1 z

(female) (1)
Resistance
Max. 1 z
PC300/350(LC)-7
TROUBLESHOOTING
Self-diagnosis
notice
Trouble
E-31
Short circuit in daylight sensor
E18
Contents of
trouble
Action of
control panel
Short circuit in the daylight sensor system is detected.

Assumes that the daylight sensor is not installed for control.
Related
information
Possible causes and

Cause
Defective daylight sen1

The daylight sensor may be defective. Check it directly.
sor (Internal short circuit)
2
connector)

system
Self-diagnosis
notice
Trouble
starting switch ON.
Wiring harness between M30 (female) (16) and P15
(female) (2)
Resistance
Max. 1 z

(female) (1)
Resistance
Max. 1 z
Abnormality in air outlet damper
E43
Contents of
trouble
Abnormality in air outlet servomotor system is detected.
Action of
control panel
Stops the air outlet servomotor.

Related
information
Do not connect the power cables to the motor terminals directly to drive the motor. Doing so can damage
the motor output shaft and break the motor coils.
Cause
Possible causes and

Defective air outlet servo1

The air outlet servomotor may be defective. Check it directly.
motor (Internal defect)
starting switch ON.
Disconnection in wiring
2 in wiring harness or
defective contact in connector)

system
PC300/350(LC)-7
Wiring harness between MV1 (female) (1) and M30

(female) (3)
Resistance
Max. 1 z

(female) (11)
Resistance
Max. 1 z

(female) (9)
Resistance
Max. 1 z

(female) (8)
Resistance
Max. 1 z

(female) (9)
Resistance
Max. 1 z
If none of causes 1 and 2 is the cause of the trouble, the air conditioner system may
be defective. Refer to CHASSIS COMPONENT, Shop Manual, Air conditioner.
20-553
(7)
TROUBLESHOOTING
Self-diagnosis
notice
Trouble
E-31
Abnormality in air mix damper
E44
Contents of
trouble
Abnormality in air mix servomotor system is detected.
Action of
control panel
Stops the air mix servomotor.

Related
information
Cause
Possible causes and

Defective air mix servo1

motor (Internal defect)
The air mix servomotor may be defective. Check it directly.

starting switch ON.
20-554
(7)

system
Wiring harness between MAM (female) (1) and M29

(female) (11)
Resistance
Max. 1 z

(female) (3)
Resistance
Max. 1 z

(female) (2)
Resistance
Max. 1 z

(female) (4)
Resistance
Max. 1 z

(female) (5)
Resistance
Max. 1 z
PC300/350(LC)-7
TROUBLESHOOTING
Self-diagnosis
notice
Trouble
E-31
Abnormality in recirculated and fresh air damper
E45
Contents of
trouble
Abnormality in recirculated and fresh air servomotor system is detected.
Action of
control panel
Stops the recirculated and fresh air servomotor.

Related
information
Possible causes and

Cause
Defective recirculated
1 and fresh air servomotor
(Internal defect)
The recirculated and fresh air servomotor may be defective. Check it directly.
2 Defective fuse (in unit)
If the fuse (in the unit) is broken, the circuit probably has a grounding fault, etc.
Check the related circuits.
starting switch ON.

system
PC300/350(LC)-7
Wiring harness between MRF (female) (1) and M29

(female) (6)
Resistance
Max. 1 z
Wiring harness between MRF (female) (3) and M29

(female) (7)
Resistance
Max. 1 z
Wiring harness between MRF (female) (7), fuse in unit,

and M33 (female) (3)
Resistance
Max. 1 z
If none of causes 1 3 is the cause of the trouble, the air conditioner system may be
defective. Refer to CHASSIS COMPONENT, Shop Manual, Air conditioner.
20-555
(7)
TROUBLESHOOTING
E-31
20-556
(7)
PC300/350(LC)-7
TROUBLESHOOTING
E-31
Troubleshooting by failure phenomenon

Trouble
The air conditioner does not operate.
(1) The air conditioner does not operate at all.
Related
information
Cause
1 Defective fuse No. 11

If the fuse is broken, the circuit probably has a grounding fault, etc. (Refer to cause 3.)
starting switch ON.
Possible causes and

Short circuit with chassis

ground in wiring harness
3
(Contact with ground circuit)
Wiring harness between fuse 11 outlet and M33 (male)

(3)
Resistance
Max. 1z
Wiring harness between M27 (female) (14) and M30

(female) (6)
Resistance
Max. 1z
Wiring harness between M33 (male) (3) and chassis

ground
Resistance
Max. 1z
Wiring harness between M29 (female) (12) and chassis

ground
Resistance
Max. 1z
starting switch ON.
Between wiring harness between circuit breaker fuse 11
outlet and M33 (male) (3) and chassis ground
Resistance
Min. 1 Mz
Between wiring harness between M27 (female) (14) and

M30 (female) (6) and chassis ground
Resistance
Min. 1 Mz
Prepare with starting switch OFF, then turn starting switch ON and carry out
troubleshooting.
4

unit
M33
Voltage
Between (2) and (3)
20 V 30 V
If the above voltage is normal and the air conditioner does not operate, the air conditioner is defective.
troubleshooting.
5 Defective control panel
M30, M29
Voltage
Between M30 (6) and M29 (12)
20 V 30 V
If the above voltage is normal and the air conditioner does not operate, the control
panel is defective.
PC300/350(LC)-7
20-557
(7)
TROUBLESHOOTING
Trouble
E-31
(2) Air does not come out (Air flow is insufficient).
Related
information
Cause
Defective blower relay

(on coil side)
Defective blower relay

(on contact side)
Possible causes and

Defective power transis4

tor (Internal defect)
starting switch ON.
R30 (male)
Resistance
Between (1) and (3)
140 340 z
troubleshooting.
R30
Fan switch
Voltage
Between (4) and

chassis ground
ON (Operated)
20 30 V
troubleshooting.
Fan switch
If air flow can be changed with fan switch,

Operate in range of Low, Medium, and High power transistor is normal.
troubleshooting.
Defective blower motor

(Internal defect)
MB (female)
Fan switch
Voltage
Between (1) and (2)
ON (Operated)
20 30 V
If the above voltage is normal and the blower motor does not rotate, the blower motor
is defective.
starting switch ON.
20-558
(7)


system
Wiring harness between fuse 11 outlet, fuse in unit, R30

(3), R31 (female) (1), and M30 (female) (6)
Resistance
Max. 1 z
Wiring harness between M29 (female) (3) and R30

(female) (1)
Resistance
Max. 1 z

ground
Resistance
Max. 1 z
Wiring harness between MB (female) (1) and R30

(female) (4)
Resistance
Max. 1 z
Wiring harness between MB (female) (2) and PTR

(female) (3)
Resistance
Max. 1 z
Wiring harness between PTR (female) (1) and chassis

ground
Resistance
Max. 1 z
Wiring harness between PTR (female) (2) and M30

(female) (7)
Resistance
Max. 1 z
Wiring harness between PTR (female) (4) and M30

(female) (8)
Resistance
Max. 1 z
PC300/350(LC)-7
TROUBLESHOOTING
Trouble
E-31
(3) Air is not cooled (Cooling capacity is low).
Related
information
Cause
Possible causes and

Defective compressor
relay (on coil side)
relay (on contact side)
Defective thermostat
(Internal defect)
Defective high/low pres5 sure switch (Internal disconnection)

starting switch ON.
R31 (male)
Resistance
Between (1) and (2)
140 340 z
troubleshooting (Setting of temperature: Highest cooling position).
R31
Fan switch
Voltage
Between (4) and chassis

ground
ON (Operated)
20 30 V
The thermostat may be defective. Check it directly.

starting switch ON.
P17 (male)
Resistance
Between (1) and (2)
Max. 1 z
clutch (Internal defect)
The compressor clutch may be defective. Check it directly.
(Internal defect)
The compressor may be defective. Check it directly.

starting switch ON.

system
PC300/350(LC)-7

(female) (1)
Resistance
Max. 1 z
Wiring harness between P17 (female) (2) and chassis

ground
Resistance
Max. 1 z
Wiring harness between fuse 11 outlet, R31 (female)

(2), fuse in unit, R31 (female) (1), and M30 (female) (6)
Resistance
Max. 1 z
Wiring harness between ST1 (female) (1) and R31

(female) (3)
Resistance
Max. 1 z
Wiring harness between M29 (female) (2) and ST1

(female) (2)
Resistance
Max. 1 z

ground
Resistance
Max. 1 z
Wiring harness between R31 (female) (4) and M34

(female) (1)
Resistance
Max. 1 z
20-559
(7)
TROUBLESHOOTING
E-31
20-560
(7)
PC300/350(LC)-7
TROUBLESHOOTING
E-32
E-32 Travel alarm does not sound

If travel alarm equipped
Failure
information
The travel alarm does not sound while the machine is traveling.
The alarm begins to sound when the machine is at a standstill.
Relative
information
Cause
Fuse No. 15 fault
When the fuse is blown, there is a big possibility that grounding fault occurred in the circuit.
(See Cause 4)
If the monitor display is not correct, proceed to No. E-21 Troubleshooting.
Travel signal fault
Monitoring code
Item
Normal display
019
Travel
Control lever operation: ON

Control lever NEUTRAL: OFF
ing harness
Wiring harness between FB1-15 outlet to J03 and A43
Resistance
(Disconnection or
Below 1
value
(female)
defective contact
Resistance
with connector)
Below 1
Wiring harness between A43 (female)
and J01
value
Grounding fault of
wiring harness
(Contact with
grounding (GND)
circuit)
Travel alarm fault
PC300/350(LC)-7
Between wiring harness between FB1-15 outlet to J03 and
A43 (female)
and grounding
Resistance
value
Above 1 M
As this is an internal failure, troubleshooting cannot be conducted. (If none of the causes
listed in Item 1 through 4 above is found, the travel alarm is judged as defective)
20-561
(7)
TROUBLESHOOTING
E-32
Electrical Circuit Diagram for Travel PPC Hydraulic Switch and Travel Alarm
PC300, 300LC-7 Serial No. 40001 45000
PC350, 350LC-7 Serial No. 20001 25000

20-562
(7)
PC300/350(LC)-7
TROUBLESHOOTING OF HYDRAULIC AND

MECHANICAL SYSTEM (H-MODE)
SYSTEM CHART FOR HYDRAULIC AND MECHANICAL SYSTEMS ...................................................... 20-602

H-1 All work equipment lack power, or travel and swing speeds are slow .............................................. 20-605
H-2 Engine speed sharply drops or engine stalls .................................................................................... 20-606
H-3 No work equipment, travel or swing move ........................................................................................ 20-607
H-4 Abnormal noise is heard from around hydraulic pump ..................................................................... 20-607
H-5 Auto-decelerator does not work ........................................................................................................ 20-608
H-6 Fine control mode does not function................................................................................................. 20-608
H-7 Boom moves slowly or lacks power .................................................................................................. 20-609
H-8 Arm moves slowly or lacks power..................................................................................................... 20-610
H-9 Bucket moves slowly or lacks power ................................................................................................ 20- 611
H-10 Work equipment does not move in its single operation .................................................................... 20-611
H-11 Work equipment has a bit too fast hydraulic drift .............................................................................. 20-612
H-12 Work equipment has big time lag...................................................................................................... 20-613
H-13 Other work equipment moves when relieving single circuit .............................................................. 20-613
H-14 One-touch power max. switch does not operate .............................................................................. 20-613
H-15 In compound operation, work equipment with larger load moves slowly .......................................... 20-614
H-16 In swing + boom RAISE operation, boom moves slowly .................................................................. 20-614
H-17 In swing + travel, travel speed drops sharply.................................................................................... 20-614
H-18 Machine swerves in travel ................................................................................................................ 20-615
H-19 Machine travels slowly ...................................................................................................................... 20-616
H-20 Machine cannot be easily steered or lacks power ............................................................................ 20-617
H-21 Travel speed does not shift, or it is too slow or fast. ......................................................................... 20-618
H-22 Track shoe does not turn (on one side only)..................................................................................... 20-618
H-23 Machine does not swing ................................................................................................................... 20-619
H-24 Swing acceleration is poor, or swing speed is slow .......................................................................... 20-620
H-25 Excessive overrun when stopping swing .......................................................................................... 20-621
H-26 There is big shock when stopping swing .......................................................................................... 20-622
H-27 There is big abnormal noise caused when stopping swing .............................................................. 20-622
H-28 Swing natural drift is too big.............................................................................................................. 20-623
PC200/220(LC)-7
20-601
SYSTEM CHART FOR HYDRAULIC AND MECHANICAL SYSTEMS
20-602
PC200/220(LC)-7
This is a system chart that has been drawn up by simplifying the whole hydraulic circuit chart. Use it as a
reference material when troubleshooting the hydraulic and mechanical systems.
PC200/220(LC)-7
20-603

Troubleshooting Table and Related Circuit Diagram collectively carry the following information. Carry out
troubleshooting work after fully grasping their contents.
Phenomena occurring on machine
Relative information
Information on occurred failures and troubleshooting
Failure information
Cause
Cause for presumed

failure
(The attached No. for
filing and reference
purpose only. It does not stand
for any priority)
<Contents>
The standard values in normalcy by which to judge "good" or "no good" about
presumed causes.
References for making judgement of "good" or "no good"
20-604
PC200/220(LC)-7
H-1
H-1 All work equipment lack power, or travel and swing speeds are slow
Failure information
All the work equipment lack power, or their travel and swing speeds are slow.
Set the working mode at A mode for troubleshooting.
Cause

Stop engine for preparations. Start troubleshooting at engine high idling.
Malfunctioning of unload valve
Control lever
Unload pressure
3.9 1.0 MPa

{40 10kg/cm2}
Improper adjustment or malfunctioning of main relief valve
Control lever
Main relief pressure
Arm, DIGGING
33.34 37.23 MPa

{340 375kg/cm2}
If the pressure does not return to normalcy even after the adjustment, malfunctioning of main relief valve or its internal failure is suspected. In that case, check
the valve itself.

3
Malfunctioning of self pressure

decompression valve
Control lever
Control circuit source pressure
2.83 3.43 MPa

{29 35kg/cm2}

Oil pressure to be measured
4
Improper adjustment or malfunctioning of PC valve
Pump delivery pressure

PC valve output pressure
Oil pressure ratio
Swing lock: ON
Arm digging relief
Approx. 3/5
If the oil pressure does not return to normalcy even after the adjustment, malfunctioning of PC valve or its internal failure is suspected. In that case, check the valve
itself.
5
Malfunctioning of LS-EPC
valve
Travel speed
LS-EPC output pressure
Lo
NEUTRAL
Approx. 1.4 MPa

{Approx. 14 kg/cm2}
Hi
0{0}

Oil pressure ratio
6
Improper adjustment or malfunctioning of LS valve

LS valve output pressure
All control levers in

NEUTRAL
Nearly equal pressure
Travel without load (control lever held at half

stroke)
1
Approx. 3/5
If the oil pressure does not return to normalcy even after the adjustment, malfunctioning of LS valve or its internal failure is suspected. In that case, check the valve
itself.
7
Malfunctioning of servo piston
Malfunctioning of servo piston is suspected. Check the piston itself.
Piston pump defective
If none of the above listed causes is detected, the piston pump is suspected of
deteriorated performance, malfunctioning or internal failure.
PC200/220(LC)-7
20-605
H-2
H-2 Engine speed sharply drops or engine stalls

Failure information
The engine speed sharply drops or the engine stalls.
Relative Information
Cause

Improper adjustment or malfunctioning of main relief valve
Control lever
Arm, DIGGING
33.34 37.23 MPa

{340 375kg/cm2}
If the oil pressure does not return to normalcy even after the adjustment, malfunctioning of the main relief valve or its internal failure is suspected. In that case,
check the valve itself.
2
Improper adjustment or malfunctioning of PC valve

Oil pressure ratio
Swing lock: ON
Arm digging relief
1
Approx. 3/5
If the oil pressure does not return to normalcy even after the adjustment, malfunctioning of the PC valve or its internal failure is suspected. In that case, check the
valve itself.
Oil pressure ratio
3


NEUTRAL
Travel without load

(control lever held at half
stroke)
1
Approx. 3/5
If the oil pressure does not return to normalcy even after the adjustment, malfunctioning of the LS valve or its internal failure is suspected. In that case, check the
valve itself.
4
Orifice or filter in servo equipment clogged
The orifice or filter in the pump servo equipment is suspected of clogging. Check
the equipment itself.
Malfunction of servo piston
The servo piston is suspected of malfunction. Check the piston itself.
20-606
PC200/220(LC)-7
H-3, H-4
H-3 No work equipment, travel or swing move

No work equipment nor travel and swing functions can be set in motion.
Set the working mode at A mode for the troubleshooting.
Failure information
Cause

Malfunctioning of PPC lock

solenoid valve
Safety lock lever
Locked
0{0}
Released
2.84 3.43 MPa

{29 35kg/cm2}

2
Malfunctioning of self pressure

decompression valve
Control lever
All control levers in NEUTRAL position
2.83 3.43 MPa

{29 35kg/cm2}
The piston pump is suspected of malfunctioning or an internal failure. Diagnose it

Remove the oil pressure measurement plug and crank the engine. If oil flows out,
it is in normal condition.
Damper defective
It is presumed that the pump shaft does not rotate due to some internal failure of
the dumper. Check the damper itself.
H-4 Abnormal noise is heard from around hydraulic pump

An abnormal noise is heard from around the hydraulic pump.
Failure information
Cause
Hydraulic oil level lowered
Make a visual check.
Quality of hydraulic oil bad
Air may have get mixed with the oil. Make a visual check.
Hydraulic tank cap breather

clogged
It is presumed that the breather in the cap of hydraulic tanks is clogged, thereby
causing negative pressure inside the tank. Make a visual check.
Hydraulic tank strainer

clogged
It is presumed that the strainer in the hydraulic tank is clogged, thereby causing
negative pressure in the suction circuit. Make a visual check.
The piston pump is suspected of an internal failure. Check the pump itself.
PC200/220(LC)-7
20-607
H-5, H-6
H-5 Auto-decelerator does not work

The auto-decelerator does not work.
This troubleshooting mode is applied when the auto-decelerator does not work, while operating
the travel control lever. (A shuttle valve is provided between PPC valve and the hydraulic switch
only in the travel circuit -actually located inside PPC valve)
Failure information
Cause

NEUTRAL
0{0}
Operation
Above 2.7 MPa

{Above 28 kg/cm2}
Malfunctioning of
travel PPC valve
(shuttle valve)
H-6 Fine control mode does not function

Failure information
The fine control mode poorly functions or its response is slow.
Cause

Malfunctioning of
LS-EPC valve
Orifice in LS circuit
clogged
Travel speed
LS-EPC valve output

pressure
Lo
NEUTRAL
Approx. 1.4 MPa

{Approx. 14 kg/cm2}
Hi
0{0}
The orifice in the LS circuit is presumed to be clogged. Check the orifice itself.
Oil pressure ratio


NEUTRAL
Nearly equal oil pressure
Travel without load

stroke)
1
Approx. 3/5
If the oil pressure does not return to normalcy even after the adjustment, malfunctioning of the LS valve or its internal failure is suspected. In that case, check the valve
itself.
4
20-608
Malfunctioning of
servo piston
Malfunctioning of the servo piston is suspected. Check the piston itself.
PC200/220(LC)-7
H-7
H-7 Boom moves slowly or lacks power

Failure information
The boom moves slowly or lacks power
Cause

Malfunctioning of right PPC

valve (in boom circuit)
Boom lever
NEUTRAL
0{0}
RAISE or LOWER
Above 2.7 MPa

{Above 28 kg/cm2}
Malfunction of merge/divide
solenoid valve
Travel lever
Solenoid output pressure
NEUTRAL
0{0}
Operating one side only
2.84 3.43 MPa

{29 35 kg/cm2}
Malfunctioning of merge/divide
valve (main and LS valves)
The merge/divide valve (main and LS valves) is presumed to malfunction. Check

the valve itself.
Malfunctioning of boom control

valve (spool)
The spool in the boom control valve (Lo Hi) is presumed to malfunction. Check
the valve itself.

valve (pressure compensation
valve)
The pressure compensation valve in the boom control valve (Lo Hi) is presumed
to malfunction. Check the valve itself.

valve (regeneration valve)
The regeneration valve in the boom control valve (Lo) or the seal is presumed to
malfunction. Check the valve itself.

valve (lock valve)
The lock valve in the boom control valve (Lo) is presumed to malfunction. Check
the valve itself.

valve (check valve)
The check valve in the boom control valve (Hi) is presumed to malfunction. Check
the valve itself.
Malfunctioning of safety valve

for lock valve or seal defective
The safety valve for the lock valve is presumed to malfunction, or the seal is suspected to be defective. Check the valve itself.

10 valve (suction valve) or seal
defective
The suction valve in the boom control valve (Lo) is presumed to malfunction, or
the seal is suspected to be defective.

11 valve (safety and suction
valves) or seal defective
The safety and suction valves in the boom control valve (Lo) are presumed to
malfunction, or the seal is suspected to be defective. Check those valves themselves.
Malfunctioning of LS shuttle
12 valve (left travel, bucket and
service valves)
LS shuttle valves in the left travel control valve, bucket control valve and service
control valve are presumed to malfunction. Check those valves themselves.
13 Boom cylinder defective
PC200/220(LC)-7
Boom lever
Amount oil leakage from cylinder
Raise relief
20 cc/min
20-609
H-8
H-8 Arm moves slowly or lacks power

Failure information
The arm moves slowly, or lacks power.
Cause

+Stop engine for preparations. Start troubleshooting at engine high idling.
Malfunctioning of left PPC

valve (arm circuit)
Arm lever
NEUTRAL
0{0}
DIGGING or DUMPING
Above 2.7 MPa

{Above 28 kg/cm2}

2
solenoid valve
Travel lever
Solenoid output pressure
NEUTRAL
0{0}
2.84 3.43 MPa

{29 35 kg/cm2}
valve (main and LS valves)
The merge/divide valve (main and LS valves) is presumed to malfunction. Check

the valve itself.
Malfunctioning of arm control

valve (spool)
The spool in the arm control valve (Lo Hi) is presumed to malfunction. Check the
valve itself.

valve)
The pressure compensation valve in the arm control valve (Lo Hi) is presumed
to malfunction. Check the valve itself.

valve (regeneration valve)
The regeneration valve in the arm control valve (Lo) is presumed to malfunction,
or the seal is suspected to be defective. Check the valve itself.

valve (safety and suction
The safety and suction valves in the arm control valve (Lo Hi) are presumed to
malfunction, or the seal is suspected of defect. Check those valves themselves.

valve (quick return valve)
The quick return valve in the arm control valve (Hi) is presumed to malfunction.
Check the valve itself.
valve (right travel, boom, left
travel, bucket and service
valves)
LS shuttle valves in the right travel control valve, boom control valve, left travel
control valve, bucket control valve and service valve are presumed to malfunction. Check those valves themselves.
10 Arm cylinder defective
20-610
Arm lever
Digging relief
20 cc/min
PC200/220(LC)-7
H-9, H-10
H-9 Bucket moves slowly or lacks power

Failure information
The bucket moves slowly, or lacks power.

Cause

Malfunctioning of right PPC

valve (bucket circuit)
Bucket lever
NEUTRAL
0{0}
DIGGING or DUMPING
Above 2.7 MPa

{Above 28 kg/cm2}
Malfunctioning of bucket control valve (spool)
The spool in the bucket control valve is presumed to malfunction. Check the
valve itself.
Malfunctioning of bucket control valve (pressure compensation valve)
The pressure compensation valve in the bucket control valve is presumed to

malfunction. Check the valve itself.
Malfunctioning of bucket control valve (safety and suction

The safety and suction valves in the bucket control valve are presumed to
malfunction, or the seal is suspected to be defective. Check those valves
themselves.
Malfunction of LS shuttle valve

(service valve)
The LS shuttle valve in the service control valve is presumed to malfunction.

Bucket cylinder defective

Bucket lever
Digging relief
20 cc/min
H-10 Work equipment does not move in its single operation

The boom does not move when operated independently.
The arm does not move when operated independently.
The bucket does not move when operated independently.
Failure information
Cause

Malfunctioning of PPC valve
Malfunctioning of work equipment control valve (spool)
PC200/220(LC)-7
Work equipment control lever
NEUTRAL
0{0}
Operation
Above 2.7 MPa

{Above 28 kg/cm2}
The spool in the work equipment control valve is presumed to malfunction.

20-611
H-11
H-11 Work equipment has a bit too fast hydraulic drift

Failure information (1) Hydraulic drift of the boom is a bit too fast.

Cause

Boom control lever
Raise relief
20 cc/min
Boom cylinder defective
Boom control lever (lock valve)

seal defective
The seal at lock valve in the boom control valve (Lo) is suspected to be
defective. Check the valve itself.
Seal at safety valve for lock

valve defective
The seal at the safety valve in the lock valve is suspected to be defective.
Failure information (2) Hydraulic drift of the arm is a bit too fast.

Cause

Arm cylinder defective
Arm control lever
Digging relief
20 cc/min
Arm control valve (safety and

suction valves) seal defective
The seal for safety and suction valves in the arm control valve (Lo Hi) is
suspected to be defective. Check the valve itself.
Whether the seal is defective or not may well be determined by changing
for other safety and suction valves. (Do not attempt to change them for the
safety and suction valves for the boom LOWER and the lock valve, because the set pressure differs)
Arm control valve (spool) seal

defective
The seal for spool in the arm control valve (Lo Hi) is suspected to be defective. Check the seal itself.
Arm control valve (pressure

compensation valve) seal
defective
The seal for pressure compensation valve in the arm control valve (Lo Hi)
is suspected to be defective. Check the seal itself.
Failure information (3) Hydraulic drift of the bucket is a bit too fast.

Cause

Bucket cylinder defective
Digging relief
20 cc/min
Bucket control valve (safety

and suction valves) seal
defective
The seal for the safety and suction valves in the bucket control lever is suspected to be defective. Check the seal itself.
Whether the seal is defective or not may well be determined by changing
for other safety and suction valves. (Do not attempt to change them for the
safety and suction valves for the boom LOWER and the lock valve, because the set pressure differs)
Bucket control valve (spool)

seal defective
The seal for spool in the bucket control valve is suspected to be defective.
Check the seal itself.
Bucket control valve (pressure compensation valve) seal

defective
The seal for pressure compensation valve in the bucket control valve is suspected to be defective. Check the seal itself.
20-612
PC200/220(LC)-7
H-12, H-13, H-14
H-12 Work equipment has big time lag

Failure information
The work equipment has a big time lag.

Cause

valve
Travel speed
LS-EPC valve output

pressure
Lo
NEUTRAL
Approx. 1.4 MPa

{approx. 14 kg/cm2}
Hi
Operation
0{0}
Malfunctioning of control valve

(regeneration valve) - with
boom and arm only
The regeneration valve in the control valve is presumed to malfunction.

Malfunctioning of control
valves (safety & suction valve)
The safety and suction valves of the control valve are presumed to malfunction. Check those valves themselves directly.
For the arm and boom, whether they are defective or not may well be determined by changing them for other safety and suction valves. (Do not attempt to change them for the safety and suction valves for the boom
LOWER and the lock valve, because each set pressure differs)
Malfunctioning of control valve

(pressure compensation
valve)
The pressure compensation valve of the control valve is presumed to malfunction. Check the valve itself directly.
H-13 Other work equipment moves when relieving single circuit

Other work equipment moves when relieving the single circuit of specific work equipment.
Failure information
Cause
Control valve (pressure comThe seal for pressure compression valve in the control valve is suspected to
pensation valve) seal defective be defective. Check the seal itself.
H-14 One-touch power max. switch does not operate

The one-touch power max. switch does not operate.
Failure information
Cause

Malfunctioning of 2-stage solenoid valve
Malfunctioning of main relief

valve
PC200/220(LC)-7
Swing lock switch
Solenoid valve output pressure
OFF
0{0}
ON
2.84 3.43 MPa

{29 35kg/cm2}
The main relief valve is presumed to malfunction. Check the valve itself.
20-613
H-15, H-16, H-17
H-15 In compound operation, work equipment with larger load moves slowly
In a compound operation, work equipment with larger load tends to move slowly.
Failure information
Cause

The pressure compensation valve for the work equipment with larger load is
presumed to malfunction. Check the valve itself.
Malfunctioning of pressure
compensation valve for work
equipment with larger load
Combination of compound operation
Work equipment with larger load
Boom RAISE + arm DIGGING
Boom RAISE
Boom RAISE + arm DUMPING
Arm DUMPING
Boom RAISE + bucket DIGGING
Boom RAISE
Arm DUMPING + bucket DIGGING
Arm DUMPING
Boom LOWER + arm DUMPING
Arm DUMPING
H-16 In swing + boom RAISE operation, boom moves slowly

In a compound operation of swing + boom RAISE, the boom tends to move slowly.
If the boom moves slowly in the single operation of boom RAISE, carry out the H-7 check first.
Failure information
Cause
Malfunctioning of LS select
valve or seal defective
The LS select valve is presumed to malfunction, or the seal is suspected to

be defective. Check the valve and seal themselves.
H-17 In swing + travel, travel speed drops sharply

In a compound operation of swing + travel, the travel speed drops sharply.
If the travel speed is slow in the single operation of travel, carry out the H-19 check first.
Failure information
20-614
Cause
valve (left travel and swing)
The LS shuttle valve in the left travel control valve or the swing control valve
is presumed to malfunction. Check both of them directly.
PC200/220(LC)-7
H-18
H-18 Machine swerves in travel

Failure information
The machine tends to swerve while traveling.
Cause

Malfunctioning of travel PPC

valve
Forward or reverse
Above 2.7 MPa

{Above 28 kg/cm2}
Differential output between right

and left sides
Below 0.4 MPa {Below 4 kg/cm2}
Malfunctioning of self-pressure
decompression valve
Control lever
2.83 3.43 MPa

{29 35 kg/cm2}

Oil Pressure ratio
3
Oil pressure to be
measured

NEUTRAL
Travel without load

stroke)
1
Approx. 3/5

4
Malfunctioning of travel interlocking solenoid valve
0 {0}
Operating both sides
2.84 3.43 MPa

{29 35 kg/cm2}
Malfunctioning of travel interlocking valve
The travel interlocking valve is presumed to malfunction. Check the valve itself.
Malfunctioning of travel control

valve (spool)
The spool in the travel interlocking valve is presumed to malfunction. Check the
spool itself.
Malfunction of travel motor
Final drive defective
PC200/220(LC)-7
Amount of oil leakage from travel motor
Travel relief
30 /min
The final drive is suspected of an internal failure. Check the inside of the final
drive directly.
An internal failure in the final drive may well be determined by an abnormal noise
from within, abnormal heat or metal chip or dust contained in the drained oil.
20-615
H-19
H-19 Machine travels slowly

Failure information
The machine's travel speed is slow.
Cause


valve
Forward or reverse
Above 2.7 MPa

{Above 28 kg/cm2}
Output differential between right and

left or front and rear
Below 0.4 MPa

{Below 4 kg/cm2}

2
Malfunctioning of self-pressure
decompression valve
Control lever
2.83 3.43 MPa

{29 35kg/cm2}
valve
Travel speed
LS-EPC valve output

pressure
Lo
NEUTRAL
Approx. 1.4 MPa

{approx. 14 kg/cm2}
Hi
0 {0}
Malfunction of travel control

valve (spool)
The spool in the travel control valve is presumed to malfunction. Check the spool
itself.

valve)
The pressure compensation valve in the travel control valve is presumed to malfunction. Check the valve itself.

valve (suction valve)
The suction valve in the travel control valve is presumed to malfunction. Check
the valve itself.
valve (bucket)
The LS shuttle valve in the bucket control valve is presumed to malfunction.

Malfunction of travel motor
20-616
Travel relief
30 /min
drive directly.
An internal failure in the final drive may well be determined by an abnormal noise
from within, abnormal heat or metal chip or dust contained in the drained oil.
PC200/220(LC)-7
H-20
H-20 Machine cannot be easily steered or lacks power

Failure information
The machine cannot be easily steered.
Cause


valve (steering spool)
PPC valve output pressure (steering)
NEUTRAL on both sides
0 {0}
Above 2.7 MPa

{Above 28 kg/cm2}
Malfunctioning of travel interlocking solenoid valve
Malfunctioning of travel interlocking valve
0 {0}
2.84 3.43 MPa

{29 35 kg/cm2}
The travel interlocking valve is presumed to malfunction. Check the valve itself.
solenoid valve
0 {0}
2.84 3.43 MPa

{29 35 kg/cm2}
valve
The merge/divide valve is presumed to malfunction. Check the valve itself.
Malfunction of travel control

valve (spool)
The spool in the travel control valve is presumed to malfunction. Check the spool
itself.

valve)
The pressure compensation valve in the travel control valve is presumed to malfunction. Check the valve itself.

valve (suction valve)
The suction valve in the travel control valve is presumed to malfunction. Check
the valve itself.
valve (bucket)
The LS shuttle valve in the bucket control valve is presumed to malfunction.

10
Check valve seal defective at

LS oil pressure pickup port
The seal in the check valve of LS oil pressure pickup port is suspected to be
defective. Check the seal itself.
Malfunctioning of travel motor

11
(safety valve)
The seal in the check valve of the travel motor is suspected to be defective.
Whether the seal is defective or not may well be determined by swapping the
motors between forward and reverse, or right and left.

12
(check valve)
The seal in the check valve of the travel motor is suspected of defect. Check the
seal itself.
motors between forward and reverse, or right and left.
PC200/220(LC)-7
20-617
H-21, H-22
H-21 Travel speed does not shift, or it is too slow or fast.

Failure information
Travel speed does not shift, or it is either too fast or slow.
Cause

Travel speed
Monitoring [15]
Lo
Fine control
(to the extent that the
decelerator is released)
690 mA
(
1
valve
Mi)
Hi
740 mA
0 mA

Travel speed
LS-EPC valve output

pressure
Lo
NEUTRAL
Approx. 1.4 MPa

{approx. 14 kg/cm2}
Hi
Operation
0 {0}
Malfunctioning of travel speed

solenoid valve

(speed shifting)
Travel speed
Solenoid valve output

pressure
Lo
NEUTRAL
0 {0}
Hi
Operation
2.84 3.43 MPa

{29 35 kg/cm2}
The travel motor is presumed to malfunction when shifting speed. Check the
speed shifting portion directly.
H-22 Track shoe does not turn (on one side only)
A track shoe does not turn (only on one side).
Failure information
Cause
Travel control valve (suction

valve) seat defective
The suction valve seat in the travel control valve is suspected of defect. Check
the seat itself.
Travel motor (safety valve)

seat defective
The safety valve seat in the travel motor is suspected of defect. Check the seat
itself.
Travel motor (check valve)

seat defective
The check valve seat in the travel motor is suspected of defect. Check the seat
itself.
Travel Motor speed reduced
20-618
Travel relief
30 /min
drive directly.
A failure inside the final drive may well be determined by an abnormal noise from
within, abnormal heat generated or metal dust or chips contained in the drained
oil.
PC200/220(LC)-7
H-23
H-23 Machine does not swing

Failure information (1) The machine swings neither to the right nor to the left.
Cause

Malfunctioning of swing parking brake solenoid valve
Malfunctioning of swing motor

(parking brake)
Swing
Solenoid valve
NEUTRAL
0 {0}
Operation
2.84 3.43 MPa {29 35 kg/cm2}
The parking brake portion of the swing motor is presumed to malfunction.

Check it directly.
Improper adjustment or malfunctioning of swing motor

(safety valve)
Swing lock switch
Swing control lever
Swing relief pressure
ON
Swing relief
28.42 32.85 MPa

{285 335 kg/cm2}
If the oil pressure does not return to normalcy even after the adjustment, the
safety valve is presumed to malfunction, or suspected of an internal failure.
Swing motor defective
Swing machinery defective
Swing control lever
Amount of oil leakage from swing motor
Swing relief
Below 11 /min
The swing machinery is suspected of an internal failure. Check the inside of the
swing machinery directly.
A failure inside the swing machinery may well be determined by an abnormal
noise from within, abnormal heat generated or metal dust or chips contained in
the drained oil.
Failure information (2) The machine does not swing in one direction.
Cause

Left control lever
NEUTRAL
0 {0}
Swing operation
Above 2.7 MPa {Above 28 kg/cm2}
Malfunctioning of swing control

valve (spool)
The spool in the swing control valve is presumed to malfunction. Check the spool
itself.
Swing motor (suction valve)

seal defective
The seal in the suction valve of the swing motor is suspected of defect. Check the
seal itself.
right and left suction valves and watching if there is any change.
Swing motor (check valve)

seal defective
The seal in the check valve of the swing motor is suspected of defect. Check the
seal itself.
right and left check valves and watching the result.
PC200/220(LC)-7
20-619
H-24
H-24 Swing acceleration is poor, or swing speed is slow

Failure information (1) Swing acceleration is poor, or swing speed is slow.
Cause
valve (all LS shuttles)
The LS shuttle valves for all the control valves are presumed to malfunction.
Check them directly.

(parking brake)
The parking brake portion of the swing motor is presumed to malfunction. Check
it directly.

(safety valve)
Swing lock switch
Swing control lever
ON
Swing relief
28.42 32.85 MPa

{285 335 kg/cm2}
Swing control lever
Amount of oil leakage from swing motor
Swing relief
Below 11 /min
Failure information (2) Swing acceleration is poor only on one side, or swing speed is slow.
Cause

Swing control lever
NEUTRAL
0 {0}
Left or right

valve (spool)
The spool in the swing control valve is presumed to malfunction. Check the valve
itself.

(pressure compensation
valve)
The pressure compensation valve in the swing motor is presumed to malfunction.


seal defective
The seal in the suction valve of the swing motor is suspected of defect. Check the
seal itself.
right and left suction valves and watching the result.

seal defective
The seal in the check valve of the swing motor is suspected of defect. Check the
seal itself.
right and left check valves and watching the result.
20-620
PC200/220(LC)-7
TROUBLESHOOTING
H-25
H-25 Excessive overrun when stopping swing

Failure information (1) The work equipment overruns excessively when stopping swing.

Cause

(safety valve)
Swing lock switch
Swing control lever
ON
Swing relief
28.9 32.9 MPa

{295 335 kg/cm2}
Control lever
Amount of oil leakage from swing

motor
Swing relief
Below 10 l/min
Failure information (2) The work equipment overruns excessivery only one side when stopping swing.

Cause

Swing control lever
NEUTRAL
0 {0}
Left or right
Swing PPC slow return valve

clogged
The PPC slow return valve is suspected of clogging. Check the valve itself.
Whether the valve is clogged or not may well be determined by swapping
the right and left valves and watching the result.

valve (spool)
The spool in the swing control valve is resumed to malfunction. Check the
valve itself.

seal defective
The seal in the suction valve of the swing motor is suspected of defect.
Whether the seal is defective or not may well be determined by swapping
the right and left suction valves and watching the result.

seal defective
The seal in the check valve of the swing motor is suspected of defect.
the right and left check valves and watching the result.
PC300/350(LC)-7
20-621
(7)
TROUBLESHOOTING
H-26, H-27
H-26 There is big shock when stopping swing

There is a big shock caused when stopping a swing motion.
Failure information
Cause

Malfunctioning of swing PPC

valve
Malfunctioning of swing PPC

slow return valve
Swing control lever
NEUTRAL
0 {0}
Left or right
The swing PPC slow return valve is presumed to malfunction. Check the
valve itself.
Whether the valve malfunctions or not may well be determined by swapping the right and left valves and watching the result.
H-27 There is big abnormal noise caused when stopping swing

There is a big abnormal noise caused when stopping a swing motion.
Failure information
Cause
Malfunctioning of backpressure valve
The backpressure valve is presumed to malfunction. Check the valve itself.
Malfunction of swing motor

(safety valve)
The safety valve in the swing motor is presumed to malfunction. Check the
valve itself.
Malfunction of swing motor

(suction valve)
The seal in suction valve of the swing motor is suspected of defect. Check
the seal itself.
the right and left valves and watching the result.
Swing machinery defective
The swing machinery is suspected of an internal failure. Check the inside of

the machinery itself.
A failure inside the swing machinery may well be determined by monitoring
abnormal noise, abnormal heat generated or metal dust or chips contained
in the drained oil.
20-622
(7)
PC300/350(LC)-7
H-28
H-28 Swing natural drift is too big

Failure information (1) Natural drift of the swing is too big (when the parking brake is activated).
When the emergency swing release switch is in the OFF position (this is a normal condition), the
swing and parking brake is activated and the swing is fixed with a disc brake.
Cause

Swing and parking brake solenoid valve malfunctioned
Swing motor (parking brake

portion) malfunctioned
Swing control lever
NEUTRAL
0 {0}
Left or right
2.84 3.43 MPa {29 35 kg/cm2}
The parking portion of the swing motor is suspected of malfunctioning and

interior failure. Check that portion directly.
Failure information (2) Natural drift of the swing is too big (when the parking brake is released).
When the emergency swing release switch is in the ON condition (this is an emergent condition),
the swing and parking brake is released and the swing is retained only hydraulically.
Cause
Swing control valve (spool)

malfunctioned
The seal in the spool of the swing control valve is suspected of defect.
Check the spool itself directly.
Swing control valve (pressure

compensation valve) malfunctioned
The pressure compensation valve seal in the swing control valve is suspected of defect. Check the valve itself directly.
Swing motor (safety valve)

defective
The safety valve seal in the swing motor is suspected of defect. Check the
valve itself directly.

defective
The suction valve seal in the swing motor is suspected of defect. Check the

defective
The check valve seal in the swing motor is suspected of defect. Check the
PC200/220(LC)-7
20-623
TROUBLESHOOTING OF ENGINE
(S-MODE)
METHOD OF USING TROUBLESHOOTING CHARTS ............................................................................. 20-702

S-1 Starting performance is poor (Starting always takes time) ............................................................... 20-706
S-2 Engine does not start........................................................................................................................ 20-708
(1) Engine does not turn ................................................................................................................... 20-708
(2) Engine turns but no exhaust smoke comes out (Fuel is not being injected) ............................... 20-709
(3) Exhaust smoke comes out but engine does not start (Fuel is being injected) ............................ 20-710
S-3 Engine does not pick up smoothly (Follow-up is poor) ..................................................................... 20-711
S-4 Engine stops during operations ........................................................................................................ 20-712
S-5 Engine does not rotate smoothly (Hunting) ...................................................................................... 20-713
S-6 Engine lacks output (or lacks power) ................................................................................................ 20-714
S-7 Exhaust smoke is black (Incomplete combustion) ............................................................................ 20-715
S-8 Oil consumption is excessive (or exhaust smoke is blue) ................................................................ 20-716
S-9 Oil becomes contaminated quickly ................................................................................................... 20-717
S-10 Fuel consumption is excessive ......................................................................................................... 20-718
S-11 Oil is in cooling water, or water spurts back, or water level goes down ............................................ 20-719
S-12 Oil pressure monitor lights up (Drop in oil pressure) ........................................................................ 20-720
S-13 Oil level rises (Water, fuel in oil)........................................................................................................ 20-721
S-14 Water temperature becomes too high (Overheating)........................................................................ 20-722
S-15 Abnormal noise is made ................................................................................................................... 20-723
S-16 Vibration is excessive ....................................................................................................................... 20-724
PC300/350(LC)-7
20-701
(7)
TROUBLESHOOTING
METHOD OF USING TROUBLESHOOTING CHARTS

This troubleshooting chart is divided into three sections: questions, check items, and troubleshooting. The questions and check items are used to
pinpoint high probability causes that can be located
from the failure symptoms or simple inspeciton without using troubleshooting tools.
Next, troubleshooting tools or direct inspection are
used to check the high probability causes to make
final confirmation.
[Questions]
Sections [A] + [B] in the chart on the right corresponds to the items where answers can be obtained
from the user. The items in [B] are items that can be
obtained from the user, depending on the users
level.
[Check items]
The serviceman carries out simple inspection to narrow down the causes. The items under [C] in the
chart on the right correspond to this.
The serviceman narrows down the causes from
information [A] that he has obtained from the user
and the results of [C] that he has obtained from his
own inspection.
[Troubleshooting]
Troubleshooting is carried out in the order of probability, starting with the causes that have been
marked as having the highest probability from information gained from [Questions] and [Check
items].
Causes
[A]
Questions
(1) (2) (3)
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
[C]
(e)
Check items
[B]
Troubleshooting
20-702
(7)
ii
iii
PC300/350(LC)-7
fuel
injec
tion)
Causes
Seiz
The basic method of using the troubleshooting chart

is as follows.
Items listed for [Questions] and [Check items] that
have a relationship with the Cause items are marked
with Q, and of these, causes that have a high probability are marked with w.
Check each of the [Questions] and [Check items]
in turn, and marked the Q or w in the chart for items
where the problem appeared. The vertical column
(Causes) that has the highest number of points is the
most probable cause, so start troubleshooting for
that item to make final confirmation of the cause.
1. For [Confirm recent repair history] in the
[Questions] Section, ask the user, and
mark the Cause column with E to use
as reference for locating the cause of
the failure. However, do not use this
when making calculations to narrow
down the causes.
2. Use the E in the Cause column as reference for [Degree of use (Operated for
long period)] in the [Questions] section
as reference. As a rule, do not use it
when calculating the points for locating
the cause, but it can be included if necessary to determine the order for troubleshooting.
ed t
urbo
char
Clog
ger,
ged
inter
air c
fere
lean
Wor
nce
er e
n pis
le
men
ton
ring
t
Clog
, cyli
ged
nde
, seiz
r
ed f
Imp
uel in
rope
jectio
r fue
l inje
n no
Defe
ction
zzle
ctive
timin
fuel
g
injec
tion
pum
p (e
xces
sive
TROUBLESHOOTING
Confirm recent repair history

Degree of use
PC300/350(LC)-7
Operatred for long period
20-703
(7)
TROUBLESHOOTING
Example of troubleshooting when exhaust gas is black

Let us assume that [Clogged air cleaner] is taken to be the cause of black exhaust gas. Three symptoms
have causal relationship with this problem: [Exhaust gas slowly became black], [Power slowly became
weaker], and [Dust indicator is red].
If we look from these three symptoms to find the causes, we find that there is a relationship with five causes.
Let us explain here the method of using this causal relationship to pinpoint the most probable cause.
S-7
Exhaust gas is black (incomplete combustion)

General causes why exhaust gas is black
Insufficient intake of air
Improper condition of fuel injection
Excessive injection of fuel
Seiz
Legend
: Possible causes (judging from Questions and check items)
: Most probable causes (judging from Questions and Check items)
: Possible causes due to length of use (used for a long period)
: Items to confirm the cause.
ed tu
rboc
Clog
harg
ged
er, in
air c
terfe
Wor
lean
re
n pis
er e
to
leme nce
n
Clog
ring
nt
,
ged
cylin
,
s
der
eize
Imp
d fu
rope
el in
r fue
jec
Defe
l inje
ctive
ction tion noz
zle
fuel
timin
Imp
injec
g
rope
tion
r va
pum
Crus
lve c
p (e
lear
hed
xces
ance
, clo
Lea
sive
gge
kage
dm
fuel
uffle
injec
of a
Defe
r
ir
tion)
b
etwe
ctive
e
conta
n tu
Deff
r
boch
ct of
ectiv
a
valv
e fu
e, va rger and
el in
jecti
lve s
cylin
on p
eat
der
ump
hea
(rac
d
k, plu
n ge
r se
ized
)
Causes

Degree of use
Operated for long period
Questions
Suddenly became black

Color of exhaust gas
Gradually became black

Blue under light load
Engine oil must be added more frequently

Power was lost
Suddenly
Gradually
Non-specified fuel has been used

Noise of interference is heard from around turbocharger
Dust indicator is red
Blow-by gas is excessive
Check items
Engine pickup is poor and combustion is irregular

When exhaust manifold is touched immediately after starting
engine, temperature of some cylinders is low
Match marks on fuel injection pump are out of alignment
Seal on fuel injection pump has come off
Clanging sound is heard from around cylinder head
Exhaust noise is abnormal
Muffler is crushed
Leakage of air between turbocharger and cylinder head, loose clamp
When turbocharger is rotated by hand, it is found to be heavy
When air cleaner is inspected directly, it is found to be clogged
Troubleshooting
When compression pressure is measured, it is found to be low

Speed of some cylinders does not change when operating on
reduced cylinders
When check is made using delivery method, fuel injection timing
is found to be incorrect
Fuel injection pump test shows that fuel injection amount is incorrect
When valve clearance is checked directly it is found to be
outside standard value
When muffler is removed, exhaust gas color returns to normal
20-704
(7)
Replace
Repair
Replace
Adjust
Replace
Adjust
Adjust
Replace
Replace
Clean
Remedy
Replace
When control rack is pushed, it is found to be heavy or does not

return
PC300/350(LC)-7
TROUBLESHOOTING
Five causes
Step 1
Clarify the relationship between the three
symptoms in the [Questions] and [Check items]
section and the five Cause items in the vertical
column.
Three symptoms
Step 2
Add up the total of and marks where the
horizontal lines for the three symptoms and the
vertical columns for the causes intersect.
(1) Clogged air cleaner element:
(2) Air leakage between turbocharger
and cylinder head:
(3) Clogged, seized fuel injection nozzle:
(4) Defective contact of valve, valve seat:
(5) Worn piston ring, cylinder:
Step 3
The calculation in Step 2 show that the closest
relationship is with [Clogged air cleaner element].
Follow this column down to the troubleshooting
area and carry out the troubleshooting item
marked . The Remedy is given as [Clean], so
carry out cleaning, and the exhaust gas color
should return to normal.
PC300/350(LC)-7
20-705
(7)
TROUBLESHOOTING
S-1
S-1 Starting performance is poor (Starting always takes time)

General causes why exhaust smoke comes out but engine takes time to start
Defective electrical system
Insufficient supply of fuel
Improper selection of fuel
(At ambient temperature of 10C or below,
ASTM D975 No. 2 diesel fuel is used)
a Battery charging rate
Causes
100 %
90 %
80 %
75 %
70 %
20C
1.28
1.26
1.24
1.23
1.22
0C
1.29
1.27
1.25
1.24
1.23
10C
1.30
1.28
1.26
1.25
1.24
Wor
n pis
ton r
Defe
ing,
cylin
ctive
der li
cont
Clog
ner
act o
ged
f valv
air c
e, va
Clog
lean
lve s
e
ged
r ele
eat
fuel
men
Clog
filter
t
, stra
ged
feed
iner
Defe
pum
ctive
p ga
uze
elec
filter
trica
l inta
ke a
ir he
ater
Charging rate
Ambient
temperature
The specific gravity should exceed the value for the

charging rate of 70% in the above table.
In cold areas the specific gravity must exceed the value
for the charging rate of 75% in the above table.
Questions

Degree of use of machine
Ease of starting
Gradually became worse

Starts when warm
Preheating monitor does not light up

Replacement of filters has not been carried out according to Operation Manual
Non-specified fuel has being used
Air cleaner clogging monitor lights up
Battery charging monitor lights up
Starting motor cranks engine slowly
When exhaust manifold is touched immediately after starting engine,
temperature of some cylinders is low
Engine does not pick up smoothly, and combustion is irregular
Check items

Timing lock on fuel injection pump does not match
Mud is stuck to fuel tank cap
When engine is cranked with starting motor,
1) Little fuel comes out even when injection pump piping sleeve nut is loosened
2) Little fuel comes out even when fuel filter air bleed plug is loosened
Leakage from fuel piping
There is hunting from engine (rotation is irregular)
When air cleaner element is inspected directly, it is found to be clogged
Troubleshooting
When fuel filter, strainer are inspected directly, they are found to be clogged
When feed pump strainer is inspected directly, it is found to be clogged
Heater mount does not become warm
Yes
Is voltage 26 30V between alternator terminal B and terminal E

with engine at low idling?
No
Either specific gravity of electrolyte or voltage of battery is low

Speed does not change when operation of certain cylinders is stopped
When control rack is pushed, it is found to be heavy or does not return
(check after removing fuel injection pump)
Replace
Clean
Clean
Clean
Correct
Remedy
Replace
When fuel tank cap is inspected directly, it is found to be clogged
Use a test stand when adjusting.
20-706
(7)
PC300/350(LC)-7
PC300/350(LC)-7
Replace
Replace
Clean
Correct
Replace
Adjust
Replace
Replace
Replace
Replace
Defe
ctive
regu
Defe
lator
ctive
alter
Defe
nato
ctive
r
or de
Defe
terio
ctive
rated
injec
batte
Defe
tion
ry
tive
nozz
injec
le
Defe
tion
timin
tive
injec
g
Leak
tion
pum
age,
p
c
lo
(rack
ggin
Clog
, plu
g, air
ged
nger
air b
in fu
stuc
reath
Defe
el pip
k)
ctive
er ho
ing
feed
le in
Defe
f
p
uel t
ump
ctive
ank
boos
t com
pens
ator
canc
el
TROUBLESHOOTING
S-1
Causes
20-707
(7)
TROUBLESHOOTING
S-2
S-2 Engine does not start

(1) Engine does not turn
General causes why engine does not turn
Internal parts of engine seized
a If internal parts of the engine are seized, carry out troubleshooting for S-4 "Engine stops
during operations".
Failure in hydraulic pump system

Defective electrical system
Questions
Defe
ctive
wirin
Defe
g of
ctive
star
or d
ting
Defe
eter
circu
iora
ctive
it
t
e
s
d ba
tarti
Brok
ttery
ng m
en r
otor
ing g
Defe
ear
ctive
safe
Defe
ty re
ctive
lay
batt
Defe
e
ry re
ctive
lay
batt
Defe
ery
ctive
term
inal
eng
Defe
conn
ine s
ctive
ectio
top
sole
star
n
ting
noid
swit
ch
Causes

Condition of horn when
Horn sounds
starting switch is turned ON
Horn volume is low
Speed of rotation is low
When starting switch is
turned to START, pinion
moves out, but
Makes grating noise

Soon disengages pinion again
20-708
(7)
Replace
Replace
Remedy
Replace
For the following conditions 1) - 4), turn the starting switch

OFF, connect the cord, and carry out troubleshooting
1) When terminal B and terminal C of starting switch are
connected, engine starts
2) When terminal B and terminal C of starting motor are
connected, engine starts
3) When terminal B and terminal C of safety relay are connected,
engine starts
4) There is no 24V between battery relay terminal b and terminal
E
When ring gear is inspected directly, tooth surface is found to be
chipped
When linkage of engine stop solenoid is disconnected, engine does
not start
Replace
Troubleshooting
Specific gravity of electrolyte, voltage of battery is low
Replace
When battery is checked, battery electrolyte is found to be low
Replace
When starting switch is turned to ON, linkage does not move
Replace
Battery terminal is loose
Troubleshooting of defective wiring in starting circuit
When starting switch is turned to ON, there is no clicking

sound
Replace
Check items
Makes rattling noise and does not turn

When starting switch is turned to START, pinion does not
move out
PC300/350(LC)-7
TROUBLESHOOTING
S-2
(2) Engine turns but no exhaust smoke comes out (Fuel is not being injected)
General causes why engine turns but no exhaust
smoke comes out
Supply of fuel impossible

Supply of fuel is extremely small
Improper selection of fuel (particularly in winter)
Causes
Brok
en in
jecti
Defe
on p
ctive
ump
injec
drive
Seiz
tion
shaf
ed,
pum
t, ke
brok
p (ra
y
en f
Clog
c
k, plu
eed
ged
p
nge
u
f
uel f
mp
r se
Clog
pisto
ilter,
ized
ged
n
stra
)
feed
i
n
e
Insu
r
pum
fficie
p
s
t
nt fu
rain
Clog
er
el in
ged
tank
, lea
Clog
king
ged
fuel
air b
pipin
Defe
reat
g
ctive
her
h
e
ole i
ngin
Imp
n fu
e sto
rope
el ta
p so
r fue
nk
leno
l use
i
d
d
a Standards for use of fuel
Questions

Exhaust smoke suddenly stops coming out (when starting again)
Replacement of filters has not been carried out according to
Operation Manual
Fuel tank is found to be empty
There is leakage from fuel piping
Check items
When fuel filter is drained, fuel does not come out

1) No fuel comes out even when fuel filter air bleed plug is
loosened
2) No fuel spurts out even when injection pump piping sleeve
nut is loosened
When starting switch is turned to ON, linkage does not move
Rust and water are found when fuel tank is drained
Troubleshooting
Inspect injection pump directly

When control rack is pushed, it is found to be heavy, or does
not return
Inspect feed pump directly
When fuel filter, strainer are inspected directly, they are found
to be clogged
When feed pump strainer is inspected directly, it is found
to be clogged
When fuel cap is inspected directly, it is found to be clogged
PC300/350(LC)-7
Replace
Replace
Repair
Repair
Add
Clean
Clean
Replace
Replace
Remedy
Replace
When linkage of engine stop solenoid is disconnected, engine does

not start
20-709
(7)
TROUBLESHOOTING
S-2
(3) Exhaust smoke comes out but engine does not start (Fuel is being injected)
General causes why exhaust smoke comes out but
engine does not start
Defe
Lack of rotating force due to defective electrical

system
Improper selection of fuel
ctive
, bro
ken v
Defe
alve
ctive
syste
injec
Wor
m (v
tion
alve,
n pis
pum
rocke
ton
p (ra
ring
Clog
r leve
ck, p
, cyl
ged
r, etc
lu
i
n
nge
fuel
der
.)
r
Clog
liner
stuc
filter
ged
k)
,
s
t
rain
feed
e
Clog
r
pum
ged
p str
air c
aine
Defe
lean
r
ctive
er e
leme
intak
Defe
n
e air
t
ctive
hea
or d
ter
Lea
eter
kage
iora
, clo
ted
batt
Clog
ggin
ery
g, a
ged
i
r in
injec
fuel
Clog
tion
syst
ged
nozz
em
air b
le, d
Imp
reat
efec
rope
h
tive
e
r ho
r fue
spra
le in
l use
y
fuel
d
tank
cap
Causes
Questions
Suddenly failed to start

When engine is cranked, abnormal noise is heard from
around cylinder head
Non-specified fuel is being used
Operation Manual
Preheating monitor does not light up
Starting motor cranks engine slowly
Check items
When fuel dial is placed at FULL position, it does not contact stopper
1) Little fuel comes out even when injection pump piping
sleeve nut is loosened
2) No fuel comes out even when fuel filter air bleed plug is
loosened
Troubleshooting

When fuel filter is drained, no fuel comes out
Remove head cover and check directly
When control rack is pushed, it is found to be heavy, or
does not return
When fuel filter, strainer are inspected directly, they are
found to be clogged
When feed pump strainer is inspected directly, it is found to
be clogged
When air cleaner element is inspected directly, it is found to be clogged
Heater mount does not become warm
Either specific gravity of electrolyte or voltage of battery is low
When feed pump is operated, there is no response, or
operation is too heavy
20-710
(7)
Replace
Clean
Clean
Correct
Replace
Correct
Clean
Clean
Clean
Replace
Replace
Remedy
Replace
PC300/350(LC)-7
TROUBLESHOOTING
S-3
S-3 Engine does not pick up smoothly (Follow-up is poor)

General causes why engine does not pick up
smoothly
Improper condition of fuel injction
Improper fuel used
Clog
ged
air c
lean
Clog
er e
ged
leme
f
u
e
l
Clog
nt
filter
ged
, str
aine
feed
Clog
r
p
u
mp
ged
stra
injec
iner
Seiz
tion
ed in
nozz
jectio
le, d
Wor
efec
n pu
n pis
tive
mp
plun
spra
ton
Seiz
ring
ger
y
, cyl
ed t
inde
urbo
r line
char
Imp
rope
ger,
r
r va
inter
lve c
Clog
fere
lear
ged
nce
ance
air b
reat
Clog
her
ged
hole
, lea
in fu
Defe
king
el ta
ctive
fuel
nk c
pipin
cont
ap
act o
g
f val
ve a
nd v
alve
seat
Causes
Questions

Operation Manual
Engine pick-up suddenly became poor

Black
Check items

High idling speed under no load is normal, but speed
suddenly drops when load is applied
Troubleshooting

When air cleaner element is inspected directly, it is found to
be clogged
found to be clogged
When feed pump strainer is inspected directly, it is found to be
clogged
Speed does not change when operation of certain cylinders
is stopped
When control rack is pushed, it is found to be heavy, or does not return
When valve clearance is checked directly, it is found to be
PC300/350(LC)-7
Replace
Correct
Clean
Adjust
Replace
Replace
Replace
Correct
Clean
Clean
Remedy
Clean
When feed pump is operated, operation is too light or too heavy
20-711
(7)
TROUBLESHOOTING
S-4
S-4 Engine stops during operations

General causes why engine stops during operations
Seized parts inside engine

Overheating
a If there is overheating and the engine stops,
carry out troubleshooting for overheating.
Failure in hydraulic pump

a If the engine stops because of a failure in the
hydraulic pump, carry out troubleshooting for
H mode.
20-712
(7)
PC300/350(LC)-7
TROUBLESHOOTING
S-5
S-5 Engine does not rotate smoothly (Hunting)

Gener al caus es why engine does not r otate
smoothly
ctive
ope
Defe
ratio
ctive
n of
adju
gove
Defe
stme
rnor
ctive
nt o
f go
o
pera
Low
v
erno
tion
idlin
r
of co
g sp
Insu
n
e
t
r
ed is
ol ra
fficie
ck
too
nt fu
low
Clog
el in
ged
tank
feed
Clog
pum
ged
p str
f
uel f
aine
Clog
i
lter,
r
ged,
stra
air in
i
ner
Clog
c
ir
cuit
ged,
betw
air in
een
Clog
circu
fuel
ged
it be
tank
air b
twee
and
reat
n
feed
feed
her
pum
pum
hole
p
p an
in fu
d no
el ta
zzle
nk
Air in fuel system

Defective governor mechanism
Defective governor motor mechanism
a If hunting stops when governor spring is disconnected, carry out troubleshooting for E
mode.
Defe
Causes
Questions

Occurs at a certain speed range
Condition of hunting
Occurs at low idling

Occurs even when speed is raised
Occurs on slopes
Replacement of filters has not been carried out according

to Operation Manual
Fuel tank is found to be empty
Rust, water are found when fuel tank is drained
Check items

When feed pump is operated,
1) No response, light, return is quick
2) No response, light, return is normal
Engine speed sometimes rises too far
Engine is sometimes difficult to stop
Seal on injection pump has come off
Troubleshooting
When governor lever is moved it is found to be stiff

When injection pump is tested, governor is found to be
improperly adjusted
does not return
When feed pump strainer is inspected directly, it is
found to be clogged
PC300/350(LC)-7
Clean
Correct
Correct
Clean
Clean
Add
Adjust
Adjust
Adjust
Remedy
Adjust

found to be clogged
20-713
(7)
TROUBLESHOOTING
S-6
S-6 Engine lacks output (or lacks power)

General causes why engine lacks output
Clog
ged
air c
lean
ed t
er e
urbo
leme
char
Wor
nt
ger,
n pis
inter
ton
ring
fere
Clog
,
nce
cylin
ged
fuel
der
Clog
filter
ged
,
s
train
feed
er
Clog
pum
ged
p str
i
n
aine
jecti
Seiz
r
on n
ed in
ozzl
jecti
e, d
Imp
o
n pu
efec
rope
tive
mp
r va
plun
spra
lve c
Defe
g
y
er
lear
ctive
a
n
c
c
o
e
ntac
Ben
t of
t go
valv
vern
e an
or s
Clog
d va
prin
ged
g, d
lve s
, lea
efec
eat
king
Clog
t
i
ve a
f
uel p
ged
djus
air b
iping
t
men
Defe
reat
t
her
ctive
hole
boo
in fu
st co
el ta
mpe
nk
nsat
or d
iaph
ragm

Improper fuel used
(if non-specified fuel is used, output drops)
Lack of output due to overtaking
a If there is overheating and lack of output,
carry out troubleshooting for overheating.
Seiz
Causes

Questions
Power was lost

Suddenly
Gradually

Replacement of filters has not been carried out according
to Operation Manual
Black

Check items

High idling speed under no load is normal, but speed
suddenly drops when load is applied
High idling speed of engine is low
When air cleaner element is inspected directly, it is found to be
clogged
Troubleshooting

found to be clogged
When feed pump strainer is inspected directly, it is found
to be clogged
is stopped
does not return
When valve clearance is checked directly, it is found to be
When fuel dial is placed at FULL position, lever does not contact stopper
When feed pump is operated, operation is too light or too heavy
20-714
(7)
Replace
Clean
Correct
Adjust
Replace
Adjust
Replace
Correct
Clean
Clean
Replace
Replace
Remedy
Clean
PC300/350(LC)-7
TROUBLESHOOTING
S-7
S-7 Exhaust smoke is black (Incomplete combustion)

General causes why exhaust smoke is black
Seiz
ed t
urbo
Clog
char
ger,
ged
air c
inter
Wor
lean
fere
n pis
nce
er e
leme
ton
ring
Clog
nt
, cyl
ged
inde
injec
r
Imp
tion
rope
nozz
r inje
le, d
Defe
ction
ctive
timin efective
injec
g
spra
Imp
tion
y
rope
pum
r va
p
l
ve c
Crus
(exc
lear
essi
hed
ance
ve in
, clo
gge
Leak
jecti
dm
on)
age
uffle
of air
r
Defe
betw
ctive
een
turbo
cont
Defe
char
act o
ctive
ger a
f val
injec
nd in
ve a
tion
take
nd v
pum
alve
man
p (ra
ifold
seat
ck, p
lung
er s
eize
d)
Causes


Questions
Suddenly became black

Gradually became black


Power was lost
Suddenly
Gradually

Check items

When exhaust manifold is touched immediately after
starting engine, temperature of some cylinders is low
Timing lock on fuel injection pump does not match
Exhaust noise is abnormal
Muffler is crushed
Leakage of air between turbocharger and head, loose clamp
When air cleaner element is inspected directly, it is found to be
clogged
Troubleshooting

is stopped
When check is made using delivery method, injection timing
is found to be incorrect
Injection pump test shows that injection amount is incorrect
When valve clearance is checked directly it is found to be
When muffler is removed, exhaust color returns to normal
PC300/350(LC)-7
Replace
Replace
Correct
Replace
Adjust
Adjust
Adjust
Replace
Replace
Clean
Remedy
Replace

does not return
20-715
(7)
TROUBLESHOOTING
S-8
S-8 Oil consumption is excessive (or exhaust smoke is blue)

a Do not run the engine at idling for more than 20
minutes continuously. (Both low and high idling)
Abnormal combustion of oil

External leakage of oil
Wear of lubrication system
Brok
en p
iston
Wor
ring
n pis
ton
ring
Clog
, cyli
ged
nde
brea
r
Lea
ther
kage
or b
reat
from
Lea
her
oil fi
kage
hose
lter
from
or o
Lea
il co
o
i
l pip
kage
oler
ing
from
Lea
oil d
kage
rain
from
plug
Brok
oil p
en o
an o
il co
r cyl
Wor
oler
inde
n se
r he
al at
ad
Wor
turb
ine e
n se
al at
n
d
Wor
blow
n, b
er e
roke
nd
n re
Dus
ar s
Turb
t suc
e
a
ocha
l, se
ked
al su
rger
Wor
in fr
om
n va
r
f
a
c
intak
e
lve (
e sy
stem
stem
, gu
ide)
, bro
ken
seal
General causes why oil consumption is excessive
Causes

Oil consumption suddenly increased

Questions

Engine oil becomes contaminated quickly
Exhaust smoke is blue under light load
Amount of blow-by gas
Excessive
None
Area around engine is dirty with oil

Check items
There is oil in engine cooling water

When exhaust pipe is removed, inside is found to be dirty with oil
When turbocharger air supply pipe is removed, inside is
found to be dirty with oil
Oil level in damper chamber rises
Clamps for intake system are loose
Troubleshooting

When breather element is inspected, it is found to be
clogged with dirty oil
There is external leakage of oil from engine
Pressure-tightness test of oil cooler shows there is leakage
Excessive play of turbocharger shaft
Inspect rear seal directly
When intake manifold is removed, dust is found inside
20-716
(7)
Correct
Correct
Correct
Replace
Replace
Replace
Correct
Correct
Correct
Correct
Clean
Replace
Remedy
Replace
When intake manifold is removed, inside is found to be

dirty with oil
PC300/350(LC)-7
TROUBLESHOOTING
S-9
S-9 Oil becomes contaminated quickly

General causes why oil becomes contaminated
quickly
Entry of exhaust gas due to internal wear

Clogging of lubrication passage
Improper fuel
Improper oil used
Operation under excessive load
PC300/350(LC)-7
20-717
(7)
TROUBLESHOOTING
S-10
S-10 Fuel consumption is excessive

General causes why fuel consumption is excessive
Leakage of fuel
Defe
ctive
injec
Defe
tion
pum
ctive
p (ex
nozz
Defe
cess
le
h
olde
ive in
ctive
r spr
jectio
injec
ay
Defe
t
n)
io
n
ctive
pum
p
f
u
p
e
lung
l inje
Exte
er
ction
rnal
leak
timin
age
g
Leak
from
age
fuel
of fu
pipin
Defe
el in
g, fu
side
ctive
el filt
head
oil se
er
Defe
cove
al in
ctive
r
s
id
e fee
adju
stme
d pu
mp (
nt of
pisto
gove
n)
rnor
sprin
g
Causes
Questions

Condition of fuel
consumption

More than for other machines of same
model
Gradually increased
Suddenly increased
Exhaust smoke color
Black
White

Check items
There is irregular combustion

Timing lock on injection pump is misaligned
There is external leakage of fuel from engine
Engine oil level rises and smells of diesel fuel
Engine low idling and high idling speeds are high
Injection pump measurement shows that injection amount is excessive
Troubleshooting

When control rack is pushed, it is found to be heavy, or does not return
When check is made using delivery method, injection timing is
found to be incorrect
Remove head cover and inspect directly
Remove feed pump and inspect directly
20-718
(7)
Adjust
Correct
Correct
Correct
Adjust
Replace
Replace
Remedy
Adjust
When engine speed is measured, low idling and high idling speeds
are found to be high
PC300/350(LC)-7
TROUBLESHOOTING
S-11
S-11 Oil is in cooling water, or water spurts back, or water level goes down
General causes why oil is in cooling water
Internal leakage in lubrication system
Internal leakage in cooling system
Brok
en o
il co
oler
Brok
core
en c
, Oylind
ring
Brok
er h
en h
ead
, he
y
d
r
ad g
aulic
Hole
aske
s ca
oil c
used
t
oole
Inte
r
b
y pit
rnal
ting
crac
ks in
cylin
der
bloc
k
Causes
Questions

Oil level

Suddenly increased
Gradually increased
Engine oil level has risen, oil is cloudy white

Excessive air bubbles inside radiator, spurts back
Hydraulic oil is cloudy white
When hydraulic oil is drained, water is found
Pressure-tightness test of cylinder head shows there is leakage
PC300/350(LC)-7
Replace
Replace
Replace
Remedy
Replace
Remove oil pan and inspect directly

Replace
Troubleshooting
Check items
Hard water is being used as cooling water
20-719
(7)
TROUBLESHOOTING
S-12
S-12 Oil pressure monitor lights up (Drop in oil pressure)

General causes why oil pressure monitor lights up
Leakage, clogging, wear of lubricating system

Defective oil pressure control
Improper oil used (improper viscosity)
Deterioration of oil due to overheating
a Standards for engine oil selection
20-720
(7)
PC300/350(LC)-7
TROUBLESHOOTING
S-13
S-13 Oil level rises (Water, fuel in oil)

a If there is oil in the cooling water, carry out troubleshooting for "Oil is in cooling water".
Water in oil (milky white)

Fuel in oil (diluted, and smells of diesel fuel)
Entry of oil from other component
Brok
en o
il co
oler
Defe
core
ctive
, Onozz
ring
Brok
le ho
en c
lder
y
l
i
nde
s
le
Wor
eve
r he
n, d
ad,
ama
hea
ged
Defe
d
gask
rear
ctive
et
seal
pum
Lea
surf
p au
kage
ace
x
i
l
iary
of fu
equ
Defe
el fr
ipme
ctive
om
pipin
nt se
p
a
Defe
rt in
g ins
al
side
ctive
ide h
i
n
t
j
ead
h
ectio
erm
Hole
cove
n pu
osta
s ma
r
t
mp
de b
Crac
y pit
ks in
ting
side
cylin
der
bloc
k
General causes why oil level rises
Causes
Questions

There is oil in radiator cooling water

Fuel must be added more frequently
Check items
Exhaust smoke is white

When engine is first started, drops of water come from
muffler
Leave radiator cap open. When engine is run at idling,
an abnormal number of bubbles appear, or water spurts back
Oil level goes down in damper chamber
Oil level goes down in hydraulic tank
Engine oil smells of diesel fuel
Water temperature is low
Troubleshooting
Pressure-tightness test of cylinder head shows there is leakage

Inspect rear seal directly
When pump auxiliary equipment is removed, seal is found to
be damaged
Remove injection pump and inspect directly
Defective contact with thermostat seal valve
PC300/350(LC)-7
Replace
Replace
Correct
Replace
Correct
Replace
Correct
Replace
Replace
Remedy
Replace
Remove oil pan and check directly
20-721
(7)
TROUBLESHOOTING
S-14
S-14 Water temperature becomes too high (Overheating)

General causes why water temperature becomes
too high
Lack of cooling air (deformation, damage of fan)
Drop in heat dissipation efficiency
Defective cooling circulation system
Rise in oil temperature in hydraulic pump system
a Carry out troubleshooting for H mode.
Brok
en w
ater
Clog
pum
ged
p
, cru
shed
Clog
ged
radia
radi
tor f
ator
Defe
ins
core
ctive
t
herm
Defe
osta
ctive
t (do
wate
es n
Lack
r
tem
ot o
of co
p
pen
erat
oling
)
ure
Fan
w
g
belt
aug
ater
e
slipp
Clog
ing,
ged
worn
, bro
fan
ken
Defe
pulle
oil c
ctive
y
o
o
p
ler
ress
Brok
ure
en c
valv
ylind
e
Hole
er h
s ma
ead
, he
d
e
b
ad g
Rise
y pit
aske
ting
in hy
t
drau
lic p
ump
oil te
mpe
ratu
re
Causes
Questions

Condition of overheating
Water temperature
gauge

Suddenly overheated
Always tends to overheat
Rises quickly
Does not go down from red range
Radiator water level monitor lights up

Fan belt whines under sudden load
Cloudy white oil is floating on cooling water
Cooling water flows out from overflow hose
Check items
Excessive air bubbles inside radiator, water spurts back

Engine oil level has risen, oil is cloudy white
There is play when fan pulley is rotated
Radiator shroud, inside of underguard are clogged with dirt or mud
When light bulb is held behind radiator, no light passes through
Water is leaking because of cracks in hose or loose clamps
When belt tension is inspected, it is found to be loose
Temperature difference between top and bottom radiator tanks

is excessive
Temperature difference between top and bottom radiator tanks
is slight
When water filler port is inspected, core is found to be clogged
When function test is carried out on thermostat, it does not
open even at cracking temperature
Carry out troubleshooting for H mode.
Troubleshooting
Hydraulic oil temperature enters red range faster than

engine water temperature
When water temperature is measured, it is found to be normal

When oil cooler is inspected directly, it is found to be clogged
When measurement is made with radiator cap tester, set
pressure is found to be low
20-722
(7)
Replace
Replace
Replace
Replace
Correct
Add
Replace
Replace
Correct
Correct
Remedy
Replace
PC300/350(LC)-7
TROUBLESHOOTING
S-15
S-15 Abnormal noise is made

a Judge if the noise is an internal noise or an external noise.
ssive
wear
Seiz
of pis
ed t
ton r
urbo
ing,
char
Miss
cylin
ger,
ing,
der li
inter
seiz
ner
fere
ed b
Clog
nce
ushi
ged
n
,
g
seiz
Defe
ed in
ctive
jecti
injec
on n
Defe
tion
ozzl
ctive
pum
e
injec
p (ra
Defo
t
ck, p
i
o
n pu
rme
lung
d fa
mp
er s
n, fa
Defe
(exc
eize
n be
essi
ctive
d)
v
l
t
e
a
i
n
djus
injec
t
e
Brok
r
f
eren
tme
t
i
en d
o
n
nt o
)
ce
ynam
f val
ic va
Imp
ve c
rope
lve s
lear
ystem
r ge
ance
ar tr
Leak
(valv
ain b
age
e, ro
of air
ackl
cker
ash
Defe
b e tw
lever
ct ins
een
, etc
turbo
ide m
.)
ch a r
uffle
ger a
r (div
nd in
iding
ta ke
boar
d ou
man
t of p
ifold
ositio
n)
Causes
General causes why abnormal noise is made

Abnormality due to defective parts
Abnormal combustion
Air sucked in from intake system
Exce
Questions

Condition of abnormal
noise
Gradually occurred
Suddenly occurred


Black
Metal particles are found in oil filter

Check items
Engine pickup is poor and combustion is abnormal

Abnormal noise is loud when accelerating engine
Leakage of air between turbocharger and cylinder head, loose clamp
Vibrating noise is heard from around muffler
Troubleshooting
Remove gear cover and inspect directly

Speed does not change when operation of certain cylinders is
stopped
When control rack is pushed, it is found to be heavy, or does
not return
Fan is deformed, belt is loose
When valve clearance is checked, it is found to be outside
standard value
Remove cylinder head cover and inspect directly
PC300/350(LC)-7
Replace
Replace
Replace
Correct
Replace
Correct
Replace
Correct
Replace
Replace
Replace
Remedy
Replace
When muffler is removed, abnormal noise disappears
20-723
(7)
TROUBLESHOOTING
S-16
S-16 Vibration is excessive
General causes why vibration is excessive
Defective parts (abnormal wear, breakage)

Improper alignment
Abnormal combustion
Causes
Wor
n co
nne
cting
Wor
n ca
rod,
mb
main
u
Loo
shin
bea
se e
g
ring
ngin
em
Brok
oun
en p
ting
art i
bolts
nsid
Cen
, bro
e da
ter o
ken
mpe
f en
cush
gine
r
Imp
rope
ion
and
r ge
h
ydra
ar tr
Defe
ulic
ain b
ctive
pum
dyna
ackl
pm
Defe
mic v
ash
isali
ctive
alve
gne
syste
d
injec
m (va
tion
lve, r
pum
ocke
p (e
r leve
xces
r, etc
sive
. stuc
fuel
k)
injec
tion)
a If there is abnormal noise together with the vibration, carry out troubleshooting also for "Abnormal
noise is made".
Questions

Condition of vibration

Suddenly increased
Gradually increased
Non-specified oil is being used

Metal particles are found in oil filter
Metal particles are found when oil is drained
Check items
Oil pressure is low at low idling

Vibration occurs at mid-range speed
Vibration follows engine speed
Exhaust smoke is black
Troubleshooting
Remove side cover and inspect directly

Inspect directly for loose engine mounting bolts, broken cushion
Inspect inside damper directly
When face runout and radial runout are inspected, they are
found to be incorrect
Remove front cover and inspect directly
20-724
(7)
Adjust
Replace
Correct
Correct
Replace
Replace
Replace
Remedy
Replace
PC300/350(LC)-7
30
DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY
12
HOW TO READ THIS MANUAL . . . . . . . . . . 30-3
Removal and Installation of
Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-3
Disassembly and Assembly of
Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-4
PRECAUTIONS WHEN PERFORMING
OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-5
SPECIAL TOOL LIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-6-1
SKETCHES OF SPECIAL TOOLS . . . . . . . . 30-6-5
STARTING MOTOR ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . 30-7
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-7
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-7
FUEL INJECTION PUMP ASSEMBLY . . . . . . 30-8
Special Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-8
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-8
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-10
ENGINE FRONT SEAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-12
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-12
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-12-1
ENGINE REAR SEAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-12-2
Special Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-12-2
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-12-2
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-12-3
CYLINDER HEAD ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . 30-15
Special Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-15
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-15
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-18
RADIATOR ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-21
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-21
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-22
HYDRAULIC OIL COOLER ASSEMBLY . . . 30-23
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-23
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-24
ENGINE AND HYDRAULIC PUMP
ASSEMBLIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-25
Special Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-25
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-25
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-28
FINAL DRIVE ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-29
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-29
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-29
Special Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-30
Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-30
Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-33
SWING MOTOR, SWING
MACHINERY ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . 30-40
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-40
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-40
Special Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-41
PC300/350(LC)-7
Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-41
Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-43
SWING MOTOR, SWING MACHINERY
ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-48
Special Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-48
Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-48
Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-48-2
CARRIER ROLLER ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . 30-49
Special Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-49
Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-49
TRACK ROLLER ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-50
Special Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-50
Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-50
IDLER ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-51
Special Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-51
Disassembly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-51
Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-52
RECOIL SPRING ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-54
Special Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-54
Disassembly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-54
Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-55
SPROCKET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-56
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-56
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-56
TRACK SHOE ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-57
Special Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-57
Expansion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-57
Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-58
SWING CIRCLE ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-59
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-59
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-59
REVOLVING FRAME ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . 30-60
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-60
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-62
CENTER SWIVEL JOINT ASSEMBLY . . . . . 30-63
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-63
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-64
Special Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-65
Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-65
Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-65
HYDRAULIC TANK ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . 30-66
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-66
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-67
CONTROL VALVE ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . 30-68
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-68
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-70
Special Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-71
Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-72
30-1
(8)

12
HYDRAULIC PUMP ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . 30-73
Special Tools. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-73
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-73
Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-75
OIL SEAL IN HYDRAULIC PUMP
INPUT SHAFT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-76
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-76
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-76
WORK EQUIPMENT PPC VALVE
ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-77
Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-77
TRAVEL PPC VALVE ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . 30-78
Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-78
HYDRAULIC CYLINDER ASSEMBLY . . . . . 30-79
Special Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-79
Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-79
Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-81
WORK EQUIPMENT ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . 30-85
Special Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-85
Removal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-85
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-86
AIR CONDITIONER UNIT ASSEMBLY. . . . . 30-88
Special Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-88
Removal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-88
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-90
COUNTERWEIGHT ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . 30-91
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-91
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-91
OPERATORS CAB ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . 30-92
Removal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-92
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-93
OPERATORS CAB GLASS
(STUCK GLASS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-97
Special Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-98
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-98
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-99
FRONT WINDOW ASSEMBLY. . . . . . . . . . 30-107
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-107
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-109
MONITOR ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-113
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-113
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-113
GOVERNOR PUMP CONTROLLER
ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-114
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-114
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-114
30-2
(8)
PC300/350(LC)-7
HOW TO READ THIS MANUAL
12

REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION OF ASSEMBLIES
SPECIAL TOOLS
INSTALLATION OF PARTS
Special tools that are deemed necessary for

removal or installation of parts are listed.
List of the special tools contains the following
kind of information.
1) Necessity
: Special tools which cannot be substituted, should always be used.
: Special tools which are very useful if
available, can be substituted with
commercially available tools.
2) Distinction of new and existing special

tools
N: Tools with new part numbers, newly
developed for this model.
R: Tools with upgraded part numbers,
remodeled from already available
tools for other models.
Blank: Tools already available for other models, used without any modification.
3) Circle mark ({) in sketch column:
A circle mark means that a sketch of the
special tool is presented in the section of
Sketches for Special Tools.
Part No. of special tools starting with 79*T
means that they are locally made parts and as
such not interchangeable with those made by
Komatsu in Japan e.g. 79*T--- xxx --- xxxx.
Except where otherwise instructed, install

parts is the reverse order of removal.
Instructions and precautions for installing
parts are shown with
mark in the
INSTALLATION Section, identifying which
step the instructions are intended for.
Marks shown in the INSTALLATION Section
stand for the following.
This mark indicates safety-related precautions which must be followed when

doing the work.
This mark gives guidance or precautions when doing the procedure.
This mark stands for a specific coating
agent to be used.
This mark indicates the specified
torque.
This mark indicates an amount of oil or
water to be added.
SKETCHES OF SPECIAL TOOLS
Various special tools are illustrated for the

convenience of local manufacture.
REMOVAL OF PARTS
The REMOVAL Section contains procedures,

precautions and the amount of oil or water to
be drained.
Various symbols used in the REMOVAL Section are explained and listed below.
This mark indicates safety-related precautions which must be followed

when doing the work.
This mark gives guidance or precautions when doing the procedure.
This mark shows that there are instructions or precautions for installing
parts.
This mark shows oil or water to be
drained.
PC300/350(LC)-7
30-3
c
12
DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY OF ASSEMBLIES

SPECIAL TOOLS
ASSEMBLY
Special tools which are deemed necessary for

disassembly and assembly are listed in this
section.
List of the special tools contains the following
kind of information.
1) Necessity
: Special tools which cannot be substituted, should always be used.
: Special tools which are very useful if
available, can be substituted with
commercially available tools.
2) Distinction of new and existing special
tools
N: Tools with new part numbers, newly
developed for this model.
R: Tools with upgraded part numbers,
remodeled from already available
tools for other models.
Blank: Tools already available for other models, used without any modification.
3) Circle mark ({) in sketch column:
A circle mark means that a sketch of the
special tool is presented in the section of
Sketches for Special Tools.
Section titled ASSEMBLY contain procedures, precautions and the know-how for the
work, as well as the amount of oil or water to
be added.
Various symbols used in the ASSEMBLY Section are explained and listed below.
doing the work.
This mark gives guidance or precautions
when doing the procedure.
This mark stands for a specific coating
agent to be used.
This mark indicates the specified torque.
This mark indicates an amount of oil or
water to be added.

1) Various special tools are illustrated for the
convenience of local manufacture.
4) Part No. of special tools starting with 79*T

means that they are locally made parts
and as such not interchangeable with
those made by Komatsu in Japan e.g.
79*T--- xxx --- xxxx.
DISASSEMBLY
The DISASSEMBLY Section contains procedures, precautions and the amount of oil or
water to be drained.
Various symbols used in the DISASSEMBLY
Section are explained and listed below.
doing the work.
This mark gives guidance or precautions
when doing the procedure.
This mark shows that there are instructions or precautions for installing parts.
This mark shows oil or water to be
drained.
30-4
c
PC300/350(LC)-7
PRECAUTIONS WHEN PERFORMING OPERATION
12

Be sure to follow the general precautions given below when performing removal or installation (disassembly or assembly) of units.
1. Precautions when performing removal work

If the engine coolant water contains antifreeze, dispose of it properly.
After disconnecting hoses or tubes, cover them or install blind plugs to prevent dirt or dust from
entering.
When draining oil, prepare a container of adequate size to catch the oil.
Confirm the match marks showing the installation position, and make match marks in the necessary
places before removal to prevent any mistake during assembly.
To avoid loosening any wire contacts, do not pull on the wires. In-order to prevent excessive force
to the wiring, hold onto the connectors when disconnecting them.
Fasten tags to wires and hoses to identify them and show their installation position. This helps prevent any mistakes when re-installing.
Count and check the number and thickness of the shims, and keep them in a safe place.
When raising or lifting components, be sure to use proper lifting equipment of ample strength and
safety.
When using forcing screws to remove any components, tighten the forcing screws uniformly in
turn.
Before removing any unit, clean the surrounding area and install a cover to prevent any dust or dirt
from entering after removal.
Precautions when handling piping during disassembly
Install the following blind plugs into the piping after disconnecting it during disassembly operations.
A. Face seal type hoses and tubes
Nominal number
Plug (nut end)
Nut (elbow end)
02
07376-70210
02789-00210
03
07376-70315
02789-00315
04
07376-70422
02789-00422
05
07376-70522
02789-00522
06
07376-70628
02789-00628
B. Split flange type hoses and tubes

Nominal number
Flange (hose end)
Sleeve head (tube end)
Split flange
04
07379-00400
07378-10400
07371-30400
05
07379-00500
07378-10500
07371-30500
C. If the part is not under hydraulic pressure, the following corks can be used:
Dimensions
Nominal
number
Part Number
06
07049-00608
08
07049-00811
6.5
11
10
07049-01012
10
8.5
12
12
07049-01215
12
10
15
14
07049-01418
14
11.5
18
16
07049-01620
16
13.5
20
18
07049-01822
18
15
22
20
07049-02025
20
17
25
22
07049-02228
22
18.5
28
24
07049-02430
24
20
30
27
07049-02734
27
22.5
34
PC300/350(LC)-7
30-5
3
12
2. Precautions when carrying out installation work
Tighten all bolts and nuts (sleeve nuts) to the specified (KES) torque.
Install the hoses without twisting or interference.
Replace all gaskets, O-rings, cotter pins, and lock plates with new parts.
Bend the cotter pin or lock plate securely.
When coating with adhesive, clean the part and remove all oil and grease, then coat the threaded
portion with two or three drops of adhesive.
When coating with gasket sealant, clean the surface and remove all oil and grease, check that there
is no dirt or damage, then coat uniformly with gasket sealant.
Clean all parts, and correct any damage, dents, burrs, or rust.
Coat rotating parts and sliding parts with engine oil.
When press-fitting parts, coat the surface with anti-friction compound (LM-P).
After installing snap rings, check that the snap ring is installed securely in the ring groove.
When connecting wiring connectors, clean the connector to remove all oil, dirt, or water, then connect it securely.
When using eye bolts, check that there is no deformation or deterioration. Screw them in fully, and
align the direction of the hook.
When tightening split flanges, tighten uniformly in turn to prevent excessive tightening on one side.
When operating the hydraulic cylinders for the first time after reassembling the cylinders, pumps and other
hydraulic equipment removed for repair, bleed the air as follows:
1.
Start the engine and run it at low idle.
2. Operate the work equipment control lever to operate the hydraulic cylinders, 4 - 5 times, stopping
the cylinders 100 mm from the end of their stroke.
3. Next, operate the hydraulic cylinder 3 - 4 times to the end of its stroke.
4. After doing this run the engine at normal speed.
When using the machine for the first time after repair or long storage, follow the same procedure.
3. Precautions when completing the operations

If the engine coolant water has been drained, tighten the drain valve, and add coolant water to the
specified level. Run the engine to circulate the coolant water through the system. Then check the
coolant water level again.
If the hydraulic equipment has been removed and installed again, add engine oil to the specified
level. Run the engine to circulate the oil through the system. Then check the oil level again.
If the piping or hydraulic equipment have been removed for repair, bleed the air from the system
after reassembling the parts.
For details, see TESTING AND ADJUSTING, Bleeding air.
Add the specified amount of grease (molybdenum disulphide grease) to the work equipment
related parts.
30-6
PC300/350(LC)-7
SPECIAL TOOL LIST
SPECIAL TOOL LIST

Tools with part number 79 Ttured).
cannot be supplied (they are items to be locally manufac-
Necessity:
............ Cannot be substituted, must always be installed (used)

............. Extremely useful if available or can be substituted with commercially available
part
New/Remodel :N............ Tools with new part numbers, newly developed for this model
:R ............ Tools with upgraded part numbers, remodeled from items already available
for other models
:Blank: ... Tools already available for other models, can be used without any modification
Q'ty
Remover
Removal of fuel injection

pump
3 795-931-1100
Seal puller
Removal of engine seal
1 795-799-1170
Puller
Removal and installation

of nozzle holder assembly
2 790-331-1110
Wrench
Retightening of cylinder
head bolt
796-460-1210
Oil stopper
796-770-1320
Adapter
796-627-1610
Wrench assembly
796-627-1620 Wrench
796-427-1140 Pin
01314-20612 Screw
Part No.
1 795-799-1131
A 2 795-799-1390
Part name
Engine assembly
B
Engine, hydraulic pump assembly
Final drive assembly
Nature of work, remarks
Oil stopper

of nut
796T-627-1630
Push tool
790-101-2510
Block
791-830-1320
Rod
01580-11613
Nut
790-101-2570
Washer
01643-31645
Washer
790-105-2100
Jack assembly
790-101-1102
Pump
3 791-580-1510
Installer
Installation of floating
seal
4 790-331-1110
Wrench
Tightening of cover bolt
D
2
PC300/350(LC)-7
Sketch
Necessity
Gear
Symbol
Component
New/Remodel
Tools marked
in the Sketch column are tools introduced in the sketches of the special tools (See
SKETCHES OF SPECIAL TOOLS).
Installation of bearing
30-6-1
(8)
Q'ty
Push tool
Press-fitting of bearing
2 796T-626-1140
Push tool
Press-fitting of oil seal
3 790-201-2480
Push tool
Push tool kit
Part No.
790-101-5401
E
4
790-101-5521 Plate
790-101-5421 Grip
01010-51240
Track roller assembly
Idler assembly
1
Recoil spring assembly
Track shoe assembly
791-601-1000
Installer
791-430-3230
Oil pump
796-670-1010
Installer
791-601-1000
Oil pump
796-570-1020
Installer
791-601-1000
Oil pump
791-685-8006
Compressor
791-635-3160
Extension
790-101-1600
Cylinder
(686 kN {70 t} )
790-101-1102
Pump
790-201-1500
Push tool kit
790-201-1620 Plate
790-101-5021 Grip
01010-50816
Bolt
791-630-3000
Remover & installer
Cylinder
(980 kN {100 t} )
Pump
Wrench
Push-puller
1 790-101-1300
790-101-1102
2 790-331-1110
790-101-2501
Center swivel joint assembly
30-6-2
(8)
Bolt
Push tool
5 793T-815-1110
Carrier roller assembly
Part name
Sketch
Necessity
Swing motor, swing

machinery assembly
1 796T-626-1110
Symbol
Component
SPECIAL TOOL LIST

New/Remodel
Press-fitting of oil seal
Refilling oil
Refilling oil
Disassembly and assembly of recoil spring
Installation of dust seal
790-101-2510 Block
790-101-2520 Screw
791-112-1180 Nut
790-101-2540 Washer
790-101-2630 Leg
790-101-2570 Plate
790-101-2560 Nut
790-101-2650 Adapter
Extraction of master pin
Tightening of shoe bolt
Disassembly and assembly of center swivel joint

assembly
PC300/350(LC)-7
796-946-1310
Guide
(For 723-46-40100, 723-46-40601)

796-946-1810
1
Guide
(For 723-46-43100, 723-46-43400)

796-946-2110
Guide
(For 723-46-44100)
796-946-2210
Guide
(For 723-46-45100)
796-946-1320
Guide
(For 723-46-40100, 723-46-40601)

796-946-1820
Guide
(For 723-46-43100, 723-46-43400)

2
Control valve assembly
796-946-2120
Guide
(For 723-46-44100)
796-946-2220
Guide
(For 723-46-45100)
796-946-1420
Guide
(For 723-46-42800)
796-946-1330
Sleeve
Sleeve
796-946-2130
Sleeve
(For 723-46-44100)
796-946-2230
Sleeve
Sleeve
(For 723-46-42800)
PC300/350(LC)-7
Replacement of pressure compensation valve

seal
(For 723-46-45100)
796-946-1430
Replacement of pressure compensation valve

seal
(For 723-46-43100, 723-46-43400)

3
(For 723-46-40100, 723-46-40601)

796-946-1830
Sketch
Part name
New/Remodel
Part No.
Q'ty
SPECIAL TOOL LIST
Necessity
Component
Symbol
30-6-3
(8)
790-102-4300
Wrench assembly
790-102-4310
Pin
Expander
796-720-1680
Ring
07281-01589
Clamp
790-201-1702
Push tool kit
1 790-502-1003
3 790-720-1000
4
Hydraulic cylinder assembly
N
5
790-201-1851 Push tool kit

(for bucket, boom)
790-201-1861 Push tool (for arm)
790-101-5021 Grip
01010-50816
Bolt
790-201-1500
Push tool kit
790-101-5021 Grip
6 01010-50816
Work equipment assembly
Air conditioner assembly
Operators cab glass
30-6-4
(8)
Disassembly and assembly of hydraulic cylinder

assembly
of piston assembly
Installation of piston ring
Press-fitting of bushing
Bolt
1
1
790-201-1670 Plate (for arm)
Remover
Plate
790-201-1660
(for bucket, boom)
796-670-1100
Sketch
Cylinder repair stand
Part No.
New/Remodel
Part name
Q'ty
SPECIAL TOOL LIST
Necessity
Component
Symbol
Press-fitting of dust seal
796-670-1110 Sleeve
796-670-1120 Plate
796-670-1130 Screw
791-775-1150 Adapter
01643-33080 Washer
01803-13034 Nut
790-101-4000
Puller
(490 kN {50 t} long)
790-101-1102
Pump (294 kN {30 t} )
799-703-1200
Service tool kit
799-703-1100
Vacuum pump (100V)
799-703-1111
Vacuum pump (220V)
799-703-1121
Vacuum pump (240V)
799-703-1401
Gas leak detector
1 793-498-1210
Lifter (Suction cup)
2 20Y-54-13180
Adapter
Removal of foot pin
Charging of air conditioner gas

of operators cab glass
PC300/350(LC)-7

Note:
Komatsu cannot accept any responsibility for special tools manufactured according to these
sketches.
D2 Push tool
E1 Push tool
PC300/350(LC)-7
30-6-5
(8)
Note:
Komatsu cannot accept any responsibility for special tools manufactured according to these
sketches.
E2 Push tool
E5 Push tool
30-6-6
(8)
PC300/350(LC)-7
STARTING MOTOR ASSEMBLY
12
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION OF STARTING MOTOR

ASSEMBLY
REMOVAL
k Disconnect the cable from the negative () terminal of the battery.

1.
Open up the engine hood.
2. Disconnect the two wires from the engine

starting motor at:
Wire (1) and (2) from terminal B.
INSTALLATION
Install in reverse order of removal.

3 Engine starting motor terminal B
Securing nut:
19.6 25.5 Nm {2.0 2.6 kgm}
2 Both faces of engine starting motor
gasket: Gasket sealant (LG-1)
3. Remove 3 mounting bolts (3) to detach engine

starting motor assembly (4).
30-7
(8)
FUEL INJECTION PUMP ASSEMBLY
12
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION OF FUEL INJECTION PUMP

ASSEMBLY
8. Disconnect engine stop motor rod (7).
Gear
2 795-799-1390
Remover
Part No.
Part name
Sketch
Qty
1 795-799-1131
Mark
Distinction
Necessity
SPECIAL TOOLS
9. Disconnect governor rod (8).
REMOVAL
k Disconnect the negative () terminal of the

battery.
1.
Open up the engine hood.
2. Remove radiator fan guard (1).

3. Disconnect air compressor hose clamp (2).
4. Remove bracket (3).
10. Disconnect exhaust brake hose (9) and lubrication tube (10).
11. Disconnect tube (11) between the fuel filter
and the fuel injection pump.
5. Remove two hose clamps (4).

6. Disconnect tube (5).
7.
Disconnect engine stop motor connector (6).
30-8
(8)
12. Disconnect fuel return hoses (12) and (13).

When disconnecting hoses, fuel flows
out. Put a wooden plug in them to stop
the spillage.
12
13. Disconnect M34 air compressor connector
(14).
14. Loosen adjusting bolts (15), (16) and (17) to
remove fan belt (18).
15. Remove bracket (19).
18. Turn cap (22) to remove it.

When removing the cap, use a filter
wrench.
16. Disconnect 6 delivery tubes (20).
19. Remove nut (23) and washer (24) from the

fuel injection pump.
Be careful, do not let the nut and washer
fall inside the case.
17. Set the fuel injection timing to the top of the
No. 1 cylinder according to the following procedure.
1) Using tool A1 (gear), rotate the engine.
Refer to the "Testing and adjusting
fuel injection timing" section in this
manual.
Set yellow mark "a" of the crank pulley to the top.
2) Push in timing pin (21) of the fuel injection pump drive gear.
If timing pin (21) cannot be pushed in,
the piston of the No. 6 cylinder is at
the top. In this case, rotate the engine
further to set yellow mark "a" of the
crank pulley to the top again.
30-9
(8)

12
20. Using tool A2, separate shaft and drive gear
from the fuel injection pump.
INSTALLATION

3 Joint bolt:
36 5 Nm {3.67 0.51 kgm}
Refer to the "Inspection and adjustment of
air compressor belt tension" section of
the TESTING AND ADJUSTING chapter in
this manual.
21. Remove 2 mounting brackets (25) at the lower

part of the fuel injection pump.
3 Sleeve nut:
24 4 Nm {2.45 0.41 kgm}
3 Nut: 178 13 Nm {18.2 1.3 kgm}
22. Remove 4 nuts (26) and remove fuel injection

pump assembly (27).
30-10
(8)
Mount the fuel injection pump assembly

1) Check that the timing pin is properly
adjusted to the fuel injection timing.
Refer to Item 10 in the preceding
REMOVAL procedure.
2) Remove plug (28). Reverse fuel injection pump timing pin (29) and reinstall
the plug.
Check that the cutout on the timing
pin is engaged with protrusion "a"
inside the pump.
Refer to the "Inspection and adjustment of fuel injection timing" section
in the TESTING AND ADJUSTING
chapter, in this manual.
12
3) Install the fuel injection pump assembly (27) and secure it with 4 nuts (26).
3 Securing nut:
44 6 Nm {4.49 0.61 kgm}
4) Install washer (24) and temporarily

secure it with nut (23).
When installing the nut and washer,
be careful not to let them fall into the
case.
k Tighten the nut temporarily to the following torque. Take care not to damage the timing pin.
3 Nut:
178 13 Nm {18.2 1.3 kgm}
5) Disengage the fuel injector pump timing pin (on the timing gear side) from
protrusion "a", and return the pin to
its original position.
Air bleeding
Bleed air from the fuel injection system.
30-11
(8)
ENGINE FRONT SEAL
12
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION OF ENGINE FRONT SEAL

REMOVAL
1.
Remove the radiator and hydraulic oil cooler

assembly, refer to the "Removal of radiator
and hydraulic oil cooler assembly" in this
manual.
2. Remove radiator fan (1).

3. Loosen tension pulley (2) to remove fan belt
(3).
4. Loosen tension pulley (4) to remove alternator belt (5).
5. Remove the 4 mounting bolts to detach
damper (6).
6.
Remove the 4 mounting bolts to detach front

pulley (7).
Make counter marks on front pulley (7)
and front cover (since the stamping mark
of 1-6 TOP is on front pulley (7)).
30-12
(8)
7.
Remove 5 mounting nuts to take off seal (8)

from seal carrier (9).
ENGINE FRONT SEAL
12
INSTALLATION
The plastic part P in the engine front seal is
provided as a pilot (guide) that is used in
installing the crankshaft. So, do not remove it.
1.
Apply some amount of neutral detergent to

the outer periphery of engine front seal.
5. Push pilot P against the crankshaft and push

it together with seal carrier (9) into the crankshaft.
6. Remove pilot P.
7.
Tighten 5 seal carrier (9) mounting bolts

using the sequence shown in the figure
below.
3 Seal carrier mounting bolt:
9.8 2 Nm {1 0.2 kgm}
Check that the engine front seal has been
mounted to the seal carrier to 0.5 1 mm.
2. Using a clean cloth, remove adherents from

the crankshaft flange.
3. Apply the following to the mounting hole for

the seal carrier.
2 Inside of seal carrier mounting hole:

Apply a 1 2 mm diameter ThreeBond 1207D or its equivalent.
4. Install engine front seal (8) to seal carrier (9).

Mounting dimension: 0.5 1 mm
Carry out installation in the reverse order to

removal.
[*1]
3 Fan mounting bolt:

59 74 Nm {6 7.5 kgm}
[*2]
Temporarily install the front pulley and
apply the fan belt and then tighten them
to the specified torque.
3 Front pulley mounting bolt:
200 10 Nm {20.4 1 kgm}
30-12-1
(8)
ENGINE REAR SEAL
12
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION OF ENGINE REAR SEAL

4. Remove the mounting bolt, set the guide bolt,
and then lift off flywheel (4) to remove it. [*2]
A3
795-931-1100
Seal puller
Sketch
Part name
Distinction
Part No.
Qty
Mark
Necessity
SPECIAL TOOLS
5. Temporarily lift off flywheel housing (5),

remove the mounting bolts, set the guide
bolt, and then lift off the flywheel housing to
remove it.
[*3]
4
REMOVAL

Remove the hydraulic pump assembly, refer
to the "Hydraulic pump assembly removal"
section in this manual.
Flywheel housing (5): 70 kg
6. Remove rear cover (6).

7.
1.
Flywheel assembly: 45 kg
Remove rear seal (7) from rear cover (6).

Take care not to damage the seal attached
to the flywheel housing and the surface of
the seal in contact with the crankshaft.
2. Remove damper assembly (10).
3. Disconnect engine speed sensor connector

(1) and loosen locknut (2) to disconnect
engine speed sensor (3) from flywheel housing (5).
[*1]
30-12-2
(8)
If you cannot easily remove engine rear

seal (7) from the crankshaft, drill a hole in
the right and left sides of engine rear seal,
approximately 3 mm in diameter. Using
seal puller A3, remove the seal through
the pulling impact created by slide hammer (SH).
ENGINE REAR SEAL
12
INSTALLATION
1.
Clean and degrease the surface of gasket

between the rear cover and the cylinder block
and let dry.
2. Clean and degrease the surface of seal lip (on

the crankshaft periphery) and let dry.
5. Using alignment tool A provided with the

engine rear seal, push rear seal (7) into rear
cover (6) until the desired depth is reached.
6. Remove alignment tool A.
7.
3. Apply some amount of neutral detergent to
the outer periphery of engine rear seal.
The plastic part P in the engine rear seal
is provided as a pilot (guide) that is used
in installing the crankshaft. So, do not
remove it.
Push pilot P against the crankshaft and push

it together with rear cover (6) into the crankshaft.
Remember to put gasket G between the
cylinder block and the rear cover.
Use guide pin [2].
8. Remove pilot P.
4. Install engine rear seal (7) to rear cover (6).
30-12-3
(8)

12
9. Reinstall alignment tool A to check that rear
seal (7) is fitted up to the desired depth.
The difference between the cylinder block
bottom and rear cover (6) bottom must be
within 0.00 0.10 mm.
ENGINE REAR SEAL
[*1]
2 Thread of engine speed sensor: LG-6

Installing the engine speed sensor:
1) Screw the sensor until it comes into contact with the gear.
2) Back off it 1 1/6 turns and tighten the
locknut.
Clearance between engine speed sensor and
flywheel: 0.75 1 mm
3 Engine speed sensor locknut:
69 74 Nm {7 7.5 kgm}
[*2]
Tighten the mounting bolts
sequence shown in the figure.
using
the
3 Flywheel mounting bolt:

137 7 Nm {13.97 0.71 kgm}
Do the above procedure without removing alignment tool A.

10. Remove guide pin [2] and tighten 8 rear cover
mounting bolts using the sequence shown in
the figure below.
3 Rear cover mounting bolt:
10 2 Nm {1.02 0.2 kgm}
The projection of rear cover gasket G
above the cylinder block bottom must be
within 0.25 mm. (See mark a portion.)
There should not be more than 0.2 mm variation of flywheel to flywheel housing.
11. Remove alignment tool A.

removal.
30-12-4
(8)
ENGINE REAR SEAL
12
[*3]
2 Apply a 1 3 mm diameter gasket

sealant to the periphery of mounting
bolt hole at the cylinder block:
Tighten the mounting bolts using the
sequence shown in the figure.
3 Flywheel housing mounting bolt:
77 12 Nm {7.85 1.22 kgm}
30-12-5
(8)
ENGINE REAR SEAL
12
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION OF ENGINE REAR SEAL

REMOVAL
INSTALLATION
1.
Remove the Hydraulic Pump Assembly, refer

to the Hydraulic Pump Assembly Removal
2. Remove damper assembly (1).
Flywheel mounting bolt:

137 7 Nm (13.97 0.71 kgm)
Tighten the mounting bolts
sequence illustrated below.
in
the
3. Remove flywheel assembly (2).
Install the oil seal in the following manner.

1) Fit pilot b to new oil seal (3).
Before installing the oil seal, clean the
crankshaft sealing face and the seal
lip face. Remove all oil and dry thoroughly to prevent oil leakage.
4. Remove seal (3).

Remove the seal, inflicting no damage to
the crankshaft.
PC300/350(LC)-7
30-13
c
ENGINE REAR SEAL
2) Push the oil seal into the flywheel by

inserting pilot b with oil seal (3) into the
crankshaft.
3) Pull out pilot b. Push the oil seal into the
front cover from the inside to the outside.
4) Install the oil seal on the flywheel housing
to the proper depth. Use an alignment
tool.
Tap the head, bottom, right and left
sides of the alignment tool to make
sure that the seal carrier is not
twisted, when it is being pushed in.
30-14
c
PC300/350(LC)-7
CYLINDER HEAD ASSEMBLY
12
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION OF CYLINDER HEAD

ASSEMBLY
SPECIAL TOOLS
Mark
B
Part No.
Part
Necessity Qty Distinction* Sketch
Name
1 795-799-1170 Puller
2 790-331-1110 Wrench
8. Remove bracket (9) and remove air compressor assembly (10).

Remove the air compressor assembly in
one piece with the bracket and put them
aside near the control valve upper cover.
*Distinction between new and existing part.
REMOVAL
Disconnect the cable from the negative (-)
terminal of the battery.
1.
Drain engine coolant.

Engine coolant: Approx. 32 l

3. Remove bracket (1), and then detach clamp
(2) and hose clamp (3).
Remove the tube in one piece with the
bracket.
9. Disconnect exhaust brake hose (11) and lubrication tube (12).

When disconnecting the exhaust brake
hose, also separate the clamp mounting
plate from the head cover.
10. Disconnect after-cooler hose (13).
11. Remove protective cover (14).
5. Disconnect air compressor wiring connector

(5).
6. Remove radiator fan guard (6).
7. Loosen adjusting bolt (7) to remove belt (8).
PC300/350(LC)-7
30-15
c
12
12. Disconnect lubrication inlet hose (15) and

lubrication outlet hose (16).
16. Disconnect air feeding hose (21).

17. Separate gauge (22) from mounting plate.
18. Disconnect fuel filter tubes (23) and (24).
19. Disconnect electrical intake air heater wiring
harness (25).
21. Remove blow-by hose mounting clamp to
detach bracket (27).
Detach the bracket in one piece with the
fuel filter.
13. Remove protective covers (17) and (18).

14. Remove muffler connector V clamp (19).
22. Remove head cover (28).
15. Lift off turbocharger and exhaust manifold

assembly (20).
Note that two different length mounting
bolts are used for the exhaust manifold.
Be careful when installing them.
23. Disconnect fuel return tube (29).

24. Disconnect six delivery tubes (30).
30-16
c
PC300/350(LC)-7
27. Remove rocker arm assembly (33) to remove

oil tube (34).
25. Remove cover (31).

Know that the delivery tubes, fuel tube
fixing plate and the mounting bolts have
different lengths. Be careful when installing them.
26. Remove six nozzle holder assemblies (32).

Use tool B1, when it is difficult to remove
the nozzle holder assembly.
Take care so that no dust or foreign object
enters through the base of the nozzle
holder assembly.
PC300/350(LC)-7
28. Remove push rod (35).
29. Lift off cylinder head assembly (36) after

removing the 26 mounting bolts.
Cylinder head assembly: 65 kg
30-17
c
12
30. Remove cylinder head gasket (37).
Fuel tube joint bolt:

36 5 Nm {3.67 0.51 kgm}
INSTALLATION

Joint bolt :
24 4 Nm {2.45 0.41 kgm}
Refer to the Inspection and Adjustment of
Air Compressor Belt Tension section in
the TESTING AND ADJUSTING chapter in
this manual.
Head cover mounting bolt:

23.5 3.9 Nm {2.4 0.4 kgm}
V clamp:
6.9 - 8.8 Nm {0.7- 0.9 kgm}
Sleeve nut:
24 4 Nm {2.45 0.41 kgm}
Tighten the bolts in the sequence indicated in the figure at right.
Mounting bolt:
24 4 Nm {2.45 0.41 kgm}
Exhaust manifold mounting bolt:

1st step: Tighten to 23.5 4 Nm {2.4 0.41 kgm}
in the sequence of b through 1@.
2nd step: Tighten to 23.5 4 Nm {2.4 0.41 kgm}
in the sequence of b through e.
3rd step: Tighten to 43.1 6 Nm {4.4 0.61 kgm}
in the sequence of b through 1@
4th step: Tighten to 43.1 6 Nm {4.4 0.61 kgm}
in the sequence of b through e.
Coat the surface of the oil boot with oil

when installing the nozzle holder assemblies.
Coat a shim at the tip of the nozzle holder
assembly with a small amount of grease
so that it will firmly stay on the tip.
,
30-18
c
,
Mount the rocker arm assembly and the
cylinder head assembly in the following
manner.
PC300/350(LC)-7
12
Check that there is no dust or foreign matter
sticking to the cylinder head mounting face or
inside the cylinders.
1) Set cylinder head gasket (37) on the cylinder
block.
Check that the gasket is correctly aligned
with the corresponding cylinder holes.
2) Lift the cylinder head assembly (36) and place

it on the cylinder block.
4) Install oil tube (34) and rocker arm assembly

(33). Tighten their mounting bolts by hand.
Make sure that the ball portion of the
adjusting screw is properly seated in the
push rod socket.
5) Tighten cylinder head mounting bolts in the

sequence shown in the figure below.
Coat the threads and seat surface of the
mounting bolts with engine oil (15W-40).
Cylinder head mounting bolts:
3) Install push rods (35).
PC300/350(LC)-7
1st step: Tighten to 70 5 Nm {7.1 0.51 kgm}

in the sequence of b through 2^.
Check that each bolt is tightened to
the torque specified above, following
the same sequence.
2nd step: Tighten to 145 10 Nm {14.8 1.0 kgm}
in the sequence of b, c, h, i, j,
1), 1%, 1^, 1&, 1*, 2#, 2$, 2%, and 2^.
Check that each bolt is tightened to
the torque specified above, following
the same sequence.
30-19
c
12
3rd step:
i)
When using tool B2.

For tightening, turn the bolts with an
angle tightening wrench by 90 5 in
the sequence of b to 2^.
6) Tighten the rocker arm mounting bolts.

Rocker arm assembly mounting bolt:
65 5 Nm {6.6 0.5 kgm}
ii) When not using tool B2.

Tighten the bolts by turning them to
90 5. Put a punch mark on the bolt
head after tightening the bolt to show
the frequency of tightening.
Do not use a bolt with 5 punch marks.
Replace it with a new one.
7) Adjust the valve clearance.

Refer to the Adjustment of Valve Clearance section in the TESTING AND
ADJUSTING chapter in this manual.
Install the rocker arm assembly and

tighten the bolts by hand.
Check that the adjusting screw ball is
well seated in the push rod socket.
Refilling engine coolant

Fill engine coolant through the water filler
port up to the specified level. Start the engine
to allow the coolant to circulate and release
any air pockets. Check the water level again.
30-20
c
PC300/350(LC)-7
RADIATOR ASSEMBLY
12
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION OF RADIATOR ASSEMBLY

REMOVAL
1.
Drain the engine coolant.

Engine coolant:
8. Remove fan cover (7).

First remove the clamp for mounting the
after-cooler hose which is tightened
together and then remove the fan cover.
Approx. 32 l
2. Lift off engine hood (1) temporarily.

Be careful not to damage the rubber seal
when lifting the engine hood.
Support the engine hood with an appropriate sling and lifting device.
9. Disconnect radiator hose (8).
3. Remove engine hood mounting bolt to

remove pin (2).
4. Lift off engine hood (1).
10. Lift off radiator assembly, using two slings b.
5. Disconnect reservoir tank hose (3).

Disconnect the hose on the radiator side.
6. Disconnect radiator hose (4).
7.
Remove fan guards (5) and (6).
PC300/350(LC)-7
30-21
c
RADIATOR ASSEMBLY
12
11. Lift off radiator assembly (9) after removing
mounting bolts.
Radiator assembly: 45 kg
INSTALLATION

Refill engine coolant through the water filler
port up to the specified level. Start the engine
to allow the coolant to circulate and release
any air pockets. Check the water level again.
30-22
c
PC300/350(LC)-7
HYDRAULIC OIL COOLER ASSEMBLY
12
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION OF HYDRAULIC OIL

COOLER ASSEMBLY
REMOVAL
1.
Remove cover (1).
4. Remove engine hood mounting bolt and

remove pin (4).
2. Remove plug (2) from the hydraulic oil drain
hose to drain the hydraulic oil.
Unscrew the cap on the hydraulic tank
before draining oil to release the remaining pressure inside the tank. Then drain
oil through the cooler hose.
3. Lift off engine hood (3) temporarily.

when lifting off the engine hood.
PC300/350(LC)-7
30-23
c
HYDRAULIC OIL COOLER ASSEMBLY
12
7.
Remove hydraulic oil cooler drain hose (6).
INSTALLATION

Refilling hydraulic oil (hydraulic tank)
Refill hydraulic oil through oil filler port up to
the specified level and circulate oil in the
hydraulic system by starting the engine. Then
check the oil level again.
8. Remove hydraulic oil cooler mounting bolts

(7) and (8).
9. Lift off hydraulic oil cooler assembly (9),

using two slings b.
30-24
c
PC300/350(LC)-7
ENGINE AND HYDRAULIC PUMP ASSEMBLIES
12
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION OF ENGINE AND

HYDRAULIC PUMP ASSEMBLIES
SPECIAL TOOLS
Mark
Part No.
Part
Name
Oil
Stopper
796-770-1320 Adapter
796-460-1210
C
REMOVAL
Lower the work equipment to the ground
for safety and stop the engine. Disconnect
the cable from the negative (-) terminal of
the battery.
To release the internal pressure, gradually
loosen the oil filler cap on the hydraulic
tank.
Attach an identification tag to each pipe. This
will avoid a possible mistake when reinstalling.
1.
4. Remove engine hood mounting bolts and

then remove pin (2).
Remove the hydraulic tank strainer and stop

the flow of oil, using Tool C.
When not using tool C, remove the drain
plug to drain oil from the hydraulic tank
and piping.
Hydraulic tank: Approx. 365 l
6. Disconnect air feeding hose (3).

7.
Remove bracket (4) and disconnect clamp (5)

and hose clamp (6).

Remove the tube in one piece with the
bracket.
2. Drain engine coolant.

3. Lift up engine hood (1).
when lifting off the engine hood.
PC300/350(LC)-7
30-25
c
12
9. Disconnect air compressor wiring connector
(8).
10. Remove fan guard (9).

11. Loosen adjusting bolt (10) to remove fan belt
(11).
12. Remove bracket (12) with compressor assembly (13).
Remove the compressor assembly in one
piece with the bracket and put them aside
near the control valve upper cover.
15. Remove covers (18), (19) and (20).

16. Disconnect hydraulic pump wiring connectors
at two places.
(21): V22 (PC-EPC solenoid valve)
Color band: Red
(22): V21 (LS-EPC solenoid valve)
Color band: White
30-26
c
PC300/350(LC)-7
12
17. Disconnect eight hoses (23) through (30) and
tube (31).
(23): Drain port hose
(24): Front load pressure input port hose
(25): Rear load pressure input port hose
(Color band: Red)
(26): EPC source pressure port hose
(Color band: Yellow)
(27): Rear pressure input port hose
(Color band: Yellow)
(28): Front pressure input port hose
(29): Rear pump discharging port hose
(30): Front pump discharging port hose
(31): Pump suction port tube
19. Disconnect compressor hose clamp (35).

20. Disconnect fuel inlet hose (36), Fuel return
hoses (37) and (38).
21. Disconnect radiator hose (39) and remove fan

guard (40).
18. Disconnect wiring connectors (32), (33) and

(34).
(32): E08 (Intermediate connector)
(33): E11 (Governor motor)
(34): E10 (Potentiometer)
PC300/350(LC)-7
22. Disconnect after-cooler hose (41) and radiator

hose (42).
30-27
c
12
23. Disconnect engine starting motor wiring (43)
and heater hose (44).
Engine and Hydraulic Pump Assembly:

1,200 kg
24. Disconnect two engine filter hoses (45).

INSTALLATION

Refer to the Inspection and Adjustment of
Air Compressor Belt Tension section in
the TESTING AND ADJUSTING chapter of
this manual.
Engine mounting bolt:

(Front) 384.9 41.7 Nm {39.25 4.25 kgm)
(Rear) 926.7 103.0 Nm {94.5 10.5 kgm}
25. Disconnect engine grounding wiring (46).

26. Remove four front and rear engine mounting
bolts (47).

Refill engine coolant through the water filler
port up to the specified level.

Refill hydraulic oil through oil filler port up to
the specified level.
27. Lift off engine and hydraulic pump assembly

(48).
Lift off the assembly only after making
sure that there is no wiring or piping
which is left still connected.
30-28
c
Let the water circulate to release any air pockets by starting the engine. Check the water
level again.
Circulate oil in the hydraulic system by starting the engine. Then check the oil level again.
Air bleeding
Refer to the Air Bleeding of Various Part section in the INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
chapter of this manual.
PC300/350(LC)-7
FINAL DRIVE ASSEMBLY
12
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION OF FINAL DRIVE ASSEMBLY

REMOVAL
1.
4. Remove the 21 mounting bolts from final

drive assembly (6) and lift it off to remove.
Remove the sprocket, refer to the "Removal of

sprocket" section in this manual.
k Lower the work equipment to the ground for

safety. Stop the engine and loosen the oil
filler cap on the hydraulic tank to release pressure inside.
Be careful. Do not damage the face of the

fitting seal at the base of the hose.
When lifting off the final drive assembly,
do not use a tapped hole for lifting the
cover.
4
3. Disconnect drain hose (2), travel speed shifting hose (3) and travel motor hoses (4) and
(5).
Final drive assembly: 500 kg
INSTALLATION

3 Final drive assembly mounting bolt:
490 608 Nm {50 62 kgm}
Refilling hydraulic oil

Refill hydraulic oil through the oil filler port to
the specified level, and let the oil circulate in
the hydraulic system by starting the engine.
Then check the oil level again.
Air bleeding
Refer to the "Air bleeding of various part" section in the TESTING AND ADJUSTING chapter
of this manual.
30-29
(8)
12
DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY OF FINAL DRIVE

ASSEMBLY
796-627-1610
1 796-627-1620
796-427-1140
Wrench
assembly
N
N
Wrench
Pin
01314-20612
Screw
796T-627-1630
Push tool
790-101-2510
Block
791-830-1320
Rod
01580-11613
Nut
790-101-2570
Washer
01643-31645
Washer
790-105-2100
Jack assy
790-101-1102
Pump
3 791-580-1510
Installer
4 790-331-1110
Wrench
D
2
Sketch
Part name
Distinction
Part No.
Qty
Mark
Necessity
SPECIAL TOOLS
3. Spacer
Remove spacer (2).
DISASSEMBLY
1. Draining Oil
Remove drain plug and drain oil from final
drive case.
6
Final drive case: Approx. 8.5 l
2. Cover
4. No. 1 carrier assembly

1) Remove No. 1 carrier assembly (3).
1) Remove mounting bolts, then use forcing

screws [1] to disconnect cover (1).
2) Use eyebolts [2] to remove cover (1).
30-30
(8)
2) Disassemble No. 1 carrier assembly as

follows.
i) Push in pin (4) and pull out shaft (5)
from carrier (6).
After removing the shaft (5),
remove pin (4).
ii) Remove thrust washer (7), gear (8),

bearing (9), and thrust washer (10).
5. No. 1 sun gear shaft

Remove No. 1 sun gear shaft (11).
8. Ring gear
Using eyebolts d, remove ring gear (14).

1) Remove No. 2 carrier assembly (15)
6. No. 2 sun gear

Remove No. 2 sun gear (12).
7. Thrust washer
Remove thrust washer (13).
PC300/350(LC)-7
2) Disassemble No. 2 carrier assembly as

follows.
i) Push in pin (16) and pull out shaft (17)
from carrier (18).
After removing the shaft, remove
pin (16).
bearing (21), and thrust washer (22).
30-31
c
10. Nut
1) Remove lock plate (23).
2) Use tool D1 and remove nut (24).
11. Hub assembly
2) Disassemble hub assembly as follows.

i) Remove floating seal (26).
ii) Remove bearings (27) and (28) from

hub (29).
3) Remove floating seal (30) from travel

motor (31).
1) Using eyebolts e, remove hub assembly

(25) from travel motor.
30-32
c
PC300/350(LC)-7
12
ASSEMBLY
Clean all parts and check for dirt or damage.
Coat the sliding surfaces of all parts with
engine oil before installing.
3) Using tool D3, install floating seal (30)

onto travel motor (31).
The procedure for installation is the
same as in the previous Step 2).
1. Hub assembly
1) Assemble hub assembly as follows.
Using push tool, press fit bearings (27)
and (28) to hub (29).
4) Using eyebolts e, set hub assembly (25)

onto the travel motor. Use the push tool
and tap to press fit the bearing.
2) Using tool D3, install floating seal (26).

Remove all oil and grease from the Oring and O-ring contact surface. Dry
the parts before installing the floating
seal.
After installing the floating seal, check
that the angle of the floating seal is
within 1 mm.
After installing the floating seal, coat
the sliding surface thinly with engine
oil.
PC300/350(LC)-7
2. Nut
1) Install nut as follows.
i) Using tool D2, push bearing inner
race (27).
Pushing force:
12.7 - 16.7 kN {1.3 - 1.7 tons}
Rotate the hub 2 - 3 times before
applying the pushing force to the
bearing inner race.
30-33
c
ii) Measure dimension a in the condition

in Step 1) above.
iii) Measure thickness b of the nut (24) as

an individual part.
iv) Calculate a - b = c.
v) Tighten nut (24) with tool D1 until
dimension c is obtained.
vii) Install lock plate (23).
Install the lock plate as shown in the diagram below.

Thread of mounting bolt:
Thread tightener (LT-2)
Do no coat the threaded portion of the
nut with thread tightener (LT-2).
Mounting bolt: 49 - 74 Nm
{6 - 7.5 kgm}
vi) Using push-pull scale f, measure tangential force in the direction of rotation of the hub in relation to the motor
case.
Tangential force: Max. 490 N
{50 kg}
The tangential force is the maximum force when starting rotation.
30-34
c
PC300/350(LC)-7
12
1) Assemble No. 2 carrier assembly as follows.
Replace thrust washers (19), (22) and
pin (16) with new ones.
There are remains of caulking when
the pin is inserted at the end face of
hole e at the side of the carrier.
Remove the caulked metal from the
inside diameter of the hole before
starting to assemble.
i) Assemble bearing (21) to gear (20), fit
top and bottom thrust washers (19)
and (22), and set gear assembly in
carrier (18).
ii) Align the position of pin holes on the

shaft and carrier, then tap with a plastic hammer to install shaft (17).
When installing the shaft, rotate
the planetary gear. Be careful not
to damage the thrust washer.
iii) Insert pin (16).
Insert the pin in such a way that any
of the three claws (f portions) on the
periphery will not fall on the slender
(g) portion of the carrier. Take note,
however, that depending on the
actual carriers, this slender portion is
on the opposite side. Hence when
inserting the pin, check them carefully
to see on which side of the carrier a
thin portion is, and insert the pin the
way its claw does not come to the thin
portion. If there is a groove, meanwhile, avoid it.
PC300/350(LC)-7
After inserting the pin, caulk the pin

portion of the carrier.
After assembling the carrier assembly,
check that gear (20) rotates smoothly.
2) Install No. 2 carrier assembly (15).

Align the three tips of the gear shafts
of the carrier assembly (15) to enter
the three hollows in the end face of
the motor case, then install.
30-35
c
12
4. Ring gear
Install O-ring on hub end. Use eyebolts d to
install ring gear (14).
Remove all grease and oil from the mating surface of the ring gear and hub.
Do not put any gasket sealant on the mating surface of the ring gear and hub under
any circumstances.

1)
Assemble No. 1 carrier assembly as follows.

Replace thrust washers (7) and (10),
and pin (4) with new ones.
There are remains of caulking when
the pin is inserted at the end face of
hole h at the side of the carrier.
Remove the caulked metal from the
inside diameter of the hole before
starting to assemble.
i)
Assemble bearing (9) to gear (8), fit

top and bottom thrust washers (7) and
(10), and set gear assembly in carrier
(6).
5. Thrust washer
Install thrust washer (13).
6. No. 2 sun gear
Install No. 2 sun gear (12).
ii) Align the position of pin holes on the
shaft and carrier, then tap with a plastic hammer to install shaft (5).
When installing the shaft, rotate
the planetary gear. Be careful not
to damage the thrust washer.
30-36
c
PC300/350(LC)-7
12
iii) Insert pin (4).
Insert the pin in such a way that any
of the three claws (f portions) on the
periphery will not fall on the slender
(g) portion of the carrier. Take note,
however, that depending on the
actual carriers, this slender portion is
on the opposite side. Hence when
inserting the pin, check them carefully
to see on which side of the carrier a
thin portion is, and insert the pin the
way its claw does not come to the thin
portion. If there is a groove, meanwhile, avoid it.
8. No. 1 sun gear shaft

Install No. 1 sun gear shaft (11).
After inserting the pin, caulk the pin

portion of the carrier.
After assembling the carrier assembly,
check that gear (8) rotates smoothly.
9. Spacer
Install spacer (2).
Take measurement of dimension "i" after
installing the spacer. If "i" dimension
exceeds 15 mm, the spacer is not installed
correctly. In that case, check it again and if
necessary, try to install it correctly once
more.
PC300/350(LC)-7
30-37
c
11. Refilling with oil

Tighten drain plug and add engine oil
through oil filler.
5
Final drive case: Approx. 8.5 l
Do a final check of the oil level at the
determined position after installing the
final drive assembly to the chassis.
10. Cover
Using eyebolts [2], lift and install cover (1),
then tighten mounting bolts with angle tightening wrench D4.
2 Mounting surface of cover:
3 Mounting bolt:
Initial torque:
98.1 Nm {10 kgm}
Additional tightening angle:
Turn 100 110
30-38
(8)
SWING MOTOR, SWING MACHINERY ASSEMBLY
12
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION OF SWING MOTOR, SWING

MACHINERY ASSEMBLY
REMOVAL
k Release the residual pressure in the hydraulic

circuit. Refer to the "Releasing of residual
pressure in hydraulic circuit" section in the
TESTING AND ADJUSTING chapter of this
manual.
k Lower the work equipment to the ground for
safety. After stopping the engine, loosen the
oil filler cap on the fuel tank to release the
residual pressure inside the tank and move
the safety lock lever to the LOCK position.
1.
4. Lift and remove swing motor and swing

machinery assembly (7).
When lifting the swing motor and swing
machinery assembly for removal, do
slowly so that the hoses and other parts
will not be damaged.
Take good care, when lifting the
assembly, until the spigot joint portion is pulled out.
4
Swing motor and swing machinery assembly: 450 kg
Disconnect 5 swing motor hoses (1) through

(5).
(1): Between swing motor and control
valve (MA port)
(2): Between swing motor and control
valve (MB port)
(3): Suction hose (S port)
(4): Drain hose (T port)
(5): Swing brake releasing pilot hose (B
port)
2. Disconnect arm cylinder hose (6).

INSTALLATION

3 Mounting bolt:
824 1,030 Nm {84 105 kgm}

the specified level. Let the oil circulate in the
hydraulic system by starting the engine. Then
check the oil level again.
Air bleeding
Refer to the "Air bleeding of various parts"
section in the TESTING AND ADJUSTING
chapter of this manual.
3. Detach the swing motor and swing machinery assembly, using forcing screw [1] after
removing the mounting bolts.
30-40
(8)
12
DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY OF SWING MOTOR, SWING

MACHINERY ASSEMBLY
PC300, 300LC-7 Serial No. 40001 40573
PC350, 350LC-7 Serial No. 20001 20337
Push tool
2 796T-626-1140
Push tool
Part No.
Part name
Sketch
Qty
1 796T-626-1110
Mark
Distinction
Necessity
SPECIAL TOOLS
DISASSEMBLY
1. Draining oil
Loosen the drain plug and drain oil from the
swing machinery case.
6

1) Disassemble No. 1 carrier assembly (3).
Swing machinery case:

Approx. 13.4 l
2. Swing motor assembly

1) Place swing motor and swing machinery
assembly on block [1].
2) Remove the 6 mounting bolts to disconnect swing motor assembly (1).
4
Swing motor assembly: 70 kg
2) Disassemble the No. 1 carrier assembly in

i)
Remove snap ring (4) first and then

remove thrust washer (8), gear (6),
bearing (7), thrust washer (8) and
plate (9).
ii) Using the press, remove shaft (5).

Press fitting force for assembly
(Reference value)
29.2 54 kN {2,980 5,510 kg}
3. No. 1 Sun gear
1) Remove No. 1 sun gear (2).
30-41
(8)
5. Ring gear
Remove the mounting bolts and remove ring
gear (10).
7. Bolt
Remove the holder mounting bolt (12).
6. No. 2 sun gear

30-42
(8)
2) Disassemble the No. 2 carrier assembly

by hand in the following manner.
i) Push in pin (14) and knock out shaft
(15) from carrier (16).
After removing the shaft, remove pin
(14) .
bearing (19) and thrust washer (20).
iii) Remove plate (21).
12
9. Shaft assembly
1) Place the shaft case assembly on a press,
and push shaft assembly (22) out of shaft
case assembly (23), using push tool [2].
ASSEMBLY
Clean all related parts and check that there is
no dirt or damage on the surface. Coat sliding
surfaces with engine oil and then assemble
the parts.
Do not reuse the removed bearing and oil
seal (since their durability cannot be assured).
1. Shaft and case assembly
1) Set plate (25) to shaft (26).
2) Disassemble the shaft assembly in the following manner.

Remove bearing (24) and plate (25) from
shaft (26), using push tool [3].
10. Bearing
Remove bearing (27) and oil seal (28) from
case (29), using a push tool.
2) Set bearing (24) to shaft (26). Using push

tool [5], press fit the inner race of the
bearing.
Use a new bearing.
Install the bearing with the sealed side
down (on the gear side).
Press fitting force (Reference value):
35.3 102 kN {3,600 10,400 kg}
3) Fill the hatched area (Part "a") with grease

(G2-LI).
2 Injected grease amount:
Approx. 200 340 g
30-43
(8)
4) Set shaft assembly (22) on case assembly

(23) and press fit it with push tools [6] and
[7].
Press fitting force:
0 28.4 kN {0 2,900 kg}
3. Bearing
1) Using tool E1, press fit bearing (27).
Press the bearing inner race and outer
race simultaneously. Do not press
only the inner race.
After press fitting the bearing, check
that the case rotates smoothly.
Inner race side:
16.7 47.1 kN {1,700 4,800 kg}
Outer race side:
0 16.7 kN {0 1,700 kg}
5) Reverse the shaft and case assembly.

2. Oil seal
1) Set case assembly (23) on block [8] horizontally.
2) Set block [9] under the shaft so that the
shaft will not lean.
3) Using tool E2 and push tool [10], press fit
oil seal (28).
Use new oil seal (28).
2 Outside of oil seal:
When press fitting the oil seal, take
care that gasket sealant (LG-6) will not
stick to the oil seal lip.
2 Oil seal lip: Grease (G2-LI)

Check the press fitting finish point in
advance and make a mark on it (since
you cannot see if the oil seal has been
inserted to the end).
Outside diameter of push tool E2:
174 174.5 mm
30-44
(8)

1) Assemble the No. 2 carrier assembly
according to the following procedure.
There is caulking mark h made when
the pin was inserted around the side
hole of carrier (16) (See v)) and the
inside wall of the hole is swelled at
that mark. Flatten the swelled part in
advance.
i)
Install plate (21) to carrier (16).
ii) Install bearing (19) to gear (18) and fit

and (20), and then set the gear assembly to carrier (16).
iii) Aligning the pin holes of shaft (15)

and carrier (16), lightly hit the shaft
with a plastic hammer to install.
When installing the shaft, revolve the
planetary gear and take care not to
damage the thrust washers.
iv) Insert pin (14).
When inserting the pin, do not set the
3 claws (parts "a") on the periphery to
the thin part of the carrier (part "b").
The thin part may be on the opposite
side, however. Check the thin part
and avoid setting the claws to it.
5. Bolt
1) Tighten bolt (12).
2 Threads of mounting bolt:

Adhesive (LT-2)
3 Mounting bolt:
343 427 Nm {34 43.5 kgm}
2) Install the O-ring to the case.
v) After inserting the pin, caulk 2 parts

"h" around the pin hole of the carrier.
Check that all the gears turn smoothly.
6. No. 2 sun gear

30-45
(8)
7. Ring gear
Using eyebolts (M10 x 1.5), install ring gear
(10).
Degrease the mating surfaces of ring gear
(10) and case (29).
Do not stick gasket sealant to the mating
surfaces of ring gear (10) and case (29).
When installing the ring gear, match
counter mark (part "d") to the projection
(part "c") of the case flange.
Install the washer.
3 Mounting bolt:
245 309 Nm {25 31.5 kgm}

i)
Press fit shaft (5) to the carrier in the

direction of the arrow until the snap
ring groove is seen.
Press fitting force (Reference
value):
29.2 54 kN {2,980 5,510 kg}
ii) Install snap ring (4), and then push it

back until it is fitted to face "P" of the
carrier. Take care not to push it back
too much.
iii) Install plate (9).

iv) Install thrust washer (8), bearing (7),
gear (6), and thrust washer (8).
v) Install snap ring (4) to shaft (5).
30-46
(8)

Fit the O-ring to ring gear (10) and install
swing motor assembly (1).
Degrease the mating surfaces of swing
motor assembly (1) and ring gear (10).
surfaces of swing motor assembly (1) and
ring gear (10).
Set motor port (part "f") and projection
(part "c") of the case as shown in the figure.
4
3 Mounting bolt:
98 123 Nm {10 12.5 kgm}
9. No. 1 sun gear assembly
Take care not to install the No. 1 sun gear
upside down.
Install the No. 1 sun gear with the tooth
side (part "e") down.
"P": Press fitting plate
Refilling with oil

Tighten the drain plug and add engine oil
through the oil filler to the specified level.
5

Approx. 13.4 l
30-47
(8)
12
DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY OF SWING MOTOR, SWING

MACHINERY ASSEMBLY
Qty
Push tool
2 796T-626-1140
Push tool
Part No.
Part name
Sketch
Necessity
1 796T-626-1110
Mark
Distinction
SPECIAL TOOLS
DISASSEMBLY
1. Draining oil
Loosen the drain plug and drain oil from the
swing machinery case.
6

1) Disassemble No. 1 carrier assembly (3).

Approx. 13.4 l

1) Place swing motor and swing machinery
assembly on block [1].
2) Remove the 6 mounting bolts to disconnect swing motor assembly (1).
4

2) Disassemble the No. 1 carrier assembly in
i)
Remove snap ring (4) first and then

remove thrust washer (8), gear (6),
bearing (7), thrust washer (8) and
plate (9).
ii) Using the press, remove shaft (5).

Press fitting force for assembly
(Reference value)
29.2 54 kN {2,980 5,510 kg}
3. No. 1 Sun gear
1) Remove No. 1 sun gear (2).
30-48
(8)
5. Ring gear
Remove the mounting bolts and remove ring
gear (10).
2) Disassemble the No. 2 carrier assembly

by hand in the following manner.
i) Push in pin (14) and knock out shaft
(15) from carrier (16).
After removing the shaft, remove pin
(14) .
bearing (19) and thrust washer (20).
iii) Remove plate (21).
6. No. 2 sun gear

9. Shaft assembly
1) Remove mounting bolts (23).
2) Set shaft and case assembly to press,
then using push tool [2], remove shaft
assembly (24) from case assembly (25).
7. Bolt
Remove the holder mounting bolt (12).
30-48-1
(8)
3) Disassemble shaft assembly as follows.

i) Using push tool [3], remove cover
assembly (26) and bearing (27) from
shaft (28).
ii) Remove oil seal (29) from cover (30).
ASSEMBLY
a Clean all parts and check for dirt or damage.
Coat the sliding surfaces of all parts with
engine oil before installing.
a Do not reuse the removed bearing and oil
seal since their durability cannot be assured.
Prepare new ones.
1. Bearing
Using push tool E3, [4], press fit bearing (27)
to case (32).
a Use new bearing (27).
a Press fitting force (Reference value):
0 26.4 kN {0 2,690 kg}
10. Bearing
Using push tool, remove bearing (31) from
case (32).
2. Cover assembly
1) Using push tool E4, press fit oil seal (29)
to cover (30).
a Use new oil seal (29).
a When not using push tool E4, use another
push tool to push the outside frame of the
oil seal evenly.
a Take care that oil seal (29) will not lean.
2 Outside circumference of oil seal:
a Be careful not to let the gasket sealant
(LG-6) get on the oil seal lip when press
fitting.
30-48-2
(8)
12
2) Fit cover assembly (26) to case (32), and
tighten mounting bolts (23).
a Match the oil passage of cover assembly (26) to drilled hole A of case (32).
2 Cover mounting surface :
a Take care that LG-6 will not stick to
drilled hole A.
3 Mounting bolt :
98 123 Nm {10 12.5 kgm}
3) Press-fit bearing (31), using push tool E1,

[6].
Use new bearing (31).
When press-fitting the bearing, press
both inner and outer races of the
bearing at the same time. Avoid
pressing the inner race only.
After the bearing is press-fitted, check
that the case will turn freely.
2 Lip of oil seal : Grease (G2-LI)
3. Case assembly
1) Reverse case assembly (25) and set it to
shaft (28).
a Take extreme care not to damage the
oil seal.
2) Using push tool E5, [5], [7], press fit the
bearing inner race.
a Using push tool E5, [5], hit shaft
lightly with a plastic hammer so that it
will not come off, and then press fit it
with the press.
a Press fitting force (Reference value):
39 110 kN {3,980 11,260 kg}
a Set push tool [7] so that case assembly (25) will not slant largely.
a Hit the flange of case assembly (25)
lightly and frequently to correct its
slant.
Hit the flange of case assembly (25)

frequently and lightly to correct the
lean of case assembly (25). In particular, adjust the flange so that oil seal
mating face B of the shaft will be at
the center of oil seal (29).
4) Using push tool E1, [6], press fit bearing

(31).
Use a new bearing.
Press the bearing inner race and outer
race simultaneously. Do not press
only the inner race.
After press fitting the bearing, check
that the case rotates smoothly.
Inner race side:
15.3 43.2 kN {1,560 4,410 kg}
Outer race side:
0 16.2 kN {0 1,650 kg}
30-48-3
(8)
v) After inserting the pin, caulk 2 parts

"h" around the pin hole of the carrier.
Check that all the gears turn smoothly.

There is caulking mark "h" made
when the pin was inserted around the
side hole of carrier (16) (See v)) and
the inside wall of the hole is swelled
at that mark. Flatten the swelled part
in advance.
i)
Install plate (21) to carrier (16).
ii) Install bearing (19) to gear (18) and fit

and (20), and then set the gear assembly to carrier (16).

5. Bolt
1) Tighten bolt (12).
2 Threads of mounting bolt:

Adhesive (LT-2)
3 Mounting bolt :
343 427 Nm {34 43.5 kgm}
2) Install the O-ring to the case assembly.
iii) Aligning the pin holes of shaft (15)

and carrier (16), lightly hit the shaft
with a plastic hammer to install.
When installing the shaft, revolve the
planetary gear and take care not to
damage the thrust washers.
iv) Insert pin (14).
When inserting the pin, do not set the
3 claws (parts "a") on the periphery to
the thin part of the carrier (part "b").
The thin part may be on the opposite
side, however. Check the thin part
and avoid setting the claws to it.
30-48-4
(8)
6. No. 2 sun gear

8. No. 1 carrier
7. Ring gear
Using eyebolts (M10 x 1.5), install ring gear
(10).
Degrease the mating surfaces of ring gear
(10) and case (32).
surfaces of ring gear (10) and case (32).
When installing the ring gear, match
counter mark (part "d") to the projection
(part "c") of the case flange.
Install the washer.
3 Mounting bolt :
245 309 Nm {25 31.5 kgm}

i)
Press fit shaft (5) to the carrier in the

direction of the arrow until the snap
ring groove is seen.
Press fitting force (Reference
value):
29.2 54 kN {2,980 5,510 kg}
ii) Install snap ring (4), and then push it

back until it is fitted to face "P" of the
carrier. Take care not to push it back
too much.
30-48-5
(8)
iii) Install plate (9).
"P": Press fitting plate
iv) Install thrust washer (8), bearing (7),

gear (6), and thrust washer (8).
v) Install snap ring (4) to shaft (5).

Fit the O-ring to ring gear (10) and install
swing motor assembly (1).
Degrease the mating surfaces of swing
motor assembly (1) and ring gear (10).
surfaces of swing motor assembly (1) and
ring gear (10).
Set motor port (part "f") and projection
(part "c") of the case as shown in the figure.
4 Swing motor assembly: 70 kg
3 Mounting bolt:
98 123 Nm {10 12.5 kgm}
9. No. 1 sun gear assembly

Take care not to install the No. 1 sun gear
upside down.
Install the No. 1 sun gear with the tooth
side (part "e") down.
30-48-6
(8)
Refilling with oil

Tighten the drain plug and add engine oil
through the oil filler to the specified level.
5

Approx. 13.4 l
30-48-7
(8)
CARRIER ROLLER ASSEMBLY
12
DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY OF CARRIER ROLLER

ASSEMBLY
This section deals only with precautions to be
followed when reassembling the carrier roller
assembly.
Installer
791-430-3230
Oil pump
Part name
Sketch
791-601-1000
Part No.
Distinction
Qty
Mark
Necessity
SPECIAL TOOLS
Carrier roller
Check the amount of air leakage from the
seal with tool F by applying the standard
pressure to the oil filler port.
Check that the gauge needle does not go
down, when the below standard pressure
is applied for 10 seconds.
Standard pressure: 0.1 MPa {1 kg/cm}
ASSEMBLY
Floating seal
Before installing a floating seal, completely degrease both contact surfaces of
the O-ring and the floating seal (hatched
area in the illustration). Furthermore, take
care so that no dust or dirt sticks to the
contact surface of the floating seal.
Be sure to use the installer to insert the
floating seal.
After inserting the floating seal, check that
the inclination of the seal is less than 1
mm and that protrusion "a" of the seal
remains within the range of 5 7 mm.
Fill the carrier roller assembly with oil,

using tool F, and screw in the plug.
Carrier roller:
145 155 cc (EO30-CD)
30-49
(8)
TRACK ROLLER ASSEMBLY
12
DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY OF TRACK ROLLER

ASSEMBLY
796-670-1010
Installer
791-601-1000
Oil Pump
Mark
Part No.
Part name
Sketch
Distinction*
SPECIAL TOOLS
Qty
Necessity
This chapter deals only with precautions to be

followed when reassembling the Track Roller
Assembly.
Track roller cover mounting bolt.
3 Track roller cover mounting bolt:

44.12 53.93 Nm {4.5 5.5 kgm}
Track roller
Using tool G, apply the specified air pressure to the oil filler port to check air leakage from the seal.
Keep applying the following specified air
pressure for 10 seconds to check that the
gauge needle does not go down.
Specified air pressure:
0.1 MPa {1 kg/cm}
ASSEMBLY
Floating seal
Before installing a floating seal, completely degrease both contact surfaces of
inclination of the seal is less than 1 mm
and that protrusion "a" of the seal
remains within the range of 7 11 mm.
Fill the track roller assembly with hydraulic oil. Use tool G and screw in the plug.
5
Track roller:
250 280 cc (EO30-CD)
3 Plug: 10 20 Nm {1 2 kgm}
30-50
(8)
IDLER ASSEMBLY
12
DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY OF IDLER ASSEMBLY

SPECIAL TOOLS
Mark
H
Part No.
Part
Name
796-570-1020 Installer
791-601-1000 Oil pump
DISASSEMBLY
3. Detach idler (4) from shaft (5) and support

assembly (7).
The idler contains 230 10 cc of oil. Drain
the oil at this stage of disassembly. Take
care and spread a cloth on the floor to
prevent smearing the floor with flushing
oil.
4. Remove floating seal (6) on the opposite side
of idler (4), shaft (5) and support assembly (7).
5. Remove dowel pin (8) to detach support (7)

from shaft (5).
6. Remove bushings (9) and (10) from idler (4).
1.
Remove dowel pin (1) and then support (2).
2. Remove floating seal (3) from support (2) and

idler (4).
PC300/350(LC)-7
30-51
c
IDLER ASSEMBLY
12
ASSEMBLY
1.
Press fit bushing (9) and (10) to idler (4).
2. Fit O-ring and install support (7) to shaft (5)

with dowel pin (8).
Before installing the floating seal, completely degrease both contact surfaces of
inclination of the seal is less than 1 mm
and that protrusion a of the seal remains
within the range of 5 - 7 mm.
Install the shaft with UP mark facing

upward.
3. Using tool H, install floating seal (6) to idler

(4), shaft (5) and support (7) assembly.
4. Assemble shaft (5) and support (7) assembly
to idler (4).
30-52
c
PC300/350(LC)-7
IDLER ASSEMBLY
12
5. Using tool H, install floating seal (3) to idler
(4) and support (2).
6. Install O-ring, then install support (2) with

dowel pin (1).
After inserting the pin, caulk the support
pin.
7.
Add oil and tighten plug.

Oil: Approx. 230 10 cc (EO 30-CD)
Plug: 130 - 180 Nm {13 - 18 kgm}
Coat the sliding surface of the floating seal

with oil, and be careful not to let any dirt or
dust get stuck to it.
Remove all grease and oil from the contact
surface of the O-ring and the floating seal.
PC300/350(LC)-7
30-53
c
RECOIL SPRING ASSEMBLY
12
DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY OF RECOIL SPRING

ASSEMBLY
1.
SPECIAL TOOLS
Mark
Part No.
Part Name
791-685-8006 Compressor
791-635-3160 Extension
790-101-1102 Pump
790-201-1500 Push tool kit
790-101-1600
Cylinder
686 kN {70 T}
790-201-1620 Plate
Remove piston assembly (2) from recoil

spring assembly (1).
1
1
790-101-5021 Grip
01010-50816 Bolt
2. Disassembly of recoil spring assembly

1) Set tool J1 to recoil spring assembly (1).
The recoil spring is under large
installed load, so be very sure to set
the tool properly.
Failure to do this is dangerous.
Installed load of spring: 208.6 kN
{21,280 kg}
DISASSEMBLY
2) Apply hydraulic pressure slowly to compress the spring. Remove lock plate (3).
Then remove nut (4).
Compress the spring to a point where
the nut becomes loose.
Release the hydraulic pressure slowly
to decompress the spring.
Free length of spring: 814 mm
3) Remove yoke (6), cylinder (7), collar (8),
and dust seal (9) from spring (5).
3. Dissassembly of piston assembly
1) Remove lock plate (11) from piston (10),
then remove valve (12).
2) Remove snap ring (13), then remove Upacking (14) and ring (15).
30-54
c
PC300/350(LC)-7
RECOIL SPRING ASSEMBLY
12
ASSEMBLY
2. Assembly of recoil spring assembly

1) Using tool J2, install dust seal (9) to cylinder (7).
2) Assemble cylinder (7) collar (8), and yoke

(6) to spring (5), and place in tool J1.
Sliding portion of cylinder:
Grease (G2-L1)
1. Assembly of piston assembly

1) Assemble ring (15) and U-packing (14) to
piston (10) and secure with snap ring (13).
2) Tighten valve (12) temporarily, and secure
with lock plate (11).
PC300/350(LC)-7
30-55
c
SPROCKET
12
REMOVAL AND
INSTALLATION OF
SPROCKET
3) Apply hydraulic pressure slowly to compress the spring and tighten nut (4) so
that the installed length of the spring is
dimension a, then secure it with lock plate
(3).
Installed length a of spring:
655 mm
4) Remove recoil spring assembly (1) from

tool J1.
3. Assemble piston assembly (2) to recoil spring
assembly (1).
REMOVAL
1. Remove track shoe assembly. For details, see
TRACK SHOE ASSEMBLY, REMOVAL.
2. Swing work equipment 90, push up chassis
with work equipment and place block b
between track frame and track shoe.
3. Remove mounting bolts and lift off sprocket

(1).
Sprocket: 65 kg
Sliding portion of wear ring:

Grease (G2-L1)
Install the piston assembly so the valve
installing position is on the outside.
Fill the inside of the cylinder with 180 cc
of grease (G2-L1), then bleed the air and
check that grease comes out of the grease
hole.
INSTALLATION
Thread of sprocket mounting bolt:

Sprocket mounting bolt:
640 - 785 Nm {65 - 80 kgm}
30-56
c
PC300/350(LC)-7
TRACK SHOE ASSEMBLY
12
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION OF TRACK SHOE

ASSEMBLY
3. Disassemble track shoe (3) above master pin
(2).
791-630-3000
K
1 790-101-1300
790-101-1102
2 790-331-1110
Cylinder
(980 kN {100 t} )
Remover &
installer
Pump
Wrench
Sketch
Part name
Distinction
Part No.
Qty
Mark
Necessity
SPECIAL TOOLS
EXPANSION
1. Set master pin at the position for expanding.
Start the engine and bring the master pin
in front of the idler.
Put block [1] under the track shoe in front
of the idler.
4. Using tool K1, pull out master pin (2).
2. Lower the work equipment, then loosen lubricator (1), and relieve track tension.
k The adjustment cylinder is under extremely

high pressure. Never loosen the lubricator
more than one turn. If the grease does not
come out, move the machine backwards and
forwards.
5. Travel machine backward to expand track

shoe.
30-57
(8)

12
ASSEMBLY
Assemble in reverse order of expansion.

Refer to the "Inspection and adjustment of
track shoe tension" section in the TESTING AND ADJUSTING chapter of this
manual.
Using tool K2, tighten the bolt by angle
tightening method.
2 Mounting bolt:
Anti-seizure compound
(equivalent to "Maruzen molymax
No. 2")
3 Mounting bolt:
1st time:
393 39 Nm {40 4 kgm}
2nd time:
120 10 (Angle tightening)
Press-fit the master pin with a proper tool
until dimension "a", master pin protrusion
amount, is obtained.
Master pin protrusion amount "a":
4.2 2 mm
30-58
(8)
TRACK SHOE ASSEMBLY
SWING CIRCLE ASSEMBLY
12
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION OF SWING CIRCLE

ASSEMBLY
REMOVAL
INSTALLATION
1.
Remove revolving frame assembly. Refer to

the Removal and Installation of Revolving
Frame Assembly section in this manual.
2. Sling swing circle assembly (1) at three

points. Remove the mounting bolts and lift off
the swing circle assembly.
Swing circle assembly: 500 kg
Thread of swing circle mounting bolt:

Thread tightener (LT-2)
Swing circle mounting bolt:
926.7 103 Nm (94.5 10.5 kgm)
Install the inner race to the track frame
with the S mark of its inner soft zone spot
facing the right side of machine as shown
in the figure below.
Grease bath fill:
Grease (G2-L1) 33 l
PC300/350(LC)-7
30-59
c
REVOLVING FRAME ASSEMBLY
12
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION OF REVOLVING FRAME

ASSEMBLY
REMOVAL
Extend the arm and bucket fully, then lower
the work equipment to the ground and move
the safety lock lever to the LOCK position.
1.
Remove the work equipment assembly, refer

to the Removal of Work Equipment Assembly
2. Remove the counter weight assembly, refer to

the Removal of Counterweight Assembly section in this manual.
3. Disconnect four boom cylinder hoses (1).
Plug the hose to stop oil flow-out.
6. Support the engine hood (5) with an appropriate sling and lifting device.
Remove any parts which may interfere
with a sling, when removing the revolving
frame.
4. Sling boom cylinder assembly (2).

7.
Remove engine hood mounting bolts to pull

out pin (6).
8. Lift and remove engine hood (5).
5. Remove plate (3) and pin (4). Lift and remove

the boom cylinder assembly (2).
Remove the boom cylinder assembly on
the opposite side in the same manner.
Boom cylinder assembly: 280 kg
30-60
c
PC300/350(LC)-7
12
9. Remove plates (7) and (8).
10. Remove U bolt (9) and plate (10) to disconnect after-cooler tube (11).
If any other parts may interfere with the
slings, remove them before lifting the
assembly.
13. Sling revolving frame assembly (20) then

remove 40 mounting bolts and lift off revolving frame assembly.
Use two lever blocks.
Leave the two mounting bolts at the front
and rear and adjust the center of gravity
with the lever blocks while lifting off.
Remove the mounting bolts afterwards..
11. Disconnect seven hoses (12) through (18).
(12): Center swivel joint (D port) Swing motor (T port)
(13): Center swivel joint (D port) Hydraulic tank
(14): Center swivel joint (E port) Solenoid valve
(15): Center swivel joint (B port) Left travel control lever (B2 port)
(16): Center swivel joint (D port) Right travel control lever (B5 port)
(17): Center swivel joint (A port) Left travel control lever (A2 port)
(18): Center swivel joint (C port) Right travel control lever (A5 port)
When removing the revolving frame

assembly, take care so that it will not
bump the center swivel joint assembly
Revolving frame assembly: 7,800 kg
12. Pull out pin (19) on the side of center swivel

joint and detach turning stopper plate from
center swivel joint.
PC300/350(LC)-7
30-61
c
12
INSTALLATION
Swivel circle mating surface:

Threads of revolving frame mounting
bolt: Adhesive compound (LT-2)
Revolving frame mounting bolt:
926.7 103 Nm (94.5 10.5 kgm)

Then check the level again.
Air bleeding
Bleed air from the travel motor, refer to the
Air Bleeding of Various Parts section in the
manual.
30-62
c
PC300/350(LC)-7
CENTER SWIVEL JOINT ASSEMBLY
12
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION OF CENTER SWIVEL JOINT

ASSEMBLY
REMOVAL
Release the remaining pressure in the
hydraulic circuit. For details, see TESTING
AND ADJUSTING, release of remaining
pressure in hydraulic circuit.
Mark all the piping with tags to prevent mistakes in the mounting position when installing.
1.
Disconnect eight hoses (1) through (8)

between travel motor and center swivel joint.
(1): Center swivel joint (T port) Left travel motor (T port)
(2): Center swivel joint (T port) Right travel motor (T port)
(3): Center swivel joint (B port) Left travel motor (PA port)
(4): Center swivel joint (D port) Right travel motor (PB port)
(5): Center swivel joint (A port) Left travel motor (PB port)
(6): Center swivel joint (C port) Right travel motor (PA port)
(7): Center swivel joint (E port) Left travel motor (P port)
(8): Center swivel joint (E port) Right travel motor (P port)
PC300/350(LC)-7
2. Disconnect seven hoses (9) through (15).

(9): Center swivel joint (D port) Swing motor (T port)
(10): Center swivel joint (D port) Hydraulic tank
(11): Center swivel joint (E port) Solenoid valve
(12): Center swivel joint (B port) Left travel control lever (B2 port)
(13): Center swivel joint (D port) Right travel control lever (B5 port)
(14): Center swivel joint (A port) - |
Left travel control lever (A2 port)
(15): Center swivel joint (C port) Right travel control lever (A5 port)
3. Pull out pin (16) on the side of center swivel
joint and remove the jam plate from the center swivel joint.
30-63
c
12
4. Remove four mounting bolts (17).
INSTALLATION

Install the center swivel joint facing in the
direction shown in the diagram.
(The diagram shows the machine as seen
from above)
5. Remove center swivel joint assembly (18).
Center swivel joint assembly: 40 kg
30-64
c
Refilling with oil (hydraulic tank)

Add oil through the oil filter to the specified level. Run the engine to circulate the
oil through the system. Then check the oil
level again.
Bleeding air
Bleed the air from the travel motor. For
details see TESTING AND ADJUSTING,
Air Bleeding of Various Parts.
PC300/350(LC)-7
12
DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY OF CENTER SWIVEL JOINT

ASSEMBLY
3. Using tool L. pull out swivel rotor (4) and ring
(3) from swivel shaft (5).
SPECIAL TOOLS
Mark
Part No.
Part Name Necessity Qty Distinction* Sketch
790-101-2501 Push puller
790-101-2510 Block
790-101-2520 Screw
791-112-1180 Nut
790-101-2540 Washer
790-101-2630 Leg
790-101-2570 Plate
790-101-2560 Nut
790-101-2650 Adapter
4. Remove seal (6) from swivel shaft (5).

5. Remove O-ring (7) and slipper seal (8) from
swivel rotor (4).
DISASSEMBLY
ASSEMBLY
1.
Assemble slipper seal (8) and O-ring (7) to

swivel rotor (4).
2. Assemble seal (6) in swivel shaft (5).

3. Set swivel shaft (5) to block, then using push
tool, tap swivel rotor (4) with a plastic hammer to install.
Contact surface of rotor, shaft:
Grease (G2-L1)
When installing the rotor, be extremely
careful not to damage the slipper seal and
the O-ring.
4. Install ring (3) and secure with snap ring (2).
5. Install O-ring and cover (1).
1.
Remove cover (1).
Mounting bolt: 31.4 2.9 Nm

{3.2 0.3 kgm)
2. Remove snap ring (2).
PC300/350(LC)-7
30-65
c
HYDRAULIC TANK ASSEMBLY
12
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION OF HYDRAULIC TANK

ASSEMBLY
REMOVAL
1.
Remove covers (1) and (2).
7.
Disconnect drain hoses (9), (10) and (11).
8. Detach clamps (12) at four points.

2. Drain oil from hydraulic tank.
3. Open up engine hood.
4. Remove upper cover (3).
9. Disconnect suction tube (13) after removing

four mounting bolts.
5. Disconnect drain hoses (4) and (5).

6. Detach clamp (6) and then disconnect control
valve return hose (7) and oil cooler return
hose (8).
30-66
c
PC300/350(LC)-7
HYDRAULIC TANK ASSEMBLY
12
10. Lift hydraulic tank assembly temporarily to
remove six mounting bolts (14).
11. Lift off and remove hydraulic tank assembly

(15).
Hydraulic tank assembly: 200 kg
INSTALLATION

Add oil through the oil filler to the specified level.
Start and run the engine to circulate the
level again.
Air Bleeding
Bleed the air.
For details. see TESTING AND ADJUSTING. Air Bleeding of Various Parts.
PC300/350(LC)-7
30-67
c
CONTROL VALVE ASSEMBLY
12
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION OF CONTROL VALVE

ASSEMBLY
REMOVAL
completely and stop the engine. Then
loosen the cap on the hydraulic tank slowly
to release the remaining pressure inside the
tank, and put the safety lock lever to the
LOCK position.
4. Disconnect four boom hoses (5).

5. Remove boom tube mounting clamps (6) and
(7).
Attach a tag to each pipe to avoid making an

error when installing them again later.
1.
Open up engine hood (1).
2. Remove control valve upper cover (2).
6. Remove plate (8).
3. Remove partition covers (3) and (4) between

engine and control valves.
7.
30-68
c
Disconnect eight control valve hoses and

eight tubes.
(9): TSW port hose (Swing motor S port)

(10): T1 port hose (to hydraulic tank)
(11): In the sequence of top to bottom
A-1 port tube (Boom Hi bottom side)
A1 port tube (Bucket bottom side)
A2 port hose (Swivel joint A port)
A3 port tube (Boom bottom side)
A4 port hose (Swing motor MB port)
A5 port hose (Swivel joint C port)
A6 port tube (Arm head side)
PC300/350(LC)-7
12
(12): In the sequence of top to bottom

B-1 port hose (Arm Hi bottom side)
B1 port hose (Bucket head side)
B2 port hose (Swivel joint B port)
B3 port tube (Boom head side)
B4 port hose (Swing motor MA port)
B5 port hose (Swivel joint D port)
B6 port tube (Arm bottom side)
8. Disconnect six PPC hoses on the right side.

(13): Bucket DUMP (Hose band: Black)
(14): Left FORWARD (Hose band: Red)
(15): Boom LOWER (Hose band: Brown)
(16): Right SWING
(17): Right FORWARD (Hose band: Green)
(18): Arm DIGGING (Hose band: Green)
PC300/350(LC)-7
9. Disconnect two hoses between control valves

and solenoid.
(19): PS port hose (Hose band:
Yellow - blue)
(20): PST port hose (Hose band: Brown)
10. Disconnect drain hose (21).
11. Disconnect seven PPC hoses and five control

valve hoses on the left side.
(22): PLS2 port hose (Hose band: Red)
(23): PLS1 port hose
(24): PX1 port hose (Hose band: Green)
(25): In the sequence of top to bottom,
Bucket DIGGING (Hose band: White)
Left REVERSE
Boom RAISE (Hose band: Green)
SWING LS divider valve
BP5 port hose (to solenoid)
Left SWING (Hose band: Red)
Right REVERSE (Hose band: Blue)
Arm DUMP (Hose band: Yellow)
(26): PX2 port hose
30-69
c
12
12. Disconnect 7 hoses and wiring connectors at
two points.
(27): PPS1 port hose (Front pump)
(28): PPS2 port hose (Rear pump)
(29): PR port hose (Solenoid)
(30): PR port hose (Pump)
(31): PP1 port hose (Front pump)
(32): PP2 port hose (Rear pump)
(33): T port hose (Oil cooler)
(34): A51 (Front pump pressure sensor)
INSTALLATION
(35): A52 (Rear pump pressure sensor)

Add oil through the oil filler to the specified level.
Run the engine to circulate the oil through
the system. Then check the oil level again.
Bleeding air
Bleed the air from the circuit between the
valve and the hydraulic cylinder.
For details, see TESTING AND ADJUSTING, Air Bleeding of Various Parts.
13. Lift and remove control valve assembly (36)

after removing three mounting bolts.
Control valve assembly: 250 kg
30-70
c
PC300/350(LC)-7
12
DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY OF CONTROL VALVE

ASSEMBLY
followed when disassembling and reassembling the control valve assembly.
796-946-1310
Guide
(For 723-46-40100, 723-46-40601)

796-946-1810
1
Guide
(For 723-46-43100, 723-46-43400)

796-946-2110
Guide
(For 723-46-44100)
796-946-2210
Guide
(For 723-46-45100)
796-946-1320
Guide
(For 723-46-40100, 723-46-40601)

796-946-1820
Guide
(For 723-46-43100, 723-46-43400)

2
M
796-946-2120
Guide
(For 723-46-44100)
796-946-2220
Guide
(For 723-46-45100)
796-946-1420
Guide
(For 723-46-42800)
796-946-1330
3. Install O-ring (6) onto piston (2).
4. Place tool M1 onto piston (2) and push it in

slowly by hand so that seal (5) spreads out
evenly.
The seal may be also installed by pushing
it down to the flat surface of the tool and
then pushing it in with the tool fitted to
the piston.
Sleeve
(For 723-46-40100, 723-46-40601)

796-946-1830
Sleeve
(For 723-46-43100, 723-46-43400)

3
796-946-2130
Sleeve
(For 723-46-44100)
796-946-2230
Sleeve
796-946-1430
Sleeve
1.
Remove piston (2), plug (3), and string (4)

from pressure compensation valve (1).
2. Remove seal (5) and O-ring (6) from piston

(2).
There are many types of the pistons.

Clean the pressure compensation valve
thoroughly. Install the seal using a tool, as
indicated in the diagram.
(For 723-46-45100)
(For 723-46-42800)
Sketch
Part name
Qty
Part No.
Necessity
Mark
Distinction
SPECIAL TOOLS
Procedures for replacing pressure compensation valve seal

Since there are many types of the pressure
compensation valves, make a mark on each
valve to indicate from where it was removed.
30-71
(8)

12
5. Likewise, set tool M2 to piston (2) in the same
direction and push it slowly by hand so that
the other seal (6) may be spread out evenly.
The seal may be also fitted by pushing it
down to the flat surface of the tool and
then pushing it in with the tool fitted to
the piston.
6. Keep compensation tool M3 fitted to piston

(2) for about one minute so that seals (5) and
(6) will become well adapted.
Check that there is no protrusion or cut on
the seal.
7.
Assemble the piston in the sleeve.

If it is difficult to install the sleeve, do not
attempt to push it in forcibly, but try it
again after repeating the same process in
Step 6. above and confirming the seals
are well adapted.
8. Fit plug (3) and spring (4) to piston (2) and

assemble pressure compensation valve (1).
After the installation, push the piston by
hand and check that the piston reacts only
with spring force.
30-72
(8)
ASSEMBLY
Coat the sliding surface with engine oil and
then reassemble the control valve assembly.
When installing spools (7) and (10) in the
valve chamber, direct drilled holes (8) and (11)
toward cylinder ports (9) and (12).
Install the other spools shown in sections H
H, K K, L L and M M similarly.
Control valve top and bottom covers
2 Mating faces of control valve top and

bottom covers:
SEALEND 242 or equivalent
Use 2 washers (W2) each for only 2 places
of the control valve top cover.
Tighten the mounting bolts of the control
valve top and bottom covers in the following
order: (A o D o C o B)
3 Mounting bolt of control valve top
and bottom covers:
156.9 176.5 Nm {16 18 kgm}
Install filters (13) to the bottom of PLS1 port

and PLS2 port as shown (Take care of the
caulked parts (*).)
30-72-1
(8)
30-72-2
(8)
Merge-divider valve
2 Mating face of merge-divider valve:

SEALEND 242 or equivalent
Tighten the mounting bolts of the mergedivider valve similarly to those of the control
valve covers.
3 Mounting bolt of merge-divider valve:

156.9 176.5 Nm {16 18 kgm}
Tighten the mounting bolts of the boom Hi
check valve, quick return valve, lock valve,
and arm plate similarly to those of the control
valve covers.
3 Mounting bolt of boom Hi check

valve, quick return valve, lock valve,
and arm plate:
58.8 73.6 Nm {6 7.5 kgm}
After assembling, fit the cap so that oil and
cleaning liquid will not enter the engine
through the 12 hole.
Install each pressure compensation valve,
paying attention to the counter mark that
was put when removing it.
Main relief valve assembly
After building the main relief valve assembly
in the control valves, refer to the Inspection
And Adjustment of Hydraulic Oil Pressure In
Hydraulic Circuit For "Work equipment, swing
and travel" section in the TESTING AND
ADJUSTING chapter, in this manual.
HYDRAULIC PUMP ASSEMBLY
12
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION OF HYDRAULIC PUMP

ASSEMBLY
SPECIAL TOOLS
Mark
Part No.
Part Name Necessity Qty Distinction* Sketch
796-460-1210 Oil stopper
796-770-1320 Adapter
REMOVAL
Disconnect the negative (-) terminal of the
battery before starting with the work.
and stop the engine. Then loosen the oil
filler cap on the hydraulic tank slowly to
release pressure inside the tank.
Attach identification tags to all piping to avoid

mistakes when installing.
1.
Remove hydraulic tank strainer and stop oil

flow-out using tool C.
If tool C is not used, remove the drain
plug and drain oil from the hydraulic tank
and piping.
2. Drain oil from the damper case.

Damper case: Approx. 13.5 l
PC300/350(LC)-7
30-73
c
12
6. Disconnect pump wiring connectors at two
points.
(8): V22 (PC-EPC solenoid valve)
Color band: Red
(9): V21 (LS-EPC solenoid valve)
Color band: White
8. Disconnect muffler drain tube (21).
9. Disconnect clamps (22) at two points.

10. Remove muffler clamp (23) and two U bolts
(24) to detach muffler (25).
7.
Disconnect ten hoses and one tube.

(12): Drain port hose
(13): Front load pressure input port hose
(14): Rear load pressure input port hose
Color band: Red
(15): EPC source pressure port hose
Color band: Yellow
(16): Rear pressure port hose
Color band: Yellow
(17): Front pressure input port hose
(20): Pump suction port tube
11. Remove muffler bracket (26).
12. Lift and remove hydraulic pump assembly

(27).
Hydraulic pump assembly: 220 kg
30-74
c
PC300/350(LC)-7
12
INSTALLATION
Hydraulic pump involute spline:

Anti-friction compound (LM-G)
Hydraulic pump case mating surface:
Refilling hydraulic oil (Damper case)

the specified level.
Damper hydraulic oil : Approx. 13.5 l

Then check the oil level again.
Hydraulic tank : Approx. 365 l
Bleeding air
Bleed the air.
For details. see TESTING AND ADJUSTING. Air Bleeding of Various Parts.
PC300/350(LC)-7
30-75
c
OIL SEAL IN HYDRAULIC PUMP INPUT SHAFT
12
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION OF OIL SEAL IN HYDRAULIC

PUMP INPUT SHAFT
REMOVAL
INSTALLATION
1.
Remove the hydraulic pump assembly. Refer

to the Removing Hydraulic Pump Assembly
section.
2. Remove snap ring (1) and then remove spacer

(2).
3. Pry off oil seal (3) with a screwdriver.
When attempting to pry off the seal, do
not damage the shaft.
30-76
c
Oil seal lip portion: Grease (G2-LI)

Oil seal outer circumference:
Grease (G2-LI)
Coat the oil seal outer circumference
thinly with grease.
Press-fit oil seal (3), using tool b.
PC300/350(LC)-7
WORK EQUIPMENT PPC VALVE ASSEMBLY
12
DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY OF WORK EQUIPMENT PPC

VALVE ASSEMBLY
PC300, 300LC-7 Serial No. 40001 40314
PC350, 350LC-7 Serial No. 20001 20221
followed when reassembling the PPC valve
assembly for work equipment.
When assembling piston (8), coat the piston

outer periphery and body hole inner periphery with grease.
3 Plate (5) mounting bolt:
11.8 14.7 Nm {1.2 1.5 kgm}
2 Joint (4) sliding surface:
Grease 2 4 cc (G2-LI)
2 Body female screw portion:

Adhesive compound (LT-2)
Coat the female screw portion A of body with
Loctite at 2 spots as shown in the diagram
below. Each spot is to be coated with a drop
(approx. 0.02 g).
3 Joint (4): 39 49 Nm {4 5 kgm}

Strictly follow the specified torque for the
joint.
2 Contact surfaces of piston (8) and

disc (2): Grease 0.3 0.8 cc (G2-LI)
ASSEMBLY
Install spring (11 ) so that the end surface of
smaller end coil diameter (inner diameter)
will face the shim (12) side.
Springs (10 ) in use differ in the number of
turns according to hydraulic ports as classified in the table below. Hence, take care when
installing one.
Port location
Spring free length
P1, P2
44.4 mm
P3, P4
42.4 mm
3 Nut (1): 98 127 Nm {10 13 kgm}

After assembling the disc, refer to the
"Adjustment of work equipment and swing
PPC valve" section of the TESTING AND
ADJUSTING chapter of this manual.
The location of each port is stamped in the

lower part of the valve body.
2 Piston (8): Grease (G2-LI)
30-77
(8)
WORK EQUIPMENT PPC VALVE ASSEMBLY
12
DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY OF WORK EQUIPMENT PPC

VALVE ASSEMBLY
followed when reassembling the PPC valve
assembly for work equipment.
When assembling piston (8), coat the piston

outer periphery and body hole inner periphery with grease.
3 Plate (5) mounting bolt:
11.8 14.7 Nm {1.2 1.5 kgm}
2 Joint (4) sliding surface:

Grease 2 4 cc (G2-LI)
2 Body female screw portion:

Adhesive compound (LT-2)
Coat the female screw body with Loctite at 2
spots as shown in the diagram below. Each
spot is to be coated with a drop (approx. 0.02
g).
3 Joint (4): 39 49 Nm {4 5 kgm}
Strictly follow the specified torque for the
joint.
2 Contact surfaces of piston (8) and

disc (2): Grease 0.3 0.8 cc (G2-LI)
ASSEMBLY
Install spring (11) so that the end surface of
smaller end coil diameter (inner diameter)
will face the shim (12) side.
Springs (10) in use differ in the number of
turns according to hydraulic ports as classified in the table below. Hence, take care when
installing one.
Port location
Spring free length
P1, P2
44.4 mm
P3, P4
42.4 mm
The location of each port is stamped in the

lower part of the valve body.
2 Piston (8): Grease (G2-LI)
30-77-1
(8)
3 Nut (1): 69 88 Nm {7 9 kgm}

After assembling the disc, refer to the
"Adjustment of work equipment and swing
PPC valve" section of the TESTING AND
ADJUSTING chapter of this manual.
TRAVEL PPC VALVE ASSEMBLY
12
DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY OF TRAVEL PPC VALVE

ASSEMBLY
followed when reassembling.
ASSEMBLY
When assembling, clean and inspect the
paets closely and take care fully so that dirt,
rush, flaw, etc. will not cause a trouble.
1.
When installing piston (1), apply grease (G2LI) to its outside and the inside of the body
hole.
2. Install spring (2) with its small diameter side

on the shim (3) side.
Diameter of spring (Inside diameter)
Small diameter side: 4.9 mm
Large diameter side: 5.55 mm
3. Do not drive in bushing (4) by hitting it
directly with a hammer.
4. Do not drive in pin (5) by hitting it directly
with a hammer.
5. Apply grease (G2-LI) to the rocking part of
shaft (6) and the contact surfaces of lever (7)
and piston (1) and the contrast surfaces of
plate (8) and pin of lever (9).
2 Quantity of grease (G2-LI)
Rocking part of shaft (6):
4 8 cc/periphery
Connecting part of lever (7) and piston (1):
0.3 0.8 cc/part
Connecting part of plate (8) and lever
(9):
0.3 0.8 cc/part
6. Install washer (10) 1.6 mm thick first. If the difference between both sides at the stroke end
of the lever exceeds 0.7, change the washer
thickness to reduce the difference to below
0.7. (If the washer thickness is reduced by 0.3
mm, the stroke end angle is increased by
0.39.)
Thickness of washer: 1.0, 1.3, 1.6 mm
30-78
(8)
7.
Tighten each part to the following torque.

Plug (11): 6 11 Nm {0.6 1.1 kgm}
Bolt (12): 3.9 4.9 Nm {0.4 0.5 kgm}
(Apply LOCTITE #262.)
Screw (13): 7.8 9.8 Nm {0.8 1.0 kgm}
Plug (14): 4 9 Nm {0.4 0.9 kgm}
Bolt (15): 25 31 Nm {2.5 3.2 kgm}
Bolt (16): 27 34 Nm {2.8 3.5 kgm}
HYDRAULIC CYLINDER ASSEMBLY
12
DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY OF HYDRAULIC CYLINDER

ASSEMBLY
2
3
4
Cylinder
repair stand
790-102-4300
Wrench
Assembly
790-102-4310
Pin
790-720-1000
Expander
796-720-1680
Link
07281-01589
Clamp
790-201-1702
Push tool kit
790-201-1851
Push tool
(for bucket
and boom)
790-201-1861
Push tool
(for arm)
790-101-5021
Grip
01010-50816
Bolt
N 5
790-201-1500
790-101-5021
01010-50816
Push tool kit
4) Disassemble piston rod assembly as follows.

i) Set piston rod assembly (2) in tool N1.
Grip
Bolt
790-201-1660
Plate
(for boom
and bucket)
790-201-1670
Plate
(for arm)
Sketch
790-502-1003
Part No.
Distinction
Part name
Qty
Mark
Necessity
SPECIAL TOOLS
DISASSEMBLY
1. Piston rod assembly
1) Remove piping from cylinder assembly.
ii) Remove stopper screw (3) of piston

assembly.
Common screw size for boom,
arm, and bucket cylinder:
M12 x Pitch 1.75.
2) Remove mounting bolts and disconnect

head assembly (1).
3) Pull out piston rod assembly (2).
Place a container under the cylinder to
catch the oil.
30-79
(8)
12
If the caulking of screw (3) is too
strong and it cannot be removed,
tighten the screw fully, then fit a tap to
the thread and remove the screw.
iii) Using tool N2, remove piston assembly (4).

When not using tool N2, use the
drill holes (DH) ( 10, 4 places)
and loosen the piston assembly.
vii) Remove cap (8), and pull 12 balls (9),

then remove plunger (10).
Arm cylinder only
Since cap (8) is made of nylon,
tighten a screw into it and pull it
out with pliers.
2. Disassembly of piston assembly

1) Remove rings (11).
2) Remove wear rings (12).
iv) Remove plunger (5).
Boom and arm cylinder only
v) Remove collar (6).
vi) Remove head assembly (7).
30-80
(8)
3) Remove piston ring (13).

4) Remove O-ring and backup ring (14).
12
3. Disassembly of cylinder head assembly
1) Remove O-ring and backup ring (15).
2) Remove snap ring (16), then remove dust
seal (17).
3) Remove rod packing (18).
4) Remove buffer ring (19).
5) Remove bushing (20).
2. Assembly of piston assembly

1) Using tool N3, expand piston ring (13).
Set the piston ring on tool N3, and
turn the handle 8 10 times to expand
the ring.
2) Set tool N4 in position, and compress piston ring (13).
ASSEMBLY
Be careful not to damage the packing, dust
seals, and O-rings.
Clean each part, then cover the piping ports
and pin-inserting hole to prevent dust from
entering them.
Do not try to force the backup ring into position.
Warm it in warm water (50 60C) before
installing it.
1. Assembly of head assembly
1) Using tool N5, press fit bushing (20).
2) Assemble buffer ring (19).
3) Assemble rod packing (18).
4) Using tool N6, install dust seal (17), and
secure with snap ring (16).
5) Install backup ring and O-ring (15).
30-81
(8)
12
3) Install backup ring and O-ring (14).
2) Assemble head assembly (7).
4) Assemble wear ring (12).
3) Fit O-ring and backup ring to collar (6),

then assemble.
5) Assemble ring (11).

Be careful not to open the end gap of
the ring too wide.
2 Ring grove: Grease (G2-LI)
3. Piston rod assembly

1) Set piston rod assembly (2) to tool N1.
30-82
(8)
4) Assemble plunger (5).

5) Set cushion plunger (10) to piston rod,

then assemble 12 balls (9) and secure
with cap (8).
Check that there is a small amount of
play at the tip of the plunger.
Arm cylinder only
12
6) Assemble piston assembly (4) as follows.
When using piston rod assembly (2)
and piston assembly (4) again:
Wash thoroughly and remove all
metal particles and dirt.
i) Screw in piston assembly (4), then
use tool Q2 to tighten piston
assembly (4) so the position of the
screw thread H hole matches.
Remove all burrs and flashes with
a file.
When using a new part for either or both of

piston rod assembly (2) and piston assembly
(4).
For the rod with bottom cushion, mark the
cap (8) position on the end of the rod.
(See step 5).)
Arm cylinder only
i)
Screw in until piston assembly (4) contacts end face of rod, then use tool to
tighten.
3 Piston assembly:
294 29.4 Nm {30 3.0 kgm}
After tightening the piston, check that
there is play in plunger (5).
Boom, arm cylinder only
ii) Tighten screw (3).
2 Screw thread:
Loctite No. 262
3 Screw:
58.9 73.6 Nm {6 7.5 kgm}
iii) Punch threads [1] at 4 points for
caulking.
ii) Machine one of the holes used to install

screw (3).
Align a drill horizontal with the Vgroove of the thread of piston rod
assembly (2) and piston assembly (4),
then carry out machining.
For the cylinder with bottom cushion
(arm cylinder), avoid cap (8) machining holes position when machining.
(See step 5).)
Screw machining dimension (mm)
Drill
diameter
Bottom
hole depth
Tap used
Tap depth
10.3
27
12 x 1.75
20
30-83
(8)
12
iii) After machining, wash thoroughly to
remove all metal particles and dust.
7) Assemble piston rod assembly (2).

Set the end gap of the ring horizontally (at
the side position), align axial center of cylinder tube, then insert.
After inserting, check that the ring is not
broken and has not come out, then push
in fully.
iv) Tighten screw (3).
3 Screw:
58.9 73.6 Nm {6 7 kgm}
v) Caulk thread at 4 places with punch.

8) Tighten head assembly (1) with mounting
bolts.
3 Mounting bolt:
Cylinder
Tightening torque
Bucket
373 54 Nm {38.0 5.5 kgm}
Arm
490 49 Nm {50.0 5.0 kgm}
Boom
373 54 Nm {38.0 5.5 kgm}
9) Install piping.
30-84
(8)
WORK EQUIPMENT ASSEMBLY
12
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION OF WORK EQUIPMENT

ASSEMBLY
SPECIAL TOOLS
Mark
Part No.
796-670-1100
Part Name
Necessity Qty
Remover
796-670-1110 Sleeve
796-670-1120 Plate
796-670-1130 Screw
791-775-1150 Adapter
01643-33080 Washer
01803-13034 Nut
Puller
790-101-4000
(490 kN {50T}long)
790-101-1102
Pump
(294 kN {30T})
DistincSketch
tion*
4. Start the engine and retract the piston rod.

Fasten the piston rod with wire so that it
will not slip out. Lower the cylinder onto a
stand or place a support under the bottom
of the cylinder to support it. In the latter
case, remove the grease fitting on the bottom side first.
Remove the boom cylinder on the other
side in the same manner.
Remove the working lamp on the work
equipment if slings will hit the lamp when
lifting the work equipment off.
5. Disconnect A42 intermediate connector (6)
from working lamp.
REMOVAL
Extend the arm and bucket fully. Lower the
work equipment to the ground and set the
safety lock lever to the lock position.
6. Disconnect three arm cylinder hoses (7) and

two bucket cylinder hoses (8).
Plug them to stop oil spillage and fasten
the hoses with a rope on the valve side.
Release the residual pressure in the hydraulic circuit. Refer to the Release of Remaining
Pressure in Hydraulic Circuit section in the
manual.
1.
Disconnect grease hose (1).
2. Sling boom cylinder assembly (2), and

remove lock bolt (3).
3. Remove plate (4), then remove head pin (5).
7.
There are shims installed, so check the
number and thickness, and keep them in a
safe place.
PC300/350(LC)-7
Lift off work equipment assembly, remove

plate (9) and then pin (10) at the foot.
30-85
c
12
INSTALLATION
When removing them, first remove plate

(9) and then remove pin (10) at the foot,
using Tool P.
Shims are installed, so do not forget to
check their number and each location of
installation.
When tightening the locknut, tighten so

that clearance a between the plate and
nut is 0.5 - 1.5 mm.
8. Lift off work equipment assembly (11) and disassemble it.
Inside surface of bushing when

assembling pin:
Anti-friction compound (LM-P)
Work equipment assembly:

5,800 kg
Grease after assembling pin:

Grease (LM-G)
When aligning the position of the pin
hole, never insert your fingers into the
pin hole.
Adjust the shim thickness so that clearance b between cylinder rod (12) and
plate (4) is below 1.5 mm.
Standard shim thickness: 1.0 mm and
2.0 mm.
30-86
c
PC300/350(LC)-7
12
2 Inside surface of bushing when
assembling pin:
Anti-friction compound (LM-P)
2 Grease after assembling pin:

Grease (LM-G)
k When aligning the position of the pin

hole, never insert your fingers into the pin
hole.
Adjust clearance "c" between the foot end
surface of boom (13) and bracket (14) with
shims so that it will be less than 1 mm.
Thickness of standard shims: 2.0, 2.5 and 3.5
mm
Bleeding air
Bleed the air from the cylinder. For
details, see TESTING AND ADJUSTING,
Air Bleeding of Various Parts.
Add oil through the oil filler to the specified level. Run the engine to circulate the
level again.
30-87
(8)
12
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION OF AIR CONDITIONER UNIT

ASSEMBLY
PC300, 300LC-7 Serial No. 40001 45000
PC350, 350LC-7 Serial No. 20001 25000
3. Pull down outside air filter cover openingclosing lever (2).
Qty
799-703-1200
Service tool
kit
799-703-1100
Vacuum
Pump (100 V)
799-703-1111
Vacuum
Pump (220 V)
799-703-1121
Vacuum
Pump (240 V)
799-703-1401
Gas leak
detector
Sketch
Part name
Mark
Distinction
Part No.
Necessity
SPECIAL TOOLS
4. Remove outside air filter (3).
REMOVAL
k First, disconnect the cable from the negative

() terminal of the battery.
k Collect the air conditioner refrigerant.
1.
Drain coolant.
6
Coolant: Approx. 22.8 l
2. Remove floor mat (1).
30-88
(8)
5. Remove monitor panel lower covers (4) and

(5).
When removing cover (4), first remove
the M19 wiring for cigarette lighter.

12
6. Remove duct (6) on the right side.
7.
Remove rear covers (7), (8) and (9).
12. Disconnect cab intermediate connectors (18)

at the following 2 points.
H09: Upper side
H08: Lower side
13. Disconnect radio antenna (19).
14. Remove plate (20) and then remove cover
(21).
8. Remove rear duct (10).

9. Remove plate (11) and then remove duct (12).
10. Remove plate (13) and right duct (14).
15. Remove duct (22).

16. Disconnect connectors at the following 7
points.
(23): D01
(Assembled-type diode connector)
(24): D02
(Assembled-type diode connector)
(25): C09 (Model selection switch connector)
(26): Air conditioner unit connector
From top to bottom, M26, M27, M28
and M33 option power source connector
30-89
(8)

12
17. Remove the mounting clamp and disconnect
air conditioner wiring connector (27).
18. Remove the 4 mounting bolts and remove
governor pump control assembly (28).
Put the governor pump control assembly
aside.
INSTALLATION
Install hoses in the air conditioner circuit with
care so that dirt, dust, water, etc. may not
enter them.
Install air conditioner hoses only after checking that an O-ring is in place at the connecting
part.
Check that there is no damage on O-rings, or
that they have not deteriorated.
When connecting the refrigerant piping,
coat the O-ring with compressor oil for
R134a (DENSO: ND-OIL 8, ZEXEL: ZXL 100
PG (PAG 46 or equivalent)) and tighten
the nuts with 2 spanners.
3 Hose clamp screw:
8.83 14.7 Nm {0.9 1.5 kgm}
3 Hose screw M16 x 1.5:
11.8 14.7 Nm {1.2 1.5 kgm}
3 Hose screw M24 x 1.5:
29.4 34.3 Nm {3.0 3.5 kgm}
20. Disconnect air conditioner hoses (30) and (31)

as well as air conditioner tubes (32) and (33).
21. Remove the 8 mounting bolts and remove air

conditioner unit assembly (34).
When removing the air conditioner unit
assembly, do not forget to disconnect the
2 air conditioner hoses connected to the
bottom.
30-90
(8)
Filling air conditioner gas

Fill the air conditioner circuit with air conditioner gas (R134a), using tool Q.
AIR CONDITIONER UNIT ASSEMBLY
12
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION OF AIR CONDITIONER UNIT

ASSEMBLY
6. Remove ducts (10) and (11).

799-703-1200
Service tool
kit
799-703-1100
Vacuum
pump (100V)
799-703-1111
Vacuum
pump (220V)
799-703-1121
Vacuum
pump (240V)
799-703-1401
Gas leak
detector
REMOVAL
Sketch
Part name
Distinction
Part No.
Qty
Mark
Necessity
SPECIAL TOOLS

k Collect the air conditioner refrigerant.
1.
7.
Disconnect connectors D01 (12), D02 (13), C09

(14), R22 (15), R20 (16), and K19 (17).
8. Remove and sling controller (18).

9. Remove plate (19).
10. Disconnect air conditioner unit connectors
M27 (20) and M33 (21).
Swing the upper structure by 90.
2. Open the engine hood.

3. Remove rear covers (1), (2), (3), and (4).
11. Remove the air conditioner unit undercover.

Part A
4. Remove duct (5), cover (6), and plate (7).

5. Remove plate (8) and duct (9).
Remove the duct lock clip.
30-90-1
(8)

12
12. Remove mounting bolt (24) and connector
(25).
13. Disconnect heater hoses (22) and (23) and air
conditioner tube (26).
Put tags to the disconnected hoses and
tubes to prevent a mistake in re-connecting them.
AIR CONDITIONER UNIT ASSEMBLY
INSTALLATION
removal.
When installing the air conditioner circuit
hoses, take care that dirt, water, etc. will
not enter them.
When connecting each air conditioner
hose, check that the O-ring is fitted to the
joint.
Check that each O-ring is free from flaw
and deterioration.
When connecting the refrigerant piping,

coat the O-ring with compressor oil for
R134a (DENSO: ND-OIL 8, ZEXEL: ZXL 100
PG (PAG 46 or equivalent)) and tighten
the nuts with 2 spanners.
3 Hose clamp (M6 bolt):
7.84 11.8 Nm {0.8 1.2 kgm}
3 Hose screw of M16 x 1.5:

11.8 14.7 Nm {1.2 1.5 kgm}

19.6 24.5 Nm {2.0 2.5 kgm}
14. Remove the 7 mounting bolts and air conditioner unit assembly (27).

29.4 34.3 Nm {3.0 3.5 kgm}
30-90-2
(8)
Charging air conditioner with refrigerant gas

Using tool Q, charge the air conditioner circuit with refrigerant (R134a) from the compressor.
Quantity of refrigerant: 950 50 g
COUNTERWEIGHT ASSEMBLY
12
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION OF COUNTERWEIGHT

ASSEMBLY
REMOVAL
INSTALLATION
1.
Attach eyebolts [1] to counterweight assembly (1), and sling.
2. Remove 4 mounting bolts (2)

Take note of where shims were inserted.
3. Lift off counterweight (1) horizontally with
wire or chain block.
Be careful not to hit the engine, radiator
or cooler.
4
Counterweight assembly: 5,500 kg

2 Thread of counterweight mounting
bolt: Thread tightener (LT-2)
3 Counterweight mounting bolt:

1,814.1 98.1 Nm {185 10 kgm}
Installing and adjusting counterweight
1) Adjust clearance on the upper and
lower sides with shims.
2) Install counterweight in such a way
that clearance between the door and
counterweight as well as clearance
between the revolving frame and
counterweight become 10 5 mm.
30-91
(8)
OPERATORS CAB ASSEMBLY
12
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION OF OPERATORS CAB

ASSEMBLY
PC300, 300LC-7 Serial No. 40001 45000
PC350, 350LC-7 Serial No. 20001 25000
3. Remove rear covers (4), (5) and (6).
REMOVAL

1.
Remove floor mat (1).
4. Disconnect cab wiring intermediate connectors H10 (7), H11 (8) and H12 (9).
5. Remove duct (10) on the right side and rear
duct (11).
6. Remove left plates (12) and (13).
2. Remove covers (2) and (3) under the monitor
panel.
When removing cover (2), first disconnect
the CN-M19 wiring for cigarette lighter.
7.
30-92
(8)
Pull down outside air filter cover openingclosing lever (14).
12
8. Remove outside air filter (15).
9. Remove duct (16).
15. Remove step plate (24).
16. Remove 5 mounting bolts (25) and 4 mounting nuts (26).

Check the bolt length beforehand.
11. Disconnect cab wiring intermediate connectors (20) at the following 2 points.
H09: Upper side
H08: Lower side
17. Lift and remove operator's cab assembly (27).

4
Operator's cab assembly: 290 kg
13. Remove duct (22) on the right side.
INSTALLATION
14. Remove window washer hose (23).
30-93
(8)
12

REMOVAL

1.
4. Remove clip (10) and disconnect cab wiring

connectors M45 (11), H08 (12), and H09 (13).
5. Remove air conditioner connector plate (14).
Remove rear covers (1), (2), (3), and (4).
6. Disconnect connectors M71 (15), H10 (16), H11

(17), and H12 (18).
7.
2. Remove duct (5), cover (6), and plate (7).
3. Remove plate (8), duct (9) and the element.
Remove the duct lock clip.
Disconnect upper and lower duct joints (19)

and (20).
8. Remove controller sub-plate (21) and incline it

against the air conditioner.
9. Remove cover (22) and floor mat (23).
30-94
(8)

12
10. Move right console (24) into the cab.
17. Take grommet (35) out of the right front of the

cab.
11. Remove monitor panel undercover (25).

18. Disconnect the windshield washer hose from
(36).
19. Remove 4 mounting bolts (37) and 5 mounting bolts (38).
Check the types of the bolts.
In the initial period, 7 mounting bolts (38)
are used.
12. Disconnect cab wiring connector W04 (26)

(Wiper motor).
13. Remove ducts (27) and (28).
Both (27) and (28) are 2 in number.
Cut the tie-wrap on the monitor wiring
harness.
14. Remove cover (29) and monitor assembly
(30).
20. Using lever block [1], lift off operator's cab

assembly (39).
4
Operator's cab assembly: 300 kg

16. Remove clip (32) and take wiring harness (33)
out of grommet (34).
30-95
(8)
12
REFERENCE
INSTALLATION
When starting the engine while the operator's

cab is removed (for transportation, etc.), use the
following brackets.
1) Bracket (41) for controller (40)

Part No.: 208-53-13920
2) Bracket (42) for monitor panel assembly (30)

Part No.: 208-53-13910
30-96
(8)

removal.
OPERATORS CAB GLASS (STUCK GLASS)
12

GLASS (STUCK GLASS)
Among the panes of window glass on the 4

sides of the operator's cab, 4 panes (1) (4)
are stuck.
In this section, the procedure for replacing the
stuck glass is explained.
When replacing front window glass (4),
remove front window assembly (5). (It is
impossible to replace only the front window
glass while the front window assembly is
installed to the operator's cab.)
For the procedure for replacing the front window assembly, see REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION OF FRONT WINDOW ASSEMBLY.
(1) :
(2) :
(3) :
(4) :
(5) :
Right side window glass

Left side rear window glass
Door lower window glass
Front window glass
Front window assembly
(Front window glass + Front frame)
(6) : Both-sided adhesive tape
(16): Center trim seal
30-97
(8)
12
(The figure shows the operator's cab of a
wheel loader.)
2 20Y-54-13180
Adapter
Sketch
Lifter
(Suction cup)
Part No.
New/Remodel
Q'ty
1 793-498-1210
Symbol
Part name
Necessity
SPECIAL TOOLS
REMOVAL
Remove the window glass to be replaced
1.
Using seal cutter [1], cut the adhesive

between broken window glass (7) and operator's cab (metal sheet) (8).
If the window glass is broken finely, it

may be removed with knife [4] and a
screwdriver.
Widening the cut with a screwdriver, cut
the adhesive and both-sided adhesive
tape with knife [4].
wheel loader.)
If a seal cutter is not available, make holes

on the adhesive and both-sided adhesive
tape with a drill and pass a fine wire
(piano wire, etc.) [2] through the holes.
Grip the both ends of the wire with priors
[3], etc. (or hold them by winding them
onto something) and move the wire to the
right and left to cut the adhesive and
both-sided adhesive tape. Since the wire
may be broken by the frictional heat,
apply lubricant to it.
30-98
(8)
2. Remove the window glass.
12
INSTALLATION
1.
Using a knife and scraper [5], remove the

remaining adhesive and both-sided adhesive
tape from the metal sheets (glass sticking surfaces) of the operator's cab.
Remove the adhesive and both-sided
adhesive tape to a degree that they will
not affect adhesion of the new adhesive.
Take care not to scratch the painted surfaces. (If the painted surfaces are
scratched, adhesion will be lowered.)
wheel loader.)
3. Apply primer (10).

The using limit of primer (10) is 4 months
after the date of manufacture. Do not use
primer (10) after this limit.
Use the primer within 2 hours after
unpacking it.
Even if the primer is packed again just
after it is unpacked, use it within 24 hours
after it is unpacked for the first time. (Discard the primer 24 hours after it is
packed.)
1) Stir the primers for paint and glass sufficiently before using them.
If the primer has been stored in a
refrigerator, leave it at the room temperature for at least half a day before
stirring it. (If the primer is unpacked
just after taken out of the refrigerator,
water will be condensed. Accordingly, leave the primer at the room
temperature for a sufficient time.)
2) When reusing primer brush (11), wash it
in white gasoline.
After washing the brush, check it
again for dirt and foreign matter.
Prepare respective brushes for the
paint primer glass primer.
2. Remove oil, dust, dirt, etc. from the sticking

surfaces of cab (8) and window glass (9) with
white gasoline.
If the sticking surfaces are not cleaned
well, the glass may not be stuck perfectly.
Clean the all black part on the back side of
the window glass.
After cleaning the sticking surfaces, leave
them for at least 5 minutes to dry.
wheel loader.)
30-99
(8)
12
3) Evenly apply paint primer to the surfaces
to stick both-sided adhesive tapes and the
surfaces out of those surfaces on operator's cab (8) which will be coated with the
adhesive.
2 Paint primer:
SUNSTAR PAINT PRIMER
580 SUPER or equivalent
Do not apply the primer more than 2
times. (If it is applied more than 2
times, its performance will be lowered.)
Parts to be coated with primer: Apply

the primer all over dimension "a".
Dimension "a" to apply primer: 25
mm
Never apply wrong primer. If the glass

primer is applied by mistake, wipe it
off with white gasoline.
4) Evenly apply glass primer to the sticking
surfaces of window glass (9).
2 Glass primer:
SUNSTAR GLASS PRIMER
580 SUPER or equivalent
Do not apply the primer more than 2
times. (If it is applied more than 2
times, its performance will be lowered.)
In addition to the above parts, apply

the primer to right side window glass
(1) and door lower window glass (3).
Range to apply primer additionally for
right side window glass (1): "b"
Range to apply primer additionally for
door lower window glass (3): "c"
After applying the primer, leave it for
at least 5 minutes (within 8 hours) to
dry.
30-100
(8)
12
Parts to be coated with primer: Apply
the primer to the sticking surfaces of
window glass (9) and all over dimension "d" which will be on both-sided
adhesive tape (6) and operator's cab
(8).
Do not apply the primer to the
boarder about 5 mm wide between
the black part and transparent part of
the glass.
After applying the primer, leave it for
at least 5 minutes (within 8 hours) to
dry.
Never apply wrong primer. If the
glass primer is applied by mistake,
wipe it off with white gasoline.
When sticking both-sided adhesive tape

(6) around a frame, do not lap its finishing
end over the starting end but make clearance "e" of about 5 mm between them.
1) Stick both-sided adhesive tape (6) for
right side window glass (1) as shown in
the figure.
Stick both-sided adhesive tape (6a) additionally for right side window glass (1).
Positions to stick additional both-sided
adhesive tape for right side window glass:
f : 50 mm
g : 90 mm
h : 250 mm
4. Stick both-sided adhesive tape (6) along the
inside edge of the glass sticking section.
Do not remove the release tape of the
both-sided adhesive tape on the glass
sticking side before sticking the glass.
When sticking the both-sided adhesive
tape, do not touch the cleaned surface as
long as possible.
Take that the both-sided adhesive tape
will not float at each corner of the window
frame.
30-101
(8)
12
2) Stick both-sided adhesive tape (6) for left
side rear window glass (2) as shown in
the figure.

front window glass (4) as shown in the
figure.

door lower window glass (3) as shown in
the figure.
Stick both-sided adhesive tape (6c) of

the lower side of the front window
glass along the outside edge of the
lower line, differently from other bothsided adhesive tapes (6). (If it is stuck
along the inside, it will be seen
through the transparent part of the
glass.)
Stick both-sided adhesive tape (6b)

additionally for door lower window
glass (3).
Positions to stick additional bothsided adhesive tape for door lower
window glass:
j :
110 mm
k :
90 mm
m :
200 mm
5. Position the new window glass.

1) Check the clearance between the window
glass and the operator's cab on the right,
left, upper, and lower sides, and then
adjust it evenly.
2) Stick tapes [6] between window glass (9)
and operator's cab (8) and draw positioning line "n".
Stick tapes [6] to the right, left, and
lower parts of the right side window
glass, left side rear window glass, and
door lower window glass for accurate
positioning.
3) Cut the tape between window glass (9)
and operator's cab (8) with a knife, and
then remove the window glass.
30-102
(8)
12
Do not remove the tapes left on the
window glass and operator's cab
before installing the window glass.
6. Apply adhesive.
Use either of the 2 types of the adhesive.
2 Adhesive (Summer):
SUNSTAR PENGUINE
SEAL 580 SUPER "S"
2 Adhesive (Winter):
SUNSTAR PENGUINE
SEAL 580 SUPER "W"
The using limit of the adhesive is 4
months after the date of manufacture. Do
not use the adhesive after this limit.
Keep the adhesive in a dark place where
the temperature is below 25C.
Never heat the adhesive higher than 30C.
When reusing the adhesive, remove the
all hardened part from the nozzle tip.
1) Break aluminum seal (13) of the outlet of

adhesive cartridge (12) and install the
nozzle.
When positioning front window glass

(4), set its horizontal position to the
frame width and set its vertical position so that height difference "p"
between it and the frame top will be 3
mm.
2) Cut the tip of the adhesive nozzle (14) so

that dimensions "q" and "r" will be as follows.
Dimension "q": 10 mm
Dimension "r": 15 mm
30-103
(8)
12
3) Set adhesive cartridge (12) to caulking
gun [7].
An electric caulking gun is more efficient.
Apply adhesive (15) additionally for

additional both-sided adhesive tape
(6a) of the right side window glass
and additional both-sided adhesive
tape (6b) of door lower window glass.
4) Remove the release tape of the both-sided
adhesive tape on the glass side.
5) Apply adhesive (15) to the outside of
both-sided adhesive tape (6) of the operator's cab.
Apply adhesive (15) to dimensions "s"

and "t" of both-sided adhesive tape
(6) of operator's cab (8).
Dimension "s": 10 mm
Dimension "t": 15 mm
Apply adhesive (15) higher than bothsided adhesive tape (6).
Apply the adhesive evenly.
30-104
(8)
12
7.
Install the window glass.

1) Install window glass (9), matching it to the
lines of the positioning tapes drawn in
step 5.
Since the window glass cannot be
removed and stuck again, stick it very
carefully.
Stick the glass within 5 minutes after
applying the adhesive.
2) After sticking window glass (9), press all
around it until it is stuck to the both-sided
adhesive tape.
Press the corners of the window glass
firmly.
After installing front window glass (4),

fill the clearances between it and center trim seal (16) with caulking material in range "s" to dimensions "t" and
"u".
After applying the primer to glass (4)
of section A A, apply adhesive as
caulking material.
Caulking dimension "t": 2 mm
Caulking dimension "u": 5 mm
When caulking, mask the glass side
and form the adhesive with a rubber
spatula as shown in the figure.
Wipe off projected adhesive.
2 Glass primer:
SUNSTAR GLASS
PRIMER 580 SUPER
2 Adhesive:
SUNSTAR PENGUINE
SEAL 580 SUPER "S" or "W"
You can perform this work efficiently

by pulling window glass (9) from
inside of the operator's cab with suction cup Y1.
30-105
(8)
12
8. Fix the window glass.
1) After installing right window glass (1) to
the operator's cab, insert stopper rubbers
Y2 to 2 places "v" at the bottom of the
glass to fix the glass.
9. After installing the window glass, remove the

primer and adhesive from the operator's cab
and window glass.
Using white gasoline, wipe off the adhesive before it is dried up.
When cleaning the glass, do not give an
impact to it.
10. Protect the stuck window glass.
1) Keep the stopper rubbers, styrene foam
blocks, and rubber bands installed for 10
hours (at temperature of 20C and humidity of 60%).
2) After removing the stopper rubbers, styrene foam blocks, and rubber bands, wait
at least 14 hours, at least 24 hours in total,
before operating the machine actually.
2) Using styrene foam blocks [9] and rubber

bands [10], fix the window glass and bothsided adhesive tape to fit them completely.
30-106
(8)
12
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION OF FRONT WINDOW

ASSEMBLY
stop the engine.
To replace the front window glass, the front
window assembly must be removed from the
operator's cab. The procedure for removing
and installing the front window assembly
(front frame and front window glass) is
explained below.
REMOVAL
1.
5. Release the rear locks.

6. Lower the front window assembly carefully a
little. Put out rollers (8) and (9) under the both
sides of the front window through the portion
from which the corner blocks were removed
in step 3 (the portion where the rail is open)
and hold them.
7.
Remove rollers (8) and (9) under the both

sides of the front window.
Raise the front window assembly to the ceiling and fix it with the rear locks (on both
sides).
2. Remove left corner blocks (1) and (2) and right

corner block (3).
[*1]
3. Remove left striker bolt (4), right striker bolt
(5), left corner block bracket (6), and right corner block bracket (7).
[*2]
4. Install left striker bolt (4) to the operator's cab
again and tighten it lightly.
This bolt will be used to hang the pull-up
assist cable in step 8.
8. Remove left lower pin (10).

[*3]
If left lower pin (10) is removed, plate (12)
at the end of pull-up assist cable (11)
comes off.
Hang plate (12) on the left striker bolt.
k The return load of 58.8 N {6 kg} is applied

to the rear of the operator's cab. Accordingly, take care when removing left lower
pin (10) to disconnect pull-up assist cable
(11).
30-107
(8)
12
11. Twist front window assembly (13) to the right

and left to remove both upper rollers (14) and
(15) from the rails, and then remove front
window assembly (13).
9. Put out the bottom of front window assembly

(13) through the rail opening portion and
lower it gradually.
10. Lower front window assembly (13) completely.

Do not let the front window assembly
touch the monitor.
30-108
(8)
12
INSTALLATION

removal.
[*1] [*2]
Adjust opening and closing of the front window assembly according to the following procedure.
1.
Open and close the front window to check

that it does not interfere with the rails and the
rollers are not hitch.
4. Install right corner block (3) and fix right corner block bracket (7) with right striker bolt (5).
Tighten the striker bolt securely after
adjusting it in step 6.
Install the right corner block so that there
will be no level difference at part "a".
Install the right corner block so that level
difference "b" between the rail and right
corner block (3) will be 0 1.0 mm. Check
that the right corner block is not projected
from the rail at the rolling surface of the
roller.
Secure roller clearance "c" at part P.
2. If there is any problem in opening or closing

of the front window, loosen the mounting
bolts of roller adjustment brackets (16) and
(17) and adjust the condition of the front window, and then tighten the mounting bolts
again.
3 Mounting bolt: 9.8 Nm {1.0 kgm}
3. Raise the front window assembly and fix it

with the rear locks (on both sides).
Check that the locks in the rear of the
operator's cab are applied securely.
30-109
(8)
12
5. Install left corner blocks (1) and (2) and secure
left corner bracket (6) with left striker bolt (4).
Tighten the striker bolt securely after
adjusting it in step 6.
Install the left corner blocks so that there
will be no level difference at 2 part "d".
Secure roller clearance "e".
30-110
(8)
6. Adjust the striker bolts according to the following procedure (Adjust the "CLOSE" positions of the front window assembly locks).
1) Tighten left striker bolt (4) and right
striker bolt (5) at roughly right positions
so that front window glass (18) will be fitted to cab-side trim seal (19).
12
2) Open and close the front window assembly and check the working condition of
both locks (20) and (21).
i)
If both locks do not work normally,

move the striker bolts toward the rear
of the cab and tighten them again.
3) After checking the above items, if necessary, adjust them by moving right and left
striker plates (22) at the rear of the operator's cab.
ii) After moving the striker bolts, check

the fitness of the front window glass
and cab-side trim seal which was
checked in step 1).
iii) Repeat the work in i) and ii) until the
fitness of the front window and the
working condition of both locks (20)
and (21) are acceptable, and then
tighten the striker bolts.
7.
After adjusting the striker bolts, splash water

heavily over the front window glass and check
that the water does not leak into the cab.
9. Adjust the front window stoppers.
8. Adjust the "opening" lock of the front window

assembly.
1) After adjusting "opening" lock of the front

window assembly in step 8, check the
contact of both front window stoppers
(23).
1) After adjusting the "closing" lock of the

front window in steps 6 and 7, raise the
front window assembly to the ceiling.
2) If both stoppers (23) do not contact normally, adjust and fix them at places where
they contact normally.
2) Set the right and left front window assembly locks at the rear of the operator's cab
to the "OPEN" positions, and then check
the following items.
heck that right and left locks (20) and
(21) are closed normally.
Check that right and left locks (20) and
(21) are inserted in parallel in right
and left striker plates (22).
Check that right and left rubber stoppers (24) are in contact with the front
window assembly and their deflection
allowance is 1.5 3.0 mm.
30-111
(8)

12
10. Check the latching effort of the front window
assembly.
1) After finishing steps 6 9, check that latching efforts of both locks (20) and (21) are
even.
Check the latching efforts on both
"closing" side (in the front of the operator's cab) and "opening" side (in the
rear of the operator's cab).
[*3]
3 Left lower pin:

27 34 Nm {2.75 3.47 kgm}
2 Mounting bolt: Adhesive (LT-2)
30-112
(8)
MONITOR ASSEMBLY
12
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION OF MONITOR ASSEMBLY

REMOVAL

1.
Remove cover (1) and then disconnect the

wiring connector P15 for air conditioner sunlight sensor (2).
Lift the cover up to remove it.
2. Remove the three mounting screws and

remove monitor assembly (3).
Disconnect monitor panel wiring connectors P01, P02 and P03 at the three points,
and then remove the monitor assembly.
INSTALLATION
30-113
(8)
GOVERNOR, PUMP CONTROLLER ASSEMBLY
12
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION OF GOVERNOR,

PUMP CONTROLLER ASSEMBLY
PC300, 300LC-7 Serial No. 40001 45000
PC350, 350LC-7 Serial No. 20001 25000

REMOVAL
REMOVAL
1.
1.

Remove cover (1).

Remove covers (1), (2) and (3).
2. Disconnect governor, pump controller wiring

connectors C01 (2), C02 (3) and C03 (4).
2. Disconnect governor, pump controller wiring

connectors C01 (4), C02 (5) and C03 (6).
3. Remove the four mounting bolts and remove

governor, pump controller assembly (5).
3. Remove the four mounting bolts and remove

governor, pump controller assembly (7).
INSTALLATION
INSTALLATION
30-114
(8)
90
OTHERS
Hydraulic Circuit Diagram . . . . . . . . . . 90-3
PC300-7,PC300LC-7: Serial No. 4000145000
PC350-7,PC350LC-7: Serial No. 2000125000
Electrical Circuit Diagram (1/4) . . . . . 90-5
Electrical Circuit Diagram (4/4) . . . . 90-11
PC300-7,PC300LC-7: Serial No. 45001 and up
PC350-7,PC350LC-7: Serial No. 25001 and up
PC300-7
90-1
(6)
OTHERS
HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
PC300-7
90-3
ELECTRICAL CIRCUIT DIAGRAM (1/4)

PC300-7, PC300LC-7: Serial No. 40001 45000
PC350-7, PC350LC-7: Serial No. 20001 25000
FOR MULTI MONITOR
PC300-7
90-5
(6)

PC300-7, PC300LC-7: Serial No. 40001 45000
PC350-7, PC350LC-7: Serial No. 20001 25000
FOR MULTI MONITOR
PC300-7
90-7
(6)

PC300-7, PC300LC-7: Serial No. 40001 45000
PC350-7, PC350LC-7: Serial No. 20001 25000
FOR MULTI MONITOR
PC300-7
90-9
(6)

PC300-7, PC300LC-7: Serial No. 40001 45000
PC350-7, PC350LC-7: Serial No. 20001 25000
FOR MULTI MONITOR
PC300-7
90-11
(6)

PC300-7, PC300LC-7: Serial No. 45001 and up
PC300-7
90-13
(6)

PC300-7
90-15
(6)

PC300-7
90-17
(6)

PC300-7
90-19
(6)

Shop Manual PC300LC 7 - SN40001and Up

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Shop Manual PC300LC 7 - SN40001and Up

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

SEBM025808

PC300, 300LC, PC350, 350LC-7 mount the SAA6D114E engine.

10 STRUCTURE, FUNCTION AND

20 TESTING AND ADJUSTING ........................................................................

30 DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY

LIST OF REVISED PAGES

The affected pages are indicated by the use of the

Page to be newly added

Pages having no marks are those previously revised

LIST OF REVISED PAGES

LIST OF REVISED PAGES

LIST OF REVISED PAGES

LIST OF REVISED PAGES

LIST OF REVISED PAGES

6. Decide a place in the repair workshop to keep

Precautions during work

19. Be sure to assemble all parts again in their original places.

Structure and function

Testing and adjusting

Disassembly and assembly

How to read the shop manual

Each issued as one

Distribution and updating

Revised edition mark

Special safety precautions

Weight of parts of systems.

Places that require special

Places to be coated with

Places where oil, water or

Places where oil or water

2. Following examples show how to read the page

Heavy parts (25 kg or more) must be lifted

If a part cannot be smoothly removed from the

Slinging near the edge of the hook may

3) Do not sling a heavy load with one rope

Slinging with one rope may cause

a The allowable load value is estimated to be

4) Do not sling a heavy load with ropes forming

Method of disassembling, connecting push-pull type coupler

Method of disassembling, connecting push-pull type coupler

Before carrying out the following work, release

Method of disassembling, connecting push-pull type coupler

Hold the mouthpiece of the tightening portion

Hold the mouthpiece of the tightening portion

Hold in the condition in Step 1), and turn lever

Hold in the condition in Step 1), and push until

Hold in the condition in Steps 1) and 2), and pull

Hold in the condition in Steps 1) and 2), and pull

Hold the mouthpiece of the tightening portion and

Hold the mouthpiece of the tightening portion and

Main applications, features

Used to prevent rubber gaskets, rubber

400 g 10 Bellows type

Main applications, features

Used for normal temperature, light load

Seizure resistance and heat resistance

Since this grease is decomposed by

Used as primer for glass side

Adhesive for cab glass

Used as primer for painted surface on

Standard tightening torque

Standard tightening torque

Table of tightening torques for flared nuts